Translated from French to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.

com

NF C 15-100

December 2002
Classification index: C 15-100
ICS 29,020; 91.140.50

Low voltage electrical installations

E: Low-voltage electrical installations

D: Elektrische Niederspannungsanlagen

French standard approved

by decision of the Chief Executive Officer of afnor on November 5, 2002, to take
effect from December 5, 2002.
Is intended to replace the approved standard NF C 15-100 of May 1991 and its
amendments A1 of December 1994 and A2 of December 1995.

Correspondence Standards of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) of the 60364

series and harmonization documents of the European Committee for
Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) of the HD 384 series (see table I of
the Foreword).

To analyse This document deals with the design, construction, verification and maintenance
of electrical installations supplied with a voltage not exceeding 1000 volts (rms) in
alternating current and 1,500 volts in direct current.

Descriptors Electrical installations, buildings, living quarters.

Modifications See Foreword.

Corrections

edited and distributed by the Technical Union of Electricity and Communication (UTE) - BP 23 - 92262 Fontenay-aux-Roses Cedex - Tel: 01 40
93 62 00 - Fax: 01 40 93 44 08 - E-mail : [email protected] - Internet: http://www.ute-fr.com/
also distributed by the French standardization association (afnor), 11, rue Francis de Pressensé, 93571 Saint-Denis La Plaine Cedex - tel. : 01
41 62 80 00

Impr. UTE © 2002 - Reproduction prohibited

NF C 15-100

SUMMARY

INTRODUCTION

Summary

Foreword

Alphabetical index

TITLE 1. Scope, purpose and basic principles

TITLE 2. Definitions

TITLE 3. Determination of the general characteristics of the installations

TITLE 4. Protection to ensure safety

TITLE 5. Choice and implementation of materials

TITLE 6. Checks and maintenance of installations

TITLE 7. Rules for special facilities and locations

____________

- I- 2002
NF C 15-100

NF C 15-100

(Blank page)

- II - 2002
NF C 15-100

FOREWORD

1. The new French standard NF C 15-100 was adopted after the probationary investigation of the various parties, the
examination of the observations received during this investigation and the approval.

The provisions of this standard are applicable to works for which the date of filing of the building permit
application or, failing that, the date of the prior construction declaration or, failing that, the date of signature of
the contract, or alternatively the date of acknowledgment. of receipt of order is after May 31, 2003.

2. The revision of standard NF C 15-100 was necessary for the following reasons:

- the evolution of techniques and production practices leads to periodic adaptations and modifications of the
installation rules;
- continuing work at international and European level to harmonize installation rules.

3. This edition of standard NF C 15-100 includes:

- on the one hand, the requirements of the standard itself, which generally reproduce the texts of international
standards or harmonization documents. These prescriptions are printedin black straight roman type.

- on the other hand, comments which contain recommendations facilitating the application of the
prescriptions, based on experience and current use. In general, these comments do not include any
international text, but make it possible to explain the corresponding texts and provide the justifications for
the corresponding rules. These comments may also draw attention to French regulatory aspects and are
printedin blue italicsimmediately below the normative reference text.

At the top of each page, the references of the titles and parts are indicated.

The compliance of an installation with the NF C 15-100 standard implies full compliance with the normative part.

4. The plan of the standard is that adopted at the international level, within the framework of the study
committee n ° 64 of the International Electrotechnical Commission, for the establishment of standards
concerning the electrical installations of buildings (IEC Publication 60364 ).

The numbering of the standard is based on the division into titles, parts, articles, paragraphs and subparagraphs
as shown in the following example:

472.3.3.2 means:

4 ................................. Title47
................................ Part
472 .............................. Article
472.3 ........................... Paragraph
472.3.3 and 472.3.3.2 .... Sub-paragraphs

5. The rules of this standard take into account the state of progress of work at the international level, both within
the framework of IEC and that of CENELEC.

Table I indicates the situation of the texts of the standard in relation to the texts of international documents.

- III - 2002
NF C 15-100

5.1 Texts which reproduce those of a CENELEC harmonization document are marked by the letter H in a circle
with a double line in the margin.

5.2 Texts marked with the letter VS in a square and with a single line in the margin are those of the standards
adopted within the framework of the IEC. They are not yet harmonized within the framework of CENELEC but are
generally the subject of draft harmonization documents which have been taken into account.

5.3 The texts of articles which are neither preceded by the letter H neither of the letter VS are national
supplements.

6. Overall, the layout of this standard is the same as that of the 1991 standard, since this layout is that of the
international standard IEC 60364.

However, many groupings have been made to make the standard easier to read. The main groupings are:

• Protection against electric shock: chapter 41 and sections 471 and 481
• Protection against thermal effects: chapter 42 and section 482
• Overcurrent protection: chapter 43 and section 473
• Disconnection and control: chapter 46 and section 476
• External influences: Chapter 32, Article 512.2 and Section 522.

At the date of publication of this standard, these groupings have not yet been taken up at European level.

7. The main changes in this standard concern the following points:

Title 3:
• Diagrams in direct current (312.2.4) and harmonic currents (330.1.1).

Title 4:
• New presentation of the rules on protection against electric shock (41);
• Protection against fire hazards (422.1);
• Protection against the risk of explosion (422.3);
• Temporary overvoltage protection (442);
• Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin (443);
• Measures to limit electromagnetic interference (444).

Title 5:
• Classification of external influences (512.2);
• Section of conductors in the presence of harmonic currents (524);
• The various types of DDR (531.2.1.5);
• Coordination of protective devices (535);
• Functional earth (545);
• Apparatus sets (558);
• Security installations (56).

Title 7:
• Temporary electrical installations (711);
• Mobile or transportable units (717);
• Electric heating equipment (753);
• Residential premises (771)
• Unsupervised installations (773);
• Electrical service rooms (781).

8. This standard was approved by the Board of Directors of the Technical Union of Electricity and Communication
on September 24, 2002.
- IV - 2002
NF C 15-100

TABLE I
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN STANDARD NF C 15-100
AND INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATIONS

NF C 15-100 standard Harmonization Document IEC publication

of CENELEC
TITLE 1 60364-1
TITLE 2 60364-1
TITLE 3 60364-1
TITLE 4
Part 41 60364-4-41
Part 42 HD 384-4-42 60364-4-42
Part 43 60364-4-43
Part 44 HD 384-4-442, HD 384-4-443, 60364-4-44
prHD 384-4-444
Part 46 60364-4-41 and
60364-5-53
TITLE 5
Part 51 HD 384-5-51 60364-5-51
Part 52 HD 384-5-523 60364-5-52
Part 53 HD 384-5-537 60364-5-53
Part 54 HD 384-5-54 60364-5-54
Part 55 60364-5-55
Part 56 HD 384-5-56 60364-5-55
TITLE 6
Parts-61, 62 and 63 HD 384-6-61 60364-6-61
TITLE 7
Part 701 60364-7-701
Part 702 HD 384-7-702 60364-7-702
Part 703 HD 384-7-703 60364-7-703
Part 704 HD 384-7-704 60364-7-704
Part 705 HD 384-7-705 60364-7-705
Part 706 HD 384-7-706 60364-7-706
Part 707 60364-7-707
Part 708 HD 384-7-708 60364-7-708
Part 709 prHD 384-7-709 60364-7-709
Part 711 prHD 384-7-711 60364-7-711 and
60364-7-740
Part 717 60364-7-717
Part 752
Part 753 prHD 384-7-753
Part 771
Part 772
Part 773
Part 781
A white box indicates that there is no corresponding IEC or CENELEC document.

- V- 2002
NF C 15-100

(Blank page)

- VI - 2002
NF C 15-100 Index
ALPHABETICAL INDEX

The terms preceded by an asterisk are those designating the classes of external influences defined in article 512.2.
Following each term are recalled the letters designating the class of external influence and the number of the
corresponding article.

TO
Accessibility ............................................ 513.1 General rules
Accessible (parts). .............................. 232.6 Definition
423 Protection against burns
513.1 General rules
Active, active (parts) ............................ 232.1 Conductors - definition
232.4 Part - definition
232.5 Dangerous part - definition
Accumulators ........................................ Aerial 554 See batteries
(lines) ..... .............................. Agricultural 529.7 Rules
(Establishments) ................ ..... Replacement 705 Specific rules
power supply ............... 132.4 Design
213.3.4 Definition
313.2 Characteristics
353 Sources
Safety power supply .......................... 132.4 Design
213.3.1 Definition
* Altitude (AC) .......................................... 512.2.3 Characteristics
Antennas .. ............................................... 559.4 Choice
Apparatus ... .......................................... 270.3 Definition
53 Protection - Control - Disconnection
530.4.3 Recessing in walls
Heaters ........................... 423 Protection against the risk of burns
559.5 Industrial heating
705,422 Agricultural and horticultural establishments
753 Implementation
771.314.2.5 Accommodations

Control devices ......................... 465 Functional control

536.5 Functional control devices Conductors
Connection devices ........................... 526
555.1 Sockets Solid State Starters
Starting devices .......................... 553.2.2 Motors
559.6
Lightening devices ............................... 559.2 Choice and implementation
701.55 Shower rooms
702.55 Swimming pools

Measuring devices ............................... 556 Choice and implementation

Control and protection connection
devices (ACP) ..... ............................ 253.7 Definition
Table 53E Choice
Cabinets ................................................. . 558 See: Switchgear assemblies
Elevators ............................................. 142 Limit of the installation
772.3.2 Specific rules
Assigned (value) .................................... 212.1 Definition
254.1 Rated current of a protection device Choice
Autotransformers ................................ 552
* Water sprinkling (AD3) ........................... 512.2.4 Characteristics
* Atmospheric (AF2) ............................. 512.2.6 Characteristics
* Informed (people) (BA4) ................... 291.2 Definition
512.2.16 Characteristics
531.2.2.2 Auxiliary source RCD
B
Bathtub ................................................. 701 Shower rooms
Pressure drop .................................... 445 Protection
Balneotherapy (facilities) ...... ....... 701.1 Specific rules

- VII- 2002
NF C 15-100 Index

Barriers ................................................. . 235.4 Definition

41 / Annex A2 Rules
Fire barriers ................................. Pleasure 527.2 Implementation
boats .......... .................... Accumulator 709 marinas and boats
batteries ....................... Capacitor 554 Choice and installation
banks .................... Flush mount 557 Choice and installation
box .......................... .... Connection 530.4.3 Installation conditions
boxes ................................ Earth 526 Rules
terminal ........ ................................. 242.5 Definition
542.4 Implementation
Ventilation openings ............................ Buckle at 701 / Annex (B2) Shower rooms
the bottom of the excavation .............. ............. 542.2.3.1 Rules
Burns (risk of) ............................... 423 Protection - temperature limits
VS
Cables ................................................. .... Table 52A Standards
Table 52D Use
521.6 Pose
Cables in parallel ................................. 523.6 Rules
Heating cables ............ ....................... 753.4 Specific rules
Class II cables ........................ ............... 412.2.1 Definition
Table 52A List of Class II cables
Cables (paths) ............................... 262.3 Definition
521 Installation methods
522 Choice according to external influences
523 Admissible currents
Cables without insulated neutral ......................... 543.4.2 PEN conductors
Cables with one conductor (or unipolar) 261.3 Definition - see cables
Multicore cables (or multipolar) Flexible 261.4 Definition - see cables
cables ..... ................................... 521.6.12 Installation
Pipes .............. ............................. 261.6 Definition
52 Installation methods
Heating pipes ..................... Buried 528.2.1 Neighborhood
pipes ........................ .. Pipes fixed to the 529.5 Installation rules
wall ................ 262.1 Definition
Table 52B Installation methods
523 Admissible currents
Prefabricated pipes .................... 262.14 Definition
521.4 Installation
529.6 Standards
543.2.2 Protective conductor
Channel ................................................. 262.2 Definition
Table 52B Installation methods
523 Permissible currents in conductors Special
Caravans (and parks for) ...................... 708 rules
Fuel (distribution, depot) ................ 752 Specific rules
Overvoltage categories ...................... 443.2.2 Description
534.1 Choice of surge arresters
Building cellars .................................... 772.2.3.4.3 Specific rules
Equipotentiality belt ........ ........... 545.2 Rules
* CEM (AM) ............................................. . 444.3 General provisions
512.2.10 Characteristics
Door frames ........................................... 529.2 Pose
Frame ..... ............................................... 558 See equipment sets Definition
Construction sites ... ............................................... 213.2
704 Specific rules
* Hot (AA5) ........................................ 512.2.1 Characteristics
* Hot (very) (AA6) ............................... 512.2.1 Characteristics
Boilers .......... .................................... 559.5.2 Liquid heaters

- VIII - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Heating (of premises) ............................ 753 Electric heating equipment Living

771.314.2.5 quarters
Boiler rooms ............................................... 463.1 Emergency shutdown
cables .................................. 262.3 Definition
Table 52B Installation methods
543.2.3 Grounding
523.4 Grouping of circuits
Electrical shock ........................................ 231.1 Definition
41 Protection rules
532 Choice and implementation of protection devices
* Mechanical shocks (AG) ........................ 512.2.7.1 Characteristics
Voltage drops ................. ................... 525 Acceptable limits
Circuit .............................. ......................... 251.1 Definition
314.1 Division of installations
43 Overcurrent protection Rule
Control circuits ............................. 465.2
Communication circuits ............... ........ 444.3 General rules
444.4 Protection
771.559.6 Living quarters
Distribution channels .............................. 251.2 Definition
Table 41A Cut-off time
Terminal circuits .................................... 251.3 Definition
314 Plant division Cut-off
Table 41A time
771.314.2 Residential premises
Classes ................................................. ... 237 Definition
0 ........................................... 237.1 Definition
41 / Annex C1 Rules for non-conductive premises or
locations
I ............................................ 237.2 Definition
II ........................................... 237.3 Definition
III .......................................... 237.4 Definition
* Climatic (AB) ..................................... 512.2.2 Characteristics
Box ....... ............................................... 558 See switchgear assemblies
* Fuels (CA2) ............................... 422.1 Premises at risk of fire
512.2.21 Characteristics
Functional control ......................... 281.5 Definition
465 Rules
536.5 Devices for
711,462 Trade fairs and exhibitions
Compatibility ............................................ 330.1 Characteristics
512.1.5 Material choices
Competence of persons (BA) ............ 29 Definition
512.2.16 Characteristics
Continuous components .......................... 330.1.3 Compatibility
531.2.1.5 DDR disturbance
Electronic counter ............................. 771 / Annex D Management, remote information
Communications .................. .................... 112 + Field of application
330.1 Electromagnetic compatibility
771.559.6 Living quarters
Static capacitors ......................... 557 Choice and implementation
Conductors ...................... ....................... Table 52A Standards
521.6 Pose
Table 52D Use
524 Section
Active driver ....................................... 232.1 Definition
312.1 Types of patterns
462.1 and Sectioning
536.2.1
463 Emergency shutdown

- IX - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Charged conductors ............................... 523.5 Number

Conductors of different circuits ........... 521.6 Rules
Insulated conductors .................................. 261.1 Definition
521 Installation methods
Equipotential bonding conductor .................. 243.4 Definition
544 Rules
612.6.4.2 Effectiveness verification
Neutral conductor ................................... 232.2 Definition
312.2.3 Distribution - Restrictions for IT system
524.2 Harmonics - Neutral section
431.2 Protection
524.2.4 Common neutral prohibition Cut in TNC and
461.3 TNS diagrams Cross-sectional equality with
524.2 the phases Reduced cross-section compared
524.3 to the phases Definition
Protective conductor ......................... 242.1
543 Rules
612.2 Checking continuity
612.6.4 Measuring their resistance
771.411.3.3 Living quarters
Reinforced protective conductor ........ 543.7 Rules
Earth conductor ................................. 242.3 Definition
542.3 Rules
PEN driver ...................................... 232.3 Definition
422.1.8 Fire-risk areas Explosion-
424.11 risk areas Disconnection
462.1 and shutdown Emergency
463.2 shutdown
461.2 Disconnection and control at the origin
Main protective conductor .......... 242.2 Definition
Conductors in parallel ......................... 433.6 Overload protection DC
434.4 protection
523.6 Rules
Water pipes ....................................... 411.3.1.1 LEP main
528.2.2 Neighborhood with electrical conduits Not used
542.2.6 as main LEP protective conductor
Gas pipes ..................................... 411.3.1.1
528.2.2 Neighborhood with electrical conduits Not used
542.2.6 as a protective conductor Definition
Ducts ................................................. .. 262.4
Table 52B Choice
Table 52C Installation method
521.6 Laying the conductors
522 Choice according to external influences
523 Admissible currents in the conductors
527 Choice to limit the propagation of fire
529.1 Special rules
Vapor ducts .................................. Material 528.2 Neighborhood with electrical pipes See
conformity .......... ............... 511 Quality
Connectors .................................. ........... 559.1. Rules
Connections ...................................... ........ 261.7 Definition
526 Rules
* Construction (materials of) (CA) ........... 512.2.21 Implementation
Contactors ............................. ................. 253.5 Definition
Table 53E Choice
* Contact of people with the potential of
the earth (BC) ..................................... ... 512.2.18 Characteristics

-X- 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Direct contacts ....................................... 131.2.1 Design

231.2 Definition
41 / Annex A General rules
531.2 Using DDR
Indirect contacts .................................... 131.2.2 Design
231.3 Definition
411.3 General rules
531.2 Using DDR
* Contamination (risk of) (BE4) .......... 512.2.20 Characteristics
Continuity of earthing ................ Voltage 543.3 Rules
constraints ...... ...................... 442.2.1 Allowable values
442.2.5.1 TN and TT limitation
442.2.5.2 IT limitation
442.5 Breaking of the neutral conductor
442.6 First fault in the IT system Phase-
442.7 neutral short-circuit Obligation in the
Permanent Insulation Monitor (CPI) 411.6.3 event of an IT system Choice
537.1
Converters ......................................... 553.1 Choice
Coordination between Crow protection 535 General rules
devices ... ............................................... 262.9 Definition
Table 52B Installation methods
523 Permissible currents in the conductors
* Solid bodies (presence of) (AE) .......... 512.2.5 Characteristics
* Corrosive (substances) (AF) ................ 512.2.6 Characteristics
Fuse circuit breaker ..................... ...... See Fuses
Firewall ......................................... ....... See Barriers
Automatic cut-off .............................. 411 General rules
Emergency cut-off ....... ........................... 281.3 Definition
132.9 Facility design Rules
463
536.3 Choice of devices
771,463 Living quarters
Cut-off for mechanical maintenance ......... 281.2 Definition
464 Rules
536.4 Choice of devices
Admissible currents .............................. 252.2 Definition
433 Overload protection Short-circuit
434 protection Rules
523
Paintings Values
52H - 52J
Rated current ...................................... 254.1 Definition
Short-circuit currents ..... .................... 252.5 Definition
313.1.1 Power supply characteristics Short-circuit
434 protection Short-circuit protection exemption
434.3 Coordination of protection devices Choice of
435 protection devices
533.3
Fault currents .................................. 233.3 Definition
411 Automatic power cut protection

543.1.1 Cross-section of protective conductors

Earth fault current .................... 233.4 Definition
411 Automatic power cut protection

Starting current ............................ 559.6 See engine start

330.1.1 c) General

- XI - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Differential-residual current ..................... 233.7 Definition

411.5.1 TN diagram
411.5.2 TT scheme
531.2 DDR choice
Operating current ...................................... 252.1 Definition
311.3 Determination
Leakage current ....................................... 233.5 Definition
330.1.3 General
Harmonic currents ............................. 330.1.1 d) General
33 Compatibility
523.5.2 Admissible currents
524.2 Conductor section
Overload currents ............................ 252.4 Definition
433 Overload protection Protection
435 coordination
533.2 Choice of overload protection devices
Short circuits .......................................... 252.5 Definition
434 Protection
435 Protection coordination
533.3 Choice of devices ...
Kitchens (large) (1) .............................. 463.1 Emergency shutdown
D
DCL ................................................. ......... 559.1.1 Rule
771.314.2.3 Living quarters
DDR ................................................. ........ 253.6 Definition
415.1 Supplementary protection
411.4.4 TN scheme
531.2.4.1 Choice
411.5.3 TT scheme
531.2.4.2 Choice
411.6.5 IT diagram
531.2.4.3 Choice
531.2.5 Use of 30 mA RCDs
773 Protection of unmonitored installations
431.1 Protection of phase conductors Protection
431.2 of neutral conductor
531.2 Choice
536.2 Association with overcurrent devices
536.3 Coordination of RCDs
Table 771E Living quarters
432 Nature of the devices
533 Choice of devices
535.1 Device selectivity
535.4.3 Association with RCD
Type A RCD ......................................... 531.2.1.5 Definition, generalities
Table 771E Choice
Control devices ......................... 465 Functional control
462 Sectioning
536.5 Functional control devices Rule
Luminaire Connection Devices 559.1.1
(DCL) .......................................... .............. 771.314.2.3 Living quarters
Cut-off devices .............................. 536.3 For mechanical maintenance (choice)
536.4 For emergency shutdown (choice)
Disconnecting devices ................... 462 Rules
536.2 Choice

(1) See C 15-201.

- XII - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Overcurrent protection
device ........................................... ............ 531.1 Choice
Provisions for protection against direct
contact ............................... ........... 411.2 General rules
41 / Annex A Prescriptions
Provisions for protection against indirect
contact ....................................... 411.3 General rules
41 / Annex B Specific rules
Short-circuit protection
devices ............................................ ............ 533.3 Choice
Overcurrent protection
devices ................................ ............... 533.1 General
Overload protection
devices ............................. .................... 533.2 Choice
Minimum distances ............................ ....... 781.4 Rules - Electrical service location Installation
Division of installations ............................ 314.1 structures
Voltage domains ......... ...................... 222 Definition (alternating current)
223 Definition (direct current)
442 Insulation fault with higher voltage installations

528.1 Neighborhood with other electrical pipelines

Automation ................................................. . 330.1 Compatibility
Double insulation ......................................... 236.4 Definition
237.3 Classification of equipment - Protection
412 Protection by class II or equivalent insulation
Showers ................................................. .... 701.71 Specific rules
E
Water (pipeline) .................................. 411.3.1.1 THE P
* Water (presence of) (AD) ............................. 512.2.4 Characteristics
Overheating .......... ................................. Cable 423 See Thermal (effects)
ladder .............. ........................... 262.12 Definition
Table 52C Installation methods
Lighting ................................................. ... 559.2 General rules
771.314.2.3 Living quarters
Fluorescence lighting ............................. 330.1.1 d) Compatibility - Harmonic currents Cross
524.2 section of the neutral conductor
Electrodes (devices) ............................. 559.3 Choice of domestic equipment Choice of
559.5.2 industrial heating equipment Choice
* Electromagnetic (influences) (AM) ...... 512.2.10 according to environment
Conductive elements ............................... 232.9 Definition
411.3.1.1 THE P
415.2 LEP additional
543.2.1 Use as protective conductors Special rules
Electrical service location ............ Non- 781.1
conductive locations ............... Recessed 41 / C.1 See non-conductive premises
(mounting) ............. ...................... 529.1.2 Rules
- Pipelines ........................................... 513.2 Accessibility
Table 52B Installation methods
523 Admissible currents
529.1 Specific rules
Conductive enclosures .............................. 706 Specific rules
* Children (BA2) ........................................... 512.2.16 Rules
Sets d equipment .......................... Buried 558 Rules
(pipes) .................. ......... 523 Admissible currents
523.3 Thermal resistivity of floors
529.5 Installation rules
Table 52B Installation methods
708.52 Parks and caravans

- XIII - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Mechanical maintenance ................................ 464 Rules

536.4 Choice of devices
Envelopes .............................................. 235.3 Definition
41 / Annex A2 General rules
412 Double insulation
Establishments open to the public (ERP) 35 Security installations
56 Power supply for safety installations
* Evacuation of people (BD) ............. 512.2.19 Characteristics
* Explosions (risk of) (BE3) ................. 424 Pitches - Rules
512.2.20 Characteristics
752 Liquid fuel distribution areas
F
Correction factors ............................. 523.2 For ambient temperature For
523.3 thermal resistivity of the floor
523.4 For grouping of circuits Cables
Non-symmetry factor .......................... 523.6 in parallel
Reduction factor ................. ............... 512.2.20 For pipes in use BE3 For charged
523.5.2 neutral
Simultaneity factor ............................ 215.2 Definition
311 Structure of the facilities. Power
supply
Duty cycle .................................. 215.1 Definition
311.2 Structure of the facilities. Power
supply
* Fauna (AL) ............................................. . 512.2.9 Characteristics
Pilot wire ............................................... ..... 753.6.2 Sectioning
771.462.2 Living quarters
Fixed (materials) ...................................... 271.5 Definition
Fixing of devices ..... ......................... 530.4 Rules
* Flora (AK) ............................................. .. 512.2.8 Characteristics
Fairs ............................................... ........ 711 Trade fairs and exhibitions
* Lightning (AQ) ............................................ 443 Atmospheric overvoltages
512.2.13 Rules
534 Choice of surge arresters
Sheaths ................................................. 262.6 Definition
521.8 Crossings
527 Choice of pipes to limit the spread of fire

529.5 Buried pipelines Rules

Ovens ................................................. ....... 559.5.1
Frequency (2) ............................................ 112 PF field of application
313 Characteristics
330.1.1 Compatibility. LF disturbance
523.0 Permissible currents
* Refrigerated (AA1) ................................... 512.2.1 Characteristics
* Cold (AA3) ........................................... 512.2.1 Characteristics
* Cold (very) (AA2) .................................. 512.2.1 Characteristics
Smoke (ducts) ... ............................. 528.2.1 Neighborhood with electrical conduits
Fuses .................... ................................ 253.3 Definition
432 Nature
533.1 Devices
533.3 Choice
Table 53E Disconnecting devices
G
Sheath (of a cable) .................................... 261.5 Definition

(2) See UTE C 15-421.

- XIV - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Duct (ventilation, smoke extraction) ............ 528.2 Neighborhood of pipelines

528.2.1 Passage of pipelines
Technical Housing Housing .................... 771.558.2 Implementation
Galleries .......................... .......................... 262.7 Definition
Garages ....................... ............................ 752 Liquid fuel distribution areas Rules for
772.2.3.4.2 buildings
Gas (pipelines) ............................. 411.3.1.1 THE P
528.2.2 Neighborhood with electrical conduits Rules
Generators ............................................. 551
Chutes ... ............................................... 262.8 Definition
Table 52E Use
Table 52B Installation methods
521.6 Laying the conductors
522.3 Choice according to external influences
523 Permissible currents in the conductors
529.3 Implementation
* Water drops (falls from) (AD2) ............ 512.2.4 Characteristics
Grouping of circuits ....................... ..... 523.4 Admissible currents
GTL ............................................ .............. 771.558.2 Implementation
H
Dwellings (premises of) .............................. 771 Specific rules
* Disabled (BA3) .................................. 512.2.16 Characteristics
Harmonics .......... .................................. 330.1.1 BF disturbances
523.5.2 Loaded conductors
524.2 Conductor cross section - neutral
Height of sockets and boxes ... Hospitals (3) 555.1.8 Rules
............................................... Horticultural See NF C 15-211
(Establishments ) ..................... 705 See agricultural
* Humid (conditions) (BB1) ................... 512.2.17 Characteristics
Humidity (AB) ................... ........................ 512.2.2 Characteristics
I
* Submerged (conditions) (BB3) ................ 512.2.17 Characteristics
701 Shower rooms
702 Swimming pools

* Immersion (AD7) .................................... 512.2.4 Characteristics

Buildings, lighting common areas Loop 772.2.3.4.1 Specific rules
impedance default ........... 233.2 Definition
411.4 TN diagram
411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
521.5 Ferromagnetic enclosures
612.6.1 Verification
612.6.3 Verification - Measurement
* Fire (propagation of) (CB2) ............. 422.4 Propagating structures
512.2.22 Characteristics
* Fire (risk of) (BE2) ..................... 422 Protection
422.1 Premises at risk
422.1.4 Choice of pipes
433.3, 433.4 and Overload protection exemption
433.5
512.2.20 Characteristics
527 Fire spread
529.1.2.2 Conducted choices
531.2.3.3 DDR choice
Independence of installations ............... 132.11 Design
515 Materials
External influences .................................. 512.2 Classification
51 / Annex A Listing

(3) See NF C 15-211.

- XV - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

* Insects (AL) .......................................... 512.2.9 Characteristics

* Unstable (structures) (CB4) ................... 512.2.22 Characteristics
Stand-alone installation ..................... .......... 771 / Annex B Rules
Site installations ......................... 213.2 Definition
704 Specific rules
Earthing installations ................. 241.4 Definition
542 Rules
Semi-permanent installations ............... 213.1.3 Definition
364 Rules
Temporary installations .......................... 213.1 Definition
36 Rules
Work facilities ............................ 213.1.2 Definition
363 Rules
Security installations ........................... 213.3 Definition
313.2 Characteristics
351 General
353 Sources for ...
561 Specific rules
Unattended installations ..................... 773 Specific rules
Switches ......................... .................... 253.2 Definition
Table 53E Control and disconnection devices Definition
Insulation (floor or wall) ................................ 235.2
41 / Annex C1 Protection by distance or obstacle
612.5 Verification. Resistance measurement
Insulation ................................................. ... 236.1 Definition
Double insulation ........................................ 236.4 Definition
412 Protective measures
Main insulation ................................... 236.2 Definition
41 / Annex A General rules
Reinforced insulation ................................... 236.5 Definition
237.3 Definition - Protection
412 Classification
Additional insulation .......................... 236.3 Definition
Insulation ..................... ............................ 214.1 Definition
612.3 Verification. Resistance measurement
J
* Water jets (AD5) ..................................... 512.2.4 Characteristics
Junctions .... .............................................. 526 Pipe connections

THE
Discharge lamps (4) ............................. 463.1 Emergency shutdown
Equipotential bonding (LEP) ................ ... 243.1 Definition
Main equipotential bonding ............. 411.3.1.1 Rule
542.4.1 Main earth terminal
544.1 Equipotential bonding
Additional equipotential bonding .... 415.2 conductors General rule
544.2 Equipotentiality conductors
701.415.2 Washrooms
702.415.2 Swimming pools

705.415.2 Agricultural and horticultural

Equipotential bonding not connected to earth 41 / Annex C1 premises Fundamental principles
Earth connections ..................................... 312.2 Earth connection diagram
Overhead lines ...................................... Surge 529.7 Rules
arresters ......... ................... 442 Faults with higher voltage installations Choice
534.2 and implementation
Localization of faults .......................... 537.3 Choice of devices

(4) See NF C 15-150.

- XVI - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Non-conductive rooms .......................... 41 / Annex C1 Protection

Electrical service rooms ................. .. 781.5 Specific rules
M
Maintainability ........................................... 34 General characteristics
Marinas ..... ............................................... 709 Special rules
Masses .. .................................................. . 232.8 Definition

411.3 Protection against indirect contact

Ferromagnetic materials .................... 521.5 Installation methods
Materials (reaction to fire) ...................... 42 / Annex Classification
Electrical equipment ................................ 511 Compliance with standards
443.2.2 Overvoltage categories
512.1.2 Operating current
* Mechanics (constraints) (AG, AH. AJ). 512.2.7 Characteristics
Protective measures
- by automatic cut-off ....................... 411 Rules
- by double insulation ................................ 412 Rules
- by electrical separation ....................... 413 Rules
- by very low voltage ........................... 414 Rules
Reference methods ............... ............. Table 52G Rules
Protective measures ............................. 411 To 414 Choice of measures
Earthing. ....................................... 241.4 Definition
411.4 TN diagram
411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
442 Surge Protection Rules
542
544 Rules for protection in TN - TT - IT for
545 functional reasons
545.4.2 For combined reasons
Putting out of range ................................. 41 / B.2 Fundamental principles
Mobiles (equipment) ......... .......................... 271.2 Definition
559.1.2 Connection of devices
Installation methods ........................................ Table 52C Description
* Mold (AK) .................................... 512.2.8 Characteristics
Engines ........ ............................................ 445 Protection against brownouts Start-up
559.6 and troubles
772.3.2.2 Section calculation for elevators
Wet (BB conditions) ............................ 512.2.17 Characteristics
Moldings ................ .................................. 262.8 Definition
Table 52E Use
523 Permissible currents in the conductors
529.2 Installation
* Air movement (AR) ......................... 512.2.14 Characteristics
* Movements of buildings (CB3) ......... 512.2.22 Characteristics
NOT
Neutral (conductive) ................................. 232.2 Definition
524.2 Section
330.1.1 d) Harmonic currents
543.4.2 Cables without insulated neutral (PEN)
- Tracking ............................................... 514.3 Insulated conductors
- Protection ............................................... 431.2 overcurrent
- Cut ................................................ . 461.3 Non-isolation of the PEN
Keraunic levels ............................... 512.2.13 Definition
443 Protection against overvoltages of
atmospheric origin
771,443 Protection against overvoltages of
atmospheric origin
771 / Annex A Map of levels

- XVII - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Number of power points (per circuit) 771.314.2 Living quarters

O
Obstacles ................................................. .. 235.6 Definition
41 / Annex B1 Rules
Origin of the installation ............................... 141 Definition
211.3 Definition
461.2 Disconnection and control
P
Control panel .................................. 771.558.3 Living quarters
* Water packs (AD6) ................................ Surge 512.2.4 Characteristics
arresters ......... ...................................... 443 Surges
534.1 Choice and implementation
771,443 Residential premises
Lightning rod .............................................. 443.3 Presence of lightning rods
Insulating walls. ......................................... 235.2 Definition
612.5 Insulation resistance measurement
Accessible parts .................................... 232.6 Definition
423 Burn risk protection
Active parts ............................................ 232.4 Definition
41 Protection against electric shock
Intermediate parts ................................ 232.7 Definition
412.2.2 Envelopes
Simultaneously accessible parts ............ 232.6 Definition
41 / Annex B Distance and obstacles
Passages (service, maintenance) ............. Informed 781.4 Minimum distances
persons .......................... .......... Qualified See Warned
persons .................................. Electromagnetic See Qualified
disturbances ... ........... Swimming 444.3 Arrangements to be made
pools ...................................... ................ Test 702 Specific rules
platforms ............................ ..... 463.1 Emergency shutdown
Plans ............................................ .............. See diagrams
Skirtings ................................... ................... 262.8 Definition
Table 52B Installation methods
523 Permissible currents in the conductors
529.2 Installation
* Pollutants (substances) (AF) ................... 512.2.6 Characteristics
Pumps ...................... ................................ 464 Cut-off for mechanical maintenance
Marinas ............... ...................... Portable 709 See Marinas
(hardware) ........................ ............ Posts, 271.1 Definition
posts ................................... .... 410.3.7 Protection exemption
529.7 Rules (overhead lines)
* Earth potential (BC) .......................... Dust 512.2.18 Characteristics
(AE) ............ ............................. 422.1 Fire-risk areas Explosion-risk areas
424 Characteristics
512.2.5
Breaking capacity .................................... 254.5 Definition
434.1 Prospective DC current Overload and DC
435 protection coordination See Pipelines
Prefabricated
* Presence of water (AD) ................................ 512.2.4 Characteristics
* Presence of solid bodies ...................... 512.2.5 Characteristics
Cable gland .................... ........................ 521.7 Implementation
Main (insulation) ...................... ............. See Insulation
Outlets .................................. ..... 142 Downstream limit of the
555.1 installations Choice and
555.1.6 implementation Shutters
555.1.7 Height
704.555.1 Construction sites

708.530.2 Parks and caravans

709.530.3 Marinas and boats

- XVIII - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

- Very low voltage .................................. Earth 414.4 SELV and PELV

connections ......... ................................... 241.5 Definition
241.7 Independent earth electrodes
542 Rules
54 / Annex C Guide
Profiles ................................................. ...... 520.2.1 Standards
* Water splashes (AD4) ............................ 512.2.4 Characteristics
Supporting protection .......... ........ 535.2 Between overcurrent
Protection against electric shock ..... 131.2.1 protections Design - Direct
131.2.2 contacts Design - Indirect
410.1 contacts General rules
531 Choice of devices
535 Coordination between devices
Over-current protection ............. 131.4 PF Protection against thermal effects
251.4 Definition
43 General rules
533 Choice of devices
535 Coordination between devices
Protection (conductors) ....................... 543 See PF protective conductors
Power supply .................. ......... 133.2.4 Choice of equipment
311 Structure of the installations Choice
512.1.4 according to operating conditions See
Control panels .............................. 558 Switchgear assemblies Complementary
Differential protection ............... ............... 415.1 protection by RCD TN diagram
411.4
411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
531.2 Choice of devices
Table 771E Living quarters
Q
* Qualified (people) (BA5) ................... 291.1 Definition
512.2.16 Characteristics
531.2.2.2 Auxiliary source DR devices Rules
Quality of materials ................................. 511
R
Reaction to fire ........................................... 42 / Annex Material classification
Rectifiers ... ............................................ 330.1.1 d) Harmonic currents
553.1 Choice
Pipe marking ................................ 514.2 General
Conductor marking .............. ................... 514.3 General
51 / Annex B Colors
Marking (insulated conductors) ........... 514.3 Rules
Marking ................................ ................... 514 General - Switchgear Field of the
Distribution network ............................ ... 114 standard Origin of installations
141 Types of distribution diagrams
312 Earth connection diagrams
312.2 Structures - Power supply
313
33 Accounting
443 Atmospheric or maneuvering overvoltages
559.6.1 Limitation of disturbances due to motors
* Human body electrical resistance (BB) 512.2.17 Characteristics
Earth electrode resistance ...................... 411.5 TT scheme
411.6 IT diagram
442 Faults with higher voltage installations Resistance
612.6.2 measurement
771.411.3.2 Living quarters
Resistance of protective conductors or
equipotential bonds ...................... 415.2 Additional equipotential bonding LEP
612.6.4 resistance measurement

- XIX- 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Thermal resistivity of soils ...................... 523.3 Values

S
Shower rooms .............................................. ..... 701 Specific rules
Saunas ............................................ .............. 703 Specific rules
Installation diagrams ............................ TN 514.5 Identification and marking
diagram ... ................................................ 312.2.1 Earth connections
411.4 Automatic cut-off
422.1.8 Premises at risk of fire
442.2.4.1 Surges
444.3.12 Electromagnetic disturbances
461.3 General
462.1 Omnipolar disconnection
463.2 Emergency cut-off
531.1.1 Protection by overcurrent devices
531.2 Protection by RCD
612.6.1 a) Checks and measures
41 / Annex D1 Connection to the network
TNR / TNS diagram ........................................ 442.2.4.1 Grounding
TT diagram .... ............................................... 312.2.2 Earth connections
411.5 Automatic cut-off
422.1.7 Premises at risk of fire
442.2.4.2 Surges
41 / Annex D1 TN / TT compatibility
531.1.2 Protection by overcurrent devices
531.2 Protection by RCD
612.6.1 b) Checks and measures
TTN / TTS diagram ......................................... IT 442.2.4.2 Earthing
diagram ... .................................................. 312.2.3 Earth connections
411.6 Automatic cut-off
422.1.7 Premises at risk of fire
442.2.4.3 Surges
431.2.2 Neutral conductor protection
512.1.1 Equipment insulation voltage
531.1.3 Protection by overcurrent devices
531.2 Protection by RCD
534.2 Power frequency surge protectors Checks
612.6.1 c) and measurements
ITR / ITS diagram ........................................... 442.2.4.3 Grounding
Direct current diagram ............................... 312.2.4 Earth connections
* Dry (conditions) (BB1) ........................... 512.2.17 Characteristics
Conductor section ............ ................... 132.6 Design
523 Admissible currents
524 Rules
Table 771F Living quarters
Neutral conductor cross section ....................... 524.2 Harmonics
Minimum cross sections ..................... .................. 524.1 According to types and
Disconnection ............................... ............... 132.10 uses Design
281.1 Definition
462 Rules
461.2 Device at the origin
536.2 Choice of devices
771,462 Living quarters
Disconnectors ................................................. 253.1 Definition
536.2 Choice and implementation
Security (installations) .............................. 35 Installations
56 Choice and implementation
* Earthquake (AP) ............................................. ... 512.2.12 General provisions
Selectivity .............................................. ........ 314.2 Terminal circuits
535.1 Between overcurrent protections
535.4 Between RCDs

- XX - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Partial selectivity ........................................ 535.4.3.2 Rules

Total selectivity ...... ...................................... 535.4.3.1 Rules
Semi-permanent (installations) ...... ........... 213.1.3 Definition
364 Temporary installations
Electrical separation .................................... 413 Main rules
41 / Annex C3 Specific rules
612.4 Checks
Electrical service (premises) ...................... 41 / Annex B Obstacles and distance
551.2.1 Installation of generating sets
554.2 Installation of accumulator batteries
781 Rules
Controlled situation ........................................ 443.3.2 Definition
Natural situation ...... ................................... 443.3.1 Definition
Socket .......... ................... 555.1 Rules
771.314.2.1 Living quarters
* Solar (radiation) (AN) ..................... Non- 512.2.11 Characteristics
conductive ground (or wall) .............. ........ 41 / Annex C1 See Non-conductive premises
612.5 Resistance measurement
Heat sources ....................................... 522.1 Rules
* Building structure (CB) ...................... 512.2.22 Characteristics
* Submersion (AD8) ....................................... 512.2.4 Characteristics
Soils (conductors or insulators) ...................... 235.2 Definition
612.5 Measurement of the resistance of…
Overloads ................................................. ... 252.4 Definition
433 Protection
435 Coordination of protections Choice
533.2 and implementation of devices
Overcurrent ................................................. 131.4 General rule
132.8 Design - Protective devices Fuse
252.3 circuit breaker
252.4 Circuit breaker
43 Protection rules
533 Choice and implementation
* Atmospheric overvoltage (AQ) .................. 443.3 Provisions for overvoltage control Choice of
443.4 equipment
512.2.13 Characteristics
Industrial surges ............................... 442.2.1 Constraints
534.2 Choice of protection devices
Atmospheric overvoltages ......................... 131.6 General rule
330.1 Compatibility
44 Protection - Rules
443 Overvoltage categories Choice of
534.1 protection devices Standards
Duct systems ................................... 520.2.1
Table 52E Use
529.1 Pose
T
Distribution board .................................. 251.5 Definition
558 Equipment sets
771.558.3 Living rooms (control panel) Living rooms
Communication table ........................... 771.558.5
Distribution table ................. .................. 771.558.4 Living quarters
Tablets ............................... ........................ 262.3 Definition
Table 52C Installation method
523 Permissible currents in the conductors
Remote switches ................................................. . 536.5 Functional control
Permissible temperature ............................... 132.6 Design - Section of conductors Accessible
423 parts of electrical equipment Insulation of
523.1 conductors
Touch temperatures .............................. 423 Values

- XXI - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index

Ambient temperature (AA) ......................... 216.1 General definition

Paintings Correction factors
52K - 52L
512.2.1 Characteristics
523.2 Choice of pipes
Insulation temperatures ................................ Table 52F Maximum values
Temporary (installations) ............ ................ 213.1 Definition
36 General rules
Cut-off time ........................................ Table 41A Values
Voltages ...... ................................................. 313.1.1 Tolerances - Assigned
512.1.1 Variations
Voltage (drops from) ...................................... 132.6 Design - Cross section of conductors
525 Permissible values
Contact voltage ........................................ 234.2 Definition
Prospective contact voltage ... ................... 234.3 Definition
411.3.2 Cut-off time
Fault voltage ......................................... 234.1 Definition
Nominal voltage (from installation) ........... 221.1 Definition
313.1.1 Power supply characteristics
512.1.1 according to operating
Rated impulse withstand voltage .......... 512.1.6 conditions General
Table 44B Prescribed values for equipment Choice
Rated voltage .......................................... 133.2.1 of electrical equipment Choice according
512.1.1 to operating conditions Definitions
Alternating current voltages (ranges of) 222
Direct current voltages (ranges of) 223 Definitions
414.1.2 SELV and PELV
Earth (conductors) ................................. 242.1 Definition
542.3 Choice
Earth (sockets) ........................................... 542.2 See earth electrodes
Functional earth ......................................... 545 Rules
Thermal (effects) ..... .................................. 42 Protection
Information processing (materials) .... See computer
545 Earthing (protective and functional) Choice
Transformers ............................................ 552
Instrument transformers .. ....................... 556 Choice and implementation
Safety transformers ........................ . Isolation 414.3 Sources
transformers ..................... 413.3.2 Rules
552 Material choices
701.53 Shower rooms
Works (installations) .............................. 213.1.2 Definition
363 Rules
Crossings ................................................. ... 521.8 Degree IK
527.2 Fire barriers
Very Low Voltage
- SELV ................................................ ........... 414.1 Limits of the voltage range
414.3 Sources
414.4 Installation of circuits
701.41 Washrooms
702.41 Swimming pools

703.414.4.7 Saunas
706.410.3 Conductive enclosures
- PELV ................................................ ........... 414.1 limits of the voltage range
414.3 Sources
414.4 Installation of circuits
- TBTF ................................................ ........... 411.7 General rules
Types of DDR .................................... .......... 531.2.1.5 Implementation
U
Mobile units .............................................. 717 Specific rules
Emergency ( cut) ........................................ 463 See emergency shutdown

- XXII - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Index
V
Steam (pipes) ............................. Motor 528.2.2 Neighborhood with electrical pipes
vehicles (supply) ...... 717 Special rules
* Wind (AR) ............................................. ........ 512.2.15 Characteristics
* Vibrations (AH) ............................................ 512.2.7.2 Characteristics
Empty of construction .................................... 262.11 Definition
529.4 Installation rules
Pipeline neighborhood ........................... 528 Rules
Volume of accessibility to touch .............. ... 235.1 Definition
41 / Annex B Non-conductive rooms and locations
423 Protection against the risk of burns

____________

- XXIII - 2002
NF C 15-100

(Blank page)

- 24 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Title 1

Title 1 - Scope, object and fundamental principles

11 APPLICATION DOMAIN .............................................. ................................................. 2

12 OBJECT ................................................. .................................................. ........................... 5

13 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES ................................................... ....................................... 5

131 Protection to ensure safety ............................................. ...................................... 5
132 Design of electrical installations .............................................. ............................. 7
133 Choice of electrical equipment .............................................. ........................................ 10
134 Performing electrical installations and checks during commissioning ........... 12

14 LIMITATIONS OF INSTALLATIONS ............................................... ......................................... 12

141 Origin of installations ................................................... ............................................... 12
142 Downstream limit of installations .............................................. .............................................. 13

-1-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

11 FIELD OF APPLICATION

H 111 This standard applies mainly to electrical installations such as those of:

a) buildings for residential use;

b) buildings for commercial use;
c) establishments open to the public;
d) industrial establishments;
e) agricultural and horticultural establishments;
f) prefabricated buildings;
(g) camping grounds and similar facilities;
h) construction sites, fairgrounds, fairs, exhibitions and other temporary installations;
i) marinas;
j) public or private lighting installations.
(1)
Public lighting installations are subject to a specific standard.
In general, this standard is applicable to all electrical installations supplied with a voltage at most
equal to 1000 volts in alternating current and to 1500 volts in direct current.

The rules of this standard are supplemented for certain installations by specific standards; it is thus
for:
(2)
- installations in premises for medical use;
- cold cathode discharge lamps supplied with high voltage from a low voltage installation.
(3)

The list given above is not exhaustive and for example, under the term for commercial use, it is
necessary to include the offices, administrations, associations and groups of all kinds and, in general,
any activity of the tertiary sector classified. or not in establishments open to the public.

Title 7 and the guides of the UTE C 15-xxx series also deal with special installations such as temporary
installations, electrical service rooms, mobile or transportable units, etc.

H 112 It is applicable:

(a) circuits supplied at a nominal voltage not exceeding 1000 V in alternating current and 1,500 V in
direct current;

(1) NF C 17-200
(2) NF C 15-211
(3) NF EN 50107 (C 15-150-2)

-2-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H in alternating current, the preferred frequencies taken into account in this standard are 50 Hz, 60
Hz and 400 Hz. The use of other frequencies for particular applications is not excluded;

For frequencies above 100 Hz, precautions must be taken, in particular for pipes due to the increase
in the impedance of the conductors. The UTE C 15-421 guide gives indications for installations
supplied between 100 and 400 Hz.
H b) circuits, other than the internal circuits of apparatus, operating at a voltage greater than 1000 V
from an installation with a voltage not exceeding 1000 V in alternating current, for example:
discharge lamp circuits, electrostatic precipitators;

The application of this paragraph is limited to the specific cases for which the high voltage is
necessary to directly supply a single user device, the protection, control or disconnecting devices
being part of the low voltage installation which supplies the primary. of the transformer.

c) to any wiring and piping that is not covered by the standards relating to user devices;
H

d) all user facilities located outside buildings;

e) fixed communication and information technology, signaling or control pipelines (except internal
circuits of apparatus);
f) extensions or modifications of installations as well as parts of existing installations affected by these
extensions or modifications.

113 This standard does not apply to:

a) electric traction equipment (including rolling stock and signaling equipment);

(b) electrical equipment for automobiles;

c) electrical installations of caravans and leisure vehicles;

d) electrical installations on board ships, fixed and mobile platforms at sea;

e) electrical installations on board aircraft;

f) installations in mines and quarries;

Mines and quarries are subject to regulatory requirements, but the safety rules of this standard are
applicable.
H g) equipment for reducing radio interference, in so far as it does not compromise the safety of the
installations;
h) electric fences;
(4)
Electric fence installations are subject to a specific standard.
H i) installations of lightning rods in buildings.
(5)
Lightning rod installations are subject to specific standards.
H NOTE - Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to maneuvers is dealt with in 443.

(4) NF C 15-140
(5) NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102

-3-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H 114 This standard does not apply:

- public energy distribution networks;

- to production and transmission facilities for these networks.
Electricity production and distribution works placed under the concession regime are subject to the
provisions of the order of May 17, 2001.

H NOTE - The protection of low voltage installations against faults between high voltage networks and the earth is dealt with in 442
.

The diagrams of the different types of high voltage situations were introduced in 442 in order to give
the user of the standard an overview including the distribution networks or HV installation supplying
LV installations, and thus facilitate sizing in terms of overvoltages, performance and safety.

H 115 Electrical equipment is only considered with regard to its choice and installation conditions.

This also concerns switchgear assemblies that comply with the standards applicable to them.

This standard does not in principle deal with the protection of internal circuits of user equipment (see
430).

H 116 The application of these rules does not exempt you from complying with the administrative
regulations which certain facilities are required to comply with.

At the date of publication of these rules, the main administrative regulations concerning certain
installations are as follows:
- the decree of 14 November 1988 relating to the protection of workers in establishments which
(6)
implement electric currents and implementing decrees;
- the decree of 23 September 1991 supplementing the general regulations for extractive industries
(creating a title entitled Electricity);

- the safety regulations relating to protection against the risks of fire and panic in establishments
(7)
open to the public;
- the instructions concerning the electrical installations in historic monuments, established by the
Ministry of National Education on April 24, 1952;
(8)
- Decree No. 92-587 (amended) relating to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC
Directive) 1: Directive 89/336 EEC (amended) - 2: Directive 92/31 EEC;
- the safety regulations concerning the measures to be observed in the construction, fittings and
occupancy of barracks and temporary buildings;
- the orders made in application of the law on classified establishments;

(6) C 12-101
(7) C 12-201
(8) UTE C 00-200

-4-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

- the decrees and orders taken in application of the law of 2 May 1930 relating to the protection of
natural monuments or sites of artistic, historical, scientific, legendary or picturesque character;

- the decree on fire protection in apartment buildings;

- safety regulations in high-rise buildings;
- the "Machines" directive 98/37 / CE of 22/06/98.

117 The execution of new installations, modifications or extensions of existing installations, as well as
H the maintenance of all these installations should only be entrusted to persons who have the
knowledge enabling them to design and carry out the work correctly in accordance with compliance
with these rules.

12 SUBJECT

121 This standard lists the rules for the design and construction of electrical installations with a view
to ensuring safety and their satisfactory operation, taking into account the intended use.

Satisfactory operation means that the installation must operate correctly for the purpose assigned to
it - in particular the supply of user devices - but without a particular level of efficiency or economy. Any
economic consideration is excluded from the rules of this standard.

122 Clause 13 of this standard lists the basic principles. It does not contain detailed technical
H
requirements which may be subject to modifications depending on technical developments.

123 Titles 3 to 7 of this standard contain technical requirements which must be complied with in order
to ensure the conformity of electrical installations with the fundamental principles set out in 13.

124 The definitions of the main terms used in this standard are covered in thetitle 2.

H 13 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

131 Protection to ensure safety

131.1 General
The rules set out in this section are intended to ensure the safety of people, pets and property against
the dangers and damage that may result from the normal use of these installations.

NOTE - There are two main types of dangers to be feared in electrical installations:
- shock currents;
- excessively high temperatures which may cause burns, fires or other dangerous effects.

These rules are developed in the different parts 4 of the standard.

-5-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H 131.2 Protection against electric shock

131.2.1 Protection against direct contact

People and pets must be protected against the dangers which may result from contact with the active
parts of the installation.

This protection can be provided by one of the methods listed below:

- arrangement preventing a current from passing through the human body or the body of an animal;
- limitation of the current that can pass through the body.

The protective measures against direct contact are described in annex A.1 of thepart 4-41.

H 131.2.2 Protection against indirect contact

People and pets must be protected against the dangers which may result from contact with masses in
the event of a fault.
This protection can be provided by one of the methods listed below:
- arrangement preventing fault current from passing through the human body or the body of a
domestic animal;
- limitation of the fault current that can flow through the body;
- automatic cut-off within a determined time from the appearance of a fault liable to give rise, in
the event of contact with masses, to the passage of a current through the body.

NOTE - In conjunction with protection against indirect contact, the use of equipotential bonding constitutes a fundamental
principle of safety.

The protective measures against indirect contact are described in the part 4-41.
By definition, indirect contact refers to contact with masses, but protective measures against indirect
contact are intended to protect people from the dangers that may arise from contact not only with
the masses themselves but also with any party. conductive in contact with masses.

H 131.3 Protection against thermal effects

The electrical installation must be arranged in such a way as to exclude any risk of ignition of
flammable materials due to high temperatures or electric arcs. In addition, in normal service, people
and pets must not incur any risk of burns.

The arrangements for ensuring protection against thermal effects in normal service are given in the
part 4-42.
H 131.4 Over-current protection
People, pets and property must be protected against damage from excessively high temperatures or
mechanical stress due to overcurrents that may occur in live conductors.

This protection can be provided by one of the methods listed below:

- automatic cut-off before the overcurrent reaches a dangerous value taking into account its
duration;
- limitation of the maximum overcurrent to a safe value taking into account its duration.

-6-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

The rules for ensuring protection against overcurrents are described in part 4- 43 of the standard:

- article 433 for overload protection;

- article 434 for short circuit protection.

H 131.5 Fault current protection

The conductors, other than the active conductors, and the other parts intended for the flow of fault
currents must be able to withstand these currents without reaching excessively high temperatures.

NOTES -
1 - Particular attention should be paid to earth fault currents and leakage currents.
2 - For active drivers, compliance with 131.4 ensures their protection against overcurrents resulting from faults.

The rules for ensuring protection against fault currents are described inpart 5-54, and in particular
in 543.

H 131.6 Overvoltage protection

131.6.1 People, pets and property must be protected against the harmful consequences of a fault
between the active parts of circuits supplied at different voltages.

131.6.2 People, pets and property must be protected against the harmful consequences of
overvoltages due to other causes when such overvoltages are likely to occur (atmospheric
phenomena, switching overvoltages, etc.) when the risk is unacceptable.

The rules for ensuring protection against overvoltages are described in part 4- 44 :

- article 442 for power frequency overvoltages;

- article 443 for overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to maneuvers.

132 Design of electrical installations

H

132.1 General

When designing an electrical installation, the following factors should be taken into account to
ensure:
- the protection of people, pets and property in accordance with 131 ;
- satisfactory operation of the electrical installation for the intended use.
The indications necessary for the design of the electrical installation are listed in paragraphs 132.2 to
132.5. The requirements to which the design of the electrical installation must meet are given in
paragraphs132.6 To 132.12.
These rules are developed in the titles 3 and 4 of the standard.

H 132.2 Characteristics of the normal or replacement power supply

132.2.1 Type of current: alternating current or direct current

-7-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H 132.2.2 Nature and number of conductors:

- Alternating current : phase conductor (s);
neutral conductor;
protective conductor;

- Direct current: drivers equivalent to those listed above.

The rules relating to the determination of the characteristics of the power supply are given in3-31.

H 132.2.3 Characteristic values and tolerances:

- tensions and tolerances;
- frequencies and tolerances;
- maximum admissible current;
- prospective short-circuit current.

132.2.4 Diagram of earth connections and other conditions inherent to the power supply
relating to protection.

The different earth connection diagrams are described in 312.2.

H 132.2.5 Special requirements of the electrical energy distributor

See standards NF C 14-100 and NF C 13-100.

H 132.3 Nature of the request

The number, type and section of circuits required for lighting, heating, motive power, control,
signaling, communication and information technology networks, etc., are determined on the basis of
the following indications:
- consumption points of electric power demand;
- operating current IB ;
See 311.3 for his determination.
H - daily and annual variation in demand;
- special conditions ;
- control, signaling, communication and information technology network installations, etc.

132.4 Safety or replacement power supply

H
- sources (nature, characteristics);
- circuits supplied by the safety source.

The rules relating to safety or replacement power supplies are given in 313.2and in 35 and 56.

H 132.5 Environmental conditions

See 512 of this standard.

The environmental conditions in the various premises (or locations) are given in the UTE C 15-103
guide.

-8-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H 132.6 Conductor cross section

The section of the conductors must be determined according to:

(a) their maximum allowable temperature;

b) the allowable voltage drop;
c) electromechanical stresses likely to occur in the event of a short circuit;
d) other mechanical stresses to which the conductors may be subjected;
e) the maximum value of the impedance allowing the operation of the protection against faults and
short circuits.
NOTE - The points listed above relate primarily to the safety of electrical installations. Section values greater than those required
for safety may be desirable for economical operation.

The conditions for determining the cross-sections of the conductors are given in the following articles:

- 523 for the admissible currents as a function of the maximum admissible temperature;
- 533 for the constraints in the event of a short-circuit;
- 532 and 543 for stresses due to fault currents;
- 525 for the voltage drop.
The practical application of these conditions is given in guides UTE C 15-105 for insulated conductors
and cables and UTE C 15-107 for circuits comprising prefabricated conduits.

H 132.7 Laying methods and types of pipes

The choice of the method of laying the pipes depends on:

- the nature of the premises or locations;
- the nature of the walls and other construction elements supporting the pipes;

- the accessibility of the pipes to people and pets;

- tension;
- electromechanical stresses likely to occur in the event of a short circuit;
- other stresses (for example mechanical, thermal and associated with fire, etc.) to which the pipes
may be subjected during the realization of the electrical installation or in service.

The rules relating to the methods of laying pipelines are developed in 52.
Practical instructions for carrying out the different installation methods are also given in the UTE C
15-520 guide.

H 132.8 Protective devices

The characteristics of the protective devices must be determined according to their function which
can be, for example, protection against the effects of:
- overcurrents (overloads, short circuits);
- earth fault currents;
- surges;
- drops or absence of voltage.

-9-
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H The protective devices must operate at current, voltage and time values appropriate to the
characteristics of the circuits and to the possible dangers.
The rules relating to the choice of protection devices are developed in 53.

Practical application guidelines are also given in guides UTE C 15-105 and UTE C 15-107.

H 132.9 Emergency cut-off devices

If it is necessary, in the event of danger, to immediately de-energize a circuit, a disconnecting device

must be installed in such a way as to be easily recognizable and quickly operable.

The rules relating to emergency shutdown are given in 463 and for the choice of devices in 536.3.

H 132.10 Disconnecting devices

Disconnecting devices must be provided to allow the isolation of the electrical installation, circuits or
individual devices, in order to allow maintenance, verification, fault localization and repairs.

The rules relating to sectioning are given in 462 and, for the choice of disconnecting devices, in 536.2.

H 132.11 Independence of the electrical installation

The electrical installation must be arranged in such a way as to exclude any damaging material
influence between the electrical installation and the non-electrical installations of the building.

The rules relating to the independence of the electrical installation are given in 515 and, for pipes, in
528.

H 132.12 Accessibility of electrical equipment

Electrical equipment must be arranged in such a way as to allow, to the extent necessary:

- to leave sufficient space for the initial installation and subsequent replacement of individual
equipment;
- accessibility for service, testing, maintenance and repair.Rules relating to the

accessibility of electrical equipment are given in 513.

133 Choice of electrical equipment

H

133.1 General

All electrical equipment must comply with the appropriate European standard (EN) or harmonization
document (HD) or the national standard resulting from the HD. In the absence of EN or HD, the
equipment must comply with the appropriate national standards. In all other cases, reference should
be made to the appropriate IEC standard or to the appropriate national standard of another country.

When there is no standard applicable to electrical equipment, it must be chosen by mutual

agreement between the user or the client and the installer.

See as well 511.

- 10 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H
133.2 Characteristics

The characteristics of the electrical equipment chosen must correspond to the conditions and
characteristics defined for the electrical installation (see 132), they must in particular meet the
following requirements.

133.2.1 Voltage

The electrical equipment must be suitable for the maximum value of the permanent voltage (rms
value in alternating current) likely to be applied. These materials must be suitable for the expected
overvoltage category.
NOTE - For some equipment, it may be necessary to take into account the lowest voltage likely to occur.

133.2.2 Current
The electrical equipment must be chosen taking into account the maximum value of the intensity of
the current (effective value in alternating current) which passes through them in normal service. It is
also necessary to consider the current likely to flow through them under abnormal conditions, taking
into account the duration of the passage of such a current according to the possible protection
devices.

133.2.3 Frequency
If the frequency has an influence on the characteristics of electrical equipment, their nominal
frequency must correspond to the frequency of the supply voltage.

133.2.4 Power
Electrical equipment, chosen on the basis of its power characteristics, must be able to be used at the
maximum power that it absorbs in service, taking into account the coefficients of use and normal
operating conditions.

H 133.3 Installation conditions

Electrical equipment must be chosen so as to safely withstand the constraints and environmental
conditions (see 132.5) specific to the place where these materials are installed, and to which they may
be subjected. If, however, a piece of equipment does not have, by its construction, the qualities
corresponding to the place of its installation, it may be used on condition that it is provided with
appropriate additional protection forming an integral part of the installation.

See external influences (512).

H 133.4 Prevention of adverse effects

The equipment must be chosen in such a way that, in normal service, it does not have harmful effects
on other equipment or on the supply network, including during maneuvers. In this context, among
the factors that may have an influence, we can cite:
- the power factor;
- current draws;
- load imbalance;
- harmonics.
Indications on the absence of disorders are given in 33.

- 11 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 1

H 134 Realization of electrical installations and checks during commissioning

134.1 Realization

Careful execution by qualified personnel and the use of appropriate materials are essential for
carrying out electrical installations.
The characteristics of the electrical equipment, determined in accordance with 133, must not be
compromised by the assembly.
Drivers must be identified in accordance with 514.3.
The connections of the conductors to each other and to other electrical equipment must be made in
such a way as to ensure safe and durable contacts.
Electrical equipment must be installed in such a way as to ensure the planned cooling conditions.

Electrical equipment liable to give rise to high temperatures or to produce electric arcs must be
arranged or protected in such a way as to eliminate any risk of ignition of flammable materials. Any
external part of electrical equipment the temperature of which is liable to endanger human health
must be placed or protected in such a way as to prevent any accidental contact.

The rules for the choice and implementation of equipment are given in the title 5.

H 134.2 Checking during commissioning

Electrical installations must be tested and checked before they are put into service and on the
occasion of any major modification, in order to ensure that they have been carried out in accordance
with this standard.
The conditions for checking electrical installations when they are put into service are given in 6-61.

By significant modification, we mean a modification of the structure of the installation such as:

- modification of the earth connection diagram;

- increase in the short-circuit power of the power supply;
- modification or addition of distribution channels;
- creation of new distribution boards.

14 LIMITATIONS OF THE FACILITIES

141 Origin of installations

The origin of the installations defined in this standard corresponds to:

a) for installations supplied directly by a public low-voltage distribution network,

- 12 -
NF C 15-100 Title 1

(9)
• in the case of the limited power connection, the general at the output terminals of
control and protection device (AGCP);
• in the case of connection at monitored power (9) at the downstream terminals of the
disconnecting device with visible break.
b) for installations supplied by a transformer substation, at the output terminals of the transformer,

Low voltage installations can be supplied with:

• by a public high-voltage distribution network, via a so-called "delivery" transformer station in
(10)
accordance with the standard in force;
• by a high voltage installation via a transformer substation, in accordance with the standard in
(11)
force.

c) for installations powered by an autonomous low-voltage energy source, the installation includes
the electrical energy source.

142 Downstream limit of installations

The scope of this standard is limited, downstream:

- at the power supply terminals of user equipment or equipment supplied by fixed pipelines;

- to the socket-outlets in other cases.

However, the fixed equipment of the installation is the subject in this standard of specific rules for
their choice and their implementation.
Certain applications are subject to specific standards to which reference should be made, for
example:
(12)
- electrical installations for lifts and hoists;
(13)
- electrical equipment of industrial machines.

______________

(9) NF C 14-100
(10) NF C 13-100, NF C 13-101, NF C 13-102, NF C 13-103
(11) NF C 13-200
(12) NF P 82-201
(13) NF EN 60204 (C 79-130)

- 13 -
NF C 15-100 Title 1

(Blank page)

- 14 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2

Title 2 - Definitions

21 TERMS RELATING TO THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INSTALLATIONS .......................... 18

211 Main Features ................................................ ............................................. 18
212 Sizes ................................................. .................................................. ................... 18
213 Various installations ................................................ .................................................. .... 18
214 Isolation ................................................. .................................................. .................... 19
215 Factors ................................................. .................................................. ...................... 20
216 External influences ................................................ .................................................. ...... 20

22 TENSIONS ................................................. .................................................. .................... 20

222 AC voltage ranges ............................................ ........................ 21
223 DC voltage ranges ............................................ .......................... 21

23 TERMS RELATING TO PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK ............ 22

236 Insulations ................................................. .................................................. ..................... 26
237 Classification of equipment with regard to protection
against electric shocks .............................................. ............................................. 27

24 TERMS RELATING TO EARTHING ........................................... ..................... 29

25 TERMS RELATING TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ............................................. ..........30

252 Terms relating to currents .............................................. ............................................ 31
253 Definitions relating to disconnection, control and protection devices ... 32
254 Definitions relating to the characteristics of protection devices ............................ 33

26 PIPELINE TERMS .............................................. ...................... 34

261 General terms ................................................ .................................................. ......... 34
262 Installation methods ............................................... .................................................. .............. 35

27 MATERIAL TERMS .............................................. .............................. 37

270 General terms ................................................ .................................................. ......... 37
271 Terms relating to travel possibilities ............................................ ................. 37

28 SECTIONING AND ORDERING ............................................... ................................. 38

29 COMPETENCE OF PERSONS ............................................... ................................... 38

- 15 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
LIST OF DEFINITIONS

Replacement power Ravens .................................... 262.9

supply ............................. Power supply 213.3.4
Fuse circuit breaker ............... 253.3
safety .................................. Removable 213.3.1
(material) .......... ........... 271.4 Automatic cut-off of
power ............................... Cut for 234.5
PCA ............................................ 253.7 mechanical maintenance Emergency 281.2
Apparatus .... ............................ 270.3 cut ........ .............. Permissible 281.3
Assigned (value) .................. ...... 212.1 (permanent) current of a conductor (Iz
) ...................... Rated current of a 252.2
Notified (person) ...................... 291.2 protection device (Inot
) ................................ Conventional 254.1
Main earth bar .............. 242.5 current of
functioning (I2) ....................... Contact 254.2
Barrier ...................................... Main 235.4 current ...................... Current short- 231.4
earth terminal ....... ....... Full digging 242.5 circuit (Ik) .......... Leakage 252.5
loop ............... 241.6 current .......................... Operating 233.5
Nozzle ...................... ..................... 262.6 current of a circuit (IB) .. Fault current (I 252.1
Cable (insulated) ......................... ...... 261.2 f) ................... Earth fault current ......... 233.3
Single-core cable ............... Multi-core 261.3 Differential-residual current ........ 233.4
cable ........................ Cable multi- 261.4 Current in the protective 233.7
conductor ................. 261.4 conductor ................................... Setting
current (Ir) ................. Overload 233.6
Single-core cable .......................... 261.3 current .................. 254.3
Channeling ..................... ........... Pipe 261.6 Fault .......... .............................. Residual 252.4
fixed to the walls ....... Prefabricated 262.1 differential current 233.1
pipe ........... 262.14 device ................ ....................... Circuit
breaker .......................... ....... AC voltage 253.6
Channel .................................... Cable 262.2 ranges ..................................... DC 253.4
tray .......... ............. 262.3 voltage ranges ........................................
Double insulation. ......................... Cable 222
Electrical shock ........................... 231.1 ladder ...................... .... Conductive
element .................... Low voltage 223
Electrical circuit ......................... 251.1 switchgear 236.4
Control circuit .................. Control 281.5 assembly ................. ....................... 262.12
circuit distribution .................. 251.2 Envelope .......................... ........ Non- 232.9
Electrical safety circuit ....... 213.3.3 conductive environment ... Use
factor .................... Simultaneity 251.6
Terminal circuit ........................... Class 251.3 factor ......... ..... 235.3
0 (equipment) ............... .. Class I 237.1 Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216.2
(equipment) .................. Class II 237.2 Scabbard ........................ ............... 215.1
(equipment) ................. Class III 237.3 Sheath (of a cable) ......................... 215.2
(material of) ................ 237.4 Gallery .. ....................................... 271.5
Necklaces ............................ ........... 262.13 Gutter .......... .............................. 262.6
Functional control ............. Active 281.4 Impedance of the fault loop. Electrical 261.5
driver ...................... .... Equipotential 232.1 installation.................. 262.7
bonding conductor ...... Conductor 243.4 262.8
(insulated) ....................... Neutral 261.1 233.2
earthing 211.1
conductor. ........................................ 242.4
Neutral conductor (N) ..... ............. PEN 232.2 Temporary installations ............... Site 213.1
conductor ......................... Protective 232.3 installations ............... Breakdown 213.2
conductor (PE) .... Main protective 242.1 facilities ............ Work 213.1.1
conductor Earth 242.2 installations ................. Semi- 213.1.2
conductor .................... Conduit 242.3 permanent installations ..... Earthing 213.1.3
(circular) ................... .... Channel- 262.4 installation ........ Switch 241.4
profile ............................ 262.5 (mechanical) ... ............. Insulation 253.2
Connection .............. .................... 261.7 (floors, walls) .................... 235.2
Construction (empty of) ................. 262.11 Insulation .......... ............................... 236.1
Contactor (mechanical) ............... 253.5 Main insulation ................. ....... 236.2
Direct contact ............... .............. 231.2 Reinforced insulation ........................ 236.5
Indirect contact ........................... 231.3 Additional insulation ............... 236.3
Power frequency voltage Isolation ...................................... 214.1
constraint. ................................. 214.2

- 16 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2

Equipotential bonding Functional .................. 243.1 Qualified (person) ..................... 291.1

equipotential Reinforced (insulation) ..................... 236.5
bonding ................................. 243.3
Equipotential bonding of Distribution network .................. 211.2
protection ..................................... 243.2
Mass ........... ................................ 232.8 Disconnection .............................. 281.1
Electrical equipment ................ ........ 270.1 Disconnector .................. ................ 253.1
User equipment ...................... Mobile 270.2 Semi-fixed (material) (stationary). 271.3
(equipment) ............ ............... Nominal 271.2 Simple electrical separation ......... 235.6
(value) ........................... 212.2 Protective separation ............... 235.7
Obstacle ... .................................... Origin 235.5 Insulating floor .................. ................... 235.2
of the installation ......... ......... 211.3 Replacement electrical source Safety 213.3.5
Insulating wall ................................ 235.2 electrical source ......... Additional 213.3.2
Active part ..... ............................. 232.4 (insulation) .......... ... 236.2
Dangerous active part ................ 232.5 Overload ..................................... 252.4
Simultaneous parts accessible 232.6 Overcurrent ........ .......................... 252.3
Intermediate section ....................... 232.7 Distribution board .................. 251.5
Service passage ..................... .. 292.2 Tablet ... ...................................... 262.3
Interview ...................... Person 292.3 Ambient temperature .......... ........ 216.1
informed .................... ....... Ordinary 291.2 Contact voltage (effective) ........ 234.2
person Prospective contact voltage ........ 234.3
(electrically) ................................... 291.3
Qualified person ........................Hand- 291.1 Fault voltage ......................... 234.1
held portable (hardware) ............... 271.1 Conventional limit contact voltage (U
THE) ................................... Equipment 234.4
Breaking capacity (Icu) ................. 254.4 shock withstand
voltage ....... ................................. 221.2
Rated breaking capacity in service (Ics Nominal voltage of an installation 221.1
) .................................... Main 254.5
(insulation) ......... ............ 236.1 Tensions (areas of) ................ 222,
223
Earth connection ................................. 241.5 Reference earth ........................ Local 241.1
Independent earth connection .......... . 241.7 earth ..................... ............. Earth (put 241.2
Impact protection to) ......................... 241.3
electrical ..................................... Main 231.5
protection .......... ............ Protection in 231.6 Trench ...................................... 262.10
the event of a fault ............ Additional 231.7 Construction void ........ ............. Touch 262.11
protection ............. Protection against 231.8 accessibility volume Limited access 235.1
overcurrents. 251.4 area ....................... 292.1

The numbers following the defined term are the references of the International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. (1)

-------
(1) Publications CEI 50 ... and Standards NF C 01 -...

- 17 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2

21 TERMS RELATING TO THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE FACILITIES

VS 211 General characteristics

211.1
electrical installation (826-01-01)
set of associated electrical equipment having coordinated characteristics for a given application.

211.2
distribution network
installations intended for the transport of electric energy between the sources of production and the
installations of use.
VS 211.3
origin of the installation (826-01-02)
point of delivery of electrical energy to the electrical installation.
An electrical installation can have several origins.

213.1.1
breakdown facilities
installations necessary to overcome an operational incident.

212 Sizes

VS 212.1
assigned value (151-16-08)
value of a quantity, generally fixed by the manufacturer for a specified operation of a component of a
device or of a piece of equipment.
This definition applies to a quantity such as a rated voltage, a rated current, etc.

212.2
nominal value
value used to name a material by a quantity that characterizes it (current, voltage, etc.). This quantity
is generally close to the assigned value of this material.
For example, for an adjustable circuit breaker with nominal current Inot, the rated current corresponds
to the maximum rated setting current.

213 Miscellaneous installations

213.1
temporary installations
installations which have only a duration limited to the circumstances which motivate them.

- 18 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2

A distinction is made between the following temporary installations:

213.1.2
works installations
installations carried out to allow repairs or conversions to installations without interrupting their
operation.

213.1.3
semi-permanent installations
installations intended for arrangements of limited duration, going beyond the framework of the usual
activities of the premises or repeating themselves periodically.
As examples of semi-permanent installations, we can cite the installations of fairs, exhibitions,
fairground activities.

213.2
site installations
temporary installations for carrying out construction work on buildings and the like.

Outdoor installations of large construction sites or operations subject to severe conditions may be
(2)
subject to additional rules.

213.3
security installations

213.3.1
safety power supply
power supply designed to maintain the operation of devices essential for the safety of persons.

VS 213.3.2
safety electrical source (826-01-05)
power source intended to form part of a safety power supply.

213.3.3
electrical safety circuit (826-01-06)
electrical circuit intended to form part of an electrical safety installation.

213.3.4
replacement power supply
power supply intended to maintain, for reasons other than the safety of persons, the operation of an
electrical installation or parts of it.

213.3.5
VS
replacement power source (826-01-08)
electrical source intended to maintain, for reasons other than personal safety, the power supply to an
electrical installation or parts of it, in the event of an interruption of the normal power supply.

214 Isolation

VS 214.1
isolation (151-15-42)
set of properties which characterize the ability of an insulation to perform its function.
Note - Examples of relevant properties are resistance, breakdown voltage.

-------
(2) IEC 60621 publication

- 19 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
214.2
admissible voltage stress at power frequency
voltage stress taken equal to the dielectric test voltage (50 Hz), the value of which is fixed by the
corresponding equipment rules.

215 Factors

215.1
duty cycle
ratio of the power actually absorbed by a user device to its nominal power.

215.2
simultaneity factor
ratio of the sum of the nominal powers of the devices capable of operating simultaneously to the sum
of the nominal powers of all the devices supplied by the same circuit or the same installation.

The powers used to determine the simultaneity factors are affected, if necessary, by use factors.

216 External influences

VS 216.1
ambient temperature (826-01-03)
temperature of the air or the environment where the equipment is to be used.
The ambient temperature to be considered for the equipment is the temperature at the place where
this equipment is to be installed, resulting from the influence of all the other equipment placed in the
same place and in operation, without taking into account the thermal contribution of the equipment.
considered.

216.2
VS non-conductive environment (826-03-36)
arrangement whereby a person or a domestic or farm animal touching an accessible conductive part
which has become a dangerous active part is protected by the high impedance of its environment
(e.g. insulating walls and floors) and by the absence of parts grounded conductors.

22 TENSIONS

VS 221.1
nominal voltage of an installation (826-02-01)
voltage by which an electrical installation or part of an electrical installation is designated.

The voltage value in the installation may differ from the nominal voltage within the limits of the
specified tolerances (see 313.1.1).

221.2
rated impulse withstand voltage of equipment
peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed form and polarity which the equipment is capable of
withstanding without damage under the specified test conditions and to which reference is made for
the values of the insulation distances.
The paragraph 443.2 classifies equipment into four overvoltage categories according to the value of
the rated impulse withstand voltage of the equipment.

- 20 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2

222 AC voltage ranges

The alternating current voltage ranges, in which installations must be classified according to their
nominal voltage, are defined in table 22A:
- for systems connected directly to earth (TT and TN diagrams), by the effective values of the voltage
between a phase conductor and the earth and between two phase conductors,

- for systems not directly earthed (IT diagram), by the rms value of the voltage between two phase
conductors.
Table 22A - AC voltage ranges
(effective values)

AREAS CONNECTED SYSTEMS NON-LINKED SYSTEMS

DIRECTLY TO EARTH DIRECTLY TO EARTH (*)
Between phase and Between phases Between phases
Earth
I U < 50 U < 50 U < 50
II 50 <U < 600 50 <U < 1000 50 <U < 1000
U is the nominal voltage of the installation (volts)
(*) If the neutral is distributed, the equipment supplied between phase and neutral is chosen in such a
way that their insulation corresponds to the voltage between phases (see 512.1.1).

This classification of voltage domains does not exclude the possibility of introducing intermediate
limits for certain installation rules.
Very low voltages SELV, PELV and TBTF (respectively referred to in English as SELV, PELV and FELV) are
in domain I.
Domain II corresponds to the following names of the worker protection decree of November 14,
1988:
- BTA for voltages greater than 50 V and less than or equal to 500 V,
- BTB for voltages greater than 500 V and less than or equal to 1000 V.

223 DC voltage ranges

The DC voltage ranges in which installations must be classified according to their nominal voltage are
defined in table 22B.
- for systems connected directly to the earth, by the voltage values between a pole and the earth and
between two poles;
- for systems not directly earthed, by the value of the voltage between two poles.

Table 22B - DC voltage ranges

AREAS CONNECTED SYSTEMS NON-LINKED SYSTEMS

DIRECTLY TO EARTH DIRECTLY TO EARTH (*)
Between pole and Between poles Between poles
Earth
I U < 120 U < 120 U < 120
II 120 <U < 900 120 <U < 1500 120 <U < 1500
U is the nominal voltage of the installation (volts)
(*) If the compensator is distributed, the equipment supplied between pole and compensator is
chosen in such a way that their insulation corresponds to the voltage between poles

- 21 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2

NOTES -
1 - The values in this table refer to smooth direct current.
By smooth direct current is meant a current whose ripple rate is not greater than 10%.
2 - This classification of voltage domains does not exclude the possibility of introducing intermediate limits for certain installation
rules.

Very low voltages SELV, PELV and TBTF (respectively referred to in English as SELV, PELV and FELV) are
in domain I.
Domain II corresponds to the following names of the worker protection decree of November 14,
1988:
- BTA for voltages greater than 120 V and less than or equal to 750 V,
- BTB for voltages greater than 750 V and less than or equal to 1,500 V.

23 TERMS RELATING TO PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

VS 231.1
electric shock (826-03-01)
physiological effect resulting from the passage of an electric current through the human body or that
of a domestic or farm animal.
The expression electric shock concerns both direct contacts (231.2) and indirect contacts (231.3).

VS 231.2
direct contact (826-03-03)
electrical contact of people or domestic or livestock animals with live parts.

231.3
indirect contact (826-03-04)
electrical contact of people or domestic or livestock animals with energized masses following an
insulation fault.

231.4
contact current (826-02-12)
electric current flowing through the human body or that of a domestic or farm animal when it is in
contact with one or more accessible parts of an electrical installation or electrical equipment.

231.5
protection against electric shock (826-03-02)
set of measures ensuring a tolerable risk of electric shock

231.6
main protection (826-03-05)
protection against electric shock in the absence of fault.

231.7
fault protection (826-03-06)
protection against electric shock under fault conditions.

231.8
additional protection (826-03-07)
protective measure in addition to the main protection and / or protection in the event of a fault.

- 22 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
232.1
active driver
conductor assigned to the transmission of electrical energy, including the neutral conductor in
alternating current and the compensator in direct current.

VS 232.2
neutral conductor (N) (826-05-07)
conductor electrically connected to the neutral point and capable of contributing to the distribution of
electrical energy.
The neutral point of a polyphase system is defined as a common point of a polyphase network
connected in star or midpoint of a single phase network. (826-05-05)

232.3
PEN driver
conductor performing both the functions of protective conductor and neutral conductor.

NOTE - The designation PEN results from the combination of the two symbols PE for the protective conductor and N for the
neutral conductor.

VS 232.4
active part (826-03-08)
conductor or conductive part intended to be live in normal service, as well as the neutral conductor
but, by convention, not the PEN conductor.
NOTE - The term active part does not necessarily imply a risk of electric shock.

232.5
dangerous active part (826-03-13)
active part which can cause, under certain conditions, a harmful electric shock.

232.6
simultaneously accessible parts (826-03-12)
conductors or conductive parts which can be simultaneously touched by a person or by domestic or
farm animals.
NOTE - Simultaneously accessible parts can be:
- active parts;
- masses;
- conductive elements;
- protective conductors;
- the ground or a conductive floor.

232.7
middle part
inaccessible conductive part which is not energized in normal service, but which can be energized in
the event of a fault.
The intermediate parts are in particular the conductive parts of class II equipment which are isolated
from the active parts by a main insulation only.

VS 232.8
mass (826-03-10)
accessible conductive part.
conductive part of a material, susceptible to being touched, and which is not normally live, but can
become so when the main insulation fails.
NOTE- A conductive part of a material which can only be energized in the event of a fault by means of a mass is not considered to
be a mass.

- 23 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2

The term mass essentially designates the accessible metal parts of electrical equipment separated
from the active parts by a main insulation only (236.1) but liable to be accidentally placed in electrical
connection with active parts following a failure of the measures taken to ensure their isolation. This
failure may result from a fault in the main insulation or in the fixing and protection arrangements. It
follows that :

- the accessible metal parts of electrical equipment other than those in class II (237.3), metal
armor of cables, metal conduits when they contain insulated conductors are masses;

- no part of class II electrical equipment is considered to be mass.

VS 232.9
conductive element (foreign to the electrical installation) (826-03-11)
conductive part not forming part of the electrical installation and liable to introduce an electrical
potential, generally that of a local earth.
Can be conductive elements:
- metallic elements used in the construction of buildings;
- metal pipes for gas, water, heating, etc., and non-electric appliances connected to them
(radiators, non-electric stoves, metal sinks, etc.);

- non-insulating floors and walls (235.2).

233.1
fault
failure of the insulation of an active part producing a reduction in the level of insulation and being
able to cause an accidental connection between two points of different potentials.
A fault can be clear or present a certain impedance. A clear fault between live conductors is a short
circuit.

233.2
fault loop impedance
total impedance offered to the flow of current resulting from a fault.
In each case, the nature of the fault loop impedance must be specified, for example the impedance of
the earth fault loop in the event of a fault between an active part and the earth, the impedance of the
phase-neutral fault loop in the event of a fault between a phase conductor and the neutral conductor.

VS 233.3
fault current (If) (826-02-11)
current flowing at a given fault point, following an insulation fault.
In this document, the expression “fault current” is reserved for a current flowing between an active
conductor and a ground or a protective conductor.

233.4
earth fault currentfault current flowing to
earth.

VS 233.5
leakage current (826-02-19)
electric current which, under normal operating conditions, flows to earth or in conductive parts.

233.6
current in the protective conductor (826-02-20)
electric current flowing in a protective conductor, such as leakage or fault current.

- 24 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
233.7
VS differential-residual current (826-02-18)
algebraic sum of the instantaneous values of the electric currents flowing in all the active conductors
at a given point of an electric circuit.

234.1
fault voltage (826-02-02)
voltage between a given fault point and the reference earth, following an insulation fault.

234.2
contact voltage (effective) (826-02-05)
tension between conductive parts when touched by a person or a domestic or farm animal.

NOTE - The value of the effective contact voltage can be significantly influenced by the impedance of the person or domestic or
farm animal in electrical contact with these conductive parts.

234.3
assumed contact voltage (826-02-03)
voltage appearing between conductive parts simultaneously accessible when these conductive parts
are not touched by a person or a domestic or farm animal.

234.4
conventional limit contact voltage (UL) (826-02-04)
maximum value of the presumed contact voltage which it is permissible to be able to maintain
indefinitely under specified conditions of external influences.
In some regulatory texts, this voltage is called the safety limit voltage.

VS 234.5
automatic power supply cut-off (826-03-18)
interruption of one or more active conductors caused by the automatic operation of a protection
device in the event of a fault.

235.1
touch accessibility volume (826-03-19)
area extending between any point on the surface where people usually stand and walk, and the limit
that a person can reach with the hand, in all directions, without aids

See as well annex B2 of the part 4-41.

235.2
insulating floors and walls
floors and walls of rooms or locations can be considered as insulating when their electrical resistance
is high enough to limit the fault current that they can transmit to a non-dangerous value.

The resistance measured under the conditions described in article 612.5 must be at least equal to:

- 50,000 ohms if the nominal voltage of the installation is not more than 500 volts (300 volts with
respect to the earth);
- 100,000 ohms if the nominal voltage of the installation is greater than 500 volts (300 volts with
respect to earth).
In general, are considered as insulating floors, wooden floors, floors covered with carpet or with
plastic or linoleum coverings.
On the other hand, concrete or tiled floors are not considered to be insulating; the same is true of all
metallic coatings.

- 25 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2

In some rooms, a metallic grid connected to the earth is placed under the carpet to limit the effects of
static electricity. The presence of this grid can reduce the electrical resistance presented by the
ground to a value lower than that allowing the ground to be considered as insulating.

235.3
envelope
enclosure ensuring the protection of equipment against certain external influences and in all
directions, protection against direct contact.

VS 235.4
barrier (826-03-23)
part providing protection against direct contact in any usual direction of access.

235.5
obstacle (826-03-24)
element preventing accidental direct contact but not opposing direct contact by deliberate action.

235.6
single (electrical) separation (826-03-28)
separation between electrical circuits or between an electrical circuit and the local earth by a main
insulation.

235.7
protective (electrical) separation (826-03-29)separation
between two electrical circuits by means of:
- double insulation or
- main insulation and electrical protection by screen or
- reinforced insulation.

236 Insulations

VS 236.1
insulation (151-03-30)
Set of materials used to isolate a device.

236.2
main insulation (826-03-14)
isolation of dangerous active parts which provides the main protection.
NOTE - This notion is not applicable to insulation used exclusively for functional purposes.

236.3
additional insulation (826-03-15)
independent insulation provided, in addition to the main insulation, as protection in the event of a
fault.

236.4
double insulation (826-03-16)
insulation comprising both primary insulation and additional insulation.

236.5
reinforced insulation (826-03-17)
insulation of dangerous live parts ensuring a degree of protection against electric shock equivalent to
that of double insulation.
NOTE - Reinforced insulation may have multiple layers which cannot be tested separately as primary or supplemental insulation.

- 26 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2

237 Classification of equipment with regard to protection against electric shock

The class numbers are not intended to reflect the level of security of the equipment, but only to
indicate how security is achieved.
It is up to the constructor to declare the class of its material.
The provisions of this section are those of the general standard relating to protection against electric
(3)
shock.

237.1
class 0 material
material in which protection against electric shock is based on the main insulation; This implies that
no provision is made for the connection of the accessible conductive parts, if any, to a protective
conductor forming part of the fixed wiring of the installation, protection in the event of an insulation
fault. primary environment.

Class 0 equipment is no longer allowed.

237.2
Class I material
material in which protection against electric shock does not rely solely on the main insulation, but
which includes an additional safety measure in the form of means for connecting the conductive parts
accessible to a protective earthed conductor, forming part the fixed wiring of the installation, in such
a way that accessible conductive parts cannot become dangerous in the event of a fault in the main
insulation.

NOTE - For equipment intended for use with a flexible cable, these means comprise a protective conductor forming part of the
flexible cable.

The essential class I rules concern the achievement of equipotentiality between all the masses and the
earth terminal connecting the equipment to the protective conductor of the installation.

237.3
Class II material
material in which protection against electric shock does not rely solely on the main insulation but
which includes additional safety measures, such as double insulation or reinforced insulation. These
measures do not include a means of protective earthing and do not depend on the installation
conditions.

NOTES -
1 - Class II equipment may be fitted with means to ensure the continuity of the protection circuits, provided that these means are
an integral part of the equipment and are isolated from accessible surfaces in accordance with class II requirements.

2 - In certain cases, it may be necessary to distinguish between “totally insulated” class II equipment and “in a metal enclosure”.

3 - Class II equipment in a metal enclosure may only be fitted with a device for connecting a potential equalization conductor to
the enclosure if this need is recognized in the corresponding standard.

4 - Class II equipment may only be fitted with an earthing device for functional purposes (separate from that of earthing for
protective purposes) if this need is recognized in the corresponding standard.

The principle of class II is that it ensures its own safety by itself and that it does not require any other
provision to ensure protection against indirect contact. This means that the equipment is designed in
such a way that any fault between the active parts and the accessible parts is made unlikely. In other
words, a class material
-------
(3) NF EN 61140 (C 20-030)

- 27 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2
It must have properties such that it is not liable, under the intended conditions of use, to be the site of
a defect which risks propagating a dangerous potential towards its outer surface.

There are two types of equipment in class II, but which are equivalent from the point of view of safety
and consequently of the conditions of protection against indirect contacts.

Equipment with double insulation or reinforced insulation, already well known and recognized in the
standards of household appliances, portable tools, small transformers, lighting.

Equipment comprising constructive provisions ensuring equivalent safety, these provisions having to
be defined and specified for each equipment by the corresponding standards. This category concerns
electronic devices, cables, certain equipment and other machines.

Earthing for functional purposes is not incompatible with the level of safety of class II if all the
conditions of class II are met. Such provisions apply for example to electronic, medical, computer
applications..

237.4
Class III material
equipment in which protection against electric shocks is based on a very low voltage supply SELV or
PELV and in which voltages greater than the upper limit of domain I are not generated.

NOTES -
1 - Class III equipment must not include a protective earth terminal.
2 - Class III equipment in a metal enclosure may only be fitted with devices for connection to the enclosure of a potential
equalization conductor if this need is recognized in the corresponding standard.

3 - Class III equipment may only be fitted with an earthing device for functional purposes (separate from that of earthing for
protection purposes) if this need is recognized in the standard. corresponding.

Class III is characterized by the fact that no voltage above the limit of the TBT must appear in the
corresponding equipment. As a result, it must be supplied exclusively by a SELV source and that it
must not include any internal device capable of generating a higher voltage.

This is why an equipment supplied with very low voltage and which would produce, even for its
internal use, higher voltages cannot be considered as being of class III, It then belongs to one of
classes 0, I or II, it this may be the case for a battery powered television receiver.

- 28 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
24 TERMS RELATING TO EARTHING
VS

241.1
reference earth (826-04-01)
part of the Earth considered to be conductive, the electric potential of which is taken, by convention,
equal to zero, being outside the zone of influence of any earthing installation.

NOTE - The notion of "Earth" refers to the planet and all the matter of which it is composed.

The land of reference is sometimes called “distant land”.

VS 241.2
local land (826-04-02)
part of the Earth in electrical contact with an earth electrode, and whose electrical potential is not
necessarily equal to zero.

241.3
to ground (826-04-03)
make an electrical connection between a given point of a network, an installation or a piece of
equipment and a local earth.
NOTE - The local earth connection can be:
- intentional, or
- unintentional or accidental
- and can be permanent or temporary.

241.4
earthing system (826-04-04)
all the electrical connections and devices implemented in the earthing of a network, an installation or
a piece of equipment.

241.5
earth connection (826-04-06)
conductive part, which can be incorporated in the ground or in a particular conductive medium, for
example, concrete or coke, in electrical contact with the Earth.

241.6
bottom digging loop
conductive part incorporated in the foundation excavations of the building, generally in the form of a
loop.

241.7
independent earth connection (826-04-07)
earth electrode sufficiently far from other earth electrodes so that its electrical potential is not
appreciably affected by electric currents flowing through other earth electrodes.

242.1
protective conductor (PE)
conductor prescribed in certain protective measures against electric shock and intended to electrically
connect some of the following parts:
- masses,
- conductive elements,
- main earth terminal,
- taken from the ground,
- power supply point connected to earth or to an artificial neutral point.
A protective conductor can be common to several circuits.

- 29 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
242.2
main protective conductor
protective conductor to which are connected the protective earth conductors, the earth conductors
and possibly the equipotential bonding conductors (243.3).

242.3
earth conductor
protective conductor connecting the main earth terminal or bar to the earth.
Uninsulated parts of earth conductors buried in the ground are considered to be part of the earth
electrode.

242.4
neutral earthing conductor
conductor connecting a point of the neutral conductor to an earth.

242.5
main earth terminal - main earth bar
terminal or bar provided for connection to protective conductor earthing devices, including
equipotential bonding conductors and possibly conductors ensuring functional earthing.

243.1
equipotential bonding
electrical connection putting at the same potential, or at neighboring potentials, masses and
conductive elements.
We distinguish :
- the main equipotential bonding (411.3.1.1);
- additional equipotential bonding (411.3.2.5);
- the local equipotential bonds not connected to the earth (Annex C.2 to part 4-41).

VS 243.2
protective equipotential bonding (826-04-20)
equipotential bonding carried out for safety purposes.
NOTE - When the expression “equipotential bonding” is used, it is the protective equipotential bonding.

243.3
functional equipotential bonding (826-04-21)
equipotential bonding carried out for functional purposes other than safety.

243.4
equipotential bonding conductor
protective conductor ensuring equipotential bonding.

25 TERMS RELATING TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

251 General terms

VS 251.1
(electrical) circuit (electrical installation) (826-05-01)
all the electrical equipment of the electrical installation supplied from the same source and protected
against overcurrents by the same protection device (s).
A circuit includes active and protective conductors and associated equipment.

- 30 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
VS 251.2
distribution channel (826-05-02)
electrical circuit supplying one or more distribution boards.

251.3
terminal circuit (826-05-03)
electrical circuit intended to supply direct power to user devices or socket outlets.

251.4
overcurrent protection
function intended to prevent electrical equipment from being traversed by overcurrents that are
harmful to them and their environment.
It involves :
- overcurrent detection;
- circuit load cut-off.
Depending on the nature of the protection devices, the detection, overcurrent and load cut-off
functions can be provided by the same device or by separate devices.

VS 251.5
distribution / distribution board (826-07-08)
assembly comprising operating or protection devices associated with one or more outgoing electrical
circuits supplied by one or more incoming electrical circuits, as well as terminals for the neutral and
protection conductors. It may also include signaling devices and other control devices.

251.6
low voltage switchgear set
combination of one or more low-voltage connection devices with associated control, measurement,
signaling, protection, regulation, etc. equipment, completely assembled under the responsibility of
the manufacturer with all their internal mechanical and electrical connections and their construction
elements.
NOTE - The constituents of an ASSEMBLY can be electromechanical or electronic.

252 Terms relating to currents

VS 252.1
operating current of a circuit (IB) (826-02-10)
electric current intended to be transported in an electric circuit in normal operation.

In steady state, the operating current corresponds to the greatest power transported by the circuit in
normal operation, taking into account the simultaneity factors.
In variable mode, we consider the thermally equivalent current which, in continuous mode, would
bring the elements of the circuit to the same temperature.

VS 252.2
admissible (permanent) current of a conductor (Iz) (826-02-13)
maximum value of the electric current which can continuously flow through a conductor, device or
appliance, without its steady-state temperature, under given conditions, being higher than the
specified value.

252.3
overcurrent (826-02-14)
electric current value greater than the rated electric current value.
For conductors, the rated current value is the permissible current.
According to its importance and its duration of application. an overcurrent may or may not have
harmful effects.

- 31 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
Over-currents can be the consequence either of overloads due to the operating devices, or of faults
such as short circuits or earth faults.
VS 252.4
overload current (826-02-15)
overcurrent occurring in an electrical circuit, which is not due to an electrical fault.

252.5
short-circuit current (Ik)
overcurrent produced by a fault with negligible impedance between active conductors having a
potential difference in normal service.

253 Definitions relating to isolation, control and protection devices

A mechanical connection device is a device intended to close and open one or more electrical circuits
by means of separable contacts.

253.1
disconnector
mechanical connection device which ensures, in the open position, a disconnection distance satisfying
specified requirements.
NOTE - A disconnector does not allow on-load breaking of a circuit.

VS 253.2
switch (mechanical) (441-14-10)
mechanical connecting device capable of establishing, withstanding and interrupting currents under
normal circuit conditions, including possibly the specified conditions of overload in service, as well as
withstanding for a specified period of time currents under specified abnormal conditions of the circuit
such as those of the short circuit.
NOTE - A switch may be able to establish short circuit currents but is not able to cut them.

253.3
fuse circuit breaker (fuse) (441-18-01)
device whose function is to open, by the fusion of one or more of its elements designed and
calibrated for this purpose, the circuit in which it is inserted by cutting the current when this exceeds
for a sufficient time a value given. The fuse includes all the parts that make up the complete device.

The fuse circuit breaker includes all the parts that make up the whole device, including the base and
the replacement part.
VS 253.4
circuit breaker (441-14-20)
mechanical connecting device capable of establishing, supporting and interrupting currents under
normal circuit conditions, as well as establishing, supporting for a specified time and interrupting
currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as than those of the short-circuit.

A circuit breaker is generally designed to operate infrequently although some types are capable of
frequent operations.

VS 253.5
contactor (mechanical) (441-14-33)
Mechanical connection device having a single rest position, controlled other than by hand, capable of
establishing, supporting and interrupting currents under normal circuit conditions, including overload
conditions in service.
NOTE - The contactors can be designated according to the way in which the force required to close the main contacts is provided.

A contactor is generally designed to operate frequently.

- 32 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
Some contactors may also be able to establish and interrupt short circuit currents.

The rest position of a contactor corresponds to the opening of the main contacts. A circuit breaker is a
combination in a single device, produced by the manufacturer or according to his instructions, of a
contactor and a protection relay, intended to cause the automatic opening of the contactor under
predetermined conditions.
Example: A circuit breaker, consisting of a contactor and an overload protection relay, creates a direct
motor starter.

VS 253.6
differential-residual current device (abbreviated as "DDR") (445-05-02)
mechanical device or combination of devices intended to cause contacts to open when the differential
current reaches, under specified conditions, a given value.
The differential devices can be differential switches or differential circuit breakers depending on
whether they also meet the definition 253.2 Where 253.4.
A differential device can be a combination of various separate elements designed to sense and
measure the differential current and to make or interrupt the current.

253.7
control and protection connection device (abbreviated as "ACP")
connection device comprising, integrated into the device, all the devices necessary to ensure in a
coordinated manner:
- the command ;
- overload protection;
- protection against short circuits.
This apparatus is capable of establishing, withstanding, and interrupting currents under normal
circuit conditions, including in service overload conditions, and of establishing, withstanding for a
specified period of time, and of interrupting currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such
as short circuit conditions, it meets tests including mixed sequences of these functions.

This device is either automatically controlled or automatically and manually controlled with automatic
opening in the event of overcurrent.

254 Definitions relating to the characteristics of protective devices

254.1
rated current of a protective device (Inot)
current value from which the operating conditions of the protective device are determined.

Differential devices have two rated currents designated respectively by Inot

and I∆not.

254.2
VS
conventional operating current (I ) (a protective2 device) (826-02-17)
specified value of the electric current which is intended to cause the operation of the protective device
within a specified time.
The conventional operating current is greater than the rated or setting current and the conventional
time varies according to the type and rated current of the protection device.

- 33 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
254.3
setting current (Ir)
tripping current value of an overcurrent protection device expressed in amperes or as a multiple of
the rated current (Inot).

254.4
ultimate rated short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu)
value of the maximum short-circuit current that a circuit breaker can cut.
This breaking capacity is called Icu for industrial circuit breakers and Icn for household circuit breakers.

254.5
rated breaking capacity in service (Ics)
short-circuit current value that a circuit-breaker can cut (expressed in% of the ultimate rated breaking
capacity Icu or Icn) without degradation of its performance.

26 PIPELINE TERMS

261 General terms

VS 261.1
conductor (insulated) (461-04-04)
assembly comprising the core, its insulating envelope and any screens.
By convention, in this standard, the term conductor designates an insulated conductor. When it
comes to naked drivers, the text explicitly specifies.
The same term designates both the constituent conductor of a cable, and the conductor used
separately from the others.

VS 261.2
cable (insulated)
(461-06-01)set made up of:
- one or more insulated conductors;
- their possible individual coating;
- possible assembly protection;
- the coating (s) or protective sheaths, if any.
It may also include one or more uninsulated conductors.

261.3
single core cable
single core cable (461-06-02)
cable comprising a single insulated conductor.
NOTE - The term unipolar cable is more particularly used to designate the cable constituting one of the phases of a polyphase
system.

261.4
multicore cable
Multipolar cable (461-06-04)
cable comprising more than one insulated conductor.
NOTE - The term multipolar cable is more particularly used to designate the cable constituting the phases of a polyphase system
(example three-pole cable).

- 34 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
VS 261.5
sheath (of a cable) (461-05-03)
continuous and uniform tubular coating of metallic or non-metallic material, generally extruded.

261.6
pipeline (826-06-01)
assembly consisting of one or more insulated electrical conductors, cables or busbars and the
elements ensuring their fixing and, where appropriate, their mechanical protection.

261.7
connection (581-03-01)
material junction between conductors or contacts, intended to ensure the passage of current.

262 Laying methods

The references appearing in brackets after the defined term indicate the numbers of the
corresponding installation methods described in the part 5-52 (see in particular the table 52C).

262.1
pipe fixed to the walls
pipe placed on the surface of a wall or in its immediate vicinity, this wall constituting a fixing means
and possibly a protective element.

VS 262.2
channel (Ref. 41, 42, 43) (826-06-06)
ducting element located above or in the ground or the floor, open, ventilated or closed, having
dimensions that do not allow people to walk through it, but in which the conduits or cables are
accessible over their entire length, during and after installation.
NOTE - A gutter may or may not be part of the construction of the building.

Different values of admissible currents are applicable depending on whether the channels are open
or closed (see 523).

VS 262.3
cable tray (or shelf) (Ref. 12, 13, 14) (826-06-08)
cable support consisting of a continuous base and edges, and not having a cover.

NOTE - A cable tray may or may not be perforated.

If a cable tray has a cover during its installation, then it is considered a trunking (262.8) for the
determination of the admissible currents.

262.4
duct (circular) (Ref. 1, 2, 3, 5, 22)
closed enclosure, circular straight section, intended for the installation or replacement of insulated
conductors or cables by pulling, in electrical installations.

262.5
duct-profile (Ref. 4, 23, 24)
closed enclosure, of non-circular section, intended for the installation or replacement of insulated
conductors or cables by pulling, in electrical installations.
The term "duct-profile", defined in international standards, designates a product similar to a duct, but
of non-circular section.
A profiled duct can be partitioned.

- 35 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
262.6
sleeve (or nozzle) (Ref. 61)
element surrounding a pipe and giving it additional protection in wall feedthroughs (wall, partition,
floor, ceiling) or in buried paths.

VS 262.7
gallery (826-06-06)
corridor the dimensions of which allow people to move freely along its entire length, containing
supports for cables and their junctions or other ducting elements.

262.8
chute (Ref. 31 to 34)
closed enclosure, fitted with a removable cover and intended for the complete protection of insulated
conductors or cables, as well as for the installation of other electrical equipment.
A chute may or may not have partitions.
According to its dimensions and its location; a chute can be called a "molding", "plinth" or "chair rail".

VS 262.9
ravens (Ref. 14) (826-06-10)
horizontal cable supports, arranged from place to place, fixed at only one end and on which the
cables are laid.

262.10
trench
opening made in a field to lay cables, and plugged after their installation.

VS 262.11
construction vacuum (Ref. 21, 22, 23) (826-06-02)
space existing in the structure or elements of a building and accessible only at certain locations.

NOTES -
1 - Spaces in the walls. supported floors. ceilings and certain types of window or door frames and jambs are examples of
construction voids.
2 - Specially constructed construction voids are generally referred to as "cells".

Ducts, galleries and gutters are not considered construction voids. The same applies to spaces above
removable suspended false ceilings for which the installation conditions are those of exposed
installation, the pipes being fixed or supported independently of the removable panels.

262.12
VS
cable ladder (Ref. 16) (826-06-09)
cable support consisting of a series of transverse elements rigidly fixed to the main longitudinal
uprights.

262.13
necklaces (Ref. 3, 11) (826-06-11)
supports arranged from place to place and which mechanically retain a cable or conduit.

262.14
prefabricated pipeline
set of standard equipment in the form of a conductive network comprising, in a conduit, a sheath or
an enclosure, separate busbars supported by
insulating materials [VE1 441-12-07 modified].

- 36 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2

This set can be made up of elements such as:

- pipe elements with or without the possibility of bypass;

- phase transposition elements, expansion elements, flexible elements, feed and adaptation
elements;
- bypass elements;
- additional conductors for communication and / or control purposes.

NOTE - The term “busbar” is without prejudice to the geometric shape, size and dimensions of the conductor.

27 TERMS RELATING TO MATERIALS

270 General terms

VS 270.1
electrical equipment (826-07-01)
equipment used for the production, transformation, transport, distribution or use of electrical energy,
such as machine, transformer, switchgear, measuring device, protection device, electrical pipe,
equipment for use.

270.2
user equipment (826-07-02)
electrical equipment intended to transform electrical energy into another form of energy, for example
light, heat, mechanical.

270.3
apparatus (826-07-03)
electrical equipment intended to be connected to an electrical circuit in order to perform one or more
of the following functions: protection, control, disconnection, connection.

271 Terms relating to travel possibilities

VS 271.1
portable equipment (hand-held) (826-07-05)
equipment intended to be held in the hand in normal use.
Portable equipment is equipment whose operation requires the constant action of the hand, either as
a support or as a guide.

VS 271.2
mobile equipment (826-07-04)
equipment which is moved during operation or which can be easily moved while remaining
connected to the power supply circuit.
Mobile equipment can either move on its own or be moved while it is powered on.

VS 271.3
semi-fixed (stationary) equipment (826-07-06)
equipment not fitted with a handle for transport and having a mass such that it cannot be easily
moved.
Example: this mass is fixed at 18 kg in the standards relating to household electrical appliances.

- 37 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
271.4
removable material
hand-held or mobile or semi-fixed portable equipment.

271.5
fixed material
material sealed to a support or otherwise secured to a specific location.

28 SECTIONING AND CONTROL

VS 281.1
isolation (826-08-01)
function intended to ensure the de-energization of all or part of an electrical installation by separating
the electrical installation or part of the electrical installation from any source of electrical energy, for
safety reasons.
The disconnection function helps to guarantee the safety of people having to carry out repair work,
fault finding or equipment replacement.

281.2
cut-off for mechanical maintenance
opening of a cut-off device intended to cut off the power supply to parts of equipment supplied with
electrical energy so as to avoid dangers when working on this equipment.
This function is intended to cut off the power supply to a device during work on mechanical parts.

VS 281.3
emergency shutdown (826-08-03)
action intended to cut off the power supply of an electrical installation in order to eliminate or reduce
a danger.

281.4
functional control (826-08-05)
action intended to ensure the closing, opening or variation of the supply of electrical energy to all or
part of an electrical installation for the purposes of normal operation.

281.5
control circuit
circuit used to transmit orders from an operating device (such as key, handle, lever, push-button,
automatic control device, etc.) to the device ensuring the opening, closing or adjustment of 'another
circuit.

29 COMPETENCE OF PERSONS

VS 291.1
qualified person (in electricity) (826-09-01)
person with the appropriate training and experience to enable him or her to perceive the risks and
avoid the dangers that electricity can present.
This definition corresponds to the condition of external influence BA5 (512.2.16).
(*) Publication UTE C 18-510 gives the following definition of a qualified person (2.1.9):" Person
possessing the theoretical and practical knowledge necessary for the proper execution of the tasks
entrusted to him but who may not have knowledge of security ”.

In France, only authorized persons within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to
work under BA4 and BA5 conditions.

- 38 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 2
291.2
VS informed person (in electricity) (826-09-02)
person sufficiently informed or supervised by persons qualified in electricity to enable him to perceive
the risks and to avoid the dangers which electricity can present.

This definition corresponds to the condition of external influence BA4 (512-2-16).

In France, only authorized persons within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to
work under BA4 and BA5 conditions.

291.3
VS
ordinary person (826-09-03)
person who is neither a qualified person in electricity nor a person knowledgeable in electricity.

292.1
limited access area (826-09-04)
area only accessible to electrically qualified persons and electrically aware persons.

292.2
service passage (826-01-09)
passage used for needs such as command, control, adjustment and observation of electrical
equipment.

292.3
maintenance run (826-01-10)
passage used for access to electrical equipment for maintenance purposes.

______________

- 39 -
NF C 15-100 Title 2

(Blank page)

- 40 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3

Title 3 - Determination of the general characteristics of the Installations

30 GENERAL ................................................. .................................................. ............. 42

31 POWER SUPPLIES AND STRUCTURES ............................................... ................................ 42

311 Power supply and concurrency factor................................................... ..... 42
312 Types of distribution diagrams ............................................. ..................................... 43
313 Food ................................................. .................................................. ................ 53
314 Facilities Division ............................................... ................................................. 55

32 (Available) ............................................... .................................................. .................... 56

33 COMPATIBILITY ................................................. .................................................. ........... 56

34 MAINTENABILITY ................................................. .................................................. ......... 60

35 SAFETY FACILITIES ............................................... ...................................... 61

351 General ................................................. .................................................. ................. 61
352 (Available) ............................................... .................................................. .................. 61
353 Safety or replacement sources ............................................ ........................... 61

36 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ................................................ .................................... 61

361 Terms and conditions ................................................ .................................................. ... 61
362 Breakdown facilities ............................................... ............................................. 62
363 Work facilities ............................................... .................................................. . 62
364 Semi-permanent installations .............................................. ........................................ 63

- 41 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H 30 GENERAL

A determination of the following characteristics of the installation should be carried out in

accordance with the items indicated:

- the intended use of the installation, its general structure and its power supplies (31);
- the external influences to which the installation is subject (512);
- the compatibility of its materials (33);
- its maintainability (34).

These characteristics must be taken into consideration when choosing the protective measures to
ensure safety (see title 4) and the choice and implementation of materials (see title 5).

31 POWER SUPPLIES AND STRUCTURES

311 Supply power and concurrency factor

311.1 A determination of the supply power is essential for an economical and safe design of an
installation within the limits of temperature and voltage drop.

The UTE C 15-105 guide gives indications for determining the operating current of a circuit, taking
into account in particular the power factor and the efficiency of the operating devices (lighting,
motors, heating, etc.) , the device utilization factor, the simultaneity factor.

H 311.2 When determining the power supply of an installation or part of it, non-simultaneity can be
taken into account.

Simultaneity factors can be used to determine the operational currents involved in the choice of the
cross-sections of the conductors of the pipelines (523) and in the choice of equipment (512.1.2).

Their determination requires detailed knowledge of the installation under consideration and
experience of installation and operating conditions.

The UTE C 15-105 guide gives simultaneity factor values in the absence of precise indications.

311.3 Determination of the operational current

The operating current IB is determined by multiplying the nominal power Pnot of each user device or
group of devices by the following five factors:

IB = Pnot • To • b • vs • d • e

To) Factor a
It takes into account the power factor and efficiency
the
The factor a is equal to , r being the electrical efficiency of the device.
r cos

The values given below are average values which can be used in the absence of more precise
data:

For lighting and motors see guide UTE C 15-105.

- 42 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

HEATING (by resistance): a = 1

OTHER RECEIVERS: to be determined according to the manufacturer's instructions

b) Factor b: device utilization factor

In an industrial installation, the factor b can vary between 0.3 and 0.9.
In the absence of more precise indications, a duty cycle of 0.75 can generally be adopted for
powered devices. For lighting and heating devices, the duty cycle is always equal to 1.

vs) Factor c: simultaneity factor

The determination of the simultaneity factors c requires detailed knowledge of the installation
considered and experience of the operating conditions, in particular for motors and sockets. It is
practically not possible to specify values of the factor c for each type of installation, but, in the
absence of more precise indications, the value of the simultaneity factor can be taken from the
following table:

USE SIMULTANEITY FACTOR

vs
Lighting ................................................. .............................. 1

Heating and air conditioning .................................... 1

Outlets ............................................... .................... 0.1 to 0.2 (*)

Elevators (**) - for the most powerful engine ..... for 1

and - the next engine .................. for the 0.75
Load lift - others .............. ................ 0.60

(*) In some cases, especially in industrial plants, this factor may be higher.

(**) The current to be taken into consideration is equal to the nominal motor current, increased by the
third of the starting current.

d) Factor d
It takes into account expansion forecasts

The value of the factor d must be estimated according to the foreseeable conditions of evolution of
the installation; it is at least equal to 1 and, for industrial installations, a value of at least 1.2 is
recommended.

e) Factor e: conversion factor of powers into currents

The power conversion factor, expressed in kW or in kVA, into current expressed in amperes can be
taken equal to:

- in single phase 127 V, e = 8 - single-phase 230 V, e = 4.35

- in three-phase 230 V, e = 2.5 - three-phase 400 V, e = 1.4

H 312 Types of distribution diagrams

The characteristics of the distribution schemes are determined on the basis of:
- types of active conductor diagrams;
- types of earth connections.
- 43 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H 312.1 Types of active conductor diagrams

The schemes of active conductors described below are considered within the scope of this standard:

Alternating current Continuous current

single-phase 2-conductor 2 conductors
single-phase 3-conductor 3 conductors
three-phase 3-conductor
three-phase 4 conductors

The diagram of the active conductors is chosen taking into account the nature of the devices of use
(for example three-phase devices with or without neutral), and the limits of use of the available
source (for example, power balance in polyphase circuits , power limits of single-phase devices, ...).

Account should be taken of the limits set in this regard by the electrical energy distributor (for
example for the power of the motors, see 559.6.1).

H 312.2 Types of earth connection diagrams

The following types are considered within the scope of this standard.

NOTES -
1 - Figures 312A To 312E show examples of commonly used three-phase AC systems. The figures312F To 312K show examples
of commonly used DC systems.
2 - The symbols used have the following meaning:
First letter - Power supply situation in relation to the earth: T = direct
connection of a point with the earth;
I = either isolation of all active parts from earth, or connection of a point with earth through an impedance.

Second letter - Location of the masses of the electrical installation in relation to the earth:
T = masses connected directly to the earth, independently of the possible earthing of a point of the power supply;

N = direct electrical connection of the masses to the earthed power point (in alternating current, the earthed point is normally
the neutral point or, if a neutral point is not available, a phase conductor) .

Other letters (possible) - Arrangement of the neutral conductor and the protective conductor:
S = protection function provided by a separate conductor from the neutral or from the active earthed conductor (in alternating
current, one phase conductor earthed).
C = neutral and protection functions combined in a single conductor (PEN conductor).

When the installation is supplied directly by a public low-voltage distribution network, the diagram
used is generally the TT diagram.

H NOTE - For figures 312A, 312B, 312C, 312D and 312E.

Table 31A - Explanation of symbols according to publication NF C 03-211

Neutral conductor (N)

Protective conductor (PE)

Protective conductors and neutral combined (PEN)

- 44 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H 312.2.1 TN diagram
TN diagrams have a point connected directly to the earth, the earths of the installation being
connected to this point by protective conductors. Three types of TN diagrams are taken into
consideration, depending on the arrangement of the neutral conductor and the protective
conductor, namely:
- TN-S scheme: in which a separate protective conductor is used throughout the scheme;

- TN-CS scheme: in which the neutral and protection functions are combined into a single
conductor in one part of the scheme;
- TN-C scheme: in which the neutral and protection functions are combined into a single
conductor in the whole scheme.
The point connected directly to the earth is generally the neutral. In these diagrams, the fault loop
consisting exclusively of galvanic elements (active conductors and protective conductors), any
phase-to-ground fault current becomes a short-circuit current.

L1 L1
H
L2 L2
L3 L3
NOT PE
PE
PE
NOT PE PE

Taken from the ground Taken from the ground

food Masses food

Masses
Separate earthed active conductor and protective
conductor throughout the diagram

Figure 312A - TN-S diagrams

TNC TNS

L1

L2
L3
PEN PE

PEN NOT PE

Taken from the ground

food Masses

Figure 312B - TN-CS diagram

Neutral and protection functions combined in a single conductor
in part of the diagram

- 45 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3
H
L1

L2
L3
PEN

PEN

Taken from the ground

food
Masses

Figure 312C - TN-C diagram

Neutral and protection functions combined in a single conductor
in the whole diagram
312.2.2 TT diagram
The TT system has a point of the power supply connected directly to the earth, the masses of the
electrical installation being connected to earth electrodes which are electrically separate from the
earth of the power supply.
L1 L1

L2 L2
L3 L3
NOT

NOT

Masses PE Masses PE

Taken from the ground

Taken from the ground
food food

Figure 312D - TT diagrams

The point of the power supply connected directly to earth is usually neutral.
The fault loop generally includes the earth over part of its path, which does not exclude the
possibility of electrical connections, voluntary or in fact, between the earth connection of the
installation grounds and that of the power supply.
Except in the latter hypothesis, the phase-to-ground fault current has an intensity lower than that of
a short-circuit current and may nevertheless be sufficient to cause the appearance of dangerous
voltages.
Even when the earth connections of the neutral and the masses are the same, the diagram remains
a TT diagram if all the rules of the TN diagram are not respected. In other words, in such cases, the
connections between the earth electrodes are not taken into account for the determination of the
protection conditions.
Such conditions are encountered for example in buildings housing the transformer station
supplying the electrical installation; the earth connections are then merged. In such buildings, the
conditions imposed for the TN diagram may not be respected for the terminal circuits located in the
parts of the building far from the transformer substation, in particular if the building is of great
height.
They can also be encountered when the earth connections of the neutral and the earths are in fact
connected by buried metal pipes located in the immediate vicinity of each of the earth connections.

- 46 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H
312.2.3 IT diagram
In the IT diagram, all the active parts are isolated from the earth or a point is connected to the earth
by means of an impedance, the earths of the electrical installation being:
- either grounded separately;
- either grounded collectively;
- or collectively connected to the power supply earth. (See 411.6)
L1 L1

L2 L2
L3 L3

NOT
1)
Impedance
1)
Impedance
NOT

Masses PE Masses PE

Taken from the ground Taken from the ground

food food

Figure 312E - IT diagrams

1) the diagram can be isolated from the earth. The neutral conductor may or may not be distributed.

In this diagram, the first fault current is closed by the installation's leakage capacities and possibly
by the impedance inserted between a point of the power supply - generally the neutral - and the
earth. The current resulting from a single phase-to-ground fault has a sufficiently low intensity not
to cause the appearance of any dangerous contact voltage.

In the IT scheme, it is always recommended not to distribute the neutral conductor.

Distributing the neutral conductor, when it is not earthed, requires the following to be taken:

- to prevent that in the event of two faults occurring in the same installation on two circuits of
different sections, the neutral conductor of smaller section is traversed by currents of intensity
greater than its admissible current;
- so that user devices cannot be subjected to voltages higher than their nominal voltage.

These provisions are set out in 431.2.2, but require a detailed technical study of the installation for
their implementation.
It is strongly recommended to carry out new installations in an IT scheme without distributing the
neutral conductor. The supply of devices intended to operate under voltage between phase and
neutral can then be provided from separate generators or transformers.

H 312.2.4 DC diagrams
312.2.4.1 General

NOTE - Electrochemical corrosion should be taken into account in the direct current earth connection diagrams.

When the figures 312F To 312K indicate grounding of a specific polarity of a 2-wire DC scheme, the
decision to ground positive or negative polarity should be based on operating conditions or other
consideration.
For symbols, see note in 312.2.
- 47 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3

The design and installation principles of a DC circuit remain the same as those of an AC circuit.

The main differences concern the calculation of short-circuit currents and the choice of protection
devices.

a) calculation of short-circuit currents

To calculate the short-circuit current of an accumulator battery for which the internal resistance is
not known, the following formula can be used:

IK = 10.C
C is the capacity of the battery in A / h.

For the calculation of the short-circuit current at the terminals of a direct current generator, the following
formula is applicable:

1.1 Unot
IK =
Ri

Ri is the internal resistance of the generator.

To calculate the short-circuit current at any point in the installation, the following formula will be
adopted:
1.1 Unot
IK =
Ri + 2 R THE
RTHE is the resistance of the line.

and, if there is a direct current motor, the value of I will be increasedk above by the value 6 Inot of the
motor.

b) choice of protection devices

For the choice of protection devices, the characteristics of the circuit (short-circuit current, rated
current, time constant) should be presented to a manufacturer who will help in choosing the
appropriate protection device.
Differential devices cannot be used.

- 48 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H 312.2.4.2 TN DC diagram

L+
PEN
THE-

PE
Diagram a)

Taken from the ground

food
Masses

L+
PEN
M

THE-

PE
Diagram b)

Masses

Taken from the ground

food

Figure 312F - TN-S DC diagrams

The active conductor connected to the earth (for example L-) of diagram a) or the middle conductor (M)
connected to the earth of diagram b) is separated from the protective conductor throughout the diagram.

- 49 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

TN-S DC diagram

The point connected directly to earth is usually L- or the middle conductor. In these diagrams, the
fault loop consisting exclusively of galvanic elements (active conductors and protective conductors),
any phase-to-ground fault current becomes a short-circuit current.

H
L+

PEN

Diagram a)

Taken from the ground

food
Masses

L+

PEN
THE-

Diagram b)

Masses

Taken from the ground

food

Figure 312G - TN-C DC diagrams

The functions of the active conductor connected to the earth (for example L-) of diagram a) and of
the protective conductor are combined in a single PEN conductor in the whole diagram, or the
middle conductor connected to the earth (M) of diagram b ) and the protective conductor are
combined into a single PEN conductor throughout the diagram.

- 50 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H
L+
PEN PEN

THE-

Diagram a)

Taken from the ground Masses

food
TN-C scheme TN-C scheme

TN-CS current diagram

L+
PEN
PEN

THE-

M
Diagram b)

Taken from the ground

Masses
food

TN-C scheme TN-C scheme

TN-CS current diagram

Figure 312H - TN-CS DC diagrams

The functions of the active conductor connected to the earth (for example L-) in diagram a) and the
protective conductor are combined in a single PEN conductor in parts of the diagram, or the middle
conductor connected to earth (M) in the diagram b) and the protective conductor are combined into
a single PEN conductor in parts of the diagram.

- 51 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H 312.2.4.3 DC VT diagram

L+
THE -

Diagram a)

Masses

Taken from the ground Grounding

food masses

L+
M

THE -

Diagram b)

Masses

Taken from the ground

Grounding
food masses

Figure 312J - DC TT diagrams

The point of the power supply connected directly to earth is usually L- or the middle conductor.

The fault loop generally includes the earth over part of its path, which does not exclude the
possibility of electrical connections, voluntary or in fact, between the earth connection of the
installation grounds and that of the power supply.

Except in the latter hypothesis, the phase-to-ground fault current has an intensity lower than that of
a short-circuit current and may nevertheless be sufficient to cause the appearance of dangerous
voltages.

In practice, this diagram is not used, the earth connections generally not being distinct.

- 52 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H 312.2.4.4 IT DC diagram

L+
THE -

Diagram a)

Masses

Grounding
masses

L+
M

THE -

Diagram b)

Masses

Grounding
masses

Figure 312K - IT DC diagrams

Diagram in which the current resulting from a single fault between an active conductor and the
ground has a sufficiently low intensity not to cause the appearance of any dangerous contact
voltage.
The first fault current is closed by the leakage capacities of the installation (on power-up) and
possibly by the resistance inserted between a point of the power supply - generally L- or the middle
conductor - and the earth.
The limitation of the current intensity resulting from a first fault is obtained, either by the absence of
connection to the earth of the power supply, or by the value of the resistance inserted between the
conductor L- or M and the earth. .

H 313 Power

313.1 General

313.1.1 The following characteristics of the diet should be determined:

- nature of current and frequency;
- nominal voltage value;
- value of the presumed short-circuit current, at the origin of the installation;
- possibility of meeting the requirements of the installation, including the power supply.

- 53 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3

When the installation is supplied by an external distribution network, the electrical energy
distributor must be consulted (see NF C 14-100). When the power comes from a private generator,
the corresponding characteristics must be determined according to the characteristics of this
generator or according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Nature of current
If a direct current supply is necessary and if the available source is alternating current, or vice versa,
the necessary conversion equipment and its location should be provided. It is the same if an
alternating current supply at a frequency different from that of the source is necessary.

To determine the power of the installation (311), the powers of equipment supplied with direct
current or at a different frequency are increased taking into account the efficiency of the conversion
equipment.

Tensions
In France, the nominal voltages delivered by the public distribution networks are single-phase 230 V
and three-phase 230/400 V.

When the installation is supplied by a transformer substation or by an autonomous source, the

nominal voltage and the tolerances are preferably chosen from the following normal values:

single phase 230 volts three phase 230/400 volts

400 volts 400/690 volts
690/1000 volts (Neutral generally not distributed).

The 230/400 volts voltages are internationally harmonized, the tolerances in France are + 6%, - 10%.
For higher voltages, tolerances can be contractually reduced.

When the tolerances are greater than the allowable limits for the supplied material, voltage
regulators are necessary. To determine the power of the installation, the power of the equipment
thus supplied should be increased, taking into account the efficiency of the regulators. As a variant,
when the installation includes transformers, these can be adjusted by taps.

When the power required for the installation is such that it requires a high voltage supply, the
requirements of the electrical energy distributor for the transformer substation must be taken into
account. Appropriate arrangements are made for the location of transformer stations in connection
with the power demand points. In such cases, this standard relates only to parts of the installation
supplied at a voltage not exceeding 1000 V in alternating current or 1,500 V in direct current.

Frequency
The nominal frequency of public distribution networks in France is 50 Hz.

Contractually, the frequency must not deviate by ± 2% from the nominal value of 50 Hz.

Other frequencies may be required for special purposes, in which case provision should be made for
appropriate frequency changing equipment.

- 54 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

Prospective short-circuit current

The presumed short-circuit current at the origin of the installation is determined and taken into
account in the design of the short-circuit protection of the installation in accordance with 434.

When an installation is supplied by an independent source (thermal engine generator or UPS), the
short-circuit current is lower than when it is supplied by an HV / LV transformer of the same power;
in particular, the minimum short-circuit current may be little higher than the admissible current in
the circuit or even lower. Instructions are given in guides UTE C 15-401 and UTE C 15-402.

H 313.1.2 These characteristics must be estimated in the case of an external source and must be
determined in the case of a private source. They are applicable to both main power supplies as well
as safety and replacement power supplies.

313.2 Power supplies for safety installations and replacement power supplies
When the safety installations are imposed by the authorities responsible for fire protection or by
conditions relating to the evacuation of the premises in the event of an emergency, or when
replacement power supplies are required by the contracting authority the installation, the
characteristics of the power supplies for safety or replacement installations must be determined
separately. Such power supplies must be of adequate capacity, reliability and availability for the
specified operation.

Additional requirements for power supplies for safety installations are given in 35 and in 56.

NOTE - This standard does not include special rules for replacement power supplies.

In particular, reference should be made to the official texts relating to fire safety in high-rise
buildings (C 12-061) and to the official texts relating to protection against the risks of fire and panic
in establishments receiving of the public (C 12-201).

H 314 Facilities Division

314.1 Any installation must be divided into several circuits as needed, in order to:

- to avoid any danger and limit the consequences of a fault;

- to facilitate checks, tests and maintenance (see also 46);
- take into account the dangers that could result from a failure of a single circuit such as a lighting
circuit.
- limit the value of the leakage current in the protective conductor of each circuit.

Limiting the leakage current in the protective conductor allows optimal use of differential-residual
current devices at most equal to 30 mA with respect to the need for continuity of service. It is
recommended to limit the leakage currents to a third of the sensitivity of the differential device,
which in practice limits to ten socket outlets for a differential protection of 30 mA.

H 314.2 Separate distribution circuits must be provided for those parts of the installation which need
to be controlled separately, so that these circuits are not affected by the failure of other circuits.

Terminal circuits are generally specialized by the function of the devices they serve. Separate
terminal circuits are then provided for lighting, for socket outlets, for motors, etc.

- 55 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

The above conditions imply that, in certain cases, a selection or selectivity between the different
protection devices is ensured (see in particular 536).

H 314.3 When a building is served by several installations, the corresponding circuits must be clearly
differentiated.

The same building can be served from several power supplies (transformer station, public
distribution network, independent source, etc.).
All the circuits supplied from a power supply point constitute an installation and it is important that
different installations are clearly differentiated and, in particular, the same distribution point, the
same box or the same switchboard must contain only elements belonging to a single installation.
Are not covered:

- signaling and control circuits,

- alternative or safety sources.

H
32 (Available)

33 COMPATIBILITY

330.1 Characteristics
Appropriate measures must be taken when the equipment is liable to have harmful effects on other
electrical equipment, other installations, or to interfere with the operation of the power source and
disrupt public distribution networks.

The disturbances are in particular:

- voltage disturbances;
• rapid voltage variations,
• voltage dip,
• brief voltage cuts,
• long voltage cuts,
• temporary overvoltages between phases and earth,
• transient overvoltages between phases and earth,
• voltage imbalance,
• harmonic voltages / harmonic currents,
• information signal voltage on the power conductors,
- continuous components;
- high frequency oscillations;
- leakage currents.

The power and communication networks must be carried out according to the prescriptions and
recommendations of the article 444, Of the game 5-54 and the UTE C 15-900 guide.
The characteristics of the voltage supplied to users by public distribution networks are defined in NF
EN 50160.
The other installations to which the Standard refers are the various installations distributed in
buildings, such as telephone installations, television distribution, computer networks,
teletransmissions, and in general information transmission installations. , for example building
monitoring and control.

This article 33 deals in particular with electromagnetic compatibility, which is defined as the ability of
a device, equipment or system to operate satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without
itself producing electromagnetic disturbances which are intolerable to anything in this environment.

- 56 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3

The main electromagnetic disturbances can be classified into two families:

a) low frequency disturbances, less than a few tens of kHz, which include:

- frequency fluctuations,
- voltage variations (voltage dip, flicker, etc.),
- changes in the voltage waveform (harmonics),
- voltage imbalances,
- power frequency transient overvoltages.
b) high frequency disturbances, greater than a few tens of kHz, which include:

- pulsed voltages and currents,

- damped oscillatory voltages and currents,
- radiated electromagnetic fields,
- discharges of an electrostatic nature.

The creation of complementary functional earth links is a means of limiting certain disturbances.

330.1.1 Low frequency disturbances

To) Frequency fluctuations

This type of fluctuation is practically non-existent on the public distribution networks. On the other
hand, in installations supplied by autonomous sources, the provision of information relating to the
frequency is recommended and regulation devices are necessary to keep the frequency within
acceptable tolerance limits.

b) Voltage variations

The rapid variations in voltage are mainly due to the operation of certain devices, such as arc
furnaces, welding devices, the starting of high-power motors, etc.

The protection consists either in increasing the short-circuit power of the source, or in reducing the
amplitude of the variations in reactive power absorbed by the disturbing device (for example using
static compensators).

Micro-interruptions are only one particular case of voltage dips, due either to the operation of
certain machines presenting strong current inrushes, or to faults affecting the supply network.

The protection consists either in making the receivers insensitive to voltage dips, or in supplying
them via devices compensating for the lack of energy during the duration of the voltage dips (for
example, direct current power supplies equipped with rectifiers associated with capacitors, motor-
alternator rotating units with flywheel, rectifier-accumulator-inverter sets, ...).

vs) Starting currents

The currents of the starting currents of the devices must be taken into consideration when
determining the cross-sections of conductors and in the choice of protection devices against
overcurrents, in order to avoid excessive voltage drops during the starting period and unwanted
operations. protective devices.

Power limits are set for motors connected to installations supplied directly by a public distribution
network (559.6.1).

- 57 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3

d) Harmonic currents
Harmonic currents are generated mainly by devices whose power supply, designed based on power
electronics, absorbs non-sinusoidal currents. The main devices concerned are:

• Power electronics equipment (rectifiers, inverters, variable speed drives, dimmers),

• discharge lamps including fluorescent tubes,

• welding machines,
• office automation equipment, IT equipment and their peripherals,
• household appliances (microwave, TV, Hi-Fi, etc.).

In this case, the currents absorbed break down into sinusoidal currents of rank n, even or odd
multiples of the fundamental frequency. The current deformation is characterized by an intensity
distortion rate (THDi).

The devices mentioned above mainly generate odd-numbered harmonic currents. Homopolar
harmonic currents (of order 3 and multiples of 3) can cause a non-negligible current to flow in the
neutral conductor.

Harmonic distortion of voltage

Harmonic currents can be a source of local disturbances, but also increase the level of voltage
distortion (characterized by a voltage distortion rate (THDu)) throughout the installation and
possibly on other installations via the network. distribution audience.

Harmonic voltage distortion is liable to:

• accelerate the aging of equipment (motor windings, transformers) by abnormal heating,

• decrease performance and disrupt sensitive equipment (automation, IT, etc.),

• generating resonances in the presence of power factor correction capacitors, possibly leading to
overvoltage breakdowns.

Technical solutions against current and voltage harmonics

The calculation of the section of the conductors and in particular of the neutral conductor such as
described in 523.5.2 and 524.3 takes into account the zero sequence harmonic currents.

International standards limit the individual harmonic injection of mass-market devices; in general,
there is no need to make other arrangements for domestic installations.

For industrial or tertiary installations, the global injections of harmonic currents into the network
may be subject to contractual rules with the distributor.

To limit disturbances in the installation and comply with connection rules, the technical solutions
consist of:

• supply the polluting loads by circuits whose origin is closest to the source,

• supply sensitive loads and polluting loads via separate circuits,

• use special coupling transformers,
• avoid the TNC scheme, which presents risks of disturbance of sensitive equipment,
• reduce the injected currents by using active, passive or hybrid filters and / or 12-phase bridges,

• reduce the harmonic voltage by reducing the source impedance (increase in the short-circuit
power (Pcc)).

- 58 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3

Harmonic monitoring and control devices make it possible to assess voltage and current distortion,
and to initiate corrective actions if necessary. The orders of magnitude of the distortion rates and
the foreseeable effects are given in the table below.

Harmonic rate Predictable effects

THDu <5% and THDi <10% None

5% <THDu <8% or 10% <THDi <50% Significant pollution, possible harmful effects
THDu> 8% or THDi> 50% Heavy pollution, probable malfunctions
Level of harmonic 3 in current> 15% Non-negligible current in the neutral conductor

e) Power frequency surges

These overvoltages are due either to insulation faults on the high voltage having repercussions on
the low voltage installations, or to faults on the low voltage side.

Protection is provided by limiting the earth connection resistance of the masses, as indicated in 442
and in standards NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200 and, in certain cases, by the use of surge protectors.

f) Voltage imbalances

Voltage imbalances are due in particular to unbalanced loads and non-symmetrical faults.

The protection consists either in re-balancing the phases, or in increasing the short-circuit power of
the source, or by using an appropriate compensating assembly.

330.1.2 High frequency disturbances

To) Pulse-shaped transient overvoltages

Transient overvoltages are:

- or due to overvoltages of atmospheric origin transmitted by the supply network;

- or produced during the commissioning or shutdown of certain equipment (known as "switching

surges").
Protection against such overvoltages is defined in 443.
Switching on certain equipment can cause transient overvoltages liable to cause unwanted
operation of the protection devices of the corresponding circuits.

b) High frequency oscillations

When the operation of equipment is liable to cause high frequency oscillations in the supply circuit
or induced in other circuits, it should be verified that these oscillations do not cause faulty operation
or other harmful effects on other equipment, otherwise measures must be taken to reduce these
oscillations to a non-hazardous level.

vs) Other high frequency disturbances

(such as electromagnetic fields, electrostatic discharges, ...)

Protection consists of using filters or shields suitable for the equipment to be protected.

- 59 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

330.1.3 Other causes of disturbances

To) Continuous components

When equipment is liable to cause the flow of direct current in operation in the alternating current
installation which supplies it, it must be checked that this cannot result in faulty operation or
harmful effects on other equipment. installation, otherwise arrangements must be made to
separate the material in question from the source.

DC components can, under certain conditions, interfere with the operation of differential-residual
current protection devices, unless these devices include provisions to limit their effects (see
532.2.1.4).

b) Leakage currents

When equipment is liable to produce significant leakage currents in normal operation, these
leakage currents must be taken into account in the choice of protective measures to ensure safety (
Title 4) (See as well 532.2.1.3, 544.4 and 555.5.2). This is the case, for example, for information
processing or automatic control equipment comprising a large number of filters for reducing radio
interference, or high power heating devices.

It is possible to limit the consequences of the circulation of such leakage currents by supplying the
equipment with a transformer with two windings and by creating a TN circuit on the secondary.

vs) Devices capable of supplying current to the supply network

Any device supplied by an installation connected directly to a public electric energy distribution
network and capable of being re-supplied by an autonomous source must include a device
preventing the re-supply of the distribution network unless this situation has, before its installation,
is subject to a prior agreement with the distributor, relating in particular to the control, safety and
metering devices to be adopted.

H 34 MAINTENABILITY

340.1 The frequency and quality of maintenance of the installation that can be reasonably expected
during its expected life should be estimated. When an authority is responsible for the operation of
the installation, this authority must be consulted. These characteristics are to be taken into account
when applying the prescriptions oftitles 4To 6 of this standard, such that, taking into account the
frequency and quality of maintenance expected:

- all periodic checks, tests, maintenance and repairs necessary during the expected service life
can be carried out easily and safely;
- the effectiveness of protective measures to ensure safety is ensured;
- the reliability of the equipment allowing the correct operation of the installation is appropriate
to the expected service life.

The characteristics indicated in part 34 may vary from one part of an installation to another, and
depend, for example, on the presence of persons qualified to operate the equipment in normal
service. Access to certain parts of the installation may be limited to such persons, and this must
intervene in the choice of protective measures to ensure the safety of these parts (title 4).

The presence of knowledgeable permanent maintenance personnel can have an influence on the
choice of protective measures to ensure safety.

- 60 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3
H
35 SAFETY INSTALLATIONS

351 General
NOTE - The need for security installations and their nature are often defined by regulatory authorities whose requirements are
to be observed.

The following sources for safety installations can be used:

- accumulator batteries;
- generators independent of the normal power supply;
- separate connections from the distribution network effectively independent of the normal
power supply (see 551.1.1).

The rules relating to power supplies for safety services are given in part 56.

352 (Available)

353 Safety or alternative sources

When the alternate sources meet the requirements for the safety sources, they can be used as the
safety sources. The regulatory texts specify the modalities.

36 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

361 General conditions

Temporary installations include emergency, works and semi-permanent installations.

It is recalled that the temporary installations (213.1) are those which have only a duration limited to
the circumstances which motivate them.

H 361.1 Breakdown, works and semi-permanent installations may be subject to exceptions to the rules
of this standard set out respectively in 362, 363 and364.

However, no exemption is allowed either in premises (or locations) presenting a risk of fire (BE2),
nor in premises (or locations) presenting a risk of explosion (BE3).

361.2 Exceptions to the prescriptions of the title 4 only for repair installations and subject to the
reservations set out in 362.

Any repair, work or semi-permanent installation must be protected at its origin against
overcurrents, this protection having to meet the conditions set in thepart 43.

361.3 Temporary installations must not obstruct or hinder the movement of people.

361.4 When using extensions, every precaution must be taken to prevent their parts from being
accidentally separated.
This rule does not necessarily imply the use of a locking device.
It is essential that the assembled elements of the extensions have the same electrical and
dimensional characteristics of interchangeability.

- 61 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

H 362 Breakdown facilities

For repair installations, it may be accepted not to comply with the requirements of this standard,
provided that their duration is as limited as possible and that, if certain measures are no longer
observed, compensatory measures or appropriate precautions are taken.

Breakdown facilities are those necessary to remedy an operational incident.

H 363 Work facilities

Works installations may be subject to exemptions from the following rules:

- fixing devices (530.4);

- voltage drop limits (525);
- vicinity of electrical pipes and other pipes (528);
- pipe laying conditions;
- laying of flexible cables fixed to the walls.

The works installations are those carried out to allow the repairs or conversions of existing
installations without interrupting their operation.

Attention is drawn to the value of the use of differential devices associated with earth electrodes to
ensure protection against indirect contacts, the operating threshold of the differential devices
having to meet the conditions set out in413 and 531.2.

Work installations may be subject to protective measures against indirect contact different from
those used for the installations concerned by this work, for example, use of a protective measure
from paragraphs 413.2 Where 413.5, while neighboring installations are subject to the measure in
paragraph 413.1.

Fixing devices (530.4):

The conditions for fixing the devices may not be respected, but the devices must be placed on stable
supports.

Voltage drops (525):

The voltage drop limits do not apply, provided that the devices are functioning correctly.

Neighborhood of electrical pipes and other pipes (528):

The separation between electrical pipes and other pipes can be obtained by any suitable means.

Fixed pipes (52):

In addition to the types of pipes described in 52, it is allowed to use:
- flexible cables such as those of the H 07 RN-F, H 05 VV-F, H 05 RR-F series fixed to the walls by any
means that does not risk damaging the insulating casing or the sheath of these cables.

However, if the locations where these conductors and cables are installed present mechanical risks
(AG3), they should be suitably protected, for example by placing them in a section of conduit
classified X4XX (ICTA, ICTL, MRL, CSA and some IRL) .

- 62 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 3

Cables laid in the open air

The fixing conditions must not damage the outer sheath of the cables.

Flexible cables fixed to the walls

Flexible cables such as those of the H 05 VV-F series are allowed fixed to the walls under conditions
AD1, AD2, AD3, AD4, AD5, AF1 and AF3.

Buried pipes
Unarmored cables such as those of the U-1000 R 12N and H 07 RN-F series may not be provided
with mechanical protection, provided that the necessary precautions are taken to prevent the cables
from being damaged.

Overhead lines
Overhead lines can be fixed by any suitable means, but regulatory distances must always be
observed.

364 Semi-permanent installations

The semi-permanent installations are intended for arrangements of limited duration, going beyond the
framework of the usual activities of the premises or repeating themselves periodically.

H 364.1 Semi-permanent installations may be subject to the exemptions set out in 363.

364.2 If the semi-permanent installations are renewed periodically, they must be completely
dismantled between each period of use. In addition, the protective devices of these installations
must be placed on stable boards.

____________

- 63 -
NF C 15-100 Title 3

(Blank page)

- 64 -
TITLE 4 - Protection to ensure safety

Part 4-41 - Protection against electric shock

Part 4-42 - Protection against fire, burns and explosion

Part 4-43 - Over-current protection

Part 4-44 - Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances

Part 4-46 - Disconnection and control

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

Part 4-41 - Protection against electric shock

411 Protection measure by automatic power cut-off .................................... 67

411.1 General ................................................. .................................................. ............. 67

411.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact ........................................ 68
411.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact ..................................... 68
411.4 TN diagram ................................................ .................................................. ............. 70
411.5 TT diagram ................................................ .................................................. .............. 72
411.6 IT diagram ................................................ .................................................. ............... 74
411.7 Very Low Functional Voltage (TBTF) ........................................... ...................... 78

412 Protection measure by double or reinforced insulation .......................................... ........ 78

413 Protection measure by electrical separation ............................................ .................. 80
414 Very low voltage protection measure ........................................... ............................ 82
415 Additional protection ................................................ .................................................. 86

Annex A - (normative) - Provisions for protection against direct contact ............ 88

Annex B - (normative) - Protective measures without protective provisions against

indirect contacts, subject to supervision .......................................... .................. 90

Annex C - (normative) - Protective measures in conditional installations

monitoring ................................................ .................................................. .................... 92

Annex D - (normative) - Compatibility between various earth connection schemes

and their connection to the public distribution network .......................................... .............. 94

- 65 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS 410.1 Scope
This part deals with protection against electric shock in electrical installations. It is based on standard
NF C 20-030, a fundamental safety standard applicable to the protection of people and pets, intended
to give the essential principles and prescriptions common to installations and equipment or necessary
for their coordination.

The essential rule for protection against electric shock, as defined in standard NF C 20-030, is that the
dangerous active parts are not accessible and that the accessible conductive parts are not dangerous,
both under normal conditions and under simple fault conditions.

Protection against electric shock therefore requires the application of at least oneprotective
provision against direct contact, in normal operation and at least one protective provision against
indirect contact, in the event of a fault. The combination of these two protective provisions
constitutes aprotective measure. As an alternative, protection against electric shock is provided by a
reinforced protection arrangement providing protection in normal operation and in the event of a
fault.

In standard NF C 20-030, protection against direct contact is called main protection and protection
against indirect contact is called protection in the event of a fault.

This part specifies the essential requirements and deals with the application and coordination of
these requirements, including their application in connection with the classes of external influences,
in alternating current installations and in direct current installations.

It also indicates, in 415, the requirements relating to additional protection by differential devices or by
additional equipotential bonding, which may be required in certain cases.

This new part replaces chapter 41 of standard NF C 15-100: 1991, as well as partially the old sections
471 and 481.

410.2 (available)
VS

410.3 General

410.3.1 One or more of the following protective measures, each consisting of a provision for
protection against direct contact and a provision for protection against indirect contact, shall be
applied, unless otherwise specified in 410.3.2 and 410.3.4, in each installation or part of an
installation, taking into account the conditions of external influences and must be considered when
choosing and installing materials:

- protection measure by automatic power cut-off,

- protective measure by double or reinforced insulation,
- protective measure by electrical separation for the supply of a single device,
- very low voltage protection measure.

In practice, most installations are subject to a fundamental protection measure by automatically

cutting off the power supply, certain parts of the installations being able to be the subject of one of
the other protection measures.

- 66 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS 410.3.2 For particular installations and locations, the protective measures prescribed in the part 7
must be applied.

410.3.3 Protective measures, specified in annex B, by setting up obstacles or by putting out of range
can only be set up under the supervision of a qualified or informed person.

In France, only authorized persons within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to
work under BA4 and BA5 conditions (see also 512.2.16).

VS 410.3.4 Protective measures, specified in annex C :

- non-conductive premises or locations;
- equipotential bonds not connected to earth;
- electrical separation for supplying more than one user equipment;
are only applicable if the installation is under the supervision of a competent person, so that
modifications not permitted by these protective measures cannot be made.

410.3.5 If a protective measure is not fully satisfied, additional steps should be taken to ensure that
the resulting association provides the same degree of protection as full compliance with that
measure.

NOTE - An example of application is given in 411.7.

410.3.6 It must be ensured that different protective measures applied in the same installation or the
same part of the installation, or in the equipment, cannot influence or annihilate each other.

410.3.7 It is permitted to dispense with protective measures against indirect contact for electrical
equipment and their supports in the following cases:

- metal conduits or troughs, or other metal protective envelopes for equipment with double or
reinforced insulation;
- posts and metal parts in electrical connection with them when these parts are not within the
volume of accessibility to the touch;
- reinforced concrete columns whose reinforcements are not accessible;
- masses which, due to their small dimensions (approximately 50 mm X 50 mm) or their location,
cannot be grasped or come into contact with a large part of the human body, insofar as the
connection with a protective conductor would be difficult to achieve or unreliable.

NOTE - This requirement is only applicable, for example, to nuts, rivets, identification plates and cable fasteners.

This exemption is not allowed in France by the regulations concerning workers.

411 Protective measure by automatic power cut-off

VS

411.1 General
Automatic power cut protection is a protective measure in which:

- protection against direct contact is ensured either by the main insulation of the live parts, or by
barriers or enclosures, in accordance withAnnex A, and

- 67 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS - protection against indirect contact is ensured by protective links associated with the automatic
disconnection of the power supply in accordance with 411.3 To 411.6.

The protective measure by automatically cutting off the power supply is intended to prevent a
person from being subjected to a contact voltage greater than 50 V in alternating current (rms
value) following an insulation fault. or at 120 V smooth direct current for such time that organic
damage may result.

To comply with this rule, any fault occurring in electrical equipment causes the flow of a current
which must be interrupted within a time compatible with the safety of persons.

It follows that this protective measure is based on the combination of two conditions:

a) the creation or existence of a circuit - called a "fault loop" - to allow the fault current to flow.
The constitution of this fault loop depends on the earth connection diagram (TN, TT or IT)

This condition implies the implementation of protective conductors connecting the grounds of all
the electrical equipment supplied by the installation so as to constitute a fault loop.

b) breaking the fault current by an appropriate protection device within a time depending on
certain parameters such as the contact voltage to which a person may be subjected, the
probability of faults and contact with the faulty parts. The determination of the cut-out time is
based on the knowledge of the effects of electric current on the human body and the conditions
of external influences.

This condition implies the presence of an automatic cut-off device, the characteristics of which are
defined according to the diagram of the TT, TN or IT earth connections.

If specified, additional protection against direct contact is provided by a differential-residual current

VS device rated at most equal to 30 mA in accordance with 415.1.

411.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact

Electrical equipment must be covered by one of the protection provisions given inAnnex A.

411.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact

411.3.1 Protection links

411.3.1.1 Main equipotential bonding

In each building, the main protective conductor, the main earth terminal and the following
conductive elements must be connected to the main equipotential bonding:

- pipes of metal, for example water, gas, central heating and air conditioning pipes;

- metal elements of construction and reinforcement of reinforced concrete;

- metallic sheaths or braids for communication cables.

When such conductive elements originate from outside the building, they should be connected to
the main equipotential bonding as close as possible to their point of entry into the building.

- 68 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

The conductors of the main equipotential bonding must meet the requirements of part 5-54.

The main equipotential bonding makes it possible in particular to prevent a conductive element from
propagating a potential either with respect to the earth resulting from a fault of external origin to the
building, or the potential of the distant earth.

411.3.1.2 Earthing of the masses

VS The masses must be connected to a protective conductor according to the particular conditions of the
various earth connection diagrams as specified in 411.4 To 411.6.

The simultaneously accessible masses must be connected to the same earth.

NOTE - For grounding arrangements and protective conductors, see part 5-54.

411.3.2 Automatic power cut

411.3.2.1 With the exception of the case indicated in 411.3.2.5, a protection device must
automatically separate the circuit or equipment concerned from the power supply in the event of a
fault between an active part and a protective earth or conductor in the circuit or equipment, within a
maximum time given in 411.3.2.2 Where 411.3.2.3.

NOTES -
1 - Lower breaking time and voltage values may be prescribed for particular installations or premises in accordance with the
corresponding articles of the part 7.
2 - In the IT diagram, automatic shutdown is not generally prescribed during a first fault (see
411.6.1).

411.3.2.2 According to the nominal voltage between phase and neutral U0, the maximum cut-off time
from table 41A must be applied to all terminal circuits.

Table 41A - Maximum breaking time (in seconds) for terminal circuits
50 V < U0 ≤ 120 V 120 V < U0 ≤ 230 V 230 V < U0 ≤ 400 V U0 > 400 V
Cut-off time AC continuous AC continuous AC continuous Continuous alternative
(s)
TN or IT scheme 0.8 5 0.4 5 0.2 0.4 0.1 0.1
TT scheme 0.3 5 0.2 0.4 0.07 0.2 0.04 0.1

NOTE - Smooth direct current is conventionally defined by a ripple rate not greater than 10% rms value; the maximum peak value
is not more than 140 V for a nominal voltage of 120 V in smooth direct current and 70 V for a nominal voltage of 60 V in smooth
direct current.

These times are derived from a curve defining the breaking time of the protection device as a function
of the presumed contact voltage. This curve was established taking into account the international
studies on the effects of electric current on the human body collected in the UTE C 15-110 guide.

The above breaking times are satisfied in particular by differential devices not deliberately delayed or,
when U0 is less than or equal to 230 V, type S.
In practice, the breaking times of the protection devices are only to be taken into consideration if
these devices are fuses or circuit breakers whose tripping is delayed. When protection is provided by
other types of circuit breakers, it suffices to check that the fault current is at least equal to the
smallest current ensuring instantaneous operation of the circuit breaker.

The breaking times in the TT scheme are lower than in the TN or IT scheme, the contact voltages
assumed in this scheme being able to be close to the phase-to-neutral voltage U0.

VS 411.3.2.3 A conventional cut-out time of not more than 5 s is allowed for distribution circuits.

However, it is recommended to achieve the selectivity of the protections in the shortest time
compatible with normal use.

- 69 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS
411.3.2.4 (available)

411.3.2.5 If the automatic shutdown in accordance with 411.3.2.1 cannot be completed within the
prescribed time 411.3.2.2 Where 411.3.2.3 neither by an overcurrent protection device, nor by an RCD,
an additional equipotential bonding must be provided in accordance with 415.2.

411.3.3 Supplementary protection

In alternating current, the terminal circuits must be provided with additional protection by a
differential-residual current differential device rated at most equal to 30 mA in accordance with 415.1
when they feed:

- socket outlets with a rated current not exceeding 32 A;

- socket outlets installed in rooms or locations in the AD4 external influence class, regardless of
their rated current;
- socket outlets in temporary installations, such as worksite installations, whatever their rated current.

Other situations where the use of residual current devices (RCDs) with a rated current not exceeding
30 mA is prescribed, are indicated in the title 7.
NOTE - If an installation is planned for the use of portable equipment outdoors, it is recommended that one or two outlets be
installed outdoors.

The use of high sensitivity RCDs is particularly justified to ensure the protection of flexible cables
supplying mobile or portable devices, the wear or aging of these cables which could lead to the
deterioration of the insulation or the rupture of the protective conductor, without such faults being
detected.
This provision does not apply to sockets provided by manufacturers on machines bearing the CE
marking, as the European Machinery Directive does not provide for this requirement. The Ministry
responsible for labor considers that, in this case, the use of such sockets should be reserved, under
the responsibility of the head of the establishment, to personnel who have received training and
operating instructions.

411.4 TN diagram
The creation of a TN diagram in an installation supplied by the public low-voltage distribution
network is dealt with in annex D.

VS 411.4.1 The earths of the installation must be connected by protective conductors to the main earth
terminal of the installation, which must be connected to the earthed power point.

The point of the power supply that is grounded is usually the neutral point. If the neutral point is not
available, or is not accessible, a phase conductor must be earthed. Under no circumstances may the
phase conductor serve as a protective conductor (see 411.4.2).

NOTES -
1 - If there are effective earthing possibilities, it is recommended to connect the protective conductor to it at as many points as
possible. Multiple earthing, at regularly distributed points, may be necessary to ensure that the potential of the protective
conductor remains, in the event of a fault, as close as possible to that of the earth.

In large buildings, such as tall buildings, additional grounding of protective conductors is not possible for practical reasons.
Equipotential bonds between protective conductors and conductive elements have, however, a similar function in such cases.

2 - For the same reason, it is recommended to connect the protective conductors to the earth at their point of entry into a
building or establishment.
The TN scheme can be:
TN-C - Neutral conductor and protective conductor combined, TN-S -
Neutral conductor and separate protective conductor,
TN-CS - Neutral conductor and protective conductor combined in one part of the installation and separate in the rest of the
installation.

- 70 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS The two TN-C and TN-S diagrams can be used in the same installation without implementing galvanic
isolation, provided that the TN-C diagram is used upstream of the TN-S diagram (TN-CS diagram).

L2 L2
L1 L1
L3 L3
NOT
PEN
PE

If
Fault
If
Fault

RB RB

Figure 411A - Fault loops in TN-C and TN-S diagrams

The fault loop is made up exclusively of galvanic elements because it only includes active conductors
and protective conductors. The free phase-to-ground fault current is therefore a short-circuit current.

However, certain power supply conditions can lead to phase-neutral fault loop impedance values
that are too high to allow the application of the TN scheme. This may be the case, for example, when
star-star transformers are used, because of the high value of their zero sequence impedance.
(1)

The use of this measure in installations supplied directly by a public low-voltage distribution network
is subject to the authorization of the electrical energy distributor, since the effectiveness of this
protection measure may not be compatible with the operating conditions of its network (see annex D
).

411.4.2 In fixed installations, a single conductor may be used both as a protective conductor and as a
VS
neutral conductor (PEN conductor), provided that the requirements of 543.4 are respected. The PEN
conductor must not be cut or cut.

The installation is carried out in such a way as to avoid any risk of the PEN conductor breaking; in
particular, it is necessary to give this conductor a sufficient section from the point of view of
mechanical resistance, to make it out of a material resistant to corrosion and to avoid overhead lines
exposed to mechanical risks.

Flexible cables used as mobile conduits must have a protective conductor separate from the neutral
conductor.

The socket-outlets supplied by a pipe comprising a PEN conductor have, in addition to the phase
contacts, a contact for the neutral conductor and an earth contact, the connection between the
protective conductor and the neutral conductor being made in the basement.

VS 411.4.3 The characteristics of the protection devices (see 411.4.4) and the circuit impedances must be
such that the fault current is greater than or equal to the current ITo :

Uo / Zs ≥ ITo

(1) See appendix to part 3 of standard NF C 13-200

- 71 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

or

Zs is the impedance, in ohms, of the fault loop comprising the source, the conductor
active up to the fault point and the protective conductor between the fault point and the
source.
ITo is the current ensuring the operation of the automatic cut-off device in
the time defined in 411.3.2.2 and 411.3.2.3. In alternating current, if the protection device is a
differential device, this current is the rated differential-residual current of this device.

Uo is the nominal voltage between phase and neutral, rms value in alternating current or
smooth in direct current.

If the above relation cannot be satisfied, apply 411.3.2.5.

The protection conditions can only be determined by calculation if the protective conductor - PEN in
the TN-C diagram and PE in the TN-S diagram - is located throughout the installation near the
conductors. assets of the corresponding circuit without the interposition of ferromagnetic elements.

Indeed, the removal of the protective conductor and / or the interposition of ferromagnetic elements
significantly increases the value of the impedance of the fault loop, without this value being able to be
predetermined. This is the case if the path of the fault current consists of metal frames.

In addition, he is recalled (see part 4-44) that the separate routing of the protective conductor and
active conductors leads, in the event of a fault, to disturbing electromagnetic radiation in installations
comprising sensitive equipment.

VS 411.4.4 In the TN scheme, the following protection devices can be used for protection against
indirect contact:
- over-current protection devices;
- differential-residual current protection devices
NOTE - The circuit is also protected by an overcurrent protection device in accordance withpart 4-43.

A differential current device must not be used in a TN-C scheme.

When a differential-residual current protection device is used in a TN-CS scheme, a PEN conductor
must not be used downstream. The protective conductor to the PEN conductor must be connected
upstream of the differential-residual current protection device.

NOTE - If discrimination between RCDs is necessary, see 535.4.

411.5 TT diagram
411.5.1 All the masses protected by the same protection device must be connected to protective
conductors connected to the same earth. If several protective devices are mounted in series, this
requirement applies separately to all masses protected by the same device.

Usually, the point of the power supply that is grounded is the neutral point. If the neutral does not
exist or is not accessible, an active conductor must be earthed.

Installations supplied directly by a public low-voltage distribution network are carried out according
to the TT scheme. However, it is possible to install a TN system according to the indications inAnnex D
.

- 72 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41
L1
VS L2
L3
NOT

Mass

Fault

PE

RB R TO
If

Figure 411B - Fault loop in TT diagram

The fault loop impedance is that of the loop made up of the phase conductor, the protective
conductor ensuring the connection of the earth to the earth connection of the earths, the earth
connection of the earths, the earth connection of the neutral and the secondary winding of the power
supply transformer. In general, the sum of the resistances of the earth connections of the masses and
of the neutral point (RTO + RB) is preponderant over the impedance of the other elements of the loop,
so that the total impedance of the loop differs little from the sum (RTO + RB). The impedance of this
fault loop therefore limits the value of the fault current.

When the earth connections of the neutral and the masses are the same or interconnected, the
diagram remains a TT diagram if all the conditions of the TN diagram are not respected (see 411.4),
but the phase-to-ground fault current is a short-circuit current as in the TN-S scheme and, in this case,
the section of the protective conductors is calculated as in the TN-S scheme.

In practice, the TT scheme is not used in direct current.

411.5.2 In the TT system, the protection devices are differential devices

The neutral conductor must not be connected to earth downstream of a differential device.
The previous edition of standard NF C 15-100 provided for the possibility of using protection devices
against overcurrents, while explaining in the comments that this type of protection was generally not
suitable. The introduction into this standard of maximum breaking times for the TT system (see
411.3.2.2) made this mode of protection definitively impossible, the operation in the maximum time
of the overcurrent protection devices almost systematically leading to earth connection values of
less than 1 ohm, therefore very difficult to achieve and not measurable.

VS 411.5.3 In alternating current, the following condition must be satisfied:

RTO x I∆not ≤ 50 V
or

RTO is the resistance of the earth electrode of the masses

I∆not
is the rated differential-residual current of the protective device

NOTE - If discrimination between RCDs is necessary, see 535.4.

When several differential devices are used to protect masses connected to the same earth electrode,
the value of I∆not to consider is the biggest
differential-residual current of the devices concerned.
- 73 - 2002
Translated from French to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.com

NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

This condition determines the maximum value of the resistance of the earth electrode according to
the operating characteristics of the automatic cut-off devices.

For the application of the condition, we can take into consideration the impedance of the fault loop
instead of the resistance RTO of the earth connection of the masses.

This practice, which goes in the direction of safety, leads to requirements which are not very different
from those based on the resistance of the earth connection of the masses, since this resistance
generally constitutes the most important part of the impedance of the loop. default. In addition, it is
most often this condition which is effectively verified, in particular when it is not possible, if not very
difficult, to measure the resistance of the earth electrode of the masses, whereas it is possible to
measure the impedance of the fault loop by a simple method.

The conditions of use of differential devices are indicated in 531.2.

VS 411.6 IT diagram

411.6.1 In the IT diagram, the installation must be isolated from the earth or connected to the earth
through an impedance of sufficiently high value. This connection is made either at the neutral point
of the installation, or failing that at an artificial neutral point which can be connected directly to earth
if the corresponding zero sequence impedance has a sufficient value.

When no neutral point exists, a phase conductor can be connected to earth through an impedance.

In the event of an insulation fault on the same active conductor, the fault current is low and the
automatic cut-out complies with 411.3.2 is not imperative if the condition of
411.6.2 is satisfied. However, measures must be taken to avoid a risk of a dangerous
pathophysiological effect for a person in contact with simultaneously accessible conductive parts in
the event of two simultaneous faults involving two different active conductors.

NOTE - In order to reduce overvoltages and dampen oscillations, grounding through impedance or artificial neutral point may be
necessary; their characteristics should be appropriate to those of the installation. In general, the value of the impedance is taken
in the order of 4 to 6 times the phase-to-neutral voltage of the installation, for example in the order of 1000 ohms for 230/400 V
installations at industrial frequency.

L1
L2
L3

the
f

C3 C2 C1
PE

R TO

the
f

Figure 411C - First fault loop in IT circuit isolated from earth

- 74 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

When the installation is isolated from the earth, the first fault current is closed by the capacities of the
other two phases with respect to the earth.
L1
VS L2
NOT
L3

the
f
the
f

C3 C2 C1
Zs PE

RB R TO

the
f

Figure 411D - First fault loop in IT diagram with neutral connected to earth
by an impedance

When the installation is connected to earth by an impedance, the intensity of the first fault current is
limited by the value of the impedance resulting from the parallel connection of Zs and the capacities of
the other two phases with respect to the earth.

VS 411.6.2 The masses must be connected to the earth, either individually, or in groups or together.

NOTE - In large buildings, such as tall buildings, additional grounding of protective conductors is not possible for practical
reasons. Equipotential bonds between protective conductors and conductive elements have, however, a similar function in such
cases.

In addition, the following condition must be fulfilled:

For AC networks RTO x If ≤ 50 V

For DC networks RTO x If ≤ 120 V

or

RTO is the grounding resistance of the masses.

If is the fault current in the event of a first frank fault of low impedance between a
phase conductor and a ground. The value ofIf takes into account the leakage currents and the
overall earth impedance of the electrical installation.

Compliance with the condition guarantees that when a first insulation fault appears, no dangerous
contact voltage appears in the installation.

This makes it possible to avoid any shutdown on the first fault and to continue operating the
installation. For this possibility to be valid, it is important that the fault be quickly identified and
eliminated.

- 75 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS 411.6.3 A permanent insulation monitor must be provided to indicate the appearance of a first fault of
an active part to the ground or to the earth. This device must activate an audible signal or a visual
signal.

If both audible and visual signals exist, it is allowed to cancel the audible signal, but the visual signal
must persist as long as the fault exists.

The conditions relating to the choice and implementation of permanent insulation monitors are given
in 532.4.

VS 411.6.4 After the appearance of a first fault, the conditions for automatically cutting off the power
supply at the second fault must be as follows:

a) When the masses are interconnected by a protective conductor, and collectively earthed, the
conditions of the TN diagram apply and the following condition must be satisfied when the
neutral is not distributed in the AC networks and in direct current networks where the middle
conductor is not distributed:

0.5 U / Zs ≥ ITo

or, when the neutral or the middle conductor is distributed:

0.5 Uo / Z 's ≥ ITo

or
Uo is the nominal voltage between phase and neutral, rms value in alternating current or
smooth direct current
U is the voltage between phases, rms value in alternating current or smooth in direct current

ZS is the impedance of the fault loop made up of the phase conductor and the protective
conductor of the circuit
Z 'S is the impedance of the fault loop made up of the neutral conductor and the protective
conductor of the circuit
ITo is the current ensuring the operation of the protection device over time t
prescribed in the table 41A.

b) When masses are earthed in groups or individually, the protection conditions are those of 411.5 as
for the TT diagram, with the exception of the second paragraph of 411.5.1 which does not apply.

NOTES -
1 - A differential-residual current device rated higher than 30 mA can protect only one circuit.

2 - If a differential device with a rated differential-residual current less than or equal to 30 mA is used under conditions a), it can
trip on the first fault.

The conditions for eliminating the double fault current depend on the situation of the earth
connections:
a) When in the same installation, all the masses are not connected to the same earth electrode,
protection is ensured, if two faults occur in different groups of interconnected masses, by
respecting the conditions of the TT diagram.

b) Within a group of interconnected grounds, protection is ensured, if two faults occur in this group,
by respecting the conditions of the TN diagram.

This is the case in an installation if all the masses, including those of the source or of the transformer
substation, are connected to the same earth electrode.

- 76 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

Double fault current (Ifab)

0

ZO ZO
L1

L2

L3

PE

m1 Z To Z To Ifab Zb m2 Z f

Ifab : double fault current

Figure 411E - Double fault loop in IT diagram when the grounds are connected
to the same earth

The figure applies whether the IT diagram is isolated from the earth or connected to the earth by an
impedance.

If the first fault is not eliminated and a second insulation fault occurs affecting another active
conductor, a double fault current, which is a short-circuit current between phases (or between phase
and neutral), will establish itself, but the intensity of which is clearly less than a short-circuit current in
a circuit, because it involves two circuits as shown in the figure.

The determination of the protection conditions by calculation is only possible if the protective
conductor is located throughout the installation near the active conductors of the corresponding
circuit without the interposition of ferromagnetic elements.

Indeed, the removal of the protective conductor and / or the interposition of ferromagnetic elements
significantly increases the value of the impedance of the fault loop, without this value being able to be
predetermined. This is the case if the fault current path consists only of metal frames.

VS 411.6.5 In the IT system, the following control and protection devices can be used:

- permanent isolation monitors;

- fault finding devices;
- over-current protection devices;
- differential-residual current protection devices.

The conditions to be met by the protective devices are defined by article 531.

- 77 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

411.7 Very Low Functional Voltage (TBTF)

VS
411.7.1 General
When, for functional reasons, use is made of a nominal voltage not exceeding 50 V rms in alternating
current or 120 V in smooth direct current, but all the requirements of 411.4 related to SELV or PELV
are not complied with, and when SELV or PELV is not required, the additional protective measures
described in 411.7.2 and 411.7.3 must be taken to ensure both protection against direct contact as
protection against indirect contact. This combination of measures is called TBTF.

NOTE - Such conditions may, for example, be encountered when the circuit includes equipment (transformers, relays, impulse
switches, contactors) which does not have sufficient insulation compared to higher voltage circuits.

411.7.2 Requirements for protection against direct contactProtection

against direct contact must be ensured:
- either by means of insulation in accordance withannex A.1 corresponding to the minimum test
voltage required for the primary circuit;
- either by means of barriers or envelopes satisfying the conditions of theannex A.2.

411.7.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact

The earths of TBTF equipment must be connected to the protective conductor of the primary circuit.

In the event of an insulation fault between the primary and secondary circuits, protection is provided
by the primary circuit protection measure, but only in the event of a second fault in the secondary
circuit.

411.7.4 Sources
VS
The source of a TBTF circuit is either a transformer with simple separation between windings, or a
source conforming to 414.3.

411.7.5 Power outlets

Sockets for TBTF circuits must meet the following requirements:
- the plugs must not be able to enter the sockets supplied with other voltages;
- the sockets must prevent the insertion of plugs designed for other voltages;
- the bases must have a protective contact.

412 Protective measure by double or reinforced insulation

412.1 General
412.1.1 Double or reinforced insulation is a protective measure in which:
- protection against direct contact is provided by primary insulation and protection against indirect
contact is provided by additional insulation, or
- protection against direct contact and against indirect contact is provided by reinforced insulation
between the active parts and the accessible parts.

NOTE - This measure is intended to prevent the appearance of dangerous voltages on accessible parts of electrical equipment in
the event of a fault in the main insulation.

Class II is recognized by the standards relating to a certain number of equipment and in particular
household electrical appliances, portable hand tools, small transformers (safety, separation, etc.).

- 78 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

The standard relating to "series or derived from series assemblies" (previously called factory fitted
switchgear assemblies) (2) recognizes, under the term "fully insulated equipment", equipment
presenting a safety equivalent to class II.

Subclause 412.2.2 describes the measures to be taken when installing equipment to achieve
protection by insulation equivalent to class II.

VS 412.1.2 The protection measure by double or reinforced insulation is applicable in all situations,
unless limitations given in the part 7.

412.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact and for protection against indirect contact

412.2.1 Protection must be ensured by the use of:

a) electrical equipment of the following types having undergone type tests and having been marked
according to the rules applicable to them:
- equipment with double or reinforced insulation (class II equipment);
(2)
- series assemblies and series derivatives with total insulation.
NOTE - These materials are marked with the symbol

b) conduits made of cables considered to be of Class II;

Cables not having any metallic coating and used at a voltage at most equal to half of their rated
voltage are considered to be of class II. These cables are mentioned in the table52A.

A cable comprising a protective conductor can be considered as a class II cable, provided that the
protective conductor is insulated under the same conditions as the live conductors. This condition
complies with the rule of this paragraph concerning protection by additional insulation during
installation, for the crossing of enclosures by protective conductors.

VS c) additional insulation covering electrical equipment having only one main insulation and fitted
during the electrical installation; it ensures a safety equivalent to that of equipment conforming
to 412.2.1 and fulfills the conditions specified in412.2.2.

For example, a pipe made up of insulated conductors laid under insulating conduits or insulating
troughs may be considered as satisfying this protective measure.

VS d) reinforced insulation covering the bare active parts and fitted during the electrical installation; it
ensures safety equivalent to that of electrical equipment conforming to 412.2.1 and fulfills the
conditions specified in subparagraphs 412.2.2 and412.2.3 ; such insulation is only allowed when
construction reasons do not allow the realization of double insulation.

412.2.2 Envelopes
The electrical equipment being in working order, all the conductive parts separated from the active
parts by a main insulation only must be enclosed in an insulating enclosure having at least the
degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.

(2) NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421)

- 79 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS The insulating casing must not be crossed by conductive parts liable to propagate a potential. The
enclosure must not include screws made of insulating material, the replacement of which by a metal
screw could compromise the insulation provided by the enclosure.

NOTE - When it is imperative that the insulating enclosure is crossed by mechanical connections (for example control units of
built-in devices), these must be arranged in such a way that protection against electric shock is not compromised. .

When the enclosure has doors or lids which can be opened without the aid of a tool or a key, all
conductive parts which are accessible when the door or the lid is open must be protected by an
insulating barrier having at the minus the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB, so as to prevent
people from accidentally touching these parts. This insulating barrier must only be removable with a
tool.

The protective barrier against accidental contact must provide insulation equivalent to double
insulation.

VS The conductive parts enclosed in an insulating enclosure must not be connected to a protective
conductor. However, arrangements can be made for the connection of protective conductors which
necessarily pass through the enclosure to connect other electrical equipment whose power supply
circuit passes through the enclosure. Within the enclosure, such conductors and their terminals must
be insulated as live parts, and the terminals must be appropriately marked.

Earthing of intermediate parts may be necessary, for example to prevent unwanted operation.

The accessible conductive parts and the intermediate parts must not be connected to a protective
VS
conductor unless this is provided for by the construction rules of the corresponding equipment.

The enclosure must not adversely affect the operating conditions of the equipment thus protected.

412.2.3 The installation of the materials listed in 412.1.1 (fixing, connecting the conductors, etc.) must
be carried out in such a way as not to harm the protection provided in accordance with the
construction rules for this equipment.

412.2.4 A circuit supplying class II equipment must include a protective conductor throughout its
journey.

NOTE - This requirement is intended to take into account the replacement by the user of class II equipment by class I equipment.

413 Protective measure by electrical separation

413.1 General

413.1.1 Electrical separation is a protective measure in which:

- protection against direct contact is ensured either by main insulation of the active parts, or by
barriers or enclosures, in accordance with'Annex A ; and
- protection against indirect contact is provided by a protective separation between the separate
circuit and the other circuits.

- 80 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS NOTE - The protection measure by electrical separation consists in separating the user circuit from the power supply installation
in such a way that in the event of an insulation fault in the separate circuit, no dangerous contact voltage can appear.

413.1.2 The measure of protection by electrical separation is applicable in all situations, but is limited
to the supply of a single user equipment from a separate source isolated from the earth.

This protection measure is not intended to supply devices with a low level of insulation.

The safety of this measurement depends on the good insulation of the circuits thus separated and the state of the
insulation must be able to be verified by a simple visual examination.

VS 413.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact

413.2.1 All electrical equipment must be covered by one of the provisions for protection against direct
contact with theAnnex A or the protective measure given in 412.

413.2.2 The provision for protection against direct contact relating to the insulation of live parts (A.1
of Annex A) or by barriers or envelopes (A.2 of Annex A) is applicable regardless of the conditions of
external influences.

413.2.3 If more than one user equipment is supplied by a separate source isolated from the earth, the
requirements of 411.6.1 (IT scheme) orannex C3 must be satisfied.

413.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact

413.3.1 Protection by electrical separation must be ensured in accordance with the requirements set
out in sub-paragraphs 413.3.2 To 413.3.6.

413.3.2 The circuit must be supplied by means of a source of separation, that is to say:

- an isolating transformer, or
- a current source providing safety equivalent to that of the isolation transformer specified above,
for example a motor-generator having windings providing equivalent separation.

The standard relating to isolating transformers to be considered for the application of the rule set out
in 511.2 is the standard NF EN 61558-2-4 (C 52-558-2-4).
The use of transformers with equivalent safety is necessary for devices whose characteristics (power,
etc.) are outside the scope of the aforementioned standard.

The current source ensuring equivalent safety can be obtained by applying construction rules similar
to those for isolating transformers.
Conditions relating to motor-generator units are under study. The target groups are those with an
electric motor.

VS Mobile separation sources connected to a power supply network must be chosen or installed in
accordance with the requirements of article 412.

Fixed sources of separation must be:

- either chosen or installed in accordance with the requirements of article 412 ;
- either such that the secondary circuit is separated from the primary circuit and from the
enclosure by an insulation satisfying the conditions of the article 412 ; if such a source supplies
several devices, the masses of these must not be connected to the metal casing of the source.

- 81 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS 413.3.3 The active parts of the separate circuit must not have any point in common with another
circuit nor any point connected to the earth.

The measures taken must ensure a separation at least equivalent to that which exists between the
primary and secondary circuits of a circuit separation transformer.

NOTE - In particular, if an auxiliary circuit is a separate circuit, electrical separation is necessary between the power parts and the
auxiliary parts of electrical equipment such as relays, contactors, control auxiliaries.

413.3.4 Flexible cables must be visible along their entire length, which may suffer mechanical
damage.

413.3.5 It is recommended to use a dedicated pipe for the separate circuit. If it is not possible to
avoid using the conductors of the same pipe for the separate circuit and other circuits, use must be
made of multi-conductor cables without any metallic coating or of insulated conductors laid in trunks
or insulating conduits, under reserve that these cables and conductors are specified for a voltage at
least equal to the highest voltage brought into play and that each circuit is protected against
overcurrents.

The protection of circuits against overloads at their origin meets the conditions of 434.2.

413.3.6 The grounds of the separate circuit must not be connected either to a protective conductor or
VS to the grounds of other circuits.

NOTE - If the grounds of the separate circuit are likely to come into contact, either de facto or accidentally, with grounds of other
circuits, the safety of persons no longer rests on the sole measure of protection by electrical separation, but on the protective
measures to which these latter masses are subject.

414 Very low voltage protection measure

414.1 General
414.1.1 Very low voltage protection is a protection measure made up of two different types of very
low voltage circuits:
- Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV, circuits not connected to earth),
- Very Low Voltage Protection (PELV, circuits connected to earth),

for which protection is provided by:

- a limitation of the SELV or PELV voltage to 50 V in alternating current and 120 V in direct current;

- protective separation between SELV or PELV circuits and all other circuits other than SELV or PELV,
and main insulation between SELV and PELV circuits,

For SELV circuits only, main insulation is provided between the SELV circuit and earth.

414.1.2 The use of SELV or PELV is considered a protective measure in all situations.

NOTE - In some cases, the part 7 limits the value of the extra low voltage to values less than 50 V in alternating current or 120 V
in smooth direct current.

- 82 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

The various very low voltages are designated by the following abbreviations:

- SELV: very low safety voltage;

- PELV: safety very low voltage having a point of the secondary circuit connected to earth but
satisfying all the other conditions of the SELV;
- TBTF: very low functional voltage, i.e. very low voltage that does not comply with either the SELV
rules or the PELV rules (see 411.7).

The equipment used in SELV and PELV circuits can be of class III.

VS 414.2 Requirements for protection against direct contact and for protection against indirect
contact

Protection against direct contact and protection against indirect contact for circuits whose nominal
voltage cannot exceed 50 V in alternating current and 120 V in direct current, are considered to be
ensured when:
- the power source is a source meeting the terms of paragraph 414.3,
- all the conditions of the paragraph 414.4 are met.

NOTES -
1 - When the circuit is supplied from a higher voltage circuit through other equipment, such as autotransformers,
potentiometers, semiconductor devices, etc., the secondary circuit thus formed is considered to be part primary circuit and
must be included in the protection measure for this circuit.

2 - If the circuit is supplied by a higher voltage circuit having only a simple separation between the very low voltage circuit and
the higher voltage circuit and not meeting the requirements relating to SELV or PELV sources of 414.3, the prescriptions for
TBTF apply, see 411.7.
3 - The direct voltages of ELV circuits generated by a semiconductor converter (see NF EN 61146-2 [C 97-186]) require an internal
alternating current circuit to supply the rectifier. This internal AC voltage may be higher than the DC voltage for physical
reasons. This internal AC circuit is not considered to be a higher voltage circuit within the meaning of this paragraph. Between
the internal circuits and an external circuit with higher voltage, a protective separation in accordance with 3.24 of standard NF
EN 61140 (C 20-030) is required.

4 - In direct current networks with batteries, the charge and float voltages may exceed the nominal voltage, depending on the
type of battery. This does not require additional protective measures. It is recommended that the charging voltage does not
exceed a maximum value of 75 V in alternating current and 150 V in direct current.

The actual value of the voltage may differ from the nominal value within the accepted tolerance limits,
generally + 10%.

When very low voltage circuits are supplied with alternating current, the voltage in these circuits must
not be greater, in no-load operation, than 50 volts when the voltage of the primary circuit of the
safety source is at its nominal value.

VS 414.3 Sources for SELV and PELV

These sources are:

414.3.1 A safety transformer conforming to NF EN 61558-2-6 (C 52-558-2-6).

414.3.2 A current source ensuring a degree of safety equivalent to that of a safety transformer
described in 414.3.1 (for example motor-generator with windings having an equivalent separation).

- 83 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS 414.3.3 An electrochemical source (batteries or accumulators) or another source which does not
depend on higher voltage circuits (for example thermal engine generator group).

414.3.4 Some electronic devices comply with the appropriate standards, in which measures have
been taken to ensure that, even in the event of an internal fault of this device, the voltage at the
output terminals cannot be higher than the limits indicated in 414.2. Higher values may be allowed
if, in the event of contact, direct or indirect, the voltage at the output terminals is immediately
reduced to or below these limits.

NOTES -
1 - Insulation test equipment are examples of such devices.
2 - When the voltage at the output terminals is higher, compliance with this provision can be considered satisfied if the voltage
at the output terminals is within the limits specified in 414.2when measured with a voltmeter having an internal resistance of at
least 3000 ohms.

414.3.5 Mobile sources, such as safety transformers or motor-generator sets, must be chosen or
installed in accordance with the prescriptions of the protection measure by using class II equipment
or by equivalent insulation (see article 412).

The standards relating to safety transformers and electronic converters to be considered for the
application of the rule set out in 511.2 are respectively standards NF EN 61558-1 (C 52-558-1) and NF
EN 61046 (C 71-240).

The use of transformers and converters with equivalent safety is necessary for devices whose
characteristics (power, primary voltage) are outside the scope of the aforementioned standards.

VS 414.4 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits

414.4.1 SELV and PELV circuits must have:

- a protective separation between their active parts and those of other circuits, with the exception
of active parts of other SELV or PELV circuits, consisting of double insulation or reinforced
insulation sized for the highest voltage or by main insulation and a protective shield sized for the
highest voltage present;

- main insulation between their active parts and the active parts of other SELV or PELV circuits.

NOTE - Earthing of PELV circuits can be achieved by a suitable earth connection in the source itself.

SELV circuits must have primary insulation between their live parts and earth.

414.4.2 The protection separation between the pipes of the SELV and PELV circuits and the active
parts of the other circuits can be achieved by one of the following provisions:

- the conductors of the SELV and PELV circuits are provided, in addition to their main insulation,
with a non-metallic sheath or envelope;
- the conductors of the SELV and PELV circuits are separated from the conductors at different
voltages by a metal screen connected to the earth or by a metal sheath connected to the earth;

- 84 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

- the conductors of the SELV and PELV circuits belong to a multi-conductor cable or to a group of
VS
conductors which may contain circuits at different voltages provided that they are isolated, either
individually or collectively, for the highest voltage involved;

- a physical separation is achieved.

The diagrams below illustrate the various arrangements provided for above:

The conductors of the SELV or PELV circuit are provided, in addition to their
main insulation, with a non-metallic sheath.

A grounded metal screen separates the SELV or PELV circuits from any other
circuit.

The SELV or PELV circuit is part of a multi-conductor cable containing other

circuits, the conductors of the SELV or PELV circuit being insulated for the
highest voltage involved in the circuits of the cable.

The SELV or PELV circuit is physically separated from any other circuit.

designates the SELV or PELV circuit.

designates another circuit.

Figure 414A - Neighborhood rules between an LV circuit and a SELV or PELV circuit

414.4.3 Sockets for SELV and PELV circuits must meet the following requirements:
VS

- the plugs must not be able to enter the sockets supplied with other voltages;
- the sockets must prevent the insertion of plugs designed for other voltages;
- SELV sockets must not have a protective contact.

414.4.4 The active parts of SELV circuits must not be electrically connected to the earth, nor to live
parts, nor to protective conductors belonging to other circuits.

414.4.5 The masses must not be intentionally connected to the earth, or to protective conductors or
the masses of other circuits.

NOTE - If the masses of SELV circuits are liable to come into contact, either in fact or accidentally, with the masses of other
circuits, protection against electric shock is no longer based on the sole measure of protection by SELV, but on the protective
measures to which these latter masses are subject.

414.4.6 When the nominal voltage of the SELV circuit is greater than 25 V rms value in alternating
current or 60 V in smooth direct current, protection against direct contact must be ensured:

- either by insulation conforming to A.1 of Annex A ;

- either by barriers or envelopes conforming to A.2 of Annex A.

When the nominal voltage of the PELV circuit is greater than 12 V rms value in alternating current or
30 V in smooth direct current, protection against direct contact must be ensured:

- either by insulation conforming to A.1 of Annex A ;

- either by barriers or envelopes conforming to A.2 of Annex A.
- 85 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

In all other cases, protection against direct contact is not necessary.

Table 41B - Summary of protection against direct contact

AC voltage U ≤ 12 V 12 <U ≤ 25 25 <U ≤ 50

DC voltage U ≤ 30 V 30 <U ≤ 60 60 <U ≤ 120

SELV
Protection against Not necessary Not necessary Necessary
direct contacts

PELV
Protection against Not necessary Necessary Necessary
direct contacts

VS 415 Supplementary protection

415.1 Additional protection by differential-residual current devices

NOTE - This protective measure is only intended to supplement other protective measures against direct contact.

415.1.1 The use of differential-residual current devices, of which the value of the nominal operating
differential current is less than or equal to 30 mA, is recognized as an additional protective measure
in the event of failure of the protection arrangement against direct contact or in case of failure.
recklessness of users.

415.1.2 The use of such devices is not recognized as constituting in itself a complete protective
measure and does not in any way exempt the use of one of the protective measures set out in
paragraphs 411.1 To 411.4.

Experience has shown that conventional protective measures against direct contact, which are
preventive in nature, can occasionally prove to be faulty, due to lack of maintenance, normal or
abnormal wear of the insulation, or carelessness.

One way of eliminating part of the risk of accidents is to use a differential-residual current protection
device with rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA, intended to ensure the rapid
de-energization of the device. electrical installation, or the part of the installation concerned, as soon
as a very low earth fault current appears.

415.2 Additional equipotential bonding

VS
NOTES -
1 - The use of additional equipotential bonds does not dispense with the need to cut off the power supply for other reasons, such
as protection against fire, thermal constraints of equipment, etc.

2 - This additional equipotential bonding may involve part of the installation, a device or a location.

3 - Additional requirements may be necessary for special locations, see part 7.

415.2.1 The additional equipotential bonding must include all simultaneously accessible conductive
parts, whether these are the masses of fixed equipment or conductive elements, including, as far as
possible, the main reinforcements of reinforced concrete used in the construction of buildings. . To
this equipotential system must be connected the protective conductors of all equipment, including
those of the sockets.

- 86 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS 415.2.2 If there is any doubt as to the effectiveness of the additional equipotential bonding, it must
be checked by ensuring that the resistance R between any mass considered and any simultaneously
accessible conductive element fulfills the following condition:

50 V
R≤ in alternating current
ITo

120 V
R≤ in direct current
ITo
or

ITo is the operating current in 5 s at most for protective devices

against overcurrents.

- 87 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS Annex A - (normative) - Provisions for protection

against direct contact

NOTE - Provisions for protection against direct contact provide protection under normal conditions and are applied if specified as
part of the chosen protection measure.

A.1 Insulation of live parts

NOTE - The insulation is intended to prevent any contact with live parts of the electrical installation.

Live parts must be completely covered with insulation which can only be removed by destruction.

For equipment manufactured in the factory, the insulation must comply with the corresponding
requirements relating to this equipment.

For other materials, protection must be provided by insulation capable of withstanding, in a durable
manner, the stresses to which it may be subjected, such as mechanical, chemical, electrical and
thermal influences. Paints, varnishes, lacquers and the like are generally not considered to constitute
sufficient insulation within the framework of protection against direct contact.

A.2 Barriers or enclosures

NOTE - The barriers or enclosures are intended to prevent any contact with the active parts of the electrical installation.

A.2.1 The active parts must be placed inside enclosures or behind barriers with at least the degree of
protection IP2X or IPXXB; however, if larger openings occur during the replacement of parts such as
certain sockets, sockets or fuses, or if larger openings are necessary to allow the proper functioning
of the equipment in accordance with the rules applicable to such equipment:

- appropriate precautions must be taken to prevent people or livestock from accidentally touching
live parts, and
- care should be taken to ensure that, as far as possible, people are aware that parts accessible
through the opening are active parts and should not be touched intentionally.

- the opening should be as small as reasonable to meet the requirements for proper operation and
replacement of a component.

Protection against direct contact can be designated in the IP code by an additional letter which has
the following meaning, in accordance with standard NF EN 60529 (C 20-010) and product standards.

Additional letter Description of protection

TO Protection against access with the back of the hand

B Protection against access with a finger Protection
VS against access with a tool
D Protection against access with a wire

- 88 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

The additional letter is used only:

- if the actual protection against direct contact is higher than that indicated by the first
characteristic number (protection against the penetration of solid bodies) (example: IP2XC);

- or if only one protection against direct contact is mentioned, the first characteristic number being
replaced by the sign X (Example: IPXXB).
Openings with dimensions of less than 12 mm confer the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.
Openings larger than 12 mm can meet the IPXXB degree if the active parts cannot be reached by the
test finger.
Equipment not meeting these provisions must be protected by additional barriers or envelopes.

VS A.2.2 The upper surfaces of barriers or horizontal enclosures which are easily accessible must meet
at least the degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD.

By upper surfaces is meant the surfaces on which people normally circulate, such as floors, walkways
overhanging active parts (for example busbars).

For cabinet doors and panels, although accessible to unqualified persons, the degree of protection
IP4X or IPXXD is not imposed, but only IP2X or IPXXB, as persons cannot stand above them.

This provision is intended to guard against the dangers that may result from the accidental fall of a
tool (screwdriver), the metal part of which penetrates the mesh of a slatted floor.

This does not preclude the use of barriers with openings provided they are securely held and meet
the requirements of A.2.4.

VS A.2.3 Barriers and enclosures must be securely fastened and be of sufficient strength and durability
to maintain the required degrees of protection with sufficient separation from active parts under
known conditions of normal service, taking into account external influences .

A.2.4 When it is necessary to remove barriers, open envelopes or remove parts of envelopes, this
should only be possible:
- either using a wrench or a tool,
Examples of layout:
- screen whose removal requires the use of a key,
- casing requiring the help of a screwdriver to lever the opening.
However, this does not preclude the use of rapid closing devices provided, however, that the force
required for their opening requires significant manual action.

VS - either after de-energizing the active parts protected by these barriers or enclosures, the voltage
being able to be restored only after replacing the barriers or enclosures,

Example layout:
Locking of the door (s) with the power supply disconnecting device so that the door (s) can only be
opened if the disconnecting device is open and it is ci cannot be closed as long as the door (s)
remain open.

When the installation includes large capacity capacitors, their discharge must be ensured, if
necessary.
VS - or if a second barrier with at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB is fitted, which can only
be removed using a key or a tool and which prevents any contact with the active parts.

Example layout:
Shutter placed in front of the power pins of a withdrawable assembly.
- 89 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS Annex B - (normative) - Protective measures without protective provision

against indirect contact, subject to supervision
NOTES -
1 - The provisions for protection against direct contact provide protection under normal conditions and are applied if specified as
part of the chosen protection measure.
2 - The monitoring conditions under which the protective provisions of Annex B may apply as part of a protective measure are
given in 410.3.3.

B.1 Obstacles
NOTE - Obstacles are intended to prevent accidental contact with active parts, but not intentional contact by a deliberate attempt
to circumvent the obstacle.

B.1.1 Obstacles must prevent:

- either an unintentional physical approach to the active parts,
- or unintentional contact with active parts when working on live equipment during operation.

B.1.2 The obstacles can be dismantled without using a tool or a wrench; however, they must be
secured in such a way as to prevent unintentional removal.

Examples of such obstacles are guardrails (guardrails) or mesh panels.

As this protective measure does not provide complete protection against direct contact, its application
is limited in practice to electrical service rooms accessible only to persons authorized or accompanied
by an electrical safety supervisor, as specified in part 7.

VS B.2 Getting out of range by moving away

NOTE - Removal from range is only intended to prevent accidental contact with active parts.

B.2.1 Simultaneously accessible parts with different potentials must not be inside the touch-accessible
volume (abbreviated: accessibility volume).

NOTE - Two parts are considered to be simultaneously accessible if they are less than 2.50 m apart (see figure B1).

The distance of 2.50 meters must be increased according to the length of the conductive objects that
can be handled or transported to the corresponding premises. The floor is considered as one of the
simultaneously accessible parts unless it is insulating (235.2).

As this protective measure does not provide complete protection against direct contact, its application
is limited in practice to electrical service rooms accessible only to persons authorized or accompanied
by an electrical safety supervisor, as specified in part 7.

With regard to overhead power lines, paragraph 529.7 indicates the minimum distances to be
observed.

- 90 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

2.50
VS

0.75 m

Volume limit
accessibility
1.25 m

1.25 m

S surface likely to be occupied by people.

Figure B1 - Accessibility volume

B.2.2 When the space in which people normally stay and move around is limited in a horizontal
direction by an obstacle (for example guardrail, mesh panel) with a degree of protection lower than
IP2X or IPXXB, the accessibility volume starts from this obstacle. In vertical direction, the accessibility
volume is limited to 2.50 m from the surfaceS on which people stand or move around, without
taking into account intermediate obstacles with a degree of protection lower than IP2X or IPXXB.

NOTE - The distances of the accessibility volume assume direct contact with bare hands without any intermediary (eg tool or
ladder).

B.2.3 In locations where very long or bulky conductive objects are commonly handled, the distances
prescribed in paragraphs B.2.1 and B.2.2 shall be increased taking into account the dimensions of
these objects.

- 91 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS Annex C - (normative) - Protective measures in installations

under supervision
NOTES -
1 - The provisions for protection against indirect contact provide protection under fault conditions and are applied if specified as
part of the chosen protection measure.
2 - The monitoring conditions under which the protective measures of this appendix can be applied are given in 410.3.4.

C.1 Non-conductive premises or locations

NOTE - This protective measure is intended to prevent simultaneous contact with parts which may be brought to different
potentials upon failure of the main insulation.

C.1.1 The masses must be so arranged that, under normal conditions, people do not come into
simultaneous contact:
- either with two masses,
- either with a mass and any conductive element,
if these elements are likely to be at different potentials in the event of a fault in the main insulation of
the live parts.

C.1.2 In such rooms (or locations), no protective conductor must be provided.

C.1.3 The requirements of paragraph C.1.1 are considered to be fulfilled if the site has insulating
walls and an insulating floor and if one or more of the following conditions are met:

a) Respective distance between masses and conductive elements as well as masses between them.
This distance is considered sufficient if the distance between two elements is at least 2 m, this
distance can be reduced to 1.25 m outside the accessibility volume.

b) Interposition of effective obstacles between masses or between masses and conductive elements.
These obstacles are considered to be sufficiently effective if they bring the distance to be crossed
to the values indicated in point a). They should not be connected to the earth or to masses; as
far as possible, they should be of insulating material.

c) Insulation or isolated arrangement of conductive elements. The insulation must have sufficient
mechanical rigidity and be able to withstand a test voltage of at least 2000 V. The leakage current
must not exceed 1 mA under normal conditions of use.

C.1.4 The insulating walls and floors must present at each measurement point, under the conditions
of part 6, a resistance not less than:
- at 50 kΩ, if the nominal voltage of the installation is not more than 500 V, and
- at 100kΩ, if the nominal voltage of the installation is greater than 500 V.

NOTE - If the resistance is not greater than or equal at all points to the prescribed value, these walls and floors are considered to
be conductive elements from the point of view of protection against electric shock.

C.1.5 The measures taken must be durable and must not be capable of being rendered ineffective.
They must also ensure the protection of mobile equipment when its use is envisaged.

NOTES -
1 - Attention is drawn to the risk of subsequent introduction, into electrical installations not strictly supervised, of other parts
(for example class I mobile equipment or conductive elements, such as metal water pipes) liable to damage. 'annihilate
compliance with C.1.6.
2 - It is important to ensure that humidity does not risk compromising the insulation of the walls and floors.

- 92 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

VS C.1.6 Measures must be taken to prevent conductive elements from propagating potentials outside
the location considered.

C.2 Protection by local non-earthed equipotential bonds

NOTE - The creation of local equipotential bonds is intended to prevent the occurrence of dangerous contact voltages.

The application of this protective measure is limited in practice to certain small workstations where
other protective measures cannot be carried out.

VS C.2.1 Equipotential bonding conductors must connect all the masses and all the simultaneously
accessible conductive elements.

These connections are made using protective conductors meeting the same conditions as those
provided for additional equipotential bonding (see 544.2).
VS C.2.2 The local equipotential bonding thus produced must not be in connection with the earth either
directly or by means of masses or conductive elements.

NOTE - If this condition cannot be fulfilled, the protective measures by automatically cutting off the power supply must be
applied (see 411).

C.2.3 Arrangements must be made to ensure that people have access to the location in question
without being subject to a dangerous difference in potential. This applies in particular to the case
where a conductive floor, but isolated from the floor, is connected to the local equipotential bonding.

C.3 Electrical separation for supplying more than one user equipment

C.3.1 Protection by electrical separation for the supply of more than one equipment must be ensured
by complying with all the requirements of 413 and of C.3.

C.3.2 The grounds of the separate circuit must be connected to each other by insulated equipotential
bonding conductors not connected to the earth. Such conductors must not be connected either to
protective conductors, or to the grounds of other circuits, or to conductive elements.

NOTE - See the note by 413.3.6.

C.3.3 The socket-outlets must have an earth contact which must be connected to the equipotential
bonding conductor provided in C.3.2.

C.3.4 With the exception of those supplying Class II equipment, all flexible cables must include a
protective conductor used as an equipotential bonding conductor.

C.3.5 In the event of two clear faults involving two masses and supplied by two conductors of
different polarity, a protection device must ensure breaking within a time at most equal to that fixed
at the table 41A.

This provision is checked in case of doubt.

- 93 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

Annex D - (normative) - Compatibility between various connection diagrams to the

earth and their connection to the public distribution network

D.1 Compatibility rules

It is possible to supply power from the same transformer - or the same transformer station
- different installations carried out according to different earth connection diagrams, provided that
the following provisions are respected:
a) the installation diagrams are TT or TN exclusively;
b) each installation is correctly protected and carried out according to the rules applicable to the
corresponding diagram;
c) a main equipotential bonding is carried out in each building in accordance with sub-paragraph
411.3.1.1, the protective conductors of all the building installations are connected to this main
equipotential bonding;
d) the connection of the PEN conductor of any installation carried out according to the TN diagram to the
neutral point of the transformer, and to the main equipotential bonding is carried out downstream of
the general protection device of this installation;
e) the neutral point of the transformer, the substation grounds and the protective conductors of the
installations located in the same building are connected to the same earth electrode or to a set of
interconnected earth electrodes;
f) each installation has its own protective conductor to which the earths of the corresponding
installation are connected; when, in the same room, there are devices supplied by different
installations and simultaneously accessible, it is recommended that their grounds be connected by
an additional equipotential bonding.

The diagram in figure D1 illustrates these arrangements

THE
M1 M2

L1 L2 L3 NOT
P

NOT

DDR PE

Installation Installation
individual heating
(TT scheme) B
TO

PEN
PE

Transformer station XXXX

Collective installation
D (TN diagram)
X
X
X
X PEN

Main equipotential bonding

M

Taken from the ground

of the building

Figure D1 - Example of compatibility between a TT diagram and a TN diagram

- 94 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

MT Connection between the PEN conductor of the TN installation and the main equipotential
bonding of the building and the earth.
THE Additional equipotential bonding recommended if grounds M1 and M2 are simultaneously
accessible.
DR Individual installation circuit breaker A.
P Protection device for the bypass of the collective heating installation serving the same
rooms as those supplied by the individual installation A.
D Collective installation protection device made according to the TN diagram: this device can
be three-pole or four-pole.

These provisions allow the following to be supplied by a public distribution transformer:

- on the one hand, the individual electrical installations carried out according to the TT diagram and
supplied by the connection installations resulting from this transformer;
- on the other hand, the electrical installations of the General Services and collective electric
heating of the same buildings carried out according to the TN diagram, or a specific connection
coming directly from the public distribution station.

D.2 Connection of a TN-C and TN-S system installation to a public distribution network

Public distribution networks generally operate according to the TT scheme. Adaptation to the TN
system is only possible under certain conditions on part of the underground networks. Due to the
vulnerability of the neutral, it is totally excluded on overhead networks.

Consequently, before undertaking any study or realization of a connection of an installation in TN

system to a public low voltage distribution network, it is advisable to contact the distributor. If the
substation is located in the building to be connected, the substation grounds are connected to the
building earth.

In addition, the determination of the protection conditions requires knowledge of the maximum value
of the impedance of the source up to the point of delivery (resistance and reactance). These values,
expressed in ohms, are communicated by the distributor.

The neutral conductor must be connected to the main equipotential bonding at the origin of the
indoor installation. The earth is made by means of an excavation bottom loop or equivalent device, in
accordance with the provisions laid down.

- 95 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-41

Examples of connection of TN-C and TN-S system installations to a public distribution network are
given below.
Delivery point L1 L2 L3 N PE
Use in TNS scheme

L1 D
vs L1
L2 ( ) X
L2
NETWORK
L3
( ) X
L3
Zcc MAX PEN ( ) NOT
X
X

PE
NF C 14-100 NF C 15-100 THE P

(*)
OTHER PIPELINES

Main earth terminal

(*) Additional protective conductor

Smin = 25 mm² this conductor is connected to the
installation, as close as possible to the delivery
point, at a point permanently accessible to the
Full digging loop
customer

Figure D2 - Connection of an installation in a TN-S diagram to a network

public distribution

Use in TNC diagram Delivery point L1 L2 L3 PEN

L1 D
() vs
X
L2
NETWORK () X
L3
Zcc MAX PEN
() X

(*)

PE
NF C 14-100 NF C 15-100

OTHER PIPELINES THE P

Main earth terminal

(*) Additional protective conductor

Smin = 25 mm² this conductor is connected to the
installation, as close as possible to the delivery
point, at a point permanently accessible to the
Full digging loop
customer

Figure D3 - Connection of an installation in TN-C diagram to a network

public distribution

______________

- 96 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

Part 4-42 - Protection against fire, burns and explosion

421 General fire protection rules .......................................... .................. 98

422 Additional fire protection rules .......................................... ...... 99
423 Protection against the risk of burns ............................................ ......................... 104
424 Locations at risk of explosion (locations BE3) ........................................ .... 104

Annex - Reaction to fire - Conventional classifications ............................................ ........ 108

____________

- 97 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

H
421 General fire protection rules

421.1 Electrical equipment must not present a fire hazard for neighboring materials.

The relevant manufacturer's instructions must be observed in addition to the requirements of this standard.

Protection against overcurrents is covered by the part 4-43.

The devices for use must be placed in such a way that they do not interfere with their heat dissipation.

H 421.2 When the outside temperatures of fixed equipment can reach values liable to cause fire in
neighboring materials, the equipment must be:
- either installed on or inside materials that can withstand such temperatures and have low thermal
conductivity;
- or separated from the construction elements by materials that can withstand such temperatures and
have low thermal conductivity.
Non-metallic materials of categories M0, M1 or M2 are suitable for the application of the above provisions.

H - or installed at a sufficient distance from any material whose conservation could be compromised by
such temperatures, allowing a safe dissipation of heat, the supports of the materials having a low
thermal conductivity.
Materials of categories M3, M4 or not classified are covered by this indent.
In France, the M0 to M4 classification is the one resulting from the amended order of June 30, 1983 from the
Ministry of the Interior on the classification of construction and fitting materials according to their reaction
to fire and definition of test methods.
The annex to this part gives a conventional classification of building materials from the point of view of their
reaction to fire.

H 421.3 Stationary equipment liable to produce arcs or sparks in normal service must be:

- either completely enclosed in arc resistant materials;

- either separated from the construction elements on which the arcs could have harmful effects, by
screens made of an arc resistant material;
- be installed at a sufficient distance from construction elements on which arcs and sparks could have
harmful effects, allowing safe extinction of the arc and sparks.

In the case of arcs, the arc resistant materials used for this protective measure should be non-combustible,
have low thermal conductivity and be of suitable thickness to ensure mechanical stability.

421.4 Fixed equipment exhibiting a focusing or heat-concentrating effect must be sufficiently far from any
fixed object and any construction element, so that these objects or elements cannot be subjected, under
normal conditions, to a dangerous temperature. .

This rule applies in particular to certain intensive beam incandescent headlamps.

H 421.5 When the electrical equipment installed in the same room contains a large quantity of flammable
liquid, measures must be taken to prevent the ignited liquid and the products of combustion of the liquid
(flame, smoke, toxic gas) from spreading to other parts of the building.

- 98 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

H NOTES -
1 - Examples of such provisions include:
- an extinguishing tank collecting liquid leaks and ensuring their extinction in the event of a fire ;
- the installation of equipment in a room made up of fire-resistant walls with thresholds or other means of preventing the spread of
flaming liquid to other parts of the building, this room being ventilated only to the outside.

2 - A quantity of 25 l is generally considered important.

3 - For quantities less than 25 l, it is sufficient to take measures to prevent the liquid from escaping. 4 - It is desirable to switch off
the equipment at the start of a fire.

The protective measures against fire risks to be taken depending on the nature of the liquid dielectric are
defined in standard NF C 17-300.

Standard NF C 17-300 does not impose any protective measure against the risk of fire when the total volume
of liquid dielectric per tank or tank is not greater than:
- 25 l for class O1 and K1 dielectrics,
- 50 l for class K2 and K3 dielectrics,
- any for class L3 dielectrics.

H 421.6 The materials of the envelopes placed around the electrical equipment during their implementation
must be able to withstand the highest temperatures likely to be produced by the electrical equipment.

When it is envisaged to implement an enclosure around an electrical equipment, it is generally advisable to

consult the manufacturer of the equipment.

H Combustible materials are not suitable for the construction of these enclosures, unless preventive measures
against ignition are taken, such as coating with an incombustible or hardly combustible material and of low
thermal conductivity.

M3, M4 or unclassified materials are not suitable for the construction of these enclosures, unless preventive
measures against ignition are taken, such as coating with an M0, M1 or M2 material of low thermal
conductivity.

This rule does not apply to the enclosures of materials which form an integral part thereof when such
materials meet the standards applicable to them.

It applies to enclosures of switchgear assemblies other than those conforming to specific standards (see
(1)
558.2).

H 422 Additional fire protection rules

422.0 General
NOTE - This part gives minimum requirements. Regulations may prescribe additional rules.

This part deals with:

- the choice and implementation of installations in premises at risk of fire due to the nature of the
materials treated or stored such as flammable materials for manufacture, treatment or storage,
including in the form of dust, by example in barns, carpentry workshops, paper factories.

NOTE - The nature, the quantities of flammable materials, the surfaces and the volumes of these rooms can be fixed by regulations.

The premises or locations referred to in this indent are premises classified as BE2.

(1) NF C 61-910 and NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421)

- 99 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

- the choice and installation of installations in premises constructed of combustible materials such as
H
wood, certain hollow walls, etc .;

- the choice and implementation of installations in premises containing irreplaceable goods.

The premises containing irreplaceable goods are museums, art collections, etc.

H
- installations in fire-propagating structures.

The electrical equipment must be chosen and installed in such a way that, in normal operation, their
temperature and the temperature rises foreseeable in the event of a fault cannot cause a fire, taking into
account the conditions of external influences.

This can be achieved by appropriate constructive measures or by additional measures during their
installation.

These latter measures are not necessary if the surface temperature of these materials is not likely to cause
the ignition of combustible materials in the vicinity.

This part does not deal with the choice and implementation of installations in evacuation routes. These
conditions can be specified by the National Authorities responsible for example for the construction of
buildings, the issuance of rules relating to the public or the prevention of fire.

422.1 Premises at risk of fire due to the nature of the materials treated or stored (premises BE2)

422.1.1 In premises classified as BE2, the installations must be limited to those necessary for the operation
of these premises, with the exception of the pipes under the conditions defined in 422.1.5.These
installations must meet the requirements of sub-paragraphs 422.1.2 To 422.1.18.

422.1.2 When dust can accumulate in sufficient quantity on enclosures of electrical equipment which could
give rise to a risk of fire, measures must be taken to prevent these enclosures from reaching excessive
temperatures.

It comes down to the simple aspect of the interview.

H 422.1.3 It is recalled that the electrical equipment must be appropriate for these premises; in particular,
their enclosures must have a degree of protection of at least IP5X in the event of the presence of dust.

422.1.4 In principle, the general rules relating to pipelines apply. However, when the pipes are not
embedded in non-combustible materials such as plaster, concrete or equivalent material, they must meet
the flame retardant characteristics defined in the standards in force.

The conductors and cables, the systems of conduits, trunking, the cable trays must satisfy the non-flame
propagation test (category C2 for cables and conductors).

H NOTE - Where the risk of fire propagation is high, for example in long vertical runs or in cable groups, it is recommended that the cables
meet the non-propagation characteristics of
(2)
fire defined in the standard in force.

The non-fire propagating cables are of category C1.

(2) NF EN 50266 (C 32-072)

- 100 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

H 422.1.5 In addition to 422.1.4, the electrical conduits which pass through such rooms, but which are not
intended to supply these rooms, must not include any connection on their route inside these rooms, unless
these connections are placed in an enclosure which satisfies the fire tests defined in the relevant product
standards, for example special requirements for partition boxes defined in the standard in
(3)
force.

The enclosures containing connections pass the glow wire test in accordance with the standard in force at a
(4)
temperature of 960 ° C.
(5)
Prefabricated electrical conduits conforming to the standard in force are allowed.

Table 52A specifies the C1, C2 and C3 characteristics of the main cables used.

H 422.1.6 The pipes which supply or pass through such rooms must be protected against overloads and
against short circuits by devices located upstream of the room concerned.

The pipes which originate in these premises must be protected against overloads and against short circuits
by devices located at the origin of these circuits.

422.1.7 The pipes must be protected against insulation faults, with the exception of prefabricated pipes:

a) in TN or TT system, by residual differential current devices with rated residual differential current at most
equal to 300 mA in accordance with 531.2.4 and appropriate standards.

If a resistive fault can lead to a risk of fire, for example ceiling heating by heating films, the rated
differential-residual current must be at most 30 mA.

b) in IT system, by a permanent insulation monitor with audible and / or visual alarm.

An appropriate instruction must indicate that during a first fault on one of the circuits of a room BE2, this
circuit must be manually cut.

This does not preclude the complementary implementation of differential devices with a differential-residual
current equal to 300 mA.

H NOTE - Metal sheathed cables are recommended. These metal sheaths must be connected to the protective conductor.

422.1.8 PEN conductors are not allowed except those belonging to pipelines crossing these premises.

In TN-system installations, the circuits serving these premises are made according to the TN-S diagram. It is
accepted that the main switchboard in these rooms can be supplied with a TN-C system.

H 422.1.9 Any neutral conductor must be capable of being cut by an associated device in accordance with
537.2.

This rule is specified for countries which do not systematically apply neutral cut-off. In France, the neutral
conductor is always cut.

H 422.1.10 Naked drivers are not allowed.

It must be ensured that combustible materials present cannot ignite by formation of arcs, sparks, burning
particles or other phenomena.

(3) NF EN 60669-2-2 (C 61-112)

(4) NF EN 60695 (C 20-924)
(5) NF EN 60439-2 (C 63-422)

- 101 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

H 422.1.11 For flexible cables it is recommended to choose cables and cords for intensive use, for example of
the type HO7RN-F or other similar cable.

422.1.12 (available)

422.1.13 Motors controlled automatically or remotely, or not continuously monitored, must be protected
against excessive temperatures by overload protection devices with manual reset or by similar devices.

Star-delta starting motors without automatic star-delta switching must also be protected against excessive
temperatures in the star connection.

422.1.14 In rooms where there is a risk of dust accumulation on the luminaire, only luminaires with limited
temperature surfaces should be used.

These luminaires must comply with standard NF EN 60598-2-24 (NF C 71-024) and present the degree of
protection IP6X.

In addition, if the luminaires used may overheat the illuminated objects due for example to the type of lamp
used, the shape of the reflector, the setting of the mounting means, or the mounting position, as indicated
in the installation instructions , these luminaires must bear the corresponding marking indicating the
minimum distance from the illuminated objects.

m
The symbol for the minimum distance to illuminated objects (meters) is

H 422.1.15 (available)

422.1.16 If electric heating or ventilation systems are used, the presence of dust and the air temperature
must be such that there is no risk of fire in this room.

Temperature limiting devices must be manually reset.

422.1.17 Electric heating equipment must be placed on non-combustible supports.

422.1.18 Heating equipment located near combustible materials must be provided with appropriate barriers
to prevent ignition of such materials.

Storage heaters should be such that they prevent air from transporting dust and / or fibers to the heating
resistor.

422.2 Rooms constructed of combustible materials

Condition CA2 according to 512.2.21.

422.2.1 Precautions must be taken to prevent electrical equipment from causing ignition of walls, floors and
ceilings. This can be achieved by:

- prevention of fire due to insulation faults in accordance with 422.1.7,

- the choice and implementation of electrical equipment.

Cables must be at least category C2.

Only the conduits, the systems of conduits, trunking, the cable trays, which do not propagate the flame are
used.

- 102 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

422.2.2 Choice and installation of materials in hollow walls

NOTE - Hollow walls are generally formed by reinforcements covered with sheets of plywood, plaster, wood or metal. Hollow walls can
also be prefabricated. The electrical equipment is installed in these walls. The pipes may or may not be fixed in these walls.

422.2.2.1 Electrical equipment, for example boxes, distribution boards, installed in combustible hollow walls
must comply with the requirements of the appropriate standards.

422.2.2.2 If electrical equipment is installed in hollow walls and does not meet the requirements of
422.2.2.1, it shall be enveloped with a thickness of 12 mm of fibro-silicate or similar non-combustible
material or with a thickness of 100 mm glass wool or rock wool. If such materials are used, their effects on
heat dissipation from electrical equipment should be taken into account.

422.2.2.3 Electrical equipment such as sockets and switches must not be claw fixing.

422.2.2.4 Cables and cords must be flame retardant (Category 2).

422.2.2.5 The conduits must comply with NF EN 50086 (C 68-110) and be flame retardant.

422.2.2.6 Junction boxes connected to surface-mounted cables must be equipped with a cable stopper.

422.3 (available)

422.4 Fire propagating structuresCondition

CB2, according to 512.2.22.

These conditions are normally regulated by the texts dealing with fire prevention in the different types of
buildings.

422.4.1 In structures whose shape and dimensions facilitate the propagation of a fire, precautions must be
taken so that the electrical installations do not easily propagate a fire (for example, chimney effect).

NOTE - Fire detectors may be provided ensuring the commissioning of measures preventing the spread of the fire, for example the
closing of fire dampers in ducts, gutters or galleries.

When such conditions arise, the following arrangements are generally satisfactory:

Fire barriers are arranged as indicated in 527.2, especially at each level.

In addition, the pipes are made in such a way that they cannot spread a fire. In particular, the conductors
and cables must pass a non-propagation test
(6)
fire, as defined by the standard in force (category C1).

The pipes cannot be placed in ventilation ducts or chimneys and, more generally, in any space that cannot
be cut from place to place by fire barriers.

(6) NF C 32-070

- 103 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

H
423 Protection against the risk of burns

The accessible parts of the electrical equipment placed inside the volume accessible to the touch must not
reach temperatures likely to cause burns to persons and must comply with the appropriate limits indicated
in table 42A. All parts of the installation liable to reach, in normal service, even for short periods,
temperatures higher than those indicated in table 42A must be protected against any accidental contact.

However, the values in Table 42A do not apply to equipment which meets the standards applicable to it.

Table 42A - Maximum temperatures in normal service of accessible parts

electrical equipment inside the volume accessible to the touch

Accessible parts Materials of the parts Maximum temperatures

accessible (° C)

Control units Metallic 55

manual Non metallic 65
Intended to be touched but Metallic 70
not intended to be held in Non metallic 80
the hand
Not intended to be touched in Metallic 80
normal service Non metallic 90

The standards relating to equipment set temperature (or temperature rise) limits such that people are not
at risk of being burned under normal conditions. Of course, these limits do not apply to the surfaces of
devices intended to provide a high temperature (such as cooking devices, ovens, welding devices, etc.).

424 Locations at risk of explosion (locations BE3)

The external influence class BE3 corresponds to locations where an explosive atmosphere can occur.

European Directive 1999/92 / EC of December 16, 1999 classifies such locations into zones according to the
frequency and duration of the presence of an explosive atmosphere. This classification includes three zones
for explosive atmospheres consisting of a mixture with air of flammable substances in the form of gas,
vapor or mist (zones 0, 1 and 2) and three zones for explosive atmospheres comprising a cloud of
combustible dust ( zones 20, 21 and 22).

The "document relating to protection against explosions" drawn up and kept up to date by the head of the
establishment shows the hazardous locations classified as zones in the establishment in question.

The same directive indicates the criteria for choosing materials characterized by their category, according to
the nature, gas (G) or dust (D), of the atmosphere, the categories being defined in European directive 94/9 /
EC of March 23, 1994.

When in a provision of this article, no mention of zone is cited, the provision applies to all zones.

Premises or locations where the risk of explosion is exclusively due to the presence of solid explosive
substances such as ammunition, pyrotechnic products, but where explosive atmospheres are not likely to
appear, must comply with the provisions of
422.1 relating to premises at risk of fire (premises BE2).

- 104 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

424.1 In places classified as BE3, the installations must be limited to those necessary for the operation of
these sites. The equipment of the latter installations, the use of which is not essential in the BE3 locations,
will preferably be in non-hazardous locations. If this is not possible, they should be placed in the area
presenting the least possible danger.

The circuits serving the BE3 locations must be reserved exclusively for supplying these locations.

424.2 In the case of explosive gaseous atmospheres (G), the equipment must be chosen from among those
conforming to the specific standards of the modes of protection.

Table 42B gives the references of the standards to be considered, as well as the areas in which the
equipment of the different protection modes can be installed.

Table 42B - Information on the use of equipment complying with specific standards
modes of protection in an explosive gas atmosphere

Standard Atmosphere zone (G)

Protection mode
Zone 0 Zone 1 Zone 2

Flameproof enclosure "d" NF EN 50018 x x

Increased safety "e" NF EN 50019 x x
Intrinsically safe NF EN 50020
Security mode "ia" x x x
Security mode "ib" x x
Encapsulation "m" NF EN 50028 x x
Oil immersion "o" NF EN 50015 x x
Internal overpressure "p" NF EN 50016 x x
Powder filling "q" NF EN 50017 x x
Protection mode "n" NF EN 50021 x

x Use possible subject to suitability for the nature of the explosive atmosphere.

Standard NF EN 60079-14 (C 23-579-14) defines the rules to be observed for the use of equipment of the
different modes of protection.

In the case of explosive atmospheres due to the presence of combustible dust (D), the equipment usable in
zones 20, 21 and 22 must comply with standard NF EN 50281-1-1 (C 23-581-1 -1).

Standard NF EN 50281-1-2 (C 23-581-1-2) defines the rules to be observed for the use of said equipment.

424.3 In explosive gas atmospheres, in the presence of non-combustible dust, the enclosures of electrical
equipment must have a degree of protection at least equal to IP5X.

In explosive atmospheres due to the presence of combustible dust, the degrees of protection of the
enclosures of electrical equipment are defined in standard NF EN 50281-1-2.

424.4 The admissible current values in the conductors must be reduced by 15%.

424.5 When the pipes are not embedded in non-combustible materials such as plaster, concrete or
equivalent material, they must meet the flame retardant characteristics defined in the standards in force.

Cables, conduits, trunking and cable trays must pass the flame retardant test (category C2 for cables).

- 105 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

424.6 When an overhead line serves BE3 classified sites, the supply must be carried out via an underground
pipeline (529.5) at least 20 m in length.
Naked drivers are prohibited.

424.7 Channels, conduits, ducts, etc. receiving cables must be sealed to prevent the passage of flammable
gases, vapors, dust or liquids from a hazardous location to a non-hazardous location or from one area to
another.

It must be the same for crossing the walls.

424.8 The pipes must be installed, as far as possible, in such a way that they are not exposed to mechanical
shocks, to the action of corrosive substances (for example, solvents) as well as to the effects of heat . If not,
they must be correctly chosen according to the classes of external influences; in the event of a mechanical
risk, the protection must be greater than that prescribed according to the external influence class AG.

Aluminum cores must have a section of at least 16 mm².

1 Except in the case of intrinsically safe circuits for which the cables must be chosen in compliance with the
provisions of standard NF EN 60079-14 (C 23-579-14), and except in the two specific cases covered by
paragraphs 2 and 3 below, the cables have a nominal voltage of 1000 volts and their choice must comply
with the following provisions:

a) under conditions of external influences AG1, all cables are allowed, including unarmoured cables, in
particular U 1000R2V cables.
b) under the conditions of external influences AG2, the armored cables admissible under the conditions
AG3 may be used (see table 52D).
c) under the conditions of external influences AG3, the cables admissible under condition b) with
additional protection (for example screens, sleeves or similar devices) can be used, unless special
cables with more armor are used.

In the three previous situations, cables of the 07RN-F, 07BB-F and 07BN-4-F series can be used when flexible
links are required.

2 Cables with a nominal voltage of less than 1000 volts but at least equal to 250 volts are only permitted if
the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

a) the cables are part of a SELV circuit satisfying all the conditions set out in414.

b) the maximum intensity of the current likely to flow through them cannot be greater than 40 mA, even
in the event of a fault.
c) the cables are protected by two steel strips having a thickness of at least 0.2 mm or equivalent.

Such uses are found in signaling and alarm circuits.

3 Fire-resistant cables (category CR1 according to the standard in force) with a nominal voltage of 500
volts, armored under the conditions of influence, are permitted for circuits of security installations such
as emergency lighting. external AG2 and AG3, provided that the insulation of these circuits is monitored
by a permanent insulation monitor, even when the installation is not in service.

4 In the case of explosive atmospheres based on gas, vapor or mist where the modes of protection defined
in the specific standards are implemented, the cables must also comply with the special provisions for
the implementation of standard NF EN 60079-14 (C 23-579-14).

- 106 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

424.9 The pipes supplying such locations must be protected against overloads and against short circuits by
devices located at the origin of these circuits.

424.10 The pipes must be protected against insulation faults:

a) in TN or TT system, by residual differential current devices with rated residual differential current at most
equal to 300 mA.
b) in IT system, by a permanent insulation monitor with audible and / or visual alarm. An appropriate
instruction must indicate that during a first fault on one of the circuits of a room BE2, this circuit must be
manually cut.

424.11 PEN drivers are not allowed.

424.12 Equipotential connections must be made between masses and conductive elements other than
electrical installations (metal construction elements, concrete reinforcements, metal pipes, non-electrical
devices, etc.).

The links between masses can be made by their earthing conductors, if the path of these conductors is close
to the shortest distance between the masses.

Metallic elements under cathodic protection and enclosures of intrinsically safe equipment may not be
connected to the equipotential bonding.

424.13 Apart from the emergency shut-off devices that may be provided in the hazardous areas, there must
be one or more emergency shut-off devices outside the hazardous location.

424.14 The flexible cables should be chosen from cables and cords for intensive use, for example of type
H07RN-F, H07BB-F or H07BN4-F.

424.15 Rotating machines and transformers must be protected against overloads and short circuits, for
example by an overcurrent device or by a thermal probe.

The protection devices must be such that automatic reset is impossible.

Precautions to prevent the operation of a three-phase motor when one phase is lost must be taken.

424.16 Replaceable items such as lamps must be of the types and characteristics assigned as specified in the
manufacturers' instructions.

424.17 Certain installations must be protected against the effects of lightning. A risk assessment can be
carried out in accordance with standards NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102.

The decree of January 28, 1993 imposes this protection for certain installations classified for the protection
of the environment as well as the decree of June 25, 1980 for certain establishments open to the public.

When a lightning rod is used, the NF C 17-100 standard gives indications for the realization of the
equipotentiality necessary to avoid the formation of sparks.

Surge protection is the subject of articles 443 and 534.

- 107 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

Annex (7) - Reaction to fire - Conventional classifications

I Materials a priori M0
Glass, cellular glass.
Concrete.
Brick.
Plaster, stucco.
Plaster reinforced with glass fibers or with metal
reinforcements. Concrete and cement and lime mortars.
Vermiculite, perlite.
Asbestos cement.
Sillico-limestone.
Stone, slate.
Iron, cast iron, steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead.
Ceramic products.

II Wood-based materials

1. Solid non-resinous wood.

Thicknesses greater than or equal to 14 mm: M3.
Thickness less than 14 mm: M4.

2. Solid coniferous wood.

Thicknesses greater than or equal to 18 mm. M3.
Thicknesses less than 18 mm: M4.

3. Wood-based panels. Plywood, slats, particles, fibers.

Thicknesses greater than or equal to 18 mm: M3
Thicknesses less than 18 mm: M4

4. Glued solid wood floors.

Thickness greater than or equal to 6 mm before sanding: M3.
Thickness less than 6 mm before sanding: M4.

The conventional M3 and M4 classifications of timber and wood-based panels are not modified by the
following strong adherent surface coatings:

a) Veneer of wood thickness less than or equal to 0.5 mm;

b) Any other coating whose surface heat release does not exceed 4.18 MJ / m2
(1000 kcal / m2).

High pressure decorative laminate sheets in accordance with standard NF T 54-301 and less than 1.5 mm
thick are classified in category M3.

(7) This appendix constitutes appendix 21 to the amended decree of June 30, 1983 of the Ministry of the Interior

- 108 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-42

III Painted materials

1. Non-insulating supports classified M0 according to paragraph I:

a) Coated with paint applied in quantities less than 0.35 kg / m2 wet for glossy paints and at 0.75 kg / m2 wet
for matt and satin paints, without taking into account primers, prints or filler: M1 classification.

b) Coated with thick paint or film coating applied in quantities between 0.5 and 1.5 kg / m2 wet: classification
M2.
c) Coated with thick plastic coatings, defined by DTU 59.2, used in quantities between 0.5 and 3.5 kg / m2
wet: classification M2.

2. Inert substrates coated in interior use with glossy paint in an amount less than 0.10 kg / m² wet or with
matt or satin paint in an amount less than 0.40 kg / m² wet, and in exterior use with glossy paint in less
than quantity. at 0.15 kg / m² wet or with a matt or satin paint in a quantity less than 0.65 kg // m² wet:
classification M0.

3. Non-insulating supports classified M1 or M2:

Coated with paint applied in quantities less than 0.35 kg / m2 wet for glossy paints and at 0.50 kg / m2 wet for
matt and satin paints, without taking into account primers, prints, or filler: classification M2.

In the case not provided for above where a manufacturer wishes to demonstrate that his paint does not
downgrade the supports designated above, a reaction to fire classification test should be carried out.

______________

- 109 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

Part 4-43 - Over-current protection

430 General rule ................................................ .................................................. .......... 112

431 Arrangements according to the nature of the circuits ............................................ ........................ 112
432 Nature of the protection devices ............................................. ................................ 113
433 Protection against overload currents ............................................ .................... 114
434 Protection against short-circuit currents .......................................... .................... 120
435 Coordination between overload protection and protection
against short circuits ............................................. ................................................ 123
436 Limitation of overcurrents by the characteristics of the power supply .......................... 123

- 111 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

430 General rule

VS
430.1 Active conductors must be protected by one or more automatic overload cut-off devices (433) and
against short circuits (434). In addition, overload protection and short circuit protection should be
coordinated in accordance with435.

NOTES -
1 - Active conductors protected against overloads according to 433 are considered as protected also against any fault likely to produce
short circuits in the range of overload currents.
2 - The protection of flexible cables in fixed installations is included in these rules. Flexible cables connected to equipment connected to
fixed installations via outlets are not necessarily protected against overloads; the protection of such cables against short circuits is under
study.

The protection devices for the installation circuits are not designed to protect the internal circuits of the
operating devices.
When an independent protection device is provided to protect the internal circuits of a user device, its
characteristics are indicated by the manufacturer of the device to be protected.

The application of the rules of this part to the various protection devices is described in guide UTE C 15-105.

The software for calculating electrical installations which is the subject of a technical opinion from the UTE
on the basis of the UTE C 15-500 guide takes into account the requirements of this part.
The application of protection rules against overcurrents in low-voltage lighting installations is the subject of
guide UTE C 15-559.

431 Provisions depending on the nature of the circuits

VS
431.1 Protection of phase conductors

431.1.1 Overcurrent detection must be provided on all phase conductors; it must cause the cut of the
conductor in which the overcurrent is detected, but does not necessarily cause the cut of the other active
conductors.

431.1.2 However, in TT and TN diagrams, on circuits supplied between phases and in which the neutral
conductor is not distributed, overcurrent detection may not be provided on one of the phase conductors,
provided that the conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

a) there is, upstream or at the same level, a differential protection which must cause the breaking of all the
phase conductors;

b) a neutral conductor must not be distributed from an artificial neutral point on the circuits located
downstream of the differential protection device referred to in a).

431.2 Protection of the neutral conductor

VS 431.2.1 Installations whose neutral point is directly connected to earth (TT or TN diagrams)

a) When the cross-section of the neutral conductor is at least equal or equivalent to that of the phase
conductors, it is not necessary to provide an overcurrent detection on the neutral conductor.

b) When the section of the neutral conductor is smaller than that of the phase conductors, it is necessary to
provide an overcurrent detection on the neutral conductor, appropriate to the section of this conductor:
this detection must lead to the breaking of the phase conductors, but not necessarily that of the neutral
conductor.

In the TN-C diagram, an overcurrent detection toroid can be placed on the PEN conductor causing the phase
conductors to be cut off and not that of the PEN conductor.
- 112 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

VS However, it is permissible not to provide for overcurrent detection on the neutral conductor between the
source (transformer, generator) and the general distribution board (TGBT).

The cross-section of the neutral conductor must be at least equal to the value prescribed in 524.

431.2.2 Installations whose neutral point is not directly earthed (IT diagram)

When it is necessary to distribute the neutral conductor in an IT scheme, it is necessary to provide for an
VS overcurrent detection on the neutral conductor of any circuit, which detection must lead to the breaking of
all the active conductors of the corresponding circuit, including the neutral conductor.

However, when the circuit supplies single-phase devices or those having low-power elements connected
between phase and neutral (for example, measuring devices) and which are not liable to cause a fire if they
are subjected to voltage between phases , but whose deterioration is admissible, the neutral conductor
disconnecting device may not cut off the phase conductors of the circuit.

VS This provision is not necessary if:

- the neutral conductor in question is effectively protected against short circuits by a protection device
placed upstream, for example at the origin of the installation, in accordance with the rules set out in
434.5.2.
- or if the circuit in question is protected by a residual current protection device whose rated differential-
residual current is at most equal to 0.15 times the admissible current in the corresponding neutral
conductor: this device must cut all the active conductors of the circuit corresponding, including the
neutral conductor.

A differential device meeting the preceding conditions may be common to a set of terminal circuits and if all
of the following conditions are met:

a) Each of these circuits is protected against indirect contacts by the overcurrent protection device placed at
its origin, in accordance with the rules set out in 411.6.4.

b) The characteristics of these terminal circuits are identical:

- the pipes are of the same type or admit the same admissible currents;
- the conductors are of the same section;
- and the overcurrent protection devices have the same rated current and the same tripping
characteristic (type B, C or D).

It should be noted that for circuits for which the overcurrent protection device does not provide protection
against indirect contacts, the latter protection can only be provided by differential devices if one device is
provided per circuit.

431.3 Interrupting the neutral conductor

VS
When the breaking of the neutral conductor is prescribed, the breaking and closing of the conductor must
be such that the neutral conductor is never cut before the phase conductors and is closed at the same time
or before the phase conductors.

432 Nature of protection devices

VS
The protection devices must be chosen from those indicated in paragraphs 432.1 To
432.3.

- 113 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

VS 432.1 Devices providing both overload protection and short-circuit protection

These protection devices must be able to interrupt any overcurrent up to the prospective short-circuit
current at the point where the device is installed. They must meet the requirements of article433. Such
protective devices can be:
- magnetothermal or electronic circuit breakers,
- gG type fuses.

NOTES -
1 - The fuse includes all the parts forming the entire protection device.
2 - The use of a device having a breaking capacity lower than the presumed short-circuit current at the point where it is installed, is
subject to the prescriptions of sub-paragraph 434.2.1.
3 - This paragraph does not exclude the use of protective devices with different characteristics if the requirements of paragraph 433.1
are satisfied.

(1)
The gG type fuses comply with the standards in force. The circuit
(2)
breakers comply with one of the standards in force.
(3)
Connection, control and protection devices (ACP) comply with the applicable standard .

VS 432.2 Devices providing only overload protection

These are devices generally possessing a characteristic of inverse time operation and may have a breaking
capacity lower than the prospective short-circuit current at the point where they are installed. They must
meet the requirements of article433.

AM fuses do not protect against overloads.

VS 432.3 Devices providing only protection against short circuits

These devices can be used when the overload protection is achieved by other means or when the item 433
admits to dispense with overload protection. They must be able to interrupt any short-circuit current less
than or equal to the prospective short-circuit current. They must meet the requirements of article434.

Such protective devices can be:

- circuit breakers with overcurrent release,
- fused circuit breakers, type gG or aM.

432.4 Characteristics of protective devices

The time / current characteristics of overcurrent protection devices must comply with those specified in the
standards in force.

The characteristics of the protection devices are defined in the following standards: NF C 60-200, NF C
61-201, NF C 61-410, NF C 61-440, NF C 63-120, NF C 63-161, NF C 63-210.

NOTE - This does not preclude the use of other protective devices To provided that their time / current characteristics ensure a level of
protection equivalent to that specified by this paragraph.

433 Overload current protection

433.0 General rule

Protective devices must be provided to interrupt any overload current in the conductors of the circuit before
it can cause overheating which is harmful to the insulation, connections, ends or environment of the pipes.

To determine the cross-sections of conductors and the choice of overload protection devices, refer to
paragraph 533.2.

(1) NF C 61-201, NF EN 60269-2 (C 63-210)

(2) NF EN 60898 (C 61-410), NF EN 61009-1 (C 61-440), NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120)
(3) NF EN 60947-6-2 (C 63-161)
- 114 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

VS 433.1 Coordination between conductors and protective devices

The operating characteristic of a device protecting a pipeline against overloads must satisfy the following
two conditions:
1) IB ≤ Inot ≤ Iz
2) I2 ≤ 1.45 Iz
IB Operating current of the circuit,
Iz Permissible current of the pipeline (see 523),
Inot Rated current of the protection device; for adjustable protection devices,Inot is the selected setting
current (Ir),

NOTE - For adjustable protection devices. The selected setting current can beInot Where Ir.

I2 Current effectively ensuring the operation of the protection device: in practice I2 is taken equal:

- the operating current over conventional time for circuit breakers;

- to the conventional time-lapse current, for gG type fuses.

The stream I2 is given in the product standard or can be obtained from the manufacturer.

NOTE - The protection provided by this subclause does not provide complete protection in certain cases, for example against prolonged
overcurrents of less than I2, and does not necessarily lead to the most economical solution. That is why it is assumed that the circuit is
designed in such a way that small overloads of long duration do not occur frequently.

Reference values for pipelines

IB
Admissible current I Z

Operating current
1.45 x I2

O I

Rated current I not Where

adjustment I r

Conventional current
Operating I 2

Protective device characteristics

Figure 433A - References for pipes and protective devices

The rule of 433.2 defines three conditions to be met for a protection device to protect a pipeline against
overloads:
1a) IB ≤ Inot

1b) Inot ≤ thez

IZ
2) I2 ≤ 1.45.lz which can be written k2.thenot ≤ 1.45Lz or k3.thenot ≤ thez Where Inot
k3
IB Operating current,
Inot Rated current of the protection device; for adjustable protection devices, Inot is the selected setting
current (Ir),
I2 Operating current of the protection device over conventional time,
- 115 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

Iz Permissible current in the pipeline, taking into account any correction factors,Current ratio I2 effectively
k2 ensuring the operation of the protection device at its rated current Inot or to its setting current Ir, = k2/
1.45.
k3

Now, the value of the ratio k2 is different depending on the nature of the protection device:
- for gG fuses, this ratio is 1.6 or 1.9; it follows that condition 2) is more severe than condition 1b),

- for circuit breakers, this ratio is equal to 1.45 for small circuit breakers, and to 1.30 or 1.25 for other circuit
breakers depending on their rated current; as a result, condition 1b) is more severe than condition 2).

In practice, it is therefore sufficient in all cases to verify only two conditions:

- for fuses, the two conditions to be observed are as follows:

1a) IB ≤ Inot
IZ
2) I2 ≤ 1.45.lz Where Inot
k3

The k factor3 having the following values:

Inot < 16A, k3 = 1.31

GG fuses
Inot ≥ 16A, k3 = 1.10

- for circuit breakers, the two conditions to be observed are as follows:

1a) IB ≤ Inot 1b) Inot ≤ thez

433.2 Location of overload protection devices

VS 433.2.1 A device ensuring protection against overloads must be placed where a change of section, type,
installation method or construction leads to a reduction in the value of the admissible current in the
conductors, except in cases mentioned in 433.2.2 and 433.3.

433.2.2 The device protecting a pipeline against overloads can be placed on the route of this pipeline if the
portion of the pipeline between, on the one hand, the change of section, nature, method of laying or
construction, and the protection device on the other hand, does not have a branch or socket and meets one
of the following two conditions:

a) It is protected against short circuits in accordance with the rules set out in 434.

Example of realization

Figure 433B - Overload protection device placed on the course

of the pipeline
The protection device P1 protects AO and OB
- 116 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

b) Its length is not more than 3 meters, it is made in such a way as to minimize the risk of a short circuit and
VS
it is not placed near combustible materials.

Example of realization

Figure 433C - Protective device placed on the route of the pipeline

The device P1 may not protect the OB bypass against short circuits. The length of 3 m is
fixed for the convenience of use.

433.3 Overload protection exemption

VS
The different cases set out below are not valid in installations located in premises (or locations) presenting a
risk of fire or explosion (condition BE2 or BE3) and when the specific rules for certain premises specify
different conditions. .

It is permissible not to provide an overload protection device:

a) on a pipeline located downstream of a change in section, type, method of laying or construction, and
effectively protected against overloads by a protection device placed upstream,

Example of realization:

Figure 433D - Example of overload protection device exemption

The P device protects the OB bypass against overloads

VS b) on a pipeline which is not liable to be traversed by overload currents, provided that this pipeline is
protected against short-circuits in accordance with the rules set out in 434and that it has neither a
branch nor a socket.

- 117 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

Example of realization :

i) line supplying a user device with its built-in overload protection, provided that the device's protection
device is suitable for the line (figure 433E).

Figure 433E - Example of overload protection exemptionThe user device has its
built-in overload protection

ii) line supplying a permanently connected user device, not liable to produce overloads and not protected
against overloads, the operating current of this device not being greater than the admissible current in
the line (figure 433F).

Figure 433F - Example of overload protection exemption

As M devices are not liable to give rise to overloads,
OB pipes do not need protection

A motor with a stalled rotor current not greater than the permissible current in the pipeline is considered
not to be susceptible to overloading.

iii) line supplying several taps that are individually protected against overloads, provided that the sum of the
nominal currents of the tap-off protection devices is less than the nominal current of the device that
would protect the line considered against overloads (figure 433G).

Figure 433G - Example of exemption from the overload protection deviceOB pipelines cannot be
subjected to overload currents, section S2
being determined as a function of the sum of the currents absorbed by the taps at B.
- 118 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

iv) pipe supplied by a source whose maximum current it can supply cannot be greater than the
admissible current in the pipe (for example, certain ringing transformers, certain welding
transformers, certain generators driven by heat engines).

VS c) on circuits of communication, control, signaling and similar installations.

d) on certain distribution circuits comprising buried cables or overhead lines through which overloading the
circuits does not present any danger.

e) on the supply lines of electric motors of certain safety installations

When, for safety reasons, it is necessary for a motor to be able to perform its service even under conditions
of mechanical or other fault, it is permissible not to protect the corresponding supply line against overloads
but only against short-circuits, provided that the conductors of the pipeline can withstand the overload
currents resulting from such faults. Unless a precise indication is provided by the motor manufacturer, the
latter condition may be considered to be satisfied if the section of the conductors of the pipe is determined
for an admissible current equal to 1.5 times the nominal current of the motor.

This provision is in particular imposed for the supply of smoke extraction motors in establishments open to
the public.

433.4 Location or exemption of overload protection in the IT diagram

VS
The provisions of 433.2.2 for moving or 433.3 for the exemption of devices for overload protection are not
applicable to the IT scheme unless each of the circuits not protected against overloads is protected against
faults by one of the following measures:

a) use of the protective measures indicated in 412 ;

All the equipment supplied by such circuits - including pipelines - are of class II or produced according to the
“additional insulation during installation” protection measure described in 412.

VS b) protection of each circuit by a differential-residual current protection device operating when the second
fault appears;

c) use of a permanent insulation monitor causing the circuit to be cut as soon as the first fault appears.

In IT installations, the fault current resulting from two insulation faults in two different circuits may have a
lower intensity than that of the minimum short-circuit current of one of the circuits.

In such cases, the rule set out in 434 cannot be respected, the breaking time of this double fault current can
be too long and the conductors of one of the circuits could exceed the permitted limit temperature and be
damaged. This is why the conductors must be effectively protected against overloads.

VS 433.5 Cases where it is recommended to dispense with overload protection for safety reasons

It is recommended not to place an overload protection device on the pipes supplying appliances if the
opening of the circuit could cause dangers.

Examples of such cases are:

- the excitation circuits of rotating machines;
- the induced circuits of alternating current machines;
- the supply circuits of handling or lifting electromagnets;
NOTE - In this case, it is recommended to provide an overload alarm.
- the secondary circuits of current transformers.
- 119 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

433.6 Overload protection of parallel conductors

If a single protection device is the source of several conductors in parallel, there must be no branch circuits
VS
or disconnecting or disconnecting devices in the conductors in parallel. This paragraph does not preclude
the use of loop circuits.

When a protective device protects several conductors in parallel, the value of Iz is the sum of the admissible
currents in the different conductors, provided however that the conductors are arranged so as to carry
substantially equal currents.
NOTE - In practice, this arrangement is only acceptable if the pipes have the same electrical characteristics (nature, method of laying,
length, section) and do not include any bypass on their route. However, verification may be desirable.

The paragraph 523.6 indicates the methods of installing unipolar cables in parallel as well as the correction
factors to be applied to the admissible currents.

Methods of protecting parallel conductors against overloads by fuses are given in publication IEC
60364-4-47 but are not used in France.

434 Protection against short-circuit currents

NOTE - This standard only considers the cases of short-circuits foreseen between conductors of the same circuit.

434.0 General rule

Protective devices must be provided to interrupt any short-circuit current before it can become dangerous
due to the thermal and mechanical effects produced in the conductors and in the connections.

434.1 Determination of prospective short-circuit currents

VS The prospective short-circuit currents must be determined at the places of the installation deemed
necessary. This determination can be made either by calculation or by measurement.

The values of short-circuit currents differ depending on whether they concern two phases, three phases or
one phase and neutral. The breaking capacity of the protection devices must be ensured for each of these
short-circuit currents.

The values of short-circuit currents can be determined by one of the following means:
- an appropriate calculation method;
- network model studies;
- measurements carried out in the installation;
- information provided by the electric power distributor.

The UTE C 15-105 guide gives indications for the calculation of short-circuit currents.

434.2 Location of short-circuit protection devices

VS 434.2.1 General rule

A device providing protection against short-circuits must be placed where a reduction in the cross-section of
the conductors or other change leads to a modification of the characteristics defined in 433.2.1.

434.2.2 Relocation of the short-circuit protection device

It is permissible not to place a short-circuit protection device in a location as defined in the two cases listed
below.

- 120 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

434.2.2.1 The part of the pipe between, on the one hand, the section reduction or other change, and the
VS
protection device on the other hand, simultaneously meets the following three conditions:

(a) its length is not more than 3 meters;

b) it is carried out in such a way as to minimize the risk of a short circuit;
c) it is not placed near combustible materials.

Condition b) can be obtained, for example, by reinforcing the protection of the pipeline against external
stresses (mechanical, thermal, humidity, etc.).

VS 434.2.2.2 A protective device placed upstream has an operating characteristic such that it protects against
short circuits in accordance with the rule of 434.2.3, the pipeline located downstream of the section
reduction or other change.

The length of the pipe located downstream, of section S2, must not be greater than that determined by the
diagram of figure 434A in the shape of a right triangle.

Figure 434A - Triangle rule

THE1 = PB being the maximum length of section pipe S1 protected against short circuits by the protection
device placed in P.
THE2 = Pc being the maximum length of section pipe S2 protected against short circuits by the protection
device placed in P.

The maximum length of branch pipe in O, section S2 protected against short-circuits by the device placed at
P, is given by the length OV.

434.3 Short-circuit protection exemption

VS
It is permissible to dispense with protection against short-circuits if the following two conditions are
simultaneously fulfilled:
a) the pipeline is constructed in such a way as to minimize the risk of a short circuit (see
434.2.2.1 b);
b) the pipeline must not be placed near combustible materials.

Examples of cases where short-circuit protection can be dispensed with:

- pipes connecting the generating machines, transformers, rectifiers, accumulator batteries to the
corresponding distribution boards, the protection devices being placed on these boards;

- circuits the breaking of which could lead to dangers for the operation of the installations concerned,
such as those mentioned above;
- some measuring circuits.

434.4 Protection against short-circuits of conductors in parallel

A single protection device can protect several conductors in parallel against short circuits.

- 121 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43
434.5 Characteristics of short-circuit protection devices
VS Any device providing protection against short circuits must meet the following two conditions:

434.5.1 Its breaking capacity must be at least equal to the presumed short-circuit current at the point where it is
installed, except in the case admitted in the following paragraph.
A device having a lower breaking capacity is allowed, provided that it is doubled upstream by a device
having the necessary breaking capacity. In this case, the characteristics of the two devices must be
coordinated in such a way that the energy which the devices allow through is not greater than that which
the device placed downstream and the pipes protected by these devices can withstand without damage.

NOTE - In some special cases it may be necessary to consider other characteristics such as dynamic stresses and arcing energy for
downstream devices. The necessary information must be obtained from the manufacturers of these devices.

In the absence of rules on the correspondence between different protection devices, the necessary
information must be requested from the manufacturers of these devices.

VS 434.5.2 The cut-off time of any current resulting from a short circuit occurring in
any point in the circuit must not be greater than the time bringing the temperature of the conductors to the
permissible limit.
For short-circuits of a duration of at most 5 s, the time necessary for a short-circuit current to raise the
temperature of the conductors from the maximum admissible temperature in normal service to the limit
value, can be calculated, as a first approximation, using the following formula:

S
t=k
I
or
t is the duration in seconds,
S is the section in mm2,
I is the effective short-circuit current in A, expressed in rms value (called Ik in guide UTE C 15-105)

k = factor taking into account the resistivity, the temperature coefficient and the resistance
heating of the conductor material, as well as final initial temperatures. For the most common conductor
insulations, the values of k for the phase conductors are shown in Table 43A.

Table 43A - Values of k for an active conductor

Conductor insulation
PVC PVC PVC PVC PR / EPR Caout-
70 ° C 70 ° C 90 ° C 90 ° C cabbage
≤ 300 mm² > 300 mm² ≤ 300 mm² > 300 mm² 60 ° C

Initial temperature 70 70 90 90 90 60
°C
Final temperature 160 140 160 140 250 200
°C
Material of
Driver

Copper
115 103 100 86 143 141
Aluminum
76 68 66 57 94 93
Connections soldered to 115 - - -
tin for
copper conductors

NOTES -
1 - For very short durations (<0.1 s) where the asymmetry is important and for devices limiting the current, k2S2 must be greater than the
value of the energy (I 2 t) that allows the protection device, indicated by the manufacturer, to pass. 2 - Other values of k are under study
for:
- small section conductors (especially for sections less than 10 mm2),
- short-circuit times greater than 5 s,
- other types of connections in the conductors,
- bare drivers,
- shielded conductors with mineral insulation.
3 - The nominal current of the short-circuit protection device may be greater than the admissible current of the circuit conductors.

- 122 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

The formula giving the relation between the breaking time, the short-circuit current and the cross-section of
the conductors assumes that, during the passage time of the short-circuit current, the heating of the
conductors is adiabatic, that is to say say that the energy dissipated by the Joule effect is only used to heat
the conductors without dissipating heat.

In certain special cases, it may be necessary to reduce the maximum temperatures taking into account the
mechanical characteristics of the conductors and cables, for example for self-supporting cables.

435 Coordination between overload protection and short-circuit protection

VS

435.1 Protection provided by the same device

If an overload protection device meeting the requirements in 433 has a breaking capacity at least equal to
the presumed short-circuit current at the point where it is installed, it is considered to also provide
protection against short-circuit currents of the pipeline located downstream from this point.

The breaking capacity can be that of the device alone or that obtained by coordination with another
upstream device such as provided in 434.2.1.

NOTE - This may not be valid for the whole range of short-circuit currents for certain types of circuit-breakers, in particular for those
which do not limit the current. The verification is carried out in accordance with the requirements of paragraph434.3.

This may also not be valid for very long circuits, such as tunnel circuits, exterior lighting circuits. In such
cases, the cut-off time rule must be systematically verified, as recommended, for example, by standard NF C
17-200 for public lighting circuits.

VS 435.2 Protection provided by separate devices

The rules in 433 and 434 apply to overload protection device and short circuit protection device respectively.

The characteristics of the devices must be coordinated in such a way that the energy passed through the
short-circuit protection device is not greater than that which the overload protection device can withstand
without damage.

436 Limitation of overcurrents by the characteristics of the power supply

Conductors supplied by a source whose impedance is such that the maximum current which it can supply
cannot be greater than the admissible current in the conductors (for example certain ringing transformers,
certain ring transformers, certain transformers) are deemed to be protected against any overcurrent.
welding, some generators driven by heat engine).

______________

- 123 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-43

(Blank page)

- 124 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

Part 4-44 - Protection against voltage disturbances and

electromagnetic disturbances

440 Introduction................................................. .................................................. ............... 126

441 (available) ............................................... .................................................. ................. 126
442 Protection of low voltage installations against overvoltages
temporary at power frequency .............................................. .............................. 126
443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due
maneuvers ............................................... .................................................. ....... 133
444 Measures to limit electromagnetic interference ........................................ 137
445 Protection against brownouts ............................................ .......................... 144

____________

- 125 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

440 Introduction

The part 4-44 gives rules for protection against the effects of conducted and radiated disturbances on
electrical installations.

Currents due to lightning, switching, short circuits and other electromagnetic phenomena can generate
overvoltages and electromagnetic disturbances.

Article 442 gives rules intended to ensure the safety of people and equipment in a low-voltage installation in
the event of a temporary power-frequency overvoltage.

Section 443 aims to describe the means which make it possible to limit transient overvoltages of
atmospheric origin or due to operations in order to reduce to an acceptable level the risk of failure in the
installation, and in the equipment connected to it. This approach is consistent with the principles of
insulation coordination in standard NF C 20-040; this standard requires technical committees to specify an
appropriate overvoltage withstand category for their equipment, which means a minimum withstand to
voltage waves for equipment, according to their use and their corresponding overvoltage withstand
category.

NOTE - According to paragraph 9 of standard NF C 20-040, the technical committees should provide the appropriate information. It is
recommended to indicate the nominal value of the surge withstand supplied with the equipment.

THE'article 444 describes the basic recommendations for limiting the effects of electromagnetic
disturbances. Currently electromagnetic interference (EMI) can disrupt or damage information technology
systems or equipment, equipment with electronic components or circuits.

THE'article 445 deals with the precautions to be taken in the event of a voltage drop.

441 (available)

H
442 Protection of low-voltage installations against temporary power-frequency
overvoltages

442.1 Scope and object

The rules in this article are intended to ensure the safety of people and equipment in a low-voltage
installation in the event of a temporary power-frequency overvoltage.

The following articles only take into account four situations generally at the origin of temporary
overvoltages, these situations being the most restrictive:
- high voltage installation earth fault (442.2);
- breakage of the neutral conductor in a TN or TT system installation (442.5);
- first earth fault in an IT system installation (442.6).

442.2 Overvoltages in the event of an earth fault in high-voltage installations

The circulation of a high voltage fault current in the earth connection of the substation masses causes an
increase in the potential of these masses with respect to the earth, the value of which depends on:
- the intensity of the fault current, and
- the resistance of the substation earth electrode.

The fault current can cause:

- either a general increase in the potential of the low-voltage installation with respect to the earth, that is
to say voltage stresses that can cause arcing in low-voltage equipment;

- or a general increase in the potential of the masses of the low-voltage installation with respect to the
earth, which may increase the fault and contact voltages.
The following paragraphs should be read in conjunction with the figures 442A To 442G.
- 126 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

442.2.1 Permissible voltage stresses at power frequency by the equipment of the low-voltage
installation

Low voltage equipment includes low voltage installation equipment and low voltage transformer substation
equipment. This paragraph deals with the voltage constraints of the equipment of the low-voltage
installation.

The admissible voltage stresses at industrial frequency by the LV masses of the transformer substation are
specified in standard NF C 13-100, 442.1.

H The voltage stresses at power frequency undergone by the equipment of the low-voltage installations in the
event of an earth fault in the high-voltage installations must not exceed the admissible voltage stresses
indicated in table 44A, depending on the duration of the fault.

Table 44A - Voltage stresses as a function of the duration of the fault

Duration Permissible voltage stresses by

(s) equipment for low-rise installations
voltage (Utb) (V)
>5 U0 + 250
≤5 U0 + 1200
NOTE - The first line of the table relates to high voltage power supply networks with long
breaking times, for example systems with compensated neutral.

The second line relates to high voltage power supply networks with short breaking times, for
example low impedance neutral diagrams.

NOTE - Table 44A is based on standard NF C 20-040.

442.2.2 Symbols
In this article, the following symbols are used:

IE is the part of the earth fault current in the high voltage installation which flows through the earth
connection of the transformer substation masses.
RP is the resistance of the earth connection of the transformer substation masses. is the
RTO resistance of the earth electrode of the low-voltage installation.
RB is the resistance of the earth connection of the neutral of the low-voltage installation, for low-voltage
installations in which the earth connection of the substation and neutral earths are electrically
independent.
RAB is the resistance of the interconnected earth electrodes of the neutral and the earths of the low-
voltage installation.
RPB is the resistance of the interconnected earth electrodes of the neutral and the transformer substation
grounds.
RPAB is the resistance of the interconnected earth electrodes of the neutral, of the
transformation and masses of the low voltage installation.

An earth electrode can be considered as electrically independent of another if a rise in potential of this
socket does not lead to an unacceptable rise in potential in the other earth electrode.

H U0 is the voltage between phase and neutral of the low voltage installation.
Uf is the voltage appearing in the low-voltage installation, between the masses and the earth, during the
fault.
U1 is the tension stress undergone by the low-voltage equipment of the transformer substation.

U2 is the tension stress undergone by the equipment of the low-voltage installation.

- 127 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H The following additional symbols are used in the IT diagram in which the earths of the low-voltage
installation are connected to an earth electrode which is electrically independent from that of the earths of
the transformer substation:
Id is the fault current which flows through the earth electrode of the low-voltage installation masses in
the presence of the first fault in the low-voltage network (see figures 442F and442G).

Z is the earth impedance of the neutral of the low-voltage installation.

442.2.3 Earthing in transformer substations

The earth of the transformer substation must be earthed in accordance with the
(*)
standards in force.

442.2.4 Applicable requirements according to the earth connection diagram for low-voltage
installations
If the risk of an insulation fault between the high-voltage installation and the low-voltage installation exists,
the neutral earth connection must meet the condition stated in 442.2.6.1.
The diagrams of the connections to the earth are symbolized by the two letters, the definition of which is given in
312.2, followed by a third which makes it possible to distinguish, according to the possible connections of the
masses of the station:
- substations whose masses are connected both to the neutral earth of the LV installation and to the
earths of the LV installation, installations designated by the third letter R;
- substations whose masses are connected to the earth of the neutral of the installation, but are not
connected to the masses of the LV installation, installations designated by the third letter N;

- installations whose masses are connected to an earth electrode which is electrically separate from that
of the LV neutral and that of the masses of the LV installation, installations designated by the third letter
S.

H 442.2.4.1 TN diagram

TNR scheme : the earth connection common to the neutral and to the earths of the low-voltage installation
is connected to the earth connection of the transformer substation (figure 442A).
In the area of influence of the main equipotential bonding present in each building, no dangerous contact
voltage appears and no maximum value is prescribed for the overall resistance of the earth electrode. If
masses are located outside this zone, the overall resistance of the earth electrode should not exceed 1 ohm.

If the transformer substation is inside a building, due to the provisions in force (*) for the earthing of the
substation masses, the earthing of the substation masses and the neutral of the installation at low voltage
are in fact electrically confused.
Job LV installation

U2
U1
HT
BT
L1
L2
L3

PEN

U2 = U 1 = U 0
U1 = U 0
Uf = R PAB I E
Uf
IE

R PAB

Figure 442A - TNR diagram

(*) NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200.

- 128 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H TNS diagram : if the neutral conductor of the low-voltage installation is connected to an earth electrode that
is electrically separate from that of the earths of the transformer substation, the condition in 442.2.5.1must
be applied (Figure 442B).
NOTE - The TNS scheme should not be confused with the TN-S scheme defined in 312.2.1 in which the neutral conductor is distinct from
the protective conductor.
Taking into account the comments in the paragraph relating to the TNR diagram, the non-connection of the
neutral conductor of the low-voltage installation to the earth connection of the transformer substation can only be
considered in cases such as substations on poles, substations. simplified prefabricated or semi-underground
prefabricated substations.
Job LV installation
U2
U1
HT
BT
L1
L2
L3

PEN

U2= U
U1 = U 0 0

Uf = 0
Uf
IE
U1 = R P IE + U 0
RP R AB

Figure 442B - TNS diagram

H 442.2.4.2 TT diagram

TTN scheme: if the neutral conductor of the low-voltage installation is connected to the earth electrode of
the transformer substation, the voltage constraint U2 = RPB IE + U0 must not exceed the allowable tensile
stress defined in the table 44A as a function of the high voltage fault breaking time (figure 442C).

Job LV installation
U2
U1
HT
BT
L1
L2
L3

NOT

U1 = U 0 U2 = R PB I E + U 0
Uf = 0
Uf
IE

R PB R TO
Figure 442C - TTN diagram

- 129 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H TTS scheme : if the neutral conductor of the low-voltage installation is connected to an earth electrode that
is electrically separate from that of the earths of the transformer substation, the condition in 442.2.5.1must
be applied (figure 442D).
Job LV installation
U2
U1
HT
BT
L1
L2
L3

NOT

U 1 = U0
Uf
IE

U2= U0 RTO
RP R
U1B = RP IE + U0 Uf = 0

Figure 442D - TTS diagram

H 442.2.4.3 IT diagram

ITR scheme : the earths of the low-voltage installation are connected to the earth of the earths of the
transformer substation and to that of the neutral (figure 442E).

In the area of influence of the main equipotential bonding prescribed in each building, no dangerous
contact voltage occurs and no maximum value is prescribed for the overall resistance of the earth electrode.
If masses are located outside this zone, the overall resistance of the earth electrode should not exceed 1
ohm.
(*)
If the transformer substation is inside a building, due to the provisions in force for earthing the substation
masses, the earthing of the substation masses and the masses of the low-voltage installation are, in fact,
electrically confused. As a result, as in the TN diagram, the electrical separation between the respective
earth connections of the substation grounds and the low voltage installation grounds can only be
considered in the same cases such as substations on poles, simplified substations. prefabricated or semi-
underground prefabricated stations. In these cases, it is desirable to interconnect the earth connections of
the substation grounds and the low voltage installation grounds,

(*) NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200.

- 130 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

Job LV installation
U2
U1
HT
BT
L1
L2
L3

PE
Uf
IE U1 = U0 3
U2 = U1 = U0 3
RPAB Uf = RPAB IE A first LV fault present

Figure 442E - ITR diagram

H ITN diagram : if, exceptionally, the earth connections of the substation grounds and the low voltage
installation grounds are electrically separate, the neutral impedance (or the earth terminal of the surge
limiter) can be connected to the earth connection masses of the post of
transformation; tension stressU2 = RPB IE + U0 3 must not exceed the constraint of
admissible voltage defined in table 44A as a function of the high voltage fault breaking time (figure 442F).

Job LV installation
U2
U1
HT
BT
L1
L2
L3

U1 = U0 3
U2 = RPB IE + U0 3Uf =
RTO Id
Id Uf
IE
A first LV fault present

RPB RTO

Figure 442F - ITN diagram

- 131 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H ITS diagram : if the neutral impedance is connected to an electrically separate earth (figure 442G), the
condition in 442.2.5.2 must be applied.

Job LV installation
U2
U1
HT
BT
L1
L2
L3

U1 = RP IE + U0 3U2
= U0 3
Uf = RTO Id
Id Uf
IE
A first LV fault present

RP RB RTO

Figure 442G - ITS diagram

442.2.5 Limitation of voltage stresses in low voltage transformer substation equipment

442.2.5.1 TN and TT diagrams

When in TN and TT diagrams, the neutral earth connection is electrically separate from that of the
transformer substation earths (figures 442B and 442D), the insulation level of the low-voltage equipment of
the transformer substation must be compatible with the voltage constraint (RP IE + U0).

442.2.5.2 IT diagram
When in the IT diagram, the earth connection of the neutral is electrically distinct from that of the earths of
the transformer substation (figure 442G), the insulation level of the low-voltage equipment of the
transformer substation must be compatible with the voltage constraint
(RP IE + U0 3).

NOTE - The distributor can give indications on the stresses which may occur.

442.2.6 Insulation faults between high voltage installation and low voltage installation

442.2.6.1 To guard against overvoltages due to direct faults between high voltage installations and low
voltage installations when the neutral earth connection is separate from the installation earth earth
connection (TTS and ITS diagrams), the condition following must be fulfilled:

UtB - U
RB ≤
IE

UtB being the admissible voltage stress at power frequency of the masses of the low-voltage installation
indicated in 442.2.1.

U being the nominal voltage of the installation (voltage between phase and neutral in the TT diagram and
voltage between phases in the IT diagram).

- 132 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H 442.2.6.2 In addition, in IT installations, a surge limiter device must be connected at the origin of the
installation between the earth of the neutral of the installation and either the neutral or a phase conductor.

The nominal starting voltage of this device must be lower than the voltage value UtB
reduced by the voltage between phase and neutral of the installation or by the voltage between phases depending on
whether it is connected to neutral or to a phase conductor.
The conditions for choosing and using surge-limiting devices are given in 534 and in guide UTE C 15-105.

H 442.2.6.3 The low voltage and high voltage electrical conduits must not use the same sheaths or channels,
unless arrangements are made so that the low voltage conduits cannot be subjected to a voltage greater
than their withstand voltage stress permissible at power frequency.

These arrangements may consist in placing the pipes of different voltages on separate supports.

H 442.3 and 442.4 (available)

442.5 Voltage stresses in the event of a break in the neutral conductor in TN and TT systems
Attention must be paid to the fact that in the event of a break in the neutral conductor in three-phase TN or
TT systems, the main, double and reinforced insulation as well as the equipment sized for phase-to-neutral
voltage may be temporarily subjected to phase-to-phase voltage. The constraint of
voltage can reach U = U0 3.

442.6 Voltage constraints in the event of a first earth fault in the IT system
Attention must be paid to the fact that in the event of the first earth fault of a phase conductor in an IT
system, the main, double and reinforced insulation as well as the equipment sized for phase-to-neutral
voltage may be temporarily subjected to line voltage. The constraint of
voltage can reach U = U0 3.

442.7 Voltage constraints in the event of a short-circuit between phase and neutral in the low-voltage
installation
Attention must be paid to the fact that in the event of a short-circuit between phase and neutral, the voltage
stresses can reach the value of 1.45 U0 for a period of not more than 5s.

443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to operations

Electrical equipment comprising electronic components is now widely used both in industrial, tertiary and
domestic installations. In addition, a large number of this equipment remains in a state of permanent watch
and performs control or security functions. The low resistance of these devices to overvoltages has given
increased importance to the protection of low-voltage electrical installations, and in particular to the use of
surge arresters for their protection against induced overvoltages transmitted through the electrical network
or communication networks.

H 443.1 Scope and object

This article deals with the protection of electrical installations against transient overvoltages of atmospheric
origin transmitted by the distribution networks and against switching overvoltages created by the
equipment of the installation.

It is necessary to take into account the overvoltages which may appear at the origin of an installation, the
presumed keraunic level, the location and the characteristics of the control devices.

- 133 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

overvoltage protection, so that the probabilities of incidents due to overvoltage stresses are reduced to an
H acceptable level for the safety of people and property, as well as for the desired continuity of service.

The values of transient overvoltages depend on the nature of the supply network (underground or
overhead) and on the possible presence of protection devices against overvoltages upstream of the origin of
the installation and the nominal voltage of the supply. at low voltage.

This clause contains guidance when surge protection is satisfied by the natural situation or provided by the
controlled situation. If the protection in accordance with this article is not provided, the isolation
coordination is not ensured and the risk due to overvoltages must be estimated. The provisions of this
article assume that the equipment meets at least the rated impulse withstand voltage values of thetable
44B.

NOTE - The rules in this clause do not apply to telecommunications installations.

An informative appendix to guide UTE C 15-443 gives recommendations for the protection of communication installations against
overvoltages of atmospheric origin, as well as for the coordination of this protection with that of power installations.

These rules are intended to describe the means that can limit transient overvoltages in order to reduce to
an acceptable level the risk of failure in the installation and in the electrical equipment connected to it. This
approach is in accordance with the principles of insulation coordination of standard NF C 20-040
"Coordination of the insulation of equipment in low voltage systems (networks)", which requires technical
committees to specify the category. appropriate shock withstand voltage (overvoltage category) of their
equipment, which means a minimum shock withstand voltage for the equipment according to its nature.

Information on the sizing of surge arresters and additional provisions are given in guide UTE C 15-443.

In accordance with 2.1.1.2 of standard NF C 20-040, the technical committees must specify the useful
information to be provided with the equipment.

In addition, electrical installations are subject to temporary power-frequency overvoltages described in 442
which are taken into account for the choice and the implementation of the protection devices given in 534.

For specific applications where the consequences of a fault can be very damaging, it is recommended to
carry out a risk assessment and to take the measures accordingly.

Industrial installations equipped with motors and power electronics may be subject to specific overvoltages.
They require specific analysis and treatment within the installation.

The notion of keraunic level Nk used in the AQ classification (number of days per year when thunder is
heard) is supplanted by that of lightning density Ng (Number of lightning strikes per km² per year).

H 443.2 Classification of shock resistance categories (overvoltage categories)

443.2.1 Purpose of the classification of shock withstand categories (overvoltage categories)

See table 44B.

H The shock resistance categories are a means of distinguishing the various degrees of availability of the
equipment according to the continuity of the service and the acceptable risk of failure. With the help of the
choices of the preferred series of impulse withstand voltages, they make it possible to achieve an
appropriate coordination of the insulation throughout the installation, thus reducing the risk of failure to an
acceptable level and giving a basis for controlling overvoltages.

- 134 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

A higher characteristic number of shock resistance category (overvoltage category) indicates better impact
resistance of the equipment and offers a wider choice of methods for controlling overvoltages.

The concept of shock resistance categories is used for equipment supplied directly by the network.

Surges of atmospheric origin do not undergo significant attenuation downstream in most installations.

See guide UTE C 15-443.

H 443.2.2 Description of shock resistance categories (overvoltage categories)

Category I
Category I impact resistance equipment is equipment intended to be connected to the fixed electrical
installation of buildings. In this case, protective measures are taken outside the equipment - either in the
fixed installation or between the fixed installation and the equipment, in order to limit transient
overvoltages to a specified level.
Examples :
- equipment comprising particularly sensitive electronic circuits;
- computer workstations;
- household appliances with electronic programming, etc.
These reduced impact withstand devices are designed for an impact withstand voltage generally not
exceeding 1.5 kV.
Protective measures may have been taken inside the equipment. In this case, information must be given by
the manufacturer.
H Category II
Category II impact resistance equipment is equipment intended for connection to the building's fixed
electrical installation.
Examples :
- mechanically programmed household electrical appliances;
- portable tools, etc.

These normal shock withstand devices are designed for a shock withstand voltage of at least 2.5 kV.

H Category III
Category III impact resistance equipment is equipment belonging to fixed installation and other equipment
for which a higher level of reliability is required.
Examples :
- distribution cabinets, switchgear (circuit breakers, switches, socket outlets, etc.), pipes and their
accessories (cables, busbars, junction boxes, etc.);
- equipment for industrial use and equipment such as fixed motors with a permanent connection to the
fixed installation.

These high impact withstand equipment and other equipment are designed for an impulse withstand
voltage of at least 4 kV.

H Category IV
Category IV shock resistance equipment is used at the origin or in the vicinity of the origin of the installation
upstream of the distribution panel.
Examples :
- electricity meters;
- main equipment for protection against overcurrents;
- telemetry devices, etc.
These very high impact withstand devices are designed for an impact withstand voltage of at least 6 kV.

- 135 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H 443.3 Provisions for overvoltage control

NOTES -
1 - Direct lightning strikes on low voltage overhead lines or on electrical installations in buildings are not taken into account (conditions
of external influences AQ 3).
2 - The control of overvoltages due to operations in the installation is generally not necessary; in fact, statistical measurements have
shown that a risk of overvoltages due to operations greater than overvoltage category II is low.

The risk assessment method applicable in France is given in guide UTE C 15-443.

H When a building is equipped with a lightning rod, lightning protection is implemented in accordance with
534.1.4.2.

443.3.1 Natural situation

Situation of an electrical system (distribution network and installation) where, thanks to the same
characteristics system (network), it can be expected that surges
presumed transients are lower than the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment.

H 443.3.1.1 When an installation is supplied by an entirely underground low-voltage network and does not
include overhead lines, the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment, given in the table 44B, is sufficient
and no additional protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin is required.

NOTE - An overhead line consisting of insulated conductors with a metallic screen connected to the earth or having a conductor
connected to the earth is considered to be equivalent to an underground cable.

443.3.1.2 When an installation is supplied by, or includes, an overhead line at low

voltage and that the condition of external influences is QA 1 (≤ 25 days per year), no additional protection
against overvoltages of atmospheric origin is required.

NOTES -
1 - Additional surge protection may be required in situations where a higher level of reliability or higher risk (eg fire) is expected.

2 - In accordance with the UTE C 15-443 guide, 25 stormy days per year are equivalent to a value of 2.5 strokes per km² and per year. This
is due to the formula:
NOTg =NOTK / 10

3 - In some cases, the implementation of overvoltage protection may depend on the risk assessment method chosen in order to replace
the conditions of external influences (see guide UTE C 15-443).

443.3.2 Controlled situation

Situation of an electrical system (distribution network and installation) where, thanks to specific reduction
means, the presumed transient overvoltages can be expected to be lower than the impulse withstand
voltage of the equipment.

H 443.3.2.1 When an installation is supplied by, or includes, an overhead line, a protective measure against
overvoltages of atmospheric origin must be provided in accordance with 443.3.2.2, if the keraunic level of
the place in question corresponds to the condition of external influences.AQ2 (> 25 days per year). The Up
protection level of the protection devices must not be greater than the value of overvoltage category II,
given in thetable 44B.

The decision to use a controlled situation can be based, replacing the conditionsQA, on the use of a
specified risk assessment method.

NOTE - Particular protection may be necessary in situations where a higher level of reliability or a higher risk (eg fire) is expected and the
acceptable risk depending on the use of the installation would be exceptionally low.

443.3.2.2 Under the conditions of 443.3.2.1, a protective measure against overvoltages of atmospheric
origin may be provided in the installation of buildings by a lightning protection device appropriate to the
level of protection required in the installation and placed in accordance with 534.

- 136 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

Other means providing at least an equivalent attenuation of the overvoltages can be used.

H NOTES -
1 - The level of overvoltages can be controlled by protection devices against overvoltages placed on overhead lines or in the installation
of buildings.
2 - The coordination of surge arresters in cascade is under study.

In France, this coordination is dealt with in the UTE C 15-443 guide.

H In conclusion, the choice for the designer of the installation or for the installer is:
- either if the condition QA is greater than AQ1 and if the installation is supplied by or includes an
overhead line, to provide for the implementation of a surge arrester;
- or to follow the risk analysis process of the UTE C 15-443 guide.

For the conditions QA, see also l'Schedule C to part 7-771.

H 443.4 Choice of materials in the installation

443.4.1 The equipment is chosen so that their rated impulse withstand voltage is not lower than the impulse
withstand voltage prescribed in the table 44B. It is the responsibility of the product committees to prescribe
the rated impulse withstand voltage of their equipment in the corresponding standards, as specified intable
44B.

NOTE - The rated impulse withstand voltage is the impulse withstand voltage value fixed by the manufacturer for the equipment or a
part of it, characterizing the specified withstand capacity of its insulation against transient overvoltages (in accordance with 1.3 .9.2 of
standard NF C 20-040).

443.4.2 Equipment with impulse withstand voltage lower than that specified in Table 44B may be used, if a
greater risk is accepted. Lightning protection devices and their series protection devices must safely
withstand temporary overvoltages in442.

Table 44B - Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) prescribed for equipment

Nominal voltage Equipment impact resistance category

of
installation
U0/ U (kV)
(V)
(IV) (III) (II) (I)
230/400 6 4 2.5 1.5
400/690 8 6 4 2.5
690/1000 Values offered by the equipment manufacturers. Otherwise, the values in the line
above can be chosen.

443.5 Characteristics of surge protection devicesSurge arresters in installations must

comply with standard NF C 61-740.

444 Measures to limit electromagnetic interference

H 444.0 General
Lightning currents, switching operations, short circuits and other electromagnetic phenomena can cause
overvoltages and electromagnetic interference.

These phenomena appear:

- whether there are large metal buckles;
- if electrical conduits of different systems follow different routes, for example for the power supply and
for the signals of information processing equipment inside the building.

The value of the induced voltage depends on the gradient (di/dt) the interference current and the size of the
loop.

- 137 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H Power cables that carry large, rapidly growing currents (di/dt), (for example the starting currents of elevators
or the currents controlled by rectifiers) can induce overvoltages in the cables of the data processing
equipment which can disturb or damage this equipment or similar equipment.

Near or in premises for medical use, electric or magnetic fields linked to the electrical installation can
disturb medical electrical equipment.

444.1 Scope
This article informs architects, designers and electrical installers about installation principles that can limit
electromagnetic interference. Fundamental principles are given there to mitigate these disturbances.
Additional requirements are given in other parts or articles (for example, in545), standards NF C 17-100 and
NF C 17-102. These principles are consistent with those of the standards cited above (figure 444C).

444.2 (available)

444.3 Measures to be taken against electrical and magnetic influences on electrical equipment

All electrical equipment must meet the appropriate electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements and
comply with the relevant EMC standards.
See as well 545.
Special rules relating to the cohabitation of power and communication networks are given in the UTE C
15-900 guide.

The following points should be taken into consideration for the design and implementation of electrical
installations.

H 444.3.1 Location of potential sources of disturbance in relation to sensitive materials.

444.3.2 Location of sensitive equipment in relation to high currents present, for example in distribution bars
or equipment such as elevators.

444.3.3 Installation of filters and / or surge arresters in circuits supplying sensitive electrical equipment.

444.3.4 Choice of protection devices with appropriate delays to avoid unwanted tripping due to transients.

444.3.5 Equipotentiality of metal enclosures and screens.

444.3.6 Appropriate separation (distance or shielding) of power and communication cables including
changes of direction and crossings of walls, crossings at right angles.

444.3.6.1 In the parts between the distributors, the power and communication cables must run on separate
metallic or insulating supports. The minimum distance between the walls closest to the supports is 30 cm.

444.3.6.2 In the terminal parts between the distributors and the points of use, the cables of the power and
communication networks can run on or in common supports.

The separation distances depend on the installation method concerned:

- exposed cables, in false floors or in false ceilings: minimum separation of 5 cm;
- method of laying in trunking and profiled conduits, install the networks in the different compartments
in decreasing order of sensitivity with respect to the ground plane (the most sensitive network being the
closest to the ground plane);
- recessed or visible ducts: separate ducts unless the supplier specifies otherwise.

- 138 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H 444.3.7 Appropriate separation (distance or shielding) of power and communication cables, from the down
conductors of lightning protection systems (see NF C 17-100 and figure 444C).

444.3.8 Reduction of induction loops by choosing a common route for the pipes of the various systems (see
also 444.4.4).

444.3.9 Use of shielded and / or twisted pair cables for communication circuits.

444.3.10 Shortest possible equipotential connections.

444.3.11 Installation in earthed metal enclosures or the equivalent of pipes made up of separate
conductors.

444.3.12 Avoid the TN-C scheme in installations containing sensitive equipment (see 545.4). For buildings
which contain or are likely to include information processing equipment in a significant way, the TN-C
diagram is only allowed between the entry point and the general distribution switchboard (TGBT).
Downstream, the pattern is TN-S.
Equipotential bonding conductor, if NOT THE
necessary PE

Equipment 1

U
1)
Communication circuit
2)

Equipment 2

1) The voltage drop ∆U is avoided along the PE

2) Restricted surface loop
Figure 444A - Implementation of a TN-S scheme in a building

- 139 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

The TT system can lead to higher overvoltages than in the TN system between the active parts of the
equipment and their grounds. Indeed, these active parts and the masses can each be connected to separate
earth electrodes, the potentials of which change separately (see below).443).

In an IT scheme, a first insulation fault can cause the line-to-phase voltage to appear between a phase
conductor and the earth of the equipment.

This constraint is not acceptable for electronic equipment supplied directly between phase and neutral and
whose design does not provide for this phase-to-phase voltage between phase and ground (see the
corresponding requirements in EN 60950 for information processing equipment. ).

H 444.3.13 Metal pipes (eg for water, gas or heating) and building power cables should enter the building at
the same place. Shields, screens, metal pipes and their connections must be connected to each other and to
the building's main equipotential bonding (LEP) (figure 444B), using low impedance conductors.

444.3.14 In the case of separate areas or buildings with separate main equipotential bonding, it is
recommended to use optical fiber cables without metallic part or any other non-conductive system for the
communication links.

NOTE - The problem of earths brought to different voltages in large public telecommunication networks is the responsibility of the
distributor who may use other methods.

444.4 Protection measures for communication circuits

In buildings with a PEN conductor or when electromagnetics appear on communication cablesdisturbances
due to
inappropriate arrangements of the electrical installation (see 545.5), the following methods can be taken
into consideration to avoid or minimize the phenomenon.

444.4.1 Use of optical fibers for communication links.

444.4.2 Use of class II equipment.

444.4.3 Local use of two-winding transformers for powering data processing equipment, taking into account
the requirements of 411.6 in an IT scheme (local IT scheme), or article 413 for protection by electrical
separation.

444.4.4 Use of appropriate duct routes to minimize the areas formed by the loops formed jointly by the
power supply cables and the communication cables.

- 140 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44
Food
Telephone power
H Telephone Earth outlet by loop
background I I
Food
power

I
THE P
THE P
• •
• I
I • ••
•• Cable fabric V
Cable fabric •• V of the antenna
•
of the antenna
I

Water, gas, Water, gas, I

communal heating, communal heating,
waste waste
IEC 320/96 IEC 321/96

Figure 444B1 Figure 444B2

Common penetration is preferred: Penetrations in various places
U≅0V to be avoided: U ≠ 0 V

THE P main equipotential bonding

I induced current

Figure 444B - Penetration of armored cables and metal pipes

in a building (examples)

- 141 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H
Class II Class I

8
FE

Board Board
BT BT

3
Slab
3 7

PE
Class I Class II Class I
2

FE

Board Board
BT BT

6
Slab
3 7

Telecommunications conductors for

telecom or data processing system Surge arresters PE
information
1-5
FE
Power supply

Diagram
TN-S Main earth terminal

Diagram
TN-C
To the earth, for
PEN Neutral PE example: the loop
deep down

FE: Functional grounding conductor (optional), used and grounded according to operator's instructions

Reference Description of the measures represented Item

1) Cables and metal conduits enter the building at the same place 444.3.14
2) Common pipeline routing with adapted separations and avoiding loops 444.3.8

3) Links as short as possible and use of accompanying conductors (see guide UTE C 444.3.10
15-900)
4) Shielded and / or twisted pair communication cables 444.3.9
5) Avoid the TN-C scheme beyond the entry point of delivery 444.3.12
6) Use of transformers with separate windings 444.4.3
7) Equipotential bonding 545.2
8) Use of class II equipment 444.4.2

Figure 444C - Illustration of the measures described by this article in a building

- 142 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

H (Protection system
against lightning)

Driver
descent

PE Plinths
AC outlets

Mesh
PE
Plinths
AC outlets

Wardrobes
PE

1) Computer science 2)
UPS

3)

Cable path
metallic TGBT

Main terminal Equipotential bonding

earthen according to NF C 17-100

1) Telephony
2) Home and building Full buckle
electronic systems excavation

3) Local horizontal
equipotential bonding
AC Power
PE Protective conductor
an AC power supply

Figure 444D - Schematic diagram of the grounding of a building

- 143 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-44

445 Protection against brownouts

H

445.1 General requirements

445.1.1 Precautions must be taken when the disappearance of the voltage and its reestablishment could
entail dangers for persons and property. Likewise, appropriate precautions must be taken when part of the
installation or user equipment may be damaged by a drop in voltage.

A protective device against the effects of voltage drops is not required if the damage to the installation or to
the equipment constitutes an acceptable risk without causing danger to persons.

This rule applies in particular to devices comprising motors capable of starting automatically after a stop
due to a drop in voltage below a certain value.
Machines subject to the decree of July 29, 1992 must meet this requirement.

H 445.1.2 Protective devices against the effects of brownouts may be delayed if the operation of the device
they are protecting allows for a short interruption or drop in voltage without danger.

445.1.3 If contactors are used, the delay in opening and reclosing must not prevent instantaneous breaking
by control or protection devices.

445.1.4 The characteristics of protective devices against the effects of voltage drops must be compatible
with the requirements of the standards relating to the commissioning and use of the equipment.

445.1.5 When reclosing a protective device is likely to create a dangerous situation, reclosing must not be
automatic.

____________

- 144 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-46

Part 4-46 - Disconnection and control

460 Introduction ................................................. .................................................. ............... 146

461 General ................................................. .................................................. ................ 146
462 Disconnection ................................................. .................................................. .......... 146
463 Emergency shutdown .............................................. .................................................. ....... 147
464 Cut-off for mechanical maintenance .............................................. ................................. 148
465 Functional control ................................................ .............................................. 148

- 145 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-46

460 Introduction

This part deals with disconnection and non-automatic control measures, local or remote, which are
used in order to avoid or eliminate dangers with electrical installations or equipment and machines
supplied with electrical energy.
The rules in this part can be applied to automatic functions provided that all the safety provisions are
met.
By non-automatic control is meant a manual action.

H 461 General

461.1 Depending on the desired functions, any device provided for disconnection or control must
meet the corresponding requirements of article 536.
461.2 A control device and a disconnecting device must be placed at the origin of any installation,
cutting all the active conductors of the entire installation.

The control device and the disconnecting device are usually combined in one device (see 536.1).

In installations supplied directly by a public low-voltage distribution network, this device can be the
general control and protection device.

H 461.3 In the TN-C diagram, the PEN conductor must not be cut or cut. In the TN-S diagram, the
neutral conductor must be able to be cut and cut.
NOTE - It is recalled that in all the diagrams, the protective conductor must neither be cut nor cut (see also 543.4).

462 Disconnection

462.1 Any circuit must be capable of being cut on each of the active conductors, with the exception of
the PEN conductor, as prescribed in 461.3
Additional arrangements may be made for the isolation of a set of circuits by the same device, if the
operating conditions allow it.
It is specified that the expression “if the operating conditions allow it” means that the corresponding
cut-out is necessary in operation to allow maintenance or repair work to be carried out with the
power off.
In order to guard against any possible return feed, it may be necessary to provide disconnection
upstream and downstream of the part to be de-energized.
In the case of a TN-C circuit power supply to an electrical cabinet with TN-S circuit feeders, a three-
pole disconnection and control device implemented on the incoming pipe is satisfactory to ensure the
disconnection function. control and emergency shutdown, regardless of the number and distribution
of TN-S and TN-C feeders in the cabinet.

Special circuits of transformer stations

(1)
In installations supplied by a transformer substation, the standard in force provides for the supply of
a certain number of circuits between the output terminals of the transformer and the general control
and protection device of the low-voltage installation.

These circuits must be fitted with a disconnecting device at their origin and are essentially intended to
supply the lighting of the substation, the socket outlets, the

-------
(1) NF C 13-100

- 146 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-46

transformer protection relays, the tripping coil of any high voltage circuit breaker, certain relays, etc.

It is recalled that the protection of these circuits is ensured by protection devices against overcurrents
which must have a breaking capacity at least equal to the short-circuit current at the output terminals
of the transformer.
It is also recalled that protection against indirect contacts is ensured by the equipotential bonding
provided for in sub-paragraph 413.1.1 of the standard relating to
(2)
delivery . The materials for these circuits are chosen in accordance with the rules of311.2.2 of the
same standard (2).

H 462.2 Appropriate means must be provided to prevent any untimely switching on of the equipment.

NOTE - These arrangements may include one or more of the following measures:
- conviction,
- warning signs,
- available in a room or in a lockable enclosure.
Short-circuiting and earthing can be used as an additional measure.

These provisions make it possible to carry out the logging provided for in Publication UTE C 18-510.

It is also possible to satisfy this rule by locking or remote locking, provided that the devices have the
same degree of security.

H 462.3 When a piece of equipment or an enclosure contains active parts connected to several power
supplies, a warning sign must be placed in such a way that any person having access to the active
parts is warned of the need to cut these parts from the different power supplies, unless 'a lock
ensures that all the circuits concerned are disconnected.

462.4 Appropriate means must be provided, if necessary, to ensure the discharge of the stored
electrical energy.
After disconnection, certain equipment (such as capacitors, cables, etc.) can cause the risk of electric
shock, it is then necessary to ensure their discharge, for example by closing a switch ensuring the
connection of the conductors to the earth .

H
463 Emergency shutdown

463.1 Emergency shutdown means must be provided for any part of the installation for which it may
be necessary to cut off the power supply in order to eliminate an unexpected danger.

Examples of installations in which an emergency shutdown is used are:

- pumping of flammable liquids;
- electrical laboratories;
- testing platforms;
- boiler rooms;
- large kitchens;
- laboratories of educational institutions;
- high voltage powered discharge lamps (eg neon signs).
The emergency cut-off devices installed on the low voltage supply circuits of discharge lamps supplied
with high voltage (for example, neon signs) must also perform the disconnection function (see NF C
15-150-1).

-------
(2) NF C 13-100

- 147 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-46

Emergency shutdown devices should not be confused with the emergency shutdown devices
prescribed by the regulations for certain equipment, in particular for machines, by the decree of July
29, 1992.

The control device used to start and stop a user device or the emergency stop device can be used as
an emergency cut-off device if it satisfies all the conditions corresponding to this function.

Article 10 of the decree of November 14, 1988 has a wider field of application since it concerns all
terminal circuits. This article is notably based on the observation that many single-phase terminal
circuits (for example, lighting circuits) are controlled by switches or single-pole switches. Compliance
with article 10 ensures that an emergency cut-off device is necessarily implemented upstream of such
circuits.

An emergency cut-off device can be common to a set of circuits.

H 463.2 The emergency cut-off device must cut off all active conductors. However, in the
TN-C scheme, the PEN conductor should not be cut.

463.3 The emergency disconnection means must act as directly as possible on the appropriate supply
conductors.
The arrangements must be such that a single maneuver is sufficient to cut off the appropriate power
supply.
By means of emergency cut-off is meant the manual control member acting on the device comprising
the devices capable of interrupting the current under supply conditions, either directly or by means of
transmission systems ( mechanical, electrical, electronic, pneumatic, ...).

H 463.4 The provisions of the emergency cut-off system must be such that its operation does not cause
another danger or interfere with the complete operation necessary to eliminate the danger.

463.5 The emergency cut-off device must be located at the level of the user devices, it being
understood that the same device can involve several devices.
The operating device must be easily recognizable and quickly accessible.
A maneuvering device whose action requires the breaking of a glass is considered to be quickly
accessible.

464 Cut-off for mechanical maintenance

Devices providing both the disconnection function (see 462) and the emergency cut-off function (see
463) are sometimes prescribed.
These devices are sometimes called proximity cut-off devices.
Examples of equipment where mechanical maintenance shutoffs are used are pumps and fans.

The cut-off of any associated electrical supply may not be sufficient in the case of systems supplied by
other energies, for example in the form of pneumatic, hydraulic or steam.

H 465 Functional control

465.1 General

465.1.1 A functional control device must be provided on any circuit element which may need to be
controlled independently from other parts of the installation.

- 148 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 4-46

H
465.1.2 Functional control devices do not necessarily cut all active conductors in a circuit.

A single pole control device must not be placed on the neutral conductor.
This rule may not be applied to control circuits (see guide UTE C15- 476, 10.2).

The control device can be:

- either a device incorporated in the apparatus if the latter has one;
- either a device placed near each device;
- either a device controlling the entire installation and placed on the distribution panel or in the
immediate vicinity if the installation concerns only one level;
- or a device controlling all the devices of the same level, when the installation involves several
levels.
The devices below are defined in the table 53D of this standard.
A thermostat can only constitute the control device if it has an "cut" position and if this cut affects all
phase conductors.

H 465.1.3 In general, any user apparatus requiring control should be controlled by an appropriate
functional controller.
A single functional control device can control several devices intended to operate simultaneously.

H 465.1.4 Sockets can ensure functional control if their rated current is at most equal to 32 A.

465.1.5 The functional control devices ensuring the changeover of power sources must involve all
active conductors and must not be able to put the sources in parallel, unless the installation is
specially designed for this condition.

In these cases, no provision has to be made for the disconnection of the PEN conductors.

465.2 Control circuits

The control circuits must be designed, arranged and protected in such a way as to limit the dangers
resulting from a fault between the control circuit and other conductive parts liable to cause
malfunction of the controlled device (for example inadvertent operation) .

465.3 Motor control

The starting devices can be combined with those ensuring the protection of the motors; they must
then comply with the rules applicable to protective devices.
The various control and adjustment devices of a motor or of a set of associated motors must be
suitably grouped (see 514.1).
H 465.3.1 Motor control circuits must be designed in such a way as to prevent an automatic starting of
an engine after a stop due to a drop or a lack of voltage, if such starting is likely to cause danger.

465.3.2 When the back-current braking of a motor is provided, every precaution must be taken to
avoid the reversal of the direction of rotation at the end of the braking, if such reversal could cause a
danger.

465.3.3 When safety depends on the direction of rotation of a motor, measures must be taken to
prevent operation in the opposite direction, caused, for example, by the disappearance of a phase.

- 149 -
NF C 15-100 Part 4-46

(Blank page)

- 150 -
TITLE 5. - Choice and implementation of materials

Part 5-51 - Rules common to all equipment

Part 5-52 - Additional rules for pipelines

Part 5-53 - Switchgear (Protection, control, isolation and monitoring)

Part 5-54 - Earthing, protective and equipotentiality conductors

Part 5-55 - Other materials

Part 5-56 - Security installations

NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

Part 5-51 - Rules common to all equipment

510 Application domain .............................................. .................................................. .. 152

511 Compliance with standards ............................................... ................................................. 152
512 Operating conditions and classification of external influences ........................... 153
513 Accessibility of electrical equipment .............................................. ........................... 184
514 Identification and location ............................................... .............................................. 184
515 Independence of materials ............................................... ......................................... 187

Annex A - (informative) - Short list of external influences ....................................... 188

Annex B - Identification of protective and earthing conductors

in fixed installations .............................................. .................................................. .. 189

____________

- 151 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

H 510 Scope

This part deals with the choice of materials and their implementation. It must make it possible to meet the
protective measures to ensure safety, the requirements for ensuring satisfactory operation of the
installation for the intended use and the requirements appropriate to the conditions of foreseeable external
influences. The equipment must be selected and installed in such a way as to satisfy the rules set out in this
part and, as far as they are applicable to it, those of the other parts of this standard.

511 Compliance with standards

511.1 All electrical equipment must comply with the appropriate European standard (EN) or harmonization
document (HD) or the national standard resulting from the HD. In the absence of EN or HD, the equipment
must comply with the appropriate national standards. In all other cases, reference should be made to the
appropriate IEC standard or to the appropriate national standard of another country.

The use of materials conforming to the standards published by the Technical Union of Electricity and
Communication makes it possible to comply with this rule.
When a material is covered with a mark of conformity with standards, it is considered without further
verification as conforming to these standards.
For certain so-called industrial use equipment, compliance with standards is provided either by a declaration
of conformity from the manufacturer, or by a certificate of conformity drawn up by an accredited body.

An accredited body is a body that has obtained accreditation issued by COFRAC (French Accreditation
Committee), or by an equivalent committee designated by the multilateral mutual recognition agreements
signed between COFRAC and its European and international counterparts within the framework of the 'ECA
(European Cooperation of Accreditation) and IAF (International Accreditation Form).

The CE marking certifies the product's compliance with the provisions (essential requirements and
assessment procedures) of the Low Voltage Directive on safety and / or the Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive on the electromagnetic environment. This marking does not prejudge the conformity of the
product with the standards (see133.1). In particular, it does not guarantee its level of performance or its
suitability for the job.

H 511.2 When for a given electrical equipment, there is no standard that can be applied to it, the manufacturer
or the importer must be able to present a report drawn up by an accredited body for the certification of
products.
The so-called industrial use equipment is the subject of a declaration issued by the manufacturer or the
importer acting on his behalf, specifying that they meet the safety requirements under the conditions of use
provided.
In the event of a dispute, the manufacturer or the importer must be able to present a report drawn up by an
accredited body.

511.3 An installation process not described in this standard must be the subject of a study by the Technical
Union of Electricity which will, if necessary, issue an Opinion on the application of this process in the to the
extent that it satisfies the rules of this standard.
Likewise, some equipment, although covered by standards, may be used under conditions different from
those provided for in this standard; such applications must be subject to the same procedure.

UTE Commission 07 issues technical opinions for new installation processes.

- 152 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

H 512 Operating conditions and classification of external influences

Electrical equipment must be chosen taking into account:

- operating conditions (512.1),
- conditions of external influences (512.2).

512.1 Operating conditions

512.1.1 Voltage
The electrical equipment must be suitable for the nominal voltage value (rms value in alternating current) of
the installation.

If, in an IT installation, the neutral conductor is distributed, the equipment connected between a phase and
the neutral must be isolated for the voltage between phases.

NOTE - For some equipment, it may be necessary to take into account the lowest voltage likely to occur.

The rated voltage of a device must be at least equal to the rated voltage of the installation.

For the application of this rule, a distinction should be made between the equipment depending on whether or
not their operation depends on the voltage:
- Case of equipment whose operation depends on voltage.

For this equipment, the rated voltage is chosen taking into account the nature of the equipment and the
indications that may be given on this subject in the standards which concern them, as well as variations in
the nominal voltage of the installation.

- Case of equipment whose operation does not depend on voltage.

a) Conductors and cables

Three reference voltages are defined for the cables:
Uo Rated rms voltage between phase and earth, used in particular as base value for tests,

U Rated rms voltage between phases used in particular as base value for tests, (U = U0 3)

Um Maximum effective phase-to-phase voltage for which the cable is designed. This is the highest
effective value ofthe voltage that can be withstood under normal operating conditions, at any time
and at any point in the installation.

All of these three values constitute the rated voltage of the product: Uo/ U (Um). The
existing rated voltage values are:
300/300 V, 300/500 V, 450/750 V, 600/1000 V.
Conductors and cables with rated voltage 600/1000 volts can be used in all low voltage electrical
installations.
Conductors and cables of rated voltage 300/500 or 450/750 V can only be used in installations whose
nominal voltage is at most equal to 500 or 750 V. However, as an exception to the general rule, 07RN-F
cables can be used in fixed installations with nominal voltage up to 1000 volts.

Flexible cables of rated voltage 300/300 volts may only be used in parts of the installation where the rated
voltage does not exceed 300 volts in alternating current or direct current.

- 153 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

The cables of the FRN05 WU, FRN05 WR and AR series and the following series: H05WF and A05 WF(if they
are permanently fixed) can be used in IT 230/400 V installations, because the insulation characteristics
between the protective conductor and the other conductors on the one hand, and between each conductor
and the surface on the other hand, is compatible with the presence of voltage of 400 V between phase and
earth.

b) Apparatus

The standards relating to the switchgear provide for the following values of rated voltages:
- for example 250 and up to 440 volts for equipment for domestic and similar installations, - for example 230
V, 400 V, 690 V and 1000 V for other equipment.

Some equipment is specified by several rated voltages, each characteristic of a particular circuit. Each of
these circuits should then be considered separately by applying the appropriate rule to it.

For equipment other than protection devices, equipment with a rated voltage of 250 V is generally
admissible in 230/400 V installations, whatever the diagram, because the dielectric test voltages, the
creepage lines and the distances in the air between active parts and accessible parts are provided
accordingly.
It is recalled that in the IT diagram, cut-out on the first fault is not required, the installation may operate
with a phase to earth as long as this fault is not eliminated.
It is therefore necessary to choose a switchgear whose phase-to-ground insulation is appropriate for the nominal voltage
between phases of the installation.
Consequently, it is up to the manufacturer to indicate the possibility of using switchgear with rated voltage
250 volts in 230/400 volts installations in IT scheme, unless the switchgear complies with a standard which
specifies a level of 'insulation compatible with use in an IT system.

(1)
This is particularly the case for equipment conforming to one of the following standards:
In addition, for overcurrent protection devices, the breaking conditions defined in 533.3.

H 512.1.2 Running
The electrical equipment must be chosen taking into account the operating current (rms value in alternating
current) which passes through it in normal service. It is also necessary to consider the current likely to flow
through them under abnormal conditions, taking into account the duration of the passage of such a current
according to the possible protection devices.

It is generally not necessary to take into account the overcurrents which may occur, for example during the
commissioning of a user device, unless these overcurrents are frequent and prolonged, in which case it may
be necessary to choose equipment with a rated current higher than that which would result from the
application of the rule.

(1)
NF EN 60742 (C 52-742) NF EN NF EN 60269-1 (C 60-200) NF EN NF EN 60269-3 (C 61-202) NF EN NF C 61-203
60669-1 (C 61-110) NF C 60669-2-1 (C 61-111) NF EN 60669-2-2 (C 61-112) NF EN NF EN 60669-2-3 (C 61-113) NF C
61-141 61008-1 (C 61-150) NF EN 50075 60799 (C61-351) 61-300
NF C 61-303 (C 61-304) NF C 61-305 NF C 61-306
NF C 61-320 NF EN 60320-1 (C 61-350) NF C NF C 61-601 NF EN 60320-2-1 (C 61-355) NF
NF C 61-400 61-401 NF EN 60934 (C 61-406) NF EN 60898 (C 61-410)
NF EN 61009-1 (C 61-440) NF C NF EN 61184 (C 61-510) NF EN 60238 (C 61-550) NF EN NF C 62-911
61-602 C 61-650 61242 (C 61-720) NF C NF C 61-740
NF C 61-750 NF C 61-910 62-411 NF C 62-412
NF EN 60269-2 (C 63-210) NF C 63-213 NF EN 60598-2-8 (C 71-008)

- 154 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

The sub-paragraph 330.1.1 as well as guide UTE C 15-105, point I, provide information for estimating the
operating current.
The value of the short-circuit current to be considered for the determination of the thermal and
electrodynamic stresses, and of the breaking capacity, takes into account the limiting capacity of any
limiting devices.

This can be obtained either by an adequate construction of the materials, or by built-in devices, In certain
situations where the intensity of the short-circuit current can be particularly great - for example near a high
power transformer - of the devices limiters can be installed to limit the effects of short-circuit currents.

512.1.3 Frequency
H
If the frequency has an influence on the characteristics of electrical equipment, their nominal frequency
must correspond to the frequency likely to occur in the circuit.

512.1.4 Power
Electrical equipment, chosen on the basis of their power characteristics, must be able to be used under
operating conditions taking into account the load factor.

512.1.5 Compatibility
Equipment must be chosen in such a way that they do not generate harmful effects on other equipment and
that they do not disturb the supply in normal service, including during maneuvers, unless appropriate
precautions have been taken. taken during their implementation.

The articles 33 and 444 give indications on the various parameters to be taken into consideration.

512.1.6 Rated impulse withstand voltage

The equipment must be chosen so that their rated impulse withstand voltage is at least equal to the value of
the presumed overvoltages at the place of their installation.

The presumed overvoltage values are defined in 443.

When a device is defined by its overvoltage category, its rated impulse withstand voltage is defined by the
table 44B.
Equipment with a rated impulse withstand voltage lower than the presumed overvoltage level may be used
if it is accepted that the insulation coordination is not ensured and if the possible consequences have been
assessed.

512.1.7 Other characteristics

To determine the supply conditions for the equipment, it may also be necessary to take into account certain
characteristics specific to this equipment, such as:

- their service,
- their power factor, etc.

512.2 External influences

Annex A gives an abbreviated list of external influences.

H Electrical equipment must be selected and installed in accordance with the requirements oftable 51A which
gives the characteristics of the necessary materials according to the external influences to which they may
be subjected.

- 155 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

H The characteristics of the equipment must be determined either by a degree of protection or by compliance
with the tests.
If the electrical equipment does not have, by construction, the characteristics appropriate to the external
influences of its location, it can nevertheless be used if additional protection has been provided during its
installation in the installation; Such protection must not affect the operation of the equipment thus
protected.
While several external influences may appear simultaneously, they may have independent effects or
influence each other and the degree of protection should be chosen accordingly.

The choice of materials according to external influences is necessary not only for correct operation, but also
to ensure the effectiveness of protective measures to ensure safety in accordance with this standard. The
protective measures provided by the construction of electrical equipment are only valid for given conditions
of external influences if the tests are carried out under these conditions.

Attention is drawn to the fact that the effectiveness of certain protective measures against indirect contact
may be annihilated if the equipment does not possess, by construction or by installation, the qualities
corresponding to the risks of the room (or location) where it is is used.
Thus, for example, a class II device (marked with the double square) - which eliminates the need to take
other protective measures with regard to it against indirect contact - must also be protected against
splashing water. (IPX4) if used in an outdoor location.

H NOTE 1 - In the context of this standard, the following classes of external influences are conventionally considered as normal:

AA Ambient temperature AA4

AB Atmospheric humidity AB4
AC to AR Other environmental conditions XX1 for each parameter
B and C Use and construction of buildings XX1 for each of the parameters XX3
for BC

NOTE 2 - The term “normal” appearing in the characteristics column of the table means that the equipment must meet the applicable
standards.

Table 51A establishes a classification and codification of external influences which must be taken into
account for the design and implementation of electrical installations.
Each condition of external influence is designated by a code always comprising a group of two uppercase
letters and a number as follows:
The first letter concerns the general category of external influences
TO = environments.
B = uses.
VS = construction of buildings.

The second letter concerns the nature of the external influence : A ..., B ..., C ... The
number relates to the class of each external influence : 1 ..., 2 ..., 3 ...
For example, the code AC2 means:
TO = environment
AC = environment-altitude
AC2 = environment-altitude> 2,000 m
NOTE - The codification given in this part is not intended to be used for the marking of equipment.
The choice of electrical equipment (including pipes) according to external influences is dealt with in guide
UTE C 15-103.
the table 52D specifies the conditions of use of the cables, and the table 52E those of conductors under duct
or trunking systems.

- 156 -
 NF C 15-100
Table 51A - Characteristics of external influences

Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References

classes and implementation
512.2.1 Ambient temperature (AA) For the implementation of the cables, refer to
the table 52D.
The ambient temperature to be See definition of the temperature For ambient temperatures other than 20 °
considered for the material is the ambient in 216.1. C in underground installation mode and 30
temperature at the location where this ° C in exposed installation mode, the tables
material is to be installed, resulting from The average value for a 24 hour period must 52K and 52L are applicable.
the influence of all other materials placed not be greater than the upper limit less 5 ° C.
in the same location and in
operation, without taking into account the
thermal contribution of the material For certain environments, it may be
considered. necessary to combine two ranges among
those defined below (for example between -
The ambient temperature classes are only 25 ° C and + 40 ° C, ie AA3 + AA5).
applicable when humidity has no Installations subject to high temperatures
influence.
different from these ranges must be
Lower and upper limits of the ambient subject to special rules.
temperature ranges:

AA1 Refrigerated - 60 ° C +5°C Class AA1 corresponds to special conditions, In addition, if the temperature is below - 25 Includes the temperature range of
such as refrigerated freezer rooms. ° C, special precautions must be taken - eg class 3K8 of NF C 20-003-3, the
- 157 -

thermal insulation, rigid fixing, mechanical upper air temperature being

protection. limited to + 5 ° C. Part of the
temperature range of class 4K4 of
NF C 20-003-4, the lower air
temperature being limited to - 60 °
C and the upper air temperature to
+ 5 ° C.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.1 Ambient temperature (AA) (continued) For the implementation of the cables,
refer to the table 52D.
AA2 Very cold - 40 ° C +5°C Class AA2 corresponds to special conditions, Specially designed material or Part of the temperature range of
such as refrigerated freezer rooms. appropriate arrangements. * class 3K7 of NF C 20-003-3, the upper
air temperature being limited to
In addition, if the temperature is below - 25
° C, special precautions must be taken - eg + 5 ° C. Includes part of the
thermal insulation, rigid fixing, mechanical temperature range of class 4K3 of NF
protection. C 20-003-4, the upper air
temperature being limited to + 5 ° C.

AA3 Cold - 25 ° C +5°C Specially designed material or Part of the temperature range of
appropriate arrangements. * class 3K6 of NF C 20-003-3, the upper
air temperature being limited to
When the temperature is lower than
- 10 ° C, pipes comprising an insulating + 5 ° C. Includes the temperature
jacket or a polyvinyl chloride (V) sheath may range of class 4K1 of NF C 20-003-4,
not be handled or subjected to mechanical the upper air temperature being
stress. limited to
+ 5 ° C.

AA4 Temperate -5°C + 40 ° C In general, installations located inside Normal Part of the temperature range of
buildings correspond to class AA4 (ambient class 3K5 of NF C 20-003-3, the upper
- 158 -

temperature between - 5 ° C and + 40 ° C). air temperature being limited to

+ 40 ° C.

AA5 Hot +5°C + 40 ° C Normal Identical to the temperature range

of class 3K6 of NF C 20-003-3.

* may require certain additional precautions (eg special lubrication).

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.1 Ambient temperature (AA) (continued)
AA6 Very + 5 ° C + 60 ° C Specially designed material or Part of the temperature range of
Hot appropriate arrangements. * class 3K7 of NF C 20-003-3, the

lower air temperature being limited

to + 5 ° C and the higher air
temperature to
+ 60 ° C. Includes the temperature
range of class 4K4 of NF C 20-003-4,
the lower range being limited to + 5
° C.

AA7 Outside - 25 ° C + 55 ° C Specially designed material or Identical to the temperature range

sheltered appropriate arrangements. * of class 3K6 of NF C 20-003-3.

When the temperature is lower than

- 10 ° C, pipes comprising an insulating
jacket or a polyvinyl chloride (V) sheath may
not be handled or subjected to mechanical
stress.

AA8 Outside - 50 ° C + 40 ° C Specially designed material or Identical to the temperature range

- 159 -

no appropriate arrangements. * of class 4K3 of NF C 20-003-4.

protected
In addition, if the temperature is below - 25
° C, special precautions must be taken - eg
thermal insulation, rigid fixing, mechanical
protection.

* may require certain additional precautions (eg special lubrication).

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Characteristics of References
classes materials and implementation
512.2.2 VSclimatic conditions (combined influences of temperature and de humidity) (AB)
Air temperature Relative humidity Absolute humidity
(° C) (%) (g / m3)
a) limit b) limit a) limit b) limit a) limit b) limit
lower superior lower superior lower superior
AB1 Refrigerated - 60 +5 3 100 0.003 7 Indoor and outdoor pitches Special arrangements must be Includes the temperature
with made. range of class 3K8 of NF C
ambient temperatures 20-003-3, the upper air
extremely cold. temperature being limited to +
5 ° C. Part of the beach

temperature of class 4K4 of NF

C 20-003-4, the lower air
temperature being limited to -
60 ° C and the temperature

air higher than + 5 ° C.

AB2 Very cold - 40 +5 10 100 0.1 7 Indoor and outdoor pitches Special arrangements must be Part of the temperature range
with made. of class 3K7 of NF C 20-003-3,
ambient temperatures the upper air temperature
cold. being limited to + 5 ° C.
- 160 -

Includes part of the

temperature range of class 4K3
of NF 20-003-4, the
temperature

upper air being limited to

+ 5 ° C.
AB3 Cold -5 +5 10 100 0.5 7 Indoor and outdoor pitches Special arrangements must be Part of the temperature range
with made. of class 3K6 of NF C 20-003-3,
ambient temperatures the upper air temperature
cold. being limited to + 5 ° C.
Includes the range of

temperature of class 4K1 of NF

C 20-003-4, the upper air
temperature being limited to +
5 ° C.
AB4 Temperate -5 + 40 5 95 1 29 Sheltered locations without Normal. Identical to the temperature
temperature and humidity range of class 3K5 of NF C
control. A heater can be used for 20-003-3. The upper air
temperature being limited to

Part 5-51
increase the ambient
temperature. + 40 ° C.
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Characteristics of References
classes materials and implementation
512.2.2 Climatic conditions (combined influences of temperature and humidity) (AB) (continued)
Air temperature Relative humidity Absolute humidity
(° C) (%) (g / m3)
a) limit b) limit a) limit b) limit a) limit b) limit
lower superior lower superior lower superior

AB5 Hot +5 + 40 5 85 1 25 Sheltered locations where the Normal. Identical to the temperature
temperature is controlled. range of class 3K3 of NF C
20-003-3.

AB6 Very +5 + 60 10 100 1 35 Indoor and outdoor pitches Special arrangements must be Part of the temperature range
hot with made. of class 3K7 of NF C 20-003-3,
ambient temperatures the lower air temperature being
extremely hot. limited to + 5 ° C and the upper
The influence of cold ambient air temperature to + 60 ° C.
temperatures is Includes the temperature range
prevented. The of class 4K4 of NF C 20-003-4,
solar radiation the lower temperature range
can occur. being limited to

+ 5 C.
- 161 -

AB7 Outside - 25 + 55 10 100 0.5 29 Indoor and sheltered locations Special arrangements must be Identical to the temperature
sheltered without temperature and made. range of class 3K6 of NF C
humidity control; they can have 20-003-3.

openings to the outside and be

subject to
solar radiation.

AB8 Outside - 50 + 40 15 100 0.04 36 Outdoor and unprotected Special arrangements must be Identical to the temperature
no pitches, with hot and cold made. range of class 4K3 of NF C
protected temperatures. 20-003-4.

NOTES -
1 - All values specified are limit or maximum values which have a low probability of being exceeded.
2 - The relative, lower and upper humidities are limited by the absolute, lower and upper humidities, so that, for example, the limit values indicated do not occur simultaneously.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.3 Altitude (AC)

AC1 low ≤ 2,000 m Normal.

AC2 high > 2,000 m May require special precautions such

as application of derating factors.

For certain categories of equipment, special

measures may be necessary from an
altitude of 1000 m.
- 162 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.4 Presence of water (AD) The different degrees of protection correspond to tests
whose modalities are defined by standard NF C 20-010.

Prefabricated pipelines and trunking or duct systems are

characterized by their IP degree.

Moldings, plinths and wooden frames authorized only for

renovation in historical monuments can only be used
under AD1 conditions.

For the implementation of the cables, refer to table

52D.
AD1 Negligible The probability of Environments in which the walls do not generally show IPX0 NF C 20-003-4
presence of water is traces of moisture, but which may show moisture for class 4Z6
negligible. short periods, for example in the form of mist, and which
dry quickly with good ventilation.

AD2 Falls from Possibility of falls Environments in which moisture occasionally condenses in IPX1 or IPX2 NF C 20-003-3
drops vertical drops the form of drops of water or which are occasionally filled class 3Z7
water of water. with water vapor. The switchgear for domestic and similar installations,
conforming to the relevant standards, can be used in
domestic installations under AD2 conditions.
- 163 -

AD3 Aspersion Possibility of water Environments in which water runs off walls or floors. IPX3 NF C 20-003-3
water falling “in rain” in one class 3Z8
direction forming NF C 20-003-4
with the vertical an class 4Z7
angle at most equal to
60 °.
AD4 Projections Possibility of Environments exposed to splashing water; this is the case IPX4 NF C 20-003-3
water splashing water in for certain light fixtures and worksite cabinets installed class 3Z9
all directions outdoors. NF C 20-003-4
class 4Z7
AD5 Water jets Possibility of jets Environments commonly washed using jets (yards, IPX5 NF C 20-003-3
of water in all directions vehicle washing areas). class 3Z10
NF C 20-003-4
class 4Z8

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.4 Presence of water (AD) (continued)
AD6 Packages Possibility of waves Environments located by the sea, such as piers, IPX6 NF C 20-003-4
water of water. beaches, docks, etc. class 4Z9
AD7 Immersion Possibility of recut- Environments susceptible to flooding and where water may IPX7
very intermittent, rise less than 150mm above the highest point of the RVFV, FR-N1, XDV, H07BB, BN and RN-F cables can be used.
partial or total, of water. equipment, with the lower part of the equipment being no However, their cumulative immersion duration must not
more than 1m below the surface of the equipment. water. exceed two months per year.

AD8 Submersion Possibility of recut- Environments in water basins (such as swimming pools) IPX8
permanently and where electrical equipment is completely covered with RGPFV, H07RN8-F cables or cables with equivalent
completely water. water permanently at a pressure greater than 0.1 bar (1 sealing to be able to be submerged can be used.
meter of water).
- 164 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.5 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE) The different degrees of protection
corresponding to tests whose modalities
are defined in standard NF C 20-010.

Prefabricated pipelines and trunking or

duct systems are characterized by their IP
degree. For the implementation of the
cables, refer to thetable 52D.

AE1 Negligible The amount of dust or foreign bodies is Class AE1 is found in domestic installations IP2X or IPXXB NF C 20-003-3
not appreciable. or those in which small objects are not In AE1 conditions, in principle no protection class 3S1
handled. against the penetration of solid bodies is NF C 20-003-4
necessary and the degree of protection IP0X class 4S1
is sufficient, but from the point of view of
protection against direct contact, a degree
of protection at least equal to IP2X or IPXXB
is enforced (see Annex A of part 4-41),
except under conditions BA4 and BA5.

AE2 Small objects Presence of solid bodies of which the Class AE2 corresponds to industrial IP3X NF C 20-003-3
smallest dimension is at least equal to 2.5 applications: class 3S2
mm. Tools and small objects are examples of NF C 20-003-4
solid bodies whose smallest dimension is at
- 165 -

class 4S2
least equal to 2.5 mm,

Under these conditions, there may be dust,

but it is such that it has no influence on
electrical equipment.

AE3 Very small Presence of solid bodies, the smallest Class AE3 corresponds to industrial IP4X NF C 20-003-3
objects dimension of which is at least equal to 1 applications: class 3S3
mm. wires are examples of solid bodies whose NF C 20-003-4
smallest dimension is at least equal to 1 mm.
class 4S3

Under these conditions, there may be dust,

but it is such that it has no influence on
electrical equipment.

AE4 Dust Presence of dust IP5X if dust can penetrate without NF C 20-003-3
Dust deposits are large enough to have an interfering with the operation of the class 3S2
influence on the operation of certain equipment. NF C 20-003-4

Part 5-51
electrical equipment. class 4S2

IP6X if dust must not enter the equipment. NF C 20-003-3

class 3S3 and 4S3
NF C 20-003-4
class 4S3 and 4S4
 Coded Name Characteristics Applications and examples Equipment characteristics References

-
classes and implementation
512.2.6 Presence of corrosive or polluting substances (FA) For the implementation of the cables, refer to thetable
52D.
AF1 Negligible The quantity or nature of corrosive or Normal. NF C 20-003-3
polluting agents is irrelevant. class 3C1
NF C 20-003-4
class 4C1

AF2 Atmos- Appreciable presence of corrosive Installations located near or near seaside Depending on the nature of the agents (for example compliance NF C 20-003-3
spherical agents or pollutants of with the salt spray test according to NF C 20-702: Ka test). class 3C2
atmospheric origin. industrial establishments producing NF C 20-003-4
significant pollution class 4C2
atmospheric, such as chemical industries, The following can be used in particular:
cement factories; this pollution comes in - cables having on the outside a polyvinyl chloride (V) or
particular from the polychloroprene (N) sheath;
production of abrasive, insulating or
conductive dust. - CSA, IRL, ICA, ICTA and ICTL conduits;
- cable trays, shelves, cable ladders and PVC trunking.

AF3 Intermittent Intermittent or accidental actions of Rooms where certain chemicals are Corrosion protection defined by material specifications. NF C 20-003-3
Where certain corrosive chemicals or pollutants handled in small quantities and where class 3C3
accidental in common use may occur. these products can only accidentally come NF C 20-003-4
- 166 -

into contact with electrical equipment, Casings made of unprotected ferrous materials or natural class 4C3
such conditions are encountered in factory rubber are not suitable.
or other laboratories or in rooms where
handles hydrocarbons. Plastic envelopes are generally suitable.

The following can be used in particular:

- cables having on the outside a polyvinyl chloride (V) or
polychloroprene (N) sheath;

- CSA, IRL, ICA, ICTA and ICTL conduits;

- cable trays, shelves, cable ladders and PVC trunking.

AF4 Permed Permanent action of corrosive or polluting Chemical industry. Materials specially designed according to the nature of the NF C 20-003-3
chemicals in substantial quantities may Certain agricultural establishments, for agents. class 3C4
occur. example pigsties or dairies. NF C 20-003-4
Technical rooms for swimming pools. It is necessary to specify the nature of the chemical agent to class 4C4
allow the manufacturer to define the type of protection of his
equipment.

Protection can be provided by special paints, appropriate

coatings or surface treatments or the choice of material.

-
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Applications and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.7 Mechanical constraints The different degrees of protection correspond to tests
512.2.7.1 Shocks (AG) whose modalities are defined by standard NF C 20-015, the
resistance to mechanical impacts in this standard
corresponding to the impact term in the installation.

For the implementation of the cables, refer to thetable

52D.
AG1 Low Environments that can be subjected to Domestic and similar installations. IK02 NF C 20-003-3,
shocks of energy at most equal to 0.2 J. Bare lamps may be admitted. classes
3M1 / 3M2 / 3M3
NF C 20-003-4,
classes
4M1 / 4M2 / 4M3

AG2 Ways Environments that can be subjected to Usual industrial installations or the like. IK07 NF C 20-003-3,
shocks of energy at most equal to 2 J. classes
3M4 / 3M5 / 3M6
NF C 20-003-4,
classes
4M4 / 4M5 / 4M6

AG3 Important Environments that can be subjected to Severe industrial installations or the like. IK08 NF C 20-003-3,
- 167 -

shocks of energy at most equal to 5 J. classes

3M7 / 3M8
NF C 20-003-4,
classes
4M7 / 4M8

AG4 Very Environments that can be subjected to Very severe industrial installations or the IK10
important shocks of energy at most equal to 20 J. like.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.7.2 Vibrations (AH) For the implementation of the cables, refer
to the table 52D.
The vibrations are taken into account
whatever their duration.
AH1 Low The effects of vibration can be neglected Domestic and similar installations. Household materials and the like. NF C 20-003-3, classes
in most cases. 3M1 / 3M2 / 3M3
NF C 20-003-4, classes
4M1 / 4M2 / 4M3

AH2 Medium Vibrations of frequencies between 10 Usual industrial installations. Industrial equipment. NF C 20-003-3, classes
and 50 Hz and of amplitude at most Particular attention must be paid to 3M4 / 3M5 / 3M6
equal to 0.15 mm. connections to equipment subjected to or NF C 20-003-4, classes
generating vibrations. Local measures can 4M4 / 4M5 / 4M6
be adopted, such as flexible cables.

AH3 Important Vibrations of frequencies between 10 Industrial installations subject to severe Specially designed materials or special NF C 20-003-3, classes
and 150 Hz and of amplitude at most conditions. arrangements. 3M7 / 3M8
equal to 0.35 mm. Particular attention must be paid to NF C 20-003-4, classes
connections to equipment subjected to or 4M7 / 4M8
generating vibrations. Local measures can
be adopted, such as flexible cables. Only
flexible cables or flexible conductors laid in
flexible CSA conduits may be used.
- 168 -

512.2.7.3 Other mechanical conditions (AJ) (under study) For the implementation of the cables, refer
512.2.8 Presence of flora or mold (AK) to the table 52D.
AK1 Negligible No harmful risks due to flora or molds. Normal. NF C 20-003-3
class 3B1
NF C 20-003-4
class 4B1

AK2 Risks Harmful risks due to flora or molds. The risks depend on local conditions and the Special protection such as: NF C 20-003-3
nature of the flora. We can distinguish - increased degree of protection (see class 3B2
according to whether the risk is due to the AE); NF C 20-003-4
harmful development of the vegetation or its - special materials or coatings class 4B2
abundance. protecting the envelopes;
- arrangements to avoid the presence of
flora.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.9 Presence of fauna (AL) For the implementation of the cables, refer to
the table 52D.
AL1 Negligible Absence of harmful risks due to fauna. Normal. NF C 20-003-3
class 3B1
NF C 20-003-4
class 4B1

AL2 Risks Harmful risks due to fauna (insects, The risks depend on the nature of the Protection may include: NF C 20-003-3
birds, small animals). fauna: - a degree of protection against the class 3B2
- dangers due to insects in harmful penetration of solid bodies (see AE); NF C 20-003-4
quantities or of an aggressive nature, class 4B2
- sufficient mechanical strength (see AG);
- the presence of small animals or birds in
harmful or aggressive quantities - precautions to avoid the presence of
this fauna (cleaning, use of pesticides).

If there is a risk due to the presence of

rodents, cables with a metallic coating with
waterproofing sheath or waterproof metallic
conduit systems can be used. Otherwise
protection
- 169 -

appropriate is to be expected.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation

512.2.10 Electromagnetic, electrostatic or ionizing influences (AM)

Immunity to electromagnetic influences is defined either in the generic standards relating to immunity (series of standards NF EN 50082), or in the product standards. (For the
implementation of materials, see444).

512.2.10.1 Low frequency electromagnetic phenomena (conducted or radiated) Harmonics,

512.2.10.1.1 interharmonics (AM-1) [see 330.1.1 d]

512.2.10.1.2 Transmission of signals for remote control, e.g. ripple control modules

512.2.10.1.3 Voltage amplitude variations

512.2.10.1.4 Unbalanced voltage

512.2.10.1.5 Fundamental frequency variations

512.2.10.1.6 Low frequency induced voltages

- 170 -

512.2.10.1.7 Continuous component in alternative networks

512.2.10.1.8 Radiated magnetic fields (LF)

512.2.10.1.9 LF electric fields

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation

512.2.10.2 Conducted, induced or radiated high frequency electromagnetic phenomena (continuous or transient)

512.2.10.2.1 Induced oscillatory voltages or currents

512.2.10.2.2 Unidirectional transients conducted at the nanosecond scale

512.2.10.2.3 One-way transients conducted at the millisecond or microsecond scale

512.2.10.2.4 Conducted oscillatory transients

512.2.10.2.5 High frequency radiated phenomena IEC 61000-4-3

512.2.10.3 Electrostatic discharges IEC 61000-4-2

512.2.10.4 Ionization
- 171 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.11 Solar radiation (AN)

AN1 / AN2 Low Normal. NF C 20-003-3

AN3 Significant Appropriate arrangements must be NF C 20-003-4

made.

These provisions can be:

- materials resistant to ultraviolet rays;
- special colored layer;
- interposition of screens.

A correction factor equal to 0.85 can be

taken for the calculation of the
admissible currents.

It is often possible to shield the cables from

the action of the sun's rays by interposing,
for example, judiciously inclined awnings.

However, care should be taken to ensure

that this does not lead to air confinement
around the cables.
- 172 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.12 Seismic effects (AP)
1 gal = 1 cm / s2 NF P 06013
The characteristic value (S) of the seismic
effects, expressed in gal, is obtained by
multiplying the seismic acceleration g by a
factor depending on the height of the
building above the ground and whose value
is:
- 2.0 to 3e stage,
- 3.0 from 4e to 8e stage,
- 4.0 above 8e stage.
The vibrations which can cause the
destruction of the building are not part of the
classification.
Frequencies are not taken into account in the
classification; however, if the seismic wave
resonates with the building, the seismic
effects must be considered. In general,
seismic acceleration frequencies are between
0 Hz and 10 Hz.

AP1 Negligible S ≤ 30 Gal Normal.

- 173 -

AP2 Low 30 < S ≤ 300 Gal

AP3 Ways 300 <S ≤ 600 Gal Insofar as the installation concerned is
subject to seismic rules (PS 1969), the fixing
of electrical equipment should be
reinforced:

- electrical panels (for example fixing to

civil engineering by
the intermediary of rails embedded in the
concrete of the slab of the room in which
they are installed);
- electrical conduits, in particular cable trays
(for example use of double U hangers or
increase in the number of

supports and the diameter of their

fasteners);
- other electrical equipment, in

Part 5-51
particular lighting.
AP4 Strong S> 600 Gal
 Translated from French to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.com

NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.13 Lightning, keraunic level (Nk), lightning density (Ng) (AQ)

The keraunic level Nk is the number of days per year when thunder is heard.

The lightning strike density Ng is equal to the number of lightning strikes on the ground per year and per km².

AQ1 Negligible Nk ≤ 25 days a year, Ng ≤ 2.5

AQ2 Indirect Nk> 25 days per year, Ng> 2.5 Installations supplied by overhead lines. See 443. UTE C 15-443
Risks from the power supply
network. A risk analysis method is given in guide UTE C
15-443.

AQ3 Direct Risks arising from the exposure of Parts facilities located To If lightning protection is necessary, it must NF C 17-100
materials. exterior of buildings. be carried out in accordance with the NF C 17-102
Cases AQ2 and AQ3 are found in regions standards in force.
particularly exposed to the effects of
lightning. A risk analysis method is given in standards
NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102.

512.2.14 Air movements (AR)

- 174 -

Normal.
AR1 Low Speed ≤ 1 m / s

AR2 Ways 1 m / s <speed ≤ 5 m / s Appropriate arrangements must be made.

AR3 Strong 5 m / s <speed ≤ 10 m / s Appropriate arrangements must be made.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.15 Wind (AS)

AS1 Weak 10 m / s <speed ≤ 20 m / s. Normal

AS2 Average 20 m / s <speed ≤ 30 m / s. Appropriate arrangements must be made.

AS3 Strong 30 m / s <speed ≤ 50 m / s Appropriate arrangements must be made.

Protection against the effects of the wind is

obtained by an appropriate fixing of the
material according to the forces exerted by
the wind on the material. These conditions
mainly concern overhead lines (see529.7).
- 175 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Use

Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References

classes and implementation
512.2.16 People competence (BA)

BA1 Ordinary Uninformed people. Normal.

BA2 Children Children in premises intended for them. Nurseries, nursery schools, kindergartens. Equipment with degree of protection IP3X or
IPXXC.

This class does not apply to living quarters. Inaccessibility of equipment with accessible
surface temperatures above 60 ° C.

Sockets, switches and other equipment

installed in rooms accessible to children are
located at least 1.20 m above the finished
floor.

BA3 Disabled People who do not have all of their Hospices, asylums, specialized centers. Depending on the nature of the disability.
physical abilities or
intellectual. Inaccessibility of equipment with accessible
surface temperatures above 60 ° C.

The height of the operating devices is limited

- 176 -

to 1.30 m.

It is recommended that electrical buttons and

switches be installed at a maximum height of
1.30 m and socket outlets at a height of
between 0.40 m and 1.30 m.

BA4 Warned (*) Persons sufficiently informed or Closed electrical service rooms. Equipment not protected against direct See annex C Of the game4-41
supervised by persons contact is only allowed in rooms accessible to .
qualified to enable them to avoid the authorized persons.
dangers that electricity can represent Publication UTE C 18-510.
(maintenance or operating agents).

BA5 Qualified (*) Persons with sufficient technical knowledge Closed electrical service rooms. Equipment not protected against direct Publication UTE C 18-510.
or experience to enable them to avoid the contact is only allowed in rooms accessible to
dangers that electricity can represent authorized persons.
(engineers and technicians).

Part 5-51
(*) In France, only authorized persons within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work under BA4 and BA5 conditions.
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation

512.2.17 Human body electrical resistance (BB) For the installation of the pipes, refer to the
tables52D and 52E.

BB1 Normal Dry or wet conditions. Circumstances in which the skin is dry or Normal.
wet, the soil has a high resistance, the

people wearing shoes are in premises (or

locations) dry or wet.

BB2 Weak Wet conditions. Circumstances in which the skin is wet, the Class II pipelines or cables with earthed 412.2.
floor has low resistance, and people are in metallic coating.
premises (or

locations) wet and shoes are not taken into The conventional limit voltage is taken equal
account. to 50 V in alternating current.

BB3 Very weak Underwater conditions. Circumstances in which people are Article 701. 412.2.
immersed in water (no resistance of the skin, Article 702.
no resistance of the walls of the room or
site).

Class II pipelines.
- 177 -

Rooms containing a bath or shower,

swimming pools.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.18 Contact of people with the potential of the earth (BC) The material classes, defined in standard NF
C 20-030 concerning protection against
electric shock, are recalled in 237.

For the installation of the pipes, refer to the

tables52D and 52E.

BC1 Draws People in non-conductive locations. Locations practically non-existent and not
considered in practice.

BC2 Low Persons who are not under normal Rare locations.
conditions in contact with conductive
elements or who do not stand on surfaces

conductors.

BC3 Frequent Persons frequently in contact with Current premises.

conductive parts or standing on surfaces

conductors.

BC4 Continuous People in permanent contact with metallic Metal enclosures such as boilers, Part 7-706.
or conductive walls and for whom the tanks.
possibilities of interrupting contact are
limited. Locations where freedom of movement is .
- 178 -

restricted, eg crawl spaces, pits.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.19 Emergency Evacuation Conditions (BD)
BD1 Normal Low occupancy density, easy evacuation BD1 conditions do not require either a particular installation design or a specific choice of
conditions. materials.

BD2 Difficult Low occupancy density, difficult evacuation The BD2, BD3 and BD4 conditions which require a choice of specific materials and a particular
conditions. design and implementation of the installations are mainly encountered in Establishments
Receiving the Public (ERP) and High Buildings (IGH) (*).
BD3 Congested High occupancy density, easy C 12-201
evacuation conditions. C 12-061
The ERP safety regulations and those for high-rise buildings, drawn up by the Ministry of the
BD4 Difficult and High occupancy density, difficult Interior, contain the provisions to be observed.
crowded evacuation conditions.
Certain residential buildings covered by the decree of 31 January 1986 of the Ministry
responsible for construction may also be concerned.

(*) According to article R.122.2 of the Construction and Housing Code, constitutes a
high-rise building, any building whose bottom floor of the last level is located, in relation to
the highest ground level usable for the vehicles of the public rescue and fire-fighting
services:
- more than 50 meters for residential buildings;
- more than 28 meters for other buildings.
- 179 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.20 Nature of materials processed or stored (BE)
BE1 Risks Normal.
negligible

BE2 Risks Presence of flammable materials, including Barns, joineries, paper factories. For the choice of materials, see 422.1.
fire dust.

Certain regulatory texts indicate, in a non-

exhaustive manner, premises or locations at
risk of fire, premises or locations that do not
always correspond to the

definition of the influence class BE2. This is

the case of the safety regulations in
establishments open to the public, issued
by the Ministry of the Interior, and the
regulations of the Ministry of Labor
relating to fire prevention.

BE3 Risks Presence of explosive or low flash point Examples are refineries, hydrocarbon Directive 1999/92 / CE of 12/16/99 defines See 423
explosion materials, including explosive dusts. storage, silos and industries. the zones and categories of equipment to
be used according to these zones. Decree
- 180 -

96.1010 of 19/11/96 defines the

Locations subject to BE3 conditions are specifications that the different categories
classified into zones according to the must meet.
frequency and duration of the presence of
an explosive atmosphere.

It is up to the operator of the establishment to

define these zones.

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.20 Nature of materials processed or stored (BE) (Continued)

BE4 Risks of Presence of unprotected foods, Food industries, kitchens. Certain precautions may be necessary to
contaminated pharmaceuticals and the like. prevent the treated products from being
tion damaged in the event of damage to
electrical equipment.
contaminated by such electrical
equipment, for example broken
lamps.

Appropriate arrangements such as:

- protection preventing the fall of
broken lamps or other fragile
objects;
- screens against harmful radiation such
as infrared or ultraviolet rays

The risk due to breakage is only to be taken

into account from the AG2 conditions.
- 181 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
C Building construction
CA Building materials
512.2.21 Building materials (CA) For the installation of the pipes, refer to the
tables52D and 52E.

CA1 No Normal.
fuel
wounds

CA2 Combusti Buildings constructed primarily of Wooden buildings. Protection is ensured under the
wounds combustible materials. conditions indicated in 422.4.

Only cables classified C1 or C2 are used.

Only the conduits, the troughs, the non-

flame propagating cable trays are used.
- 182 -

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100
Coded Name Characteristics Application and examples Equipment characteristics References
classes and implementation
512.2.22 Building structures (CB) For the installation of the pipes, refer to the
tables52D and 52E.

CB1 Risks Normal.

negligible

CB2 Spread Buildings whose shape and dimensions High-rise buildings, forced ventilation Equipment made of materials that retard C 12-201.
fire facilitate the spread of fire (eg chimney systems. the propagation of a fire of non-electrical C 12-061.
effect). origin, fire barriers. 527.2

Refer to the regulatory texts relating to

fire safety.

Under CB2 conditions, protection is

ensured as indicated in 422.4.

CB3 Movements Risks due to structural movements (for Buildings of great length or built on Expansion or expansion joints must be
example, movements between different unstable land. provided in places of the building where
parts of a building or of the building and soil, deformations are possible.
settlement of land and foundations of

buildings).
- 183 -

CB4 Flexible or Constructions that are fragile or may be Marquees, inflatable structures. Flexible cables or flexible conductors laid in
unstable subject to movements (such as flexible conduits (CSA) are used.
oscillations).

Part 5-51
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51
H 513 Accessibility of electrical equipment

513.1 General provisions

The materials, including the pipes, must be arranged in such a way as to facilitate their operation, their visit,
their maintenance and access to their connections. These possibilities should not be significantly reduced by
mounting devices in enclosures or compartments.

513.2 Checking and replacing conductors and cables

Electrical conductors and cables must be arranged in such a way that their insulation can be checked at all
times and faults can be located.

The pipes must be made in such a way that damaged conductors can be replaced. This last condition is not
required for shielded cables with embedded mineral insulation nor for buried conduits.

The rule of the second paragraph implies in particular the prohibition of directly embedding cables in the
walls; on the other hand, cables can be laid in walls if they are laid in conduits or in construction voids.

This prohibition does not apply to cables used in very low voltage circuits.

H
514 Identification and tracking

514.1 General
Nameplates or other suitable means of identification must make it possible to recognize the use of the
equipment, unless all possibility of confusion is excluded.

If the operation of a device cannot be observed by the operator and this may result in a danger, a signaling
device in accordance with the measure applicable to NF EN 60073: Coding principles for indicating devices
and control devices and to NF EN 60447: Operating principles, must be placed so that they can be seen by
the operator.

This is usually achieved by construction or by installation.

H 514.2 Identification and location of pipelines

The electrical conduits must be established or marked so as to allow their identification during checks, tests,
repairs or alterations of the installation.

In particular, the route of buried pipelines must be drawn up on a plan which allows their location to be
known without having to resort to an excavation.

Most often, the various electrical conduits of an installation are sufficiently differentiated from one another
to enable them to be identified, either by their nature, or by their dimensions, or finally by their layout.
When identification is difficult, a plan of the installation should be drawn up and labels should be placed at
intervals indicating the destination of the circuits. When different installations coexist in the same premises
or when it is necessary to identify the phases or the respective polarities of the conductors, appropriate
markings and references should be used.

- 184 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

514.3 Identification of insulated conductors

The provisions set out below in a, b, c apply to conduits made up of insulated conductors and to multi-
conductor cables, with circular or sectoral cores:

a) When the circuit has a protective conductor, this conductor must be identified by the double green-and-
yellow coloring.

When the circuit does not include a protective conductor:

- in the case of multi-conductor cables, cables comprising a conductor identified by the double green-and-
yellow coloring must not be used.

However, in the event that only cables comprising a conductor identified by the double green-and-yellow
coloring for the section chosen are available, it is permissible to use such a cable, subject to not using the
conductor identified by the double green-and-yellow coloring:

- in the case of insulated conductors, no conductor marked with the double green-and-yellow coloring must
be used.

b) When the circuit has a neutral conductor, this conductor must be identified by the color blue clear (or for
cables with more than 5 conductors, by number 1).

When the circuit does not have a neutral conductor:

- in the case of multi-conductor cables, the conductor marked with light blue can be used for another
purpose, except as a protective conductor.
- in the case of insulated conductors, no conductor marked with the color light blue must be used.

c) Conductors marked by colors other than the green-and-yellow double coloring and the light blue color, or
by other means (such as numbers), may be used for all purposes except as a protective conductor or as
a conductor neutral (except cables with more than 5 conductors) (see b) above).

When the pipe is made up of insulated conductors, in circuits other than those used exclusively for
telecommunications or for measurements, conductors marked with yellow or green must not be used.

d) When using single-core cables, the marking by continuous coloring of the insulation is not necessary.

However, in this case, the ends of the conductors must be permanently marked during installation:

- by the double green-and-yellow coloring for the protective conductor,

- by the light blue color for the neutral conductor.

However, this marking is not necessary for neutral conductors with a section smaller than that of the
corresponding phase conductors.

These provisions are also applicable to naked drivers.

e) When non-standard conductors and cables are used, the marking must be carried out by any appropriate
means (such as rings or other colored devices) at any place where the envelope of the conductors is
visible and, in any case , near each connection.
The colors used must conform to those defined in paragraphs a, b and c above.

- 185 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

514.3.1 These requirements mainly concern the choice of the means used to identify the protective
conductor and the neutral conductor. These means are:
- for the protective conductor, the double green-and-yellow coloring (annex B).
- for the neutral conductor, the color light blue (or, for cables with more than 5 conductors, the number
1).

The colors chosen have been chosen in such a way that they cannot be confused with colors used in certain
countries for different uses.
In the TN diagram:
- the neutral conductor also used as a protective conductor (PEN) must be identified as the protective
conductor, that is to say by the double green-and-yellow coloring.
- if the neutral conductor and the protective conductor are separate, the neutral conductor is identified
by the color light blue and the protective conductor is identified by the double green-and-yellow
coloring.
The different conductors making up the cables must be used, depending on the functions of the conductors
in the circuit, in accordance with the rules in paragraph 514.3, taking into account the following exception:

When the cable is not available on the market, for the section considered, and when the circuit includes a
protective conductor, it is permitted to use as protective conductor:
- the light blue conductor, if the circuit does not have a neutral conductor,
- a black conductor, if the circuit has a neutral conductor,
by identifying this conductor by rings or markers of green / yellow color arranged at the ends and on all the
apparent lengths of the conductor.
In addition, if the same cable has two neutral conductors (for example two single-phase circuits using the
same cable), it is permissible to mark a black conductor with light blue rings or markers.

514.3.2 The exclusivity of the means of spotting

The rule of exclusivity of the marking means implies that the conductors comprising one of the defined
markings are used exclusively for the function for which this means of marking has been provided.

This exclusivity rule must be considered differently depending on whether it applies to the protective
conductor or to the neutral conductor.
a) For the protective conductor, because of the safety function provided by this conductor, the means for
identifying this conductor must be exclusive. As a result, the conductor with the double green-and-
yellow coloring must be used exclusively as a protective conductor (annex B).

b) For the neutral conductor, its marking is only indicative and the use of the conductor bearing the marking
of the neutral conductor for a phase conductor does not present any serious drawback, since these
conductors are all active and that the same protective measures against direct contact apply to these
conductors.
It follows that a conductor of light blue color in a circuit does not imply that it is a neutral conductor, it can
be a phase conductor, the corresponding circuit not having a conductor. neutral.

c) As errors are always possible, the identification of the conductors should only be considered as a
presumption and it is always necessary to check the polarity of the conductors before any intervention.

514.3.3 In the particular case of an installation served by a single-phase connection between phases with
two conductors at a rated voltage at most equal to 250 volts, and supplied directly by a public distribution
network, one of the two conductors of the installation is identified by the distinctive marking of the neutral
conductor. The conductor thus identified is assimilated to the neutral conductor, in particular as regards the
arrangement of the protection and control equipment.

- 186 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

H 514.4 Overcurrent protection devices

The protection devices must be arranged and marked in such a way that it is easy to identify the circuits
protected for this purpose, it may be convenient to group them in tables.

514.5 Drawings
514.5.1 For any electrical installation, diagrams, diagrams or tables in accordance with the standards must
(2)
be drawn up indicating in particular:

- the nature and construction of the circuits (points of use served, number and section of conductors, nature
of pipes);
- the characteristics necessary to identify the devices providing protection, disconnection and control
functions and their location.

The information to be included in the attached diagrams and documents are as follows:
- type and section of conductors,
- circuit length,
- nature and type of protection devices,
- rated current or setting current of protection devices,
- presumed short-circuit currents and breaking capacities of the devices.
These indications must be mentioned for each circuit of the installation. It is recommended
to update them when modifying the installation. Plans must indicate, where applicable, the
location of non-visible devices.
(3).
H 514.5.2 The symbols used must be chosen from those of the standards

515 Independence of equipment

515.1 The materials must be chosen and arranged in such a way as to prevent any harmful influence
between electrical installations and non-electrical installations.

Equipment not having a rear face must not be installed on the wall of a building unless the following
requirements are met:
- any propagation of potential on the wall of the building is prevented;
- a fire separation is provided between the equipment and the combustible wall of the building.
If the wall of the building is not metallic and is non-combustible, no additional provision is prescribed.
Otherwise, these requirements may be satisfied by one of the following provisions:

- if the mounting surface is metallic, it must be connected to a protective conductor (PE).

- if the mounting surface is combustible, the material must be separated therefrom by an insulating
material layer of at least flammability category M2 (seeappendix to part 4-42).

515.2 When equipment carrying currents of different natures or voltages are grouped together in the same
unit (switchboard, cabinet, control console, control box, etc.), all equipment belonging to the same type of
current or voltage must be effectively separated from other materials to the extent necessary to avoid any
harmful mutual influence.

515.3 Electromagnetic compatibility

(Under study).

(2) NF C 03-151 to NF C 03-158

(3) NF C 03-201 - NF EN 60617-13 (C 03-213)

- 187 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

Annex A - (normative) - Identification of protective conductors and

earthing in fixed installations

1. - The double green-and-yellow coloring is intended to identify a protective conductor providing a safety
function.
By definition (241.1 of NF C 15-100) a protective conductor is a conductor used in certain protective
measures against indirect contact and connecting masses:

- either to other masses;

- either to conductive elements;
- either to earth electrodes, to a conductor connected to the earth or to an active part connected to the earth.

Protective conductors meeting this definition must be identified by the double green-and-yellow coloring.

2. - The double green-and-yellow coloring has been defined to identify a safety function.
Conductors that are exclusively earthed for functional reasons or to avoid interference have no safety
function.
It is therefore appropriate to prohibit the double green-and-yellow coloring for such conductors, in
particular in order to prevent any subsequent attempt to connect such a conductor to a ground for safety
reasons: such a connection could not that be the cause of dangerous situations and disturbances for the
equipment connected to this conductor.

Table 51B - Practical application

In practice, the following different cases should be distinguished:

Protective conductor Spotting Marking

from
terminals

A. Providing a safety function

- connecting a mass to an earth electrode within the framework of the
measure of protection against indirect contacts by automatic cut-off Green-and-yellow E
of the power supply (413.1) ..........................................
- connecting two masses together:
• at the secondary of an isolating transformer (4-41 C3) .... Green-and-yellow E
- ensuring an equipotential bonding:
• main general (413.1.2 and UTE C 15-106, 2.1.1) ............. Green-and-yellow E
• main local (UTE C 15-106, 2.1.2) .................................. Green-and-yellow E
• additional (413.2) ................................................. .......... Green-and-yellow E
• local ungrounded (4-41 C2) ...................................... Green-and-yellow E
B. Not providing a safety function
- connecting a conductive part of a material to earth.
• for functional reasons .............................................. (*) YOU
• for disturbance reasons ............................................ (*) YOU
(*) The double green-and-yellow coloring must not be used. No color is imposed, but the corresponding terminals must bear the
corresponding symbols defined by standard NF C 04-445 and recalled in the

board. Alternatively, the terminals may include the symbol

- 188 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

Annex B - (informative) - Short list of external influences

VS

TO AA Temperature (° C) AG Impact AP Seismic

AA1 - 60 +5 AG1 Low AP1 Negligible
AA2 - 40 +5 AG2 Ways AP2 Weak
AA3 - 25 +5 AG3 Important AP3 Average
AA4 -5 + 40 AG4 Very important AP4 Strong
AA5 +5 + 40
AA6 +5 + 60 Ah Vibrations QA Lightning
AA7 - 25 + 55 AH1 Low AQ1 Negligible
AA8 - 50 + 40 AH2 Medium AQ2 Indirect
AH3 Important AQ3 Direct
AB Temperature and humidity
AK Flora AR Air movement
AC Altitude (m)
Environments

AK1 Negligible AR1 Low

AC1 ≤ 2,000 AK2 Risk AR2 Ways
AC2 > 2,000 AR3 Strong
AL Wildlife
AD Water AS Wind
AL1 Negligible
AD1 Negligible AL2 Risk AS1 Weak
AD2 Drops AS2 Average
AD3 Aspersion AM Influences AS3 Strong
AD4 Projections electromagnetic
AD5 Jets
AD6 AM1 Phenomena at
Packages
AD7 To low frequency
Immersion
AD8 AM9
Submersion
AM21 Phenomena at
AE TO high frequency
Foreign bodies
AM25
AE1 Negligible AM31 Landfills
AE2 Small electrostatic
AE3 Very small AM41 Ionization
AE4 Light dust
YEAR Sun
AF Corrosion
AN1 Low
AF1 Negligible AN2 Significant
AF2 Atmospheric AN3 Strong
AF3 Intermittent
AF4 Permed

B BA Skill BC Contacts BE Materials

BA1 Ordinary BC1 Draws BE1 Negligible
BA2 Children BC2 Low BE2 Fire
BA3 Disabled BC3 Frequent BE3 Explosion
BA4 Warned BC4 Continuous BE4 Contamination
BA5 Qualified
Comics Evacuation
BB Resistance BD1
Use

Normal
BB1 Normal BD2 Difficult
BB2 Weak BD3 Congested
BB3 Very weak BD4 Difficult and crowded

VS THAT Materials CB Structure

CA1 Non-combustible CB1 Negligible
Buildings

CA2 Fuels CB2 Fire spread

CB3 Movements
CB4 Flexible

______________

- 189 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-51

(Blank page)

- 190 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Part 5-52 - Additional rules for pipelines

520 General ................................................. .................................................. ............... 192

521 Installation methods ............................................... .................................................. ............ 195
522 Choice and implementation according to external influences ........................................ 203
523 Admissible currents ................................................ .................................................. . 206
524 Conductor sections ............................................... ............................................. 220
525 Voltage drops ............................................... .................................................. ....... 221
526 Connections ................................................. .................................................. ............... 222
527 Choice and implementation to limit the spread of fire ....................................... .... 223
528 Neighborhood with other pipelines ............................................ .............................. 224
529 Rules specific to the different installation methods ........................................... ............ 225

_______________

- 191 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H 520 General

520.1 The choice and implementation of the conduits must take into account the fundamental principles of
part 1, applicable to conductors and cables, their connections and their ends, their supports and their
enclosures or methods of protection against external influences.

NOTE - In general, this part also applies to protective conductors, but part 5-54 contains further requirements for these drivers.

520.2 For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are:

520.2.1 Profiles, ducts and duct systems

(1)
- Wood plinths, moldings and jambs: Rules and dimensions;
- Profiles used for the routing of conductors and cables and their installation accessories: Rules;
(2)

(3)
- Profile systems used for the routing of conductors and cables: Rules;
- Duct systems for electrical installations - part 2-2: Particular rules for bendable duct systems - types ICA,
(4)
ICTA, ICTL;
- Duct systems for electrical installations - part 2-1: Particular rules for rigid duct systems - types IRL, MRL;
(5)

- Conduit systems for electrical installations - part 2-3: Particular rules for flexible conduit systems - CSA
(6)
type;
- Duct systems for electrical installations - part 2-4: Particular rules for duct systems buried in the ground
(7)
- type TPC.

520.2.2 Conductors and cables

Profiles include troughs, moldings and profile ducts.

the table 52A specifies the standards to be considered and the characteristics of insulated cables and
conductors.

520.2.3 Cable gland

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as follows:
- Metric pitch cable gland (8) ;
- Non-metric pitch cable gland - General rules (9) ;
- Plastic cable gland with non-metric pitch - Particular requirements (10) ;
- Non-metric metal cable glands - Specific rules (11).

(1) NF C 68-091
(2) NF C 68-102
(3) NF C 68-104
(4) NF EN 50086-2-2 (C 68-112)
(5) NF EN 50086-2-1 (C 68-111)
(6) NF EN 50086-2-3 (C 68-113)
(7) NF EN 50086-2-4 (C 68-114)
(8) NF EN 50262 (C 68-302)
(9) UTE C 68-300
(10) UTE C 68-311
(11) UTE C 68-312
- 192 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Table 52A specifies the standards to be considered whose letters have the following meaning:

Column 1: The cables shown in bold are the most commonly used.

Column 2: TO Recognized national type.

H Harmonized type.
FR-N National type but with international designation. National
U type with the old UTE designation.

Column 3: Designation of the standard.

Column 4: Reference cable voltages Uo / U in V (see 512.1.1 (a).

Column 5: R Conductor or rigid cable.

S Conductor or flexible cable.

Column 6: TO Armor.
P Lead sheath.
R Sheath in reticulated material. Sheath
T in thermoplastic material. Copper
E screen.
TV Braided.

Column 7: II Cable considered class II (see 413.2) for a maximum voltage with respect to earth
of 500 V.
II * Cable considered class II (see 413.2) for a maximum voltage with respect to earth
of 250 V.

Column 8: C1 Fire-retardant cable (according to standard NF C 32-070).

# Fire-retardant cable (according to standard NF C 32-072). Flame-retardant cable
C2 (according to standard NF C 32-070). No characteristics from the point of view of
C3 fire behavior (according to standard NF C 32-070).

Column 9: CR 1 Fire resistant cable (according to standard NF C 32-070)

CR 2 No characteristics from the point of view of fire resistance (according to standard
NF C 32-070).

Column 10: O Cable that does not emit opaque fumes in the event of a fire (according to
standard NF C 32-073-1).

Column 11: O Cable that does not emit acid fumes in the event of a fire (according to standard
NF C 32-074-22).

Column 12: Minimum and maximum sections: these indications do not imply that the entire
range of sections is carried out regardless of the number of conductors.

Column 13: Maximum permissible temperatures on the core.

- 193 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Table 52A - Insulated conductors and cables

No. Name Standards Voltage Supple Coating Class Fire Smoke Sections Temperature
NF C assigned mentions Propa- Resist opacity acidity mm2 on soul
gation tance scaled down weak °C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
ELASTOMERIC INSULATED CABLES (PR family)
1 U 1000 R2V (6) 32-321 600/1000 R T II C2 - - - 1.5 - 630 90
2 U 1000 RVFV (6) 32-322 600/1000 R TAT C2 - - - 1.5 - 300 90
3 U 1000 RGPFV (6) 32-111 600/1000 R PAT C2 - - - 1.5 - 240 90
4 FR-N1 X1X2 32-323 600/1000 R R II C1 # - O O 1.5 - 630 90
5 FR-N 1 X1G1 32-323 600/1000 R T II C1 # - O O 1.5 - 630 90
6 FR-N 1 X1X2Z4X2 32-323 600/1000 R RAR C1 # - O O 1.5 - 300 90
7 FR-N 1 X1G1Z4G1 32-323 600/1000 R TAT C1 # - - - 1.5 - 300 90
8 Twists (6) 33-209 600/1000 R R C3 - - - 16 - 150 90
9 RN1 XDV-AR, - AS, -AU 33-210 600/1000 R AT C2 - - - 16 - 240 90
(6)

21 M 07 BB-F 32-102-12 450/750 S R II C3 - - - 1.5 - 500 90

22 H 07 BN4-F 32-102-12 450/750 S R II C2 - - - 1.5 - 500 90
23 H 07 BQ-F 32-102-10 450/750 S R II C3 - - - 1.5 - 16 90
24 H 07 RN-F 32-102-4 450/750 S R II C2 - - - 1.5 - 500 60 (1)
25 A 07 RN-F 32-120 450/750 S R II C2 - - - 1.5 - 300 60 (1)
26 H 07 RN8-F 32-102-16 450/750 S R II C2 - - - 1.5 - 500 60 (1)
27 FR-N 07 X4X5-F 32-131 450/750 S R II C1 - O O 1.5 - 500 90
28 H 07 ZZ-F 32-102-13 450/750 S R II C2 # - O O 1.5 - 500 70

51 M 05 BB-F 32-102-12 300/500 S R II C3 - - - 1.5 - 6 90

52 H 05 GG-F 32-102-11 300/500 S R II C3 - - - 1.5 - 6 110
53 H 05 RR-F 32-102-4 300/500 S R II C3 - - - 1.5 - 6 60 (1)
54 A 05 RR-F 32-120 300/500 S R II C3 - - - 1.5 - 6 60 (1)
VINYL POLYCHLORIDE INSULATED CABLES (PVC family)
101 H 07 VVD3H2-F 32-202 450/750 S T C2 - - - 1.5 - 16 70
102 H 07 VVH2-F 32-202 450/750 S T II C2 - - - 1.5 - 16 70
111 FR-N 05 VV-U 32-207 300/500 R T II * C2 - - - 1.5 - 10 70
112 FR-N 05 VV-R 32-207 300/500 R T II * C2 - - - 1.5 - 35 70
113 FR-N 05 VL2V-U 32-207 300/500 R PT C2 - - - 1.5 - 10 70
114 FR-N 05 VL2V-R 32-207 300/500 R PT C2 - - - 1.5 - 25 70

121 H 05 VV-F 32-201-5 300/500 S T II * C2 - - - 1.5 - 4 70

122 A 05 VV-F 32-220 300/500 S T II * C2 - - - 1.5 - 4 70
123 H 05 V2V2-F 32-201-12 300/500 S T II * C2 - - - 1.5 - 4 90 (2)
124 FR-N 05 VV5-F 32-206 300/500 S T II * C2 - - - 4 - 35 70
125 H 05 VV5-F 32-201-13 300/500 S T II * C2 - - - 1.5 - 2.5 70
126 H 05 VVC4V5-K 32-201-13 300/500 S TET C2 - - - 1.5 - 2.5 70
VINYL POLYCHLORIDE INSULATED CONDUCTORS (PVC family)
201 H 07 VU 32-201-3 450/750 R - C2 - - - 1.5 - 10 70
202 H 07 VR 32-201-3 450/750 R - C2 - - - 1.5 - 400 70
203 H 07 VK 32-201-3 450/750 S - C2 - - - 1.5 - 240 70

204 H 07 V2-U 32-201-7 450/750 R - C2 - - - 1.5 - 2.5 90 (2)

205 H 07 V2-R 32-201-7 450/750 R - C2 - - - 1.5 - 35 90 (2)
206 H 07 V2-K 32-201-7 450/750 S - C2 - - - 1.5 - 35 90 (2)

207 H 07 V3-U 32-201-9 450/750 R - C2 - - - 1.5 - 10 70

208 H 07 V3-R 32-201-9 450/750 R - C2 - - - 1.5 - 400 70
209 H 07 V3-K 32-201-9 450/750 S - C2 - - - 1.5 - 240 70
ELASTOMER INSULATED CONDUCTORS (PR family)
221 H 05 SJ-K 32-102-3 300/500 S TV C3 - - - 1.5 - 16 180
224 H 07 GU 32-102-7 450/750 R - C3 - - - 1.5 - 10 110
225 H 07 GR 32-102-7 450/750 R - C3 - - - 1.5 - 240 110
226 H 07 GK 32-102-7 450/750 S - C3 - - - 1.5 - 240 110
227 H 07 ZU 32-102-9 450/750 R - C2 - O O 1.5 -10 90
228 H 07 ZR 32-102-9 450/750 R - C2 - O O 1.5 - 400 90
229 H 07 ZK 32-102-9 450/750 S - C2 - O O 1.5 - 240 90
FIRE RESISTANT CABLES WITH SYNTHETIC INSULATION (PR family or PVC family as appropriate)
501 - 32-310 (5) R (3) II * C1 CR1 - - 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
502 - 32-310 (5) R (3) A (3) C1 CR1 - - 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
503 - 32-310 (5) R (3) II * C1 CR1 O O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
504 - 32-310 (5) R (3) A (3) C1 CR1 O O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
505 -
506 - 32-310 (5) R (3) II * C2 CR1 - - 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
507 - 32-310 (5) R (3) A (3) C2 CR1 - - 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
508 - 32-310 (5) R (3) II C2 CR1 O O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)
509 - 32-310 (5) R (3) A (3) C2 CR1 O O 1.5 - 300 70 or 90 (4)

(1) Conductors or cables whose permissible core temperature is less than 70 ° C must be considered from the point of view of the permissible current as being in
the "PVC family"
(2) Conductors or cables with a permissible core temperature greater than or equal to 90 ° C must be considered from the point of view of the permissible current
as being in the "PR family"
(3) Sheath of reticulated material or of thermoplastic material
(4) Depending on the type of coating - see the manufacturer
(5) Available in the following voltage models: 300/500 V, 450/750 V, 600/1000 V - see the manufacturer
(6) There is also an aluminum core for sections greater than or equal to 10 mm2

- 194 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

521 Laying methods

H
521.1 General
Examples of installation methods are presented in the table 52C.

NOTE - Other methods of installation, not described in this part, may be used provided that the general requirements of this part are met.

The specific rules for the different installation methods are specified in 529.

The UTE C 15-520 guide gives information on the conditions of use and implementation of the different
installation methods.

H 521.2 Choice of pipes

Table 52B - Choice of pipes

Installation methods

ladders, shelves,
Without fixing

On insulators

Carrier cable
Direct fixing

Duct systems

Chutes

Cable ways,

crows
Conductors
and cables

Bare conductors ......................................... NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT TO NOT

Insulated conductors ...................................... NOT NOT TO* TO* NOT TO NOT

Cables (including Multiconductors ....... TO TO TO TO TO 0 TO

armored cables) Monoconductors .... 0 TO TO TO TO 0 TO
TO Admitted

TO* Insulated conductors are only allowed if the conduit, channel-profile or trunking has the
degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD and the trunking covers require the use of a tool to
be removed.
NOTNot accepted
0 Not applicable or not used in practice.

- 195 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

521.3 (available)

H
521.4 Prefabricated pipes
Prefabricated pipes must comply with the standard in force (12) and implemented according to the
manufacturer's instructions. Their installation must meet the requirements of articles522, 525, 526, 527 and
528.

The UTE C 15-107 guide contains information making it possible to carry out the various calculations intended
to choose the prefabricated pipes allowing them to ensure the various protection conditions defined by the
rules of this standard.

The provisions of this article also apply to electrical distribution systems by prefabricated pipeline equipped
with 16A socket outlets conforming to the standard in force. (12).

H 521.5 Alternating current circuits and enclosures of ferromagnetic material

The conductors of the alternating current circuits arranged in envelopes of ferromagnetic material must be
installed in such a way that the conductors of each circuit are in the same envelope.

NOTE - If this condition is not fulfilled, overheating and excessive voltage drops may occur due to induction phenomena.

This condition applies in particular to metallic conduits and cables with a metallic coating.

Ferromagnetic collars can also heat up and it is preferable to use collars made of non-magnetic material.

It is recalled that in TN and IT diagrams, the protective conductor must also be installed in the same enclosure
as the active conductors. Otherwise, the fault loop impedance could be increased to the point that the
protection conditions are not met.

(12) NF EN 60439-2 (C 63-422)

- 196 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
Table 52C - Examples of installation methods

The figures are not intended to really represent the installation methods but are intended to explain the
principle of the corresponding installation method.

Example Description Ref.

local Insulated conductors in conduits embedded in the thermally 1

insulating walls.

Multicore cables in conduits embedded in thermally insulating

local walls. 2

Insulated conductors in exposed ducts. 3

Single or multi-conductor cables in conduits in surface 3A

mounting.

Insulated conductors in surface-mounted profiled conduits. 4

Mono- or multi-conductor cables in surface-mounted profiled 4A

conduits.

Insulated conductors in conduits embedded in a wall. 5

Single or multi-conductor cables in conduits embedded in a

wall. 5A

- 197 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
Table 52C - Examples of installation methods (continued)

Example Description Ref.

Single or multicore cables with or without armor:

11
- fixed on a wall,

- fixed to a ceiling,
11A

- on non-perforated cable trays or shelves, (*)

12

- on perforated cable trays or shelves, in 13 horizontal or vertical

routes, (*)

- on welded mesh or on corbels,

14

- on cable ladders. 16

Single or multi-conductor cables suspended from a carrier

17
cable or self-supporting.

Bare or insulated conductors on insulators.

18

(*) a cable tray with cover is considered as a trunking (installation method 31A).

- 198 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
Table 52C - Examples of installation methods (continued)

Example Description Ref.

Single or multi-core cables in construction voids. 21

Insulated conductors in conduits in construction voids. 22

Single or multi-core cables in conduits in construction voids. 22A

Insulated conductors in profiled conduits in construction 23

voids.

Single or multi-core cables in ducts-profiles in construction 23A

voids.

Insulated conductors in profiled conduits embedded in the 24

construction.

Mono- or multi-conductor cables in profiled conduits 24A

embedded in the construction.

Single or multi-conductor cables:

- in the space between ceiling and false ceiling,

25

- installed on suspended, non-removable ceilings.

- 199 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H Table 52C - Examples of installation methods (continued)

Example Description Ref.

31 31A
Insulated conductors or single or multi-conductor cables in
ducts fixed to the walls.

- in horizontal route, 31

32 32A

- in vertical route. 32

Insulated conductors in ducts embedded in walls or floors. 33

Mono- or multi-conductor cables in ducts embedded in walls 33A

or floors.

Insulated conductors in suspended chutes. 34

Single or multi-conductor cables in suspended troughs. 34A

34 34A
41
Insulated conductors in single or multi-conductor conduits or
cables in closed channels, horizontally or vertically.

Insulated conductors in ducts in ventilated channels. 42

Single or multi-core cables in open or ventilated channels. 43

- 200 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
Table 52C - Examples of installation methods (continued)

Example Description Ref.

Mono- or multi-conductor cables in conduits, sheaths or 61

buried profiled conduits.

Single or multi-conductor underground cables without additional 62

mechanical protection.

Single or multi-conductor underground cables with additional 63

mechanical protection.

Insulated conductors in plinths or wooden moldings. 71

Conductors isolated in from conduits Where cables 73

multiconductors in door frames.

Conductors isolated in from conduits Where cables 74

multiconductors in window frames.

Cables submerged in water. 81

- 201 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

521.6 Laying cables and conductors

521.6.1 Conductors belonging to different circuits may use the same multi-conductor cable, the same conduit
or the same trunking compartment, provided that all the conductors are insulated for the present highest
rated voltage.

521.6.2 Single-core cables and insulated conductors belonging to the same circuit must be laid in close
proximity to each other. This rule also applies to the corresponding protective conductor (see544.1).

521.6.3 When several single-conductor cables are joined in parallel, they are divided into as many groups as
there are conductors in parallel, each group comprising a conductor of each phase or polarity. The
conductors of each group should be placed close to each other.

The purpose of these provisions is to reduce the loop impedances and to ensure the correct distribution of
the currents in the conductors in parallel (see 523.6).

521.6.4 The pipes must be chosen and installed in such a way as to prevent, during implementation, use and
maintenance, any damage to the sheaths and to the insulation of insulated conductors and cables.

521.6.5 The internal dimensions of the conduits, profile conduits and connection accessories must allow the
conductors or cables to be easily pulled and removed after laying the conduits and their accessories.

In the case of conductors, this rule is satisfied if their occupancy section, including all protections, is not
greater than one third of the internal section of the duct or duct-profile.

521.6.6 The radius of curvature of a pipe must be such that the conductors and cables are not damaged.

521.6.7 When the conductors and cables are not supported over their entire length by supports or because of
their method of laying, they must be supported by suitable means at sufficient intervals so that the
conductors and cables are not damaged by their own weight.

521.6.8 When pipelines are subjected to permanent tension (for example due to their own weight in vertical
travel), an appropriate type of cable or conductor with an appropriate section and method of laying must be
chosen, so as to avoid any damage to the pipes. cables or conductors and their supports.

521.6.9 The conduits in which the conductors or cables must be pulled must have suitable access means to
allow their pulling.
This requirement applies in particular to the laying of conduits in closed gutters and in construction voids.

521.6.10 Pipes embedded in floors must be sufficiently protected against damage due to the intended use of
the floor.

521.6.11 The routes of exposed pipes which are rigidly fixed must be horizontal or vertical or parallel to the
edges of the walls.
This does not preclude oblique routes when such routes are necessary, for example for changes of plane or
the avoidance of obstacles.

Drains embedded or embedded in ceilings or floors can follow the shortest practical route.

For pipes embedded in walls or partitions, see guide UTE C 15-520.

- 202 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

521.6.12 Flexible cables must be installed in such a way as to avoid excessive tensile forces on the conductors;
connections and sheath or other protective means must be securely attached at both ends.

521.7 Protection against external influences

The protection against external influences conferred by the method of laying must be ensured continuously
over the entire route of the pipes, in particular at angles, changes of plane and places of penetration into the
devices. The connection must ensure tightness, if necessary, for example by means of cable glands.

The conditions for protection against external influences are given in 522.

The trunking systems conforming to standard NF C 68-104 and the duct systems conforming to their
standards ensure, after installation, a homogeneous degree of IP protection whatever the accessory of the
system used.

When the pipes have a sheath conferring a certain degree of protection, the cable gland is clamped on this
sheath.

Cable glands, plugs, grommets, etc. provide sealing on a sheath and not on the insulating conductors.

When cable glands are used, they can be fitted to the outer sheath of the cables, if this assumes a sealing
function. In the case of armor made of steel strips or wires, or of metal braid, the cable glands do not tighten
directly on these protections.

When the sealing sheath is under a metal armor, the armors are carefully cut before entering the cable gland
and stopped by an appropriate device (collar, flange, strapping, welding, etc.) resistant to internal stresses
and external.

521.8 Crossings
In wall penetrations, pipelines other than those made up of conduits with a degree of mechanical protection
at least equal to IK07, must include additional mechanical protection consisting of a sheath.

H
522 Choice and implementation according to external influences

The essential rules for the choice and use of equipment are given in 512.2. Additional rules for pipelines are
set out in this article.

the table 52D indicates for each series of standardized cables the classes of external influences in which they
can be used.

Likewise, the table 52E indicates for each type of duct or trunking system, the classes of external influences in
which they can be used.

The UTE C 15-103 guide indicates for different rooms or locations, the series of cables and the types of duct,
trunking and profile systems that can be used and the corresponding special conditions.

- 203 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H 522.1 External heat sources

522.1.1 In order to avoid the effects of heat emitted from external sources, the following methods, or other
equally effective methods, should be used to protect pipelines:

- protective screen;
- sufficient distance from heat sources;
- choice of a pipeline taking into account the harmful effects that may occur;
- local reinforcement or modification of the insulating material.

NOTE - Heat emitted by external sources can be transmitted by radiation, by convection or by conduction, coming from:

- hot water distribution;

- installations, apparatus and lighting;
- manufacturing processes;
- transmission by heat-conducting materials;
- absorption by channeling heat from the sun or the surrounding environment.

522.2 (available)

522.3 Electromagnetic, electrostatic or ionizing (AM) influencesSee 444 and the

UTE C 15-900 guide.

- 204 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Table 52D - Conditions of use for insulated conductors and cables

No. Name AA AD AE AF AG Ah AK AL BB BC Comics BE THAT CB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ELASTOMERIC INSULATED CABLES (PR family)

1 U 1000 R2V 4 to 6 (a) 7 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1

2 U 1000 RVFV 4 to 6 (a) (e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
3 U 1000 RGPFV 4 to 6 (a) 7 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
4 FR-N1 X1X2 4 to 6 (a) (e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
5 FR-N1 X1G1 4 to 6 (a) 8 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
6 FR-N1 4 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 1 1 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
X1X2Z4X2
7 FR-N1 4 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 1 1 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1.2
X1G1Z4G1
8 0.6 / 1 Twists 1 to 6 6 4 1 to 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 4 1 1 1
9 FR-N1XDV-AR- 4 to 6 (a) 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 1 to 3 2 1
AS, -AU

21 M 07 BB-F 3 to 6 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 1 1 1 1.3.4

22 H 07 BN4-F 4 to 6 (a) 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.3.4
23 H 07 BQ-F 2 to 6 7 e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 1 1 1 1.3.4
24 H 07 RN-F 3 to 5 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.3.4
25 A 07 RN-F 3 to 5 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.3.4
26 H 07 RN8-F 4 to 6 (a) 8 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1.3.4
27 FR-N 07 X4X5-F 4 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1 to 4
28 H 07 ZZ-F 4 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 4 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1 to 4

51 M 05 BB-F 3 to 6 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3 (f) 4 (f) 1 1 1 1.3.4

52 H 05 GG-F 5 to 6 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3 (f) 4 (f) 1 1 1 1.3.4
53 H 05 RR-F 3 to 5 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3 (f) 4 (f) 1 1 1 1.3.4
54 A-05 RR-F 3 to 5 4 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3 (f) 4 (f) 1 1 1 1.3.4
VINYL POLYCHLORIDE INSULATED CABLES (PVC family)

101 H 07 VVD3H2-F 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1, 2 2 1

102 H 07 VVH2-F 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 3 4 4 1, 2 2 1
111 FR-N 05 VV-U 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 1 1 1 2.3 (b) 3, 4 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
112 FR-N 05 VV-R 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 1 1 1 2.3 (b) 3, 4 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
113 FR-N 05 VL2V-U 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 1 1 1 2 F) 2, 3 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
114 FR-N 05 VL2V-R 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 1 1 1 2 F) 2, 3 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1

121 H 05 VV-F 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3 (b) 3, 4 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1

122 A-05 VV-F 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3 (b) 3, 4 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
123 H 05 V2V2-F 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3 (b) 3, 4 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
124 FR-N 05 VV5-F 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3 (b) 3, 4 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
125 H 05 VV5-F 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2.3 (b) 3, 4 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
126 H 05 VVC4V5-K 5 to 6 (a) 6 4 1 to 3 2 3 1 1 2 F) 2, 3 (f) 4 1, 2 2 1
VINYL POLYCHLORIDE INSULATED CONDUCTORS (PVC family)
201 H 07 VU 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
202 H 07 VR 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
203 H 07 VK 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -

204 H 07 V2-U 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -

205 H 07 V2-R 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
206 H 07 V2-K 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -

207 H 07 V3-U 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -

208 H 07 V3-R 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
209 H 07 V3-K 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -
ELASTOMER INSULATED CONDUCTORS (PR family)
221 H 05 SJ-K 3 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -
224 H 07 GU 3 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
225 H 07 GR 3 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
226 H 07 GK 3 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -
227 H 07 ZU 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
228 H 07 ZR 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
229 H 07 ZK 5 to 6 (a) 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - - -
FIRE RESISTANT CABLES WITH SYNTHETIC INSULATION (PR family or PVC family as appropriate)
501 4 to 6 (a) 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
502 4 to 6 (a) 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
503 4 to 6 (a) 6 (e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
504 4 to 6 (a) 6 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1, 2
505
506 4 to 6 (a) 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1
507 4 to 6 (a) 7 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
508 4 to 6 (a) 6 (e) 4 1 to 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1 to 3 2 1
509 4 to 6 (a) 6 (e) 4 1 to 3 4 1 2 2 2 (d) 2.3 (d) 4 1 to 3 2 1
(a) These cables can be used under other conditions if they are not subjected to any mechanical stress.
(b) Cables permanently attached and supply voltage to earth at most equal to 250 V.
(c) The conductors must be of the H07V-K series.
(d) If grounding of metal cladding.
(e) Cumulative immersion time limited to two months per year.
(f) Nominal supply voltage with respect to earth equal to at most 250 volts.

- 205 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Table 52E - Conditions of use for wood moldings, duct systems

and chutes and chutes systems

AA AD AE AF AG AH AK AL BB BC BD BE THAT CB
Wood moldings 4, 5, 6 1 3 1 1 111121 1 1 1

System of
ducts (**)
- MRL 5557 1-6 2* 4* 1 4 1 2 2 1 2 4 1, 2, 3 2 1
- THAT'S IT 4421 4, 5, 6 2* 4 * 1, 2, 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 4 1, 2, 3 2 1.3 (a), 4 (a)

- ICTL 3421 4, 5, 6 6* 4 * 1, 2, 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1, 2 2 1
- ICA 3321 4, 5, 6 6* 4 * 1, 2, 3 2 1 1 1 3 4 4 1, 2 2 1
- IRL 3321 4, 5, 6 6* 4 * 1, 2, 3 2 1 1 1 3 4 4 1, 2 2 1
- ICTA 3422 4, 5, 6 6* 4 * 1, 2, 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 4 1, 2 2 1

Chutes in 4, 5, 6 1 1 1, 2.3 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 1, 2 2 1
matter
insulating (**)

Systems of 4, 5, 6 1 3 1, 2.3 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 1, 2 2 1
chutes in
matter
insulating (**)

a) The conductors must be of the HO7V-K series.

* These values correspond to the degrees of protection for the lengths of conduit without accessories.
The accessories provide at least a degree of protection IP40.
* * For external influence conditions other than those given in this table, refer to the manufacturer's
documentation.

523 admissible currents

523.0 Purpose

The requirements of this clause are intended to ensure a satisfactory service life of conductors and insulation
subjected to thermal effects of operation at the appropriate maximum operating temperature for extended
periods in normal service and for usual installation conditions. Other considerations come into play in
determining the cross-section of conductors, such as the rules for protection against electric shock (see4-41),
protection against thermal effects (see 4-42), overcurrent protection (see 4-43), voltage drop (see 525).

This article deals with unarmoured cables and conductors, at nominal voltages not higher than 1000 V at
50-60 Hz and up to 100 Hz or 1500 V in direct current.
For frequencies from 100 to 400 Hz, see the UTE C 15-421 guide.
The values in the tables for multi-conductor cables can be used for armored cables provided that each cable
contains all the conductors in the circuit, errors being in the sense of safety. The values in the tables can also
be used safely for cables with concentric conductor and metallic screen or sheath.

The admissible currents indicated in the tables are determined for the types of insulated conductors and
cables and the methods of laying commonly used in fixed electrical installations.
The admissible current values indicated in the table 52H are applicable to flexible cables insofar as they are
used in fixed installations.

- 206 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H 523.1 General

523.1.1 The current carried by any conductor for extended periods of normal operation should be such that
the maximum operating temperature does not exceed the appropriate value specified in Table 52F. The value
of the current shall be chosen in accordance with 523.1.2, or determined in accordance with 523.1.3.

Table 52F - Maximum operating temperatures for the insulations

Maximum temperature of
Insulation type functioning
(° C)

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Conductor: 70

Cross-linked polyethylene (PR) and ethylene-propylene (EPR) Conductor: 90

NOTE - The maximum operating temperatures indicated in this table were taken from standards NF C 32-300 and NF C
32-301.

523.1.2 The rule of 523.1.1 is considered to be satisfied if the current in insulated conductors and unarmoured
cables is not greater than the appropriate value chosen from the tables.52H and 52J. For cable types to which
this clause does not apply, the allowable currents shall be determined in accordance with 523.1.3.

the table 52G indicates for each installation method the installation reference methods (B, C, D, E, F) for which
the admissible currents are indicated in the corresponding tables and the procedure to be used to deduce the
admissible current values from those of the reference methods.

A tolerance of 5% is allowed on the values of the admissible currents when choosing the cross-section of the
conductors.

The admissible currents for insulated conductors are the same as for single-conductor cables.

H 523.1.3 The values of permissible currents and of correction factors satisfying the requirements of 523.1.1
may be determined according to the methods of IEC 60287 by test or by calculations using a recognized
method provided it is specified. It may be necessary to take into account the characteristics of the load.

- 207 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
Table 52G - Choice of reference methods for admissible currents
depending on the installation methods

For each of the installation methods described in the table 52C, the table indicates the reference method -
identified by one of the letters: B, C, D, E or F - to be applied and any correction factors.

Installation method Method Factors

(number of reference correction Remarks
reference
of Table 52C)
1 B 0.77
2 B 0.70
3 B -
3A B 0.9
4 B -
4A B 0.9
5 B -
5A B 0.9
11 VS -
11A VS 0.95
12 VS -
13 E, F -
14 E, F -
16 E, F -
17 E, F -
18 VS 1.21
21 B 0.95
22 B 0.95
22A B 0.865
23 B 0.95
23A B 0.865
24 B 0.95
24A B 0.865
25 B 0.95
31 B -
31A B 0.9
32 B -
32A B 0.9
33 B -
33A B 0.9
34 B -
34A B 0.9
41 B 0.95
42 B -
43 B -
61 D 0.80
62 D -
63 D -
71 B - (*) For the pose of cables
73 B (*) multicore, apply a correction factor of 0.9.
74 B (*)

81 In the study

- 208 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H Use of tables 52H and 52J

The admissible currents indicated in the tables 52H and 52J are valid for single circuits made up of the
following number of conductors:

Reference method B

- two insulated conductors or two single-conductor cables or one two-conductor cable;

- three insulated conductors or three single-core cables or one three-conductor cable.

Reference method C

- two single-core cables or one two-core cable, - three single-core cables or one three-core cable.

Reference method D

- two single-core cables or one two-core cable, - three single-core cables or one three-core cable.

Reference method E

- a two or three conductor cable.

Reference method F

- two or three single-core cables.

- 209 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H Table 52H - Allowable currents (in amperes) in pipelines

for reference methods B, C, E and F

METHOD
OF INSULATION AND NUMBER OF CHARGED CONDUCTORS
REFERENCE
B PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR 2
VS PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR 2
E PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR2
F PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR 2
S (mm²) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
COPPER
1.5 15.5 17.5 18.5 19.5 22 23 24 26
2.5 21 24 25 27 30 31 33 36
4 28 32 34 36 40 42 45 49
6 36 41 43 48 51 54 58 63
10 50 57 60 63 70 75 80 86
16 68 76 80 85 94 100 107 115
25 89 96 101 112 119 127 138 149 161
35 110 119 126 138 147 158 169 185 200
50 134 144 153 168 179 192 207 225 242
70 171 184 196 213 229 246 268 289 310
95 207 223 238 258 278 298 328 352 377
120 239 259 276 299 322 346 382 410 437
150 299 319 344 371 395 441 473 504
185 341 364 392 424 450 506 542 575
240 403 430 461 500 538 599 641 679
300 464 530
four hundred ninety seven 576 621 693 741 783
400 656 754 825 940
500 749 868 946 1083
630 855 1005 1088 1254

ALUMINUM
10 39 44 46 49 54 58 62 67
16 53 59 61 66 73 77 84 91
25 70 73 78 83 90 97 101 108 121
35 86 90 96 103 112 120 126 135 150
50 104 110 117 125 136 146 154 164 184
70 133 140 150 160 174 187 198 211 237
95 161 170 183 195 211 227 241 257 289
120 186 197 212 226 245 263 280 300 337
150 227 245 261 283 304 324 346 389
185 259 280 298 323 347 371 397 447
240 305 330 352 382 409 439 470 530
300 351 381 406 440 471 508 543 613
400 526 600 663 740
500 610 694 770 856
630 711 808 899 996

NOTES -
1 the admissible current values indicated in this table are applicable to flexible cables used in fixed installations.

2 conductors and cables whose permissible core temperature is less than 70 ° C (for example HO7RN-F, seetable 52A) must be
considered from the point of view of the permissible current as being of the "PVC family".

The number 2 after PR (crosslinked polyethylene) or PVC (polyvinyl chloride) relates to a single-phase circuit.

The number 3 after PR or PVC relates to a three-phase circuit.

- 210 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H Table 52J - Allowable currents (in amperes) in buried pipelines

(reference method D)

SECTION OF INSULATION AND NUMBER OF CHARGED CONDUCTORS

DRIVERS PVC 3 PVC 2 PR 3 PR 2

(mm²)

COPPER
1.5 26 32 31 37
2.5 34 42 41 48
4 44 54 53 63
6 56 67 66 80
10 74 90 87 104
16 96 116 113 136
25 123 148 144 173
35 147 178 174 208
50 174 211 206 247
70 216 261 254 304
95 256 308 301 360
120 290 351 343 410
150 328 397 387 463
185 367 445 434 518
240 424 514 501 598
300 480 581 565 677

ALUMINUM
10 57 68 67 80
16 74 88 87 104
25 94 114 111 133
35 114 137 134 160
50 134 161 160 188
70 167 200 197 233
95 197 237 234 275
120 224 270 266 314
150 254 304 300 359
185 285 343 337 398
240 328 396 388 458
300 371 447 440 520

- 211 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H 523.2 Ambient temperature

The value of the ambient temperature to be used is the temperature of the surrounding environment when
the cable or the conductor in question is not loaded.

The admissible current values indicated in this article are valid for an ambient temperature of:

30 ° C, for cables in air, regardless of the laying method;

20 ° C, for cables buried directly in the ground or in buried conduits.

For other ambient temperatures, the values in the tables should be multiplied by the appropriate factor of
the tables 52K and 52L.

However, for buried cables, correction is not necessary if the soil temperature is only above 25 ° C for a few
weeks per year.

Correction factors for table 52K do not take into account the possible increase in temperature due to solar
radiation. When cables or conductors are subjected to such radiation, the admissible currents must be
calculated taking into account the correction factor of 0.85 (see512.2.11).

When electrical conduits are embedded in walls with heating elements, it is generally necessary to reduce the
allowable currents by applying the correction factors of the table 52K.

- 212 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H Table 52K - Correction factors for ambient temperatures other than 30 ° C

to be applied to the admissible current values of the table 52H

Temperature Insulation
ambient Elastomer
(Rubber) PVC PR / EPR

(° C)

10 1.29 1.22 1.15

15 1.22 1.17 1.12
20 1.15 1.12 1.08
25 1.07 1.06 1.04
35 0.93 0.94 0.96
40 0.82 0.87 0.91
45 0.71 0.79 0.87
50 0.58 0.71 0.82
55 - 0.61 0.76
60 - 0.50 0.71
65 - - 0.65
70 - - 0.58
75 - - 0.50
80 - - 0.41
85 - - -
90 - - -
95 - - -

Table 52L - Correction factors for soil temperatures other than 20 ° C

to be applied to the values of table 52J

Temperature Insulation
of the ground

(° C) PVC PR / EPR

10 1.10 1.07
15 1.05 1.04
25 0.95 0.96
30 0.89 0.93
35 0.84 0.89
40 0.77 0.85
45 0.71 0.80
50 0.63 0.76
55 0.55 0.71
60 0.45 0.65
65 - 0.60
70 - 0.53
75 - 0.46
80 - 0.38

- 213 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

523.3 Thermal resistivity of the soil

The admissible currents indicated in the tables of this article for buried cables correspond to a thermal
resistivity of the ground of 1 km / W.

In locations where the thermal resistivity of the soil is different from 1 Km / W, the allowable currents are to
be multiplied by the correction factors in table 52M unless the earth in the immediate vicinity of the cable is
replaced by a more suitable earth. Such cases can be found in very dry terrain.

Table 52M - Correction factors for buried cables in function

thermal resistivity of the soil

Resistivity
thermal Factor Observations
ground of
(Km / W) correction Humidity Nature of the land

0.40 1.25 Submerged installation Swamps

0.50 1.21 Very humid grounds Sand

0.70 1.13 Wetlands Clay

0.85 1.05 So-called normal terrain and
1.00 1 Dry ground limestone

1.20 0.94
1.50 0.86 Very dry ground Ashes

2.00 0.76 and

2.50 0.70 clinker
3.00 0.65

H 523.4 Grouping of circuits

523.4.1 Grouping of circuits or cables in air

There is grouping of circuits if the laying is contiguous, ie if the free distance separating two cables is less
than or equal to twice the outside diameter of the largest conductor or cable.

In practice, the distance to be considered is the average value of the spacing of the cables along their path.

For groupings of circuits or cables in air, the correction factors for tables 52N and 52Oare applicable to the
reference values of the table 52H.

When a circuit is made up of several single-core cables per phase, the correction factor is determined by
considering that there are as many circuits as there are cables per phase.

- 214 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H
Table 52N - Correction factors for grouping several circuits
or several multicore cables

REF DISPOSITION CORRECTION FACTORS

OF CIRCUITS METHODS MODES
OR CABLES Number of circuits or multicore cables OF DEPOSIT
REFERENCE
JOINTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 16 20

1 Locked up B, C, 1, 2, 3, 3A, 4, 4A, 5, 5A,

21, 22, 22A, 23, 23A,
24, 24A, 25, 31,31A, 32,
32A, 33, 33A, 34, 34A,
41, 42, 43.71
1.00 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.40

2 Single layer on
walls or 11, 12
floors or
tablets no 1.00 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.70 VS
perforated No
factor of
3 Single layer at reduction 11A
ceiling 1.00 0.85 0.76 0.72 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.65 0.64 supplement

mental
4 Single layer on for more
tablets of 9 cables 13
perforated
1.00 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.73 0.72 0.72 E, F

5 Single layer on
scales at 14, 16, 17
cables, crows,
trellis 1.00 0.88 0.82 0.80 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78
welded etc.

The factors in this table are applicable to homogeneous groups of cables, equally loaded.

The same correction factors apply:

- groups of two or three single-core cables;
- multicore cables.

H Table 52O - Correction factors for laying in several layers

for references 1 to 5 of the table 52N

When the cables are laid out in several layers, the following correction factors must be applied to the
admissible current values:

Number of coats 2 3 4 or 5 6 to 8 9 and over

Coefficient 0.80 0.73 0.70 0.68 0.66

These correction factors may be multiplied by those of the table 52N.

Correction factors for cable bundling were calculated assuming the bundle to be similar cables equally
loaded. When a group contains cables of different dimensions, precautions are necessary for the load of the
smaller ones.

- 215 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

523.4.2 Grouping of ducts in air or embedded in concrete

When conduits or sleeves are grouped contiguously, the admissible currents in the conductors laid in these
conduits or sleeves are reduced by applying the correction factors indicated, as the case may be, in tables 52P
or 52Q.

Table 52P - Correction factors according to the number of ducts

in the air and their disposition

Number of conduits Number of ducts arranged horizontally

arranged
vertically
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 1 0.94 0.91 0.88 0.87 0.86

2 0.92 0.87 0.84 0.81 0.80 0.79

3 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.75 0.74

4 0.82 0.78 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.72

5 0.80 0.76 0.72 0.71 0.70 0.70

6 0.79 0.75 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.68

Table 52Q - Correction factors according to the number of conduits

embedded in concrete and their disposition

Number of conduits Number of ducts arranged horizontally

arranged
vertically
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 1 0.87 0.77 0.72 0.68 0.65

2 0.87 0.71 0.62 0.57 0.53 0.50

3 0.77 0.62 0.53 0.48 0.45 0.42

4 0.72 0.57 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.38

5 0.68 0.53 0.45 0.40 0.37 0.35

6 0.65 0.50 0.42 0.38 0.35 0.32

- 216 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H 523.4.3 Bundling of buried cables and conduits

When conduits or cables are laid in the ground, the allowable currents of the conductors are reduced by
applying the correction factors in tables 52R, 52S and 52T.

Table 52R - Correction factors for grouping of several cables laid

directly into the ground. Single-core or multi-core cables
arranged horizontally or vertically

Distance ebetween cablesuconductors or groupents of 3 m cablesonoconducteurs (a)

Number of Method Modes
cables or Nothing A diameter 0.25 m 0.5 m 1.0 m of of
circuits (cables cable reference pose
joined)

2 0.76 0.79 0.84 0.88 0.92

3 0.64 0.67 0.74 0.79 0.85
4 0.57 0.61 0.69 0.75 0.82 D 62, 63
5 0.52 0.56 0.65 0.71 0.80
6 0.49 0.53 0.60 0.69 0.78

Cables Single-core cables:

multicore:
•
To •
•• ••
To To

Table 52S - Correction factors for buried conduits arranged horizontally or vertically
at the rate of a cable or a group of 3 cables
single conductors per conduit

Distance between conduits (a)

Number Nothing Method Fashion
of (Conduits 0.25 m 0.5 m 1.0 m of of
conduits joined) reference pose
2 0.87 0.93 0.95 0.97
3 0.77 0.87 0.91 0.95
4 0.72 0.84 0.89 0.94 D 61
5 0.68 0.81 0.87 0.93
6 0.65 0.79 0.86 0.93

Cables Cables
multicore: single-core: • •
•• ••
To To

Table 52T - Correction factors for several circuits or cables

in the same buried duct

Correction factors Method Fashion

of of
Number of circuits or multicore cables reference pose
12345678912 1620

1 0.71 0.58 0.5 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.35 0.33 0.29 0.25 0.22 D 61

This table is applicable to groups of cables of different sections but having the same maximum admissible
temperature.

- 217 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

523.4.4 Intermittent and variable loads

The cable bundling correction factors have been calculated based on continuous operation with a 100% load
factor for all live conductors. When the operating conditions of the installation show that the load for all active
conductors is less than 100%, the correction factor may be greater.

523.4.5 Lightly loaded conductors

For the application of table 52N, there is no need to take into account circuits whose operating current is not
greater than:
30 % of the admissible current under laying conditions for reference methods B and D (see also table 52T
),
70% of the admissible current under the laying conditions for the reference methods C, E and F

This is the case, for example, if conductors are provided to carry a current that is significantly lower than the
permissible current, for example for reasons of voltage drop or protection against indirect contact.

Likewise, no account is taken of conductors used for control, signaling or similar circuits.

523.5 Number of conductors loaded in a circuit

523.5.1 The number of conductors to be considered in a circuit is that of the conductors actually traversed by
the current. When in a polyphase circuit the currents are assumed to be balanced, there is no need to take
into account the corresponding neutral conductor.

The admissible current values given for three loaded conductors are also valid in a three-phase circuit with
balanced neutral.

523.5.2 When the neutral conductor carries a current without a corresponding reduction in the load of the
phase conductors, the neutral conductor must be taken into account when determining the number of loaded
conductors.

This case is encountered when harmonic currents are present in the neutral conductor of three-phase circuits,
in particular for a level of third order harmonics and multiple of 3 in current, greater than 15% in the phase
conductors.

The materials and phenomena described in the commentary 330.1.1 (d) are the source of harmonic currents
in the neutral conductor of three-phase circuits.

When the neutral conductor is loaded, a reduction factor of 0.84 must be applied to the admissible current
values for cables with 3 or 4 conductors.

The paragraph 524.2 deals with the determination of the cross-section of the neutral conductor.

523.5.3 Conductors used only as protective conductors are not taken into account. PEN conductors are
considered the same as neutral conductors.

- 218 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

523.6 Cables in parallel

When several cables are joined in parallel on the same phase, they must be of the same type, of the same
section, of approximately equal length and must not include any branch on their route.

In general, it is recommended to implement as few cables as possible in parallel. In any case, their number
should not exceed four. Beyond that, it is advisable to prefer the implementation of prefabricated pipes.
Indeed, placing many cables in parallel leads to poor distribution of the current which can lead to abnormal
heating.

An additional factor called symmetry fs, applicable to admissible currents, is introduced for this
implementation.

The recommended symmetrical arrangements are as follows:

a) two cables per phase with or without neutral cable

1 1 1 1
Clover
2 3 NN 3 2
Where
NOT2 3 3 2 N fs= 1

Layer 2 1 3 NN 3 1 2 Where N213312N fs= 1

b) 4 cables per phase and neutral cable

1 1 1
1 fs= 1
N 2 3 3 2 NN 2 3 3 2 N

N2133 1 2 NN 2 1 3 3 1 2 N fs= 1

Failure to comply with the conditions of symmetry indicated in the case of 2 and 4 cables per phase or the use
of 3 cables per phase requires the use of a coefficient fs equal to 0.8.

Applying the coefficient of symmetry fs does not exempt the group from being taken into account; thus, when
a circuit is made up of several single-conductor cables per phase, it is necessary to take into account as many
circuits as there are cables per phase.

H 523.7 Variations in installation conditions on a route

When the conductors and cables are installed on a route along which the cooling conditions vary, the
allowable currents must be determined for the part of the route with the most unfavorable conditions.

When, for reasons of mechanical protection, a cable is laid in a conduit or trunking over a length of not more
than one meter, no admissible current reduction is necessary provided that the duct or trunking is in the air
or mounted on a vertical surface.

- 219 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

524 Conductor sections

H 524.1 Section of phase conductors
The cross-sectional area of phase conductors in alternating current circuits and live conductors in direct
current circuits must not be less than the appropriate value in table 52U.
Table 52U - Minimum cross-sections of phase conductors

Nature of pipelines Using the circuit Conductors

Materials Section (mm²)
Facilities Cables and Power and lighting Copper 1.5
conductors Aluminum 2.5 (see note 1)
isolated
Signaling and Copper 0.5 (see note 2)
ordered
Fixed Bare conductors Power Copper 10
Aluminum 16
Signaling and Copper 4
ordered
For a device according to the standard
determined corresponding
Flexible connections by insulated For any other Copper 0.75 (see note 3)
cables or conductors application
Very low voltage 0.75
circuits for
special applications
NOTES -
1 - The connectors used for the connections of aluminum conductors must be tested and approved for this specific use.

2 - A minimum cross section of 0.1 mm² is permitted in signaling and control circuits intended for electronic equipment, as well
as for communication circuits.
3 - A minimum section of 0.1 mm² is allowed for flexible cables comprising at least seven conductors in the signaling and
control circuits intended for electronic equipment.

The sections of the conductors are determined taking into account the following considerations:
- the operating current at most equal to the admissible current in the following conductors 523, taking into
account information from 311.1 and the simultaneity factors predicted in 311.2 ;
- protection against overloads ensured according to the rules of the articles 433 and 533 ;
- protection against short circuits and thermal stresses according to the rules of the articles434 and 533 ;

- protection against indirect contacts in TN and IT systems according to the rules of the articles 413 and
532 ;
- the voltage drop according to the rules of the article 525.

524.2 Cross-section of neutral conductor

524.2.1 The neutral conductor, if any, must have the same section as the phase conductors:
- in single-phase circuits with two conductors, whatever the cross-section of the conductors,
- in polyphase circuits whose phase conductors have a cross section of at most 16 mm² in copper or 25
mm² in aluminum,
- in three-phase circuits likely to be traversed by harmonic currents of order 3 and multiple of 3, the
harmonic content of which is between 15% and 33%.
See as well 523.5.2.
These harmonic levels are found, for example, in circuits supplying discharge lamp luminaires including
fluorescent tubes.
524.2.2 When the level of third order harmonics and multiple of 3 is greater than 33% in current, the choice of
a neutral section greater than that of the phase conductor may be necessary.
These harmonic rates are found, for example, in circuits dedicated to office automation and IT.

- 220 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

a) when using multipolar cables, the phase section is equal to that of the neutral conductor, the calculation of
this section being made for the current in the neutral taken equal to 1.45 times the operating current in
the sentence.

b) when using single-core cables, the section of the phases can be chosen less than that of the neutral, the
calculation being made:
- for the phase: for its operating current;
- for the neutral: for the current taken equal to 1.45 times the operating current in the phase.

524.2.3 In polyphase circuits whose phase conductors have a section greater than 16 mm² in copper or 25
mm² in aluminum, the neutral conductor may have a section smaller than that of the phase conductors if the
following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

- the load carried by the circuit in normal service is assumed to be balanced and the level of third order
harmonics and multiple of 3 does not exceed 15% in the phase conductor;

As a general rule, the reduced section of the neutral conductor is not less than half that of the phase
conductors.

- the neutral conductor is protected against overcurrents according to the rules of 431.2 ;
- the cross-section of the neutral conductor is at least equal to 16 mm² in copper or 25 mm² in aluminum.

524.2.4 A neutral conductor cannot be common to several circuits.

H 525 voltage drops

The voltage drop between the origin of an installation and any point of use must not be greater than the
values in table 52V expressed in relation to the value of the nominal voltage of the installation.

Table 52V - Voltage drops in installations

Lighting Other uses

Type A - Installations supplied directly by a low
voltage connection, from a low voltage public 3% 5%
distribution network

Type B - Installations supplied by a delivery

substation or by a transformer substation from a
high voltage installation and type A installations 6% 8%
whose delivery point is located in the general LV
switchboard of a public distribution substation.

When the main pipes of the installation are longer than 100 m, these voltage drops can be increased by 0.005% per meter of
pipe beyond 100 m, without however this additional being greater than 0.5%.

The voltage drops are determined according to the powers absorbed by the operating devices, by applying simultaneity
factors if necessary, or, failing that, according to the values of the operating currents of the circuits.

NOTES -
1 - A greater voltage drop can be accepted:
- for engines, during starting periods;
- for other equipment with high current draws,
provided that it is ensured that the voltage variations remain within the limits specified by the corresponding standard.

2 - The following temporary conditions are not taken into account:

- transient overvoltages;
- voltage variations due to abnormal operation.

- 221 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

Voltage drops are determined using the formula:

u=b p1 THE cos + Lsin IB

S

u being the voltage drop, in volts,

b being a coefficient equal to 1 for three-phase circuits, and
equal to 2 for single-phase circuits.

NOTE - Three phase circuits with completely unbalanced neutral (single phase loaded) are considered single phase circuits.

ρ1 being the resistivity of the conductors in normal service, taken equal to the resistivity at temperature in
normal service, i.e. 1.25 times the resistivity at 20 °VS, or 0.023 Ωmm² / m for copper and 0.037 Ωmm² /
m for aluminum;
THE being the simple length of the pipeline, in meters; being
S the section of the conductors, inmm²;
cosϕ being the power factor; in the absence of precise indications, the power factor is
taken equal to 0.8 (sin ϕ = 0.6);
λ being the linear reactance of the conductors, taken equal, in the absence of other indications, to
0.08 mΩ /m ;
IB being the operating current, in amperes;
The relative voltage drop (in percent) is equal to:
u
u = 100
U0
U0 being the voltage between phase and neutral, in volts.
See also the UTE C 15-105 guide.

In very low voltage circuits, the voltage drop limits of the 52V board may not be observed for uses other than
lighting (for example, bell, command, door opening, etc.) provided that the devices are checked for correct
operation Under the same conditions, the minimum cross-section of the conductors used may be reduced to
0.19 mm² when these are made of copper.

See also guide UTE C 15-559.

526 Connections
H
526.1 Connections between conductors and between conductors and other equipment must ensure lasting
electrical continuity and have appropriate mechanical strength.

The UTE C 15-520 guide gives detailed instructions for making the connections. The connections are suitable:

- on the one hand at the currents admitted in permanent mode;

- on the other hand to the sections of the conductors.
If necessary, accessories designed for this purpose are used. The connections made in switchgear assemblies
are established according to the prescriptions of the relevant standard.(13).
The connections must be made in such a way that no loosening or breaking of the strands is possible under
the effect of heating, variations in load, vibrations of materials, under operating conditions.

H 526.2 The choice of connection means must take into account,

- the material of the conductors and their insulation;
- the number and shape of the souls of the conductors;
- the section of conductors;
- the number of conductors to be connected together.

(13) NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421) or NF C 61-910.

- 222 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

NOTE - The use of soldered connections should be avoided in power circuits. If used, they must be designed taking creep and mechanical
stress into account.
The conductors must not include any connection or branching in the penetrations of walls, partitions, ceilings,
floors, roofs, or in construction voids.
For the connections of heating elements and heating cables, see 753.
Busbar fishplate and branching devices are not considered to be connection devices.

H 526.3 The connections must be accessible for verification, testing and maintenance, except in the following
cases:
- junctions of buried cables;
- junctions embedded in a compound or sealed;
- connections between cold junctions and heating elements of ceiling and floor heating systems, and
heating cables.

526.4 If necessary, precautions must be taken so that the temperature reached by the connections in normal
service does not affect the insulation of the conductors connected to them or supporting them.

526.5 The connections must have a degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB by construction or by installation.

526.6 Except in the case of overhead lines and that of contact lines supplying mobile devices, the connections
of conductors between them and with the devices must not be subjected to any tensile or torsional force.

526.7 The connections must be able to withstand the stresses caused by the admissible currents and by the
short-circuit currents determined by the characteristics of the protection devices.

The connections must not undergo any inadmissible modifications due to their heating, aging of the
insulators and vibrations occurring in normal service. In particular, account must be taken of the influence of
the temperatures reached on the mechanical resistance of the materials.

526.8 The transplanting of conductors - that is to say the connection to the terminals of a device of
conductors used to supply other devices - is only permitted on the terminals of sockets of sockets, luminaires
of all types (including autonomous emergency lighting units) and light paths (559.2.5) and if both of the
following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

- the terminals are specially provided for this purpose (for example certain socket outlets) or are
dimensioned so as to be able to receive the total cross-section of the connected conductors;

- their nominal current is not less than the operating current of the upstream circuit.
Transplanting is not allowed on the terminals of user devices (other than those mentioned above), in
particular on heating and cooking devices.

527 Choice and implementation to limit the spread of fire

527.1 Precautions inside a closed compartment

The international provisions foreseen are sometimes different from the national regulations and are not
suitable.

H 527.2 Fire barriers

527.2.1 When a pipe passes through construction elements such as floors, walls, roofs, ceilings, walls, etc. the
openings remaining after passage of the pipe must be closed according to the degree of fire resistance
prescribed for the corresponding element of the construction before crossing.

Sealing of the crossings can be obtained using materials such as plaster, mineral fibers, sand, cement mortar.

- 223 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

These closures are made in such a way as to allow modifications to the installation to be carried out without
damaging the existing pipes and in such a way that the qualities of sealing and non-propagation of the fire
are maintained.

H 527.2.2 Pipelines such as conduits, profiles, trunking, prefabricated pipelines, which enter building elements
with a specified fire resistance must be internally sealed to the degree of fire resistance prescribed for the
corresponding element before penetration and also externally sealed. as prescribed in 527.2.1.

However, there is no need to provide internal sealing for the conduits and troughs satisfying the flame
retardance test, the internal section of which is less than or equal to 710 mm², and having the degrees of
protection IP33. If these conduits or trunking open into a compartment separated by the construction
element in question, the end must have degrees of protection IP33.

528 Neighborhood with other pipelines

H 528.1 Neighborhood with other electrical conduits

The electrical conduits of the LVV and LV voltage domains must not use the same sheaths or channels as
electrical conduits with a voltage greater than the upper limit of the LV domain, unless arrangements are
made so that the conduits of the ELV and LV domains. LV cannot be subjected to a voltage greater than their
power frequency withstand voltage (see 4-41).

Special considerations of disturbances electric and / or electromagnetic can

apply to telecommunication, information transmission and similar circuits (see guide UTE C 15-900).

528.2 Neighborhood with non-electrical pipelines

H 528.2.1 In the vicinity of heating or hot air pipes and flues, electrical pipes must not risk being brought to a
harmful temperature and therefore be kept at a sufficient distance or be separated from these pipes. by a
heat-insulating screen.

The electrical pipes must not use smoke, ventilation or smoke extraction ducts.

Deformable conduits embedded in floors comprising heating elements are as far as possible from these
elements. In particular at the crossings of conduits and heating elements, the conduits are fixed so as to leave
a sufficient thickness of concrete with the heating elements.

H 528.2.2 Electrical conduits should not be placed parallel below conduits which may give rise to condensation
(such as water, steam or gas lines, etc.) unless provisions are made to protect the electrical conduits. effects
of these condensations.

528.2.3 When electrical conduits are installed in the vicinity of non-electrical conduits, they must be arranged
so that any foreseeable intervention on one conduit does not risk damaging the others.

This can be achieved by:

- an appropriate space between the pipes;
- the installation of mechanical or thermal screens.

- 224 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

H 528.2.4 When an electrical conduit is placed in the immediate vicinity of non-electrical conduits, it must be
suitably protected against the dangers which may result from the presence of other conduits.

The dangers that may result from the presence of other pipes relate in particular to:
- an increase in temperature which may result from the presence of other steam or heating pipes or more
generally of a hot fluid;
- the danger of flooding, in the event of damage to a liquid line, all arrangements being made to allow the
liquids to be evacuated.

529 Rules specific to the different laying methods

Detailed indications on the conditions of implementation of the different installation methods are given in
guide UTE C 15-520.

529.1 Ducts
529.1.1 Surface-mounted installation
The conduits which do not have the quality of non-propagation of the flame and which are characterized by
the yellow-orange color, are not allowed in apparent installation.

529.1.2 Flues in flush mounting

529.1.2.1 Ducts with a degree of protection at least equal to IK07 may only be laid before masonry
construction if they are protected from any significant mechanical stress during construction work.

Ducts with a degree of protection greater than IK07 are laid either before construction of the masonry or
after construction of the masonry.

IK07 protection degree conduits are ICA 3321 and IRL 3321 conduits.

Ducts with a degree of protection greater than IK07 are conduits with a classification greater than 3321.

529.1.2.2 Ducts which do not have the quality of non-flame propagation and which are characterized by the
yellow-orange color must be completely encased in non-combustible materials.

529.2 Wood moldings, baseboards and casings

529.2.1 Wooden moldings are only allowed in renovation in historical monuments under conditions of
external influences AD1.

529.2.2 The grooves of the moldings must have dimensions such that the conductors fit freely in them.

In wooden moldings, only one conductor must be passed per groove. It is however allowed to pass several
conductors in the same groove provided that these conductors belong to one and the same circuit.

In the absence of baseboards, the lower part of the moldings must be at least 10 cm above the finished floor.

529.2.3 When use is made of grooved plinths which serve as a support for socket outlets for plinths, it is
permitted to pass conductors belonging to two different circuits in the same groove, provided that these
conductors are not the same. polarity.

- 225 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

529.3 Chutes
In the case of trunking laid in plinth, the protection class against mechanical impacts must correspond to at
least a degree of mechanical protection IK07. The lowest insulated conductor must be at least 1.5 cm above
the finished floor.
Insulated conductors are only allowed if the cover requires the use of a tool to be removed and if the trunking
has the degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD.
When the cover can be removed without using a tool, connections are only allowed if they present a minimum
degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB, the conductors being in place.

529.4 Construction voids

Ducts, galleries and gutters are not considered construction voids. The same applies to spaces above
removable suspended false ceilings for which the installation conditions are those of exposed installation, the
pipes being fixed or supported independently of the removable panels.

529.4.1 In construction voids, conduits are made of insulated conductors under conduit or cables (multi-
conductor or single-conductor), provided that the conductors and cables can be laid or removed without
intervention on the building's construction elements.

Conductors, cables, conduits that can be laid directly in construction voids must comply with flame retardance
tests.

529.4.2 Insulated conductors laid in duct

The dimensions of construction voids must be such that conduits can enter them freely.

529.4.3 Cables
Insulated cables (single or multi-conductor) can be laid directly, i.e. without conduit, in a construction void, if
the smallest transverse dimension of the void is at least 1.5 times the outer diameter. of the cable of the
largest section.

In addition, the overall section of the cables, all protections included, must not be greater than a quarter of
the section of the vacuum used.

529.5 Buried pipelines

529.5.1 Only the underground installation of cables is permitted under the following conditions:

To) steel-armored cables with a waterproof sheath under the armor can be placed directly in the ground.

Cables which can be laid directly in the ground are cables with a nominal voltage of at least 1000 volts and
having a metallic coating, such as those of the U-1000 RGPFV, U-1000 RVFV, FR-N1X-DV, FR- series. N 1-
X1X2Z4X2, FR-N 1-X 1G lZ4G1.

b) cables without armor but with a thick sheath require independent mechanical protection against impact
from metal hand tools.

Cables which require protection against impact from metal hand tools are cables with a nominal voltage of
at least 1000 volts and not having a metallic coating, such as those of the U-1000 R 12N, U-1000 R2V series,
FR-N 1-X 1X2, FR-N 1-X 1G1. The other cables that can be used in the conditions of external influences AD5
(see table 52D) must be placed in conduits or sheaths, such as conduits for buried pipes conforming to the
standard in force.(14).

(14) NF EN 50086-2-4 (C 68-114).

- 226 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

vs) the other cables must be placed in conduits or sheaths, or protected by equivalent devices against
mechanical damage.

529.5.2 The cables must be protected against deterioration caused by soil compaction, contact with hard
bodies, the impact of hand tools in the event of excavation, as well as against chemical actions caused by
elements of the soil.

To counter the effects of soil compaction, cables should be buried in normal ground, at least 0.50 m from the
ground surface. This depth is increased to 0.85 m when crossing roads accessible to cars and under
sidewalks. These depths can be reduced in rocky terrain. They may not be complied with if arrangements are
made so that the cables do not directly withstand the effects of soil settlement, for example by using sheaths.

These values apply from the top of the cable after laying.

529.5.3 When a buried pipe crosses another buried electrical pipe, they must, in principle, be at a minimum
distance of 0.20 m.
When a buried electrical pipe runs along or crosses water, hydrocarbon, gas, compressed air or steam pipes
which are also buried, a minimum distance of 0.20 meter must, in principle, exist between their most
important points. closer together.

This distance may be reduced provided that the installations are separated by a protection device giving
equivalent safety.

529.5.4 Any buried pipe must be indicated by a non-corrodible warning device placed at least 0.20 m above it.

It is recommended that the warning device consists of a red plastic mesh. This device is not necessary when
the cables are provided with independent mechanical protection or are placed in red conduits or sheaths.

529.6 Prefabricated pipes

Prefabricated pipes must comply with NF EN 60439-2 (C 63-422).
Guidance on the calculation of prefabricated pipelines is given in guide UTE C 15-107.

529.7 Outdoor overhead lines

529.7.1 The rules set out below relate to pipelines established in bare conductors or provided with a weather-
resistant coating or in conductors assembled in bundles and mounted on wooden, reinforced concrete, iron
or steel posts or on metal posts.

For safety reasons, it is recommended to make overhead lines for low voltage electrical installations, in
insulated conductors assembled in bundles in accordance with standard NF C 33-209.

These rules do not apply to electric fence lines.

529.7.2 Bare drivers should be out of reach. In the crossings of the courtyards, their lowest point must be at
least 6 m above the ground; this height can be reduced to 4 m in yards inaccessible to vehicles and to 3 m
along buildings and walls or above terrace roofs.

In the vicinity of buildings, bare conductors must be at least a horizontal distance of 1 m from windows, bays
or openings or a vertical distance of 2 m above or 1 m below them.

529.7.3 Insulated conductors assembled in bundles must be fixed by accessories, the parts of which in contact
with the insulating coating of the conductors must be of insulating material.

- 227 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-52

These conductors must be at a height above the ground of at least 4 m in crossings of yards and 2 m in yards
inaccessible to vehicles and along walls. In the vicinity of buildings, they must be at a distance of at least 0.50
m from windows, bays or openings, unless they are equipped with additional mechanical protection.

______________

- 228 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

Part 5-53 - Apparatus

(Protection, control, isolation and monitoring)

530 General ................................................. .................................................. ............... 230

531 Fault current protection devices .......................................... ....... 231
532 (available) ............................................... .................................................. ................. 238
533 Overcurrent protection devices ............................................ .............. 238
534 Protection devices against voltage disturbances ........................................ 242
535 Coordination between the different protection devices ........................................... .. 250
536 Control and disconnection devices ............................................ ................. 257
537 Monitoring devices ............................................... ............................................. 262

- 229 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

530 General

VS 530.1 Scope
The requirements of this part supplement the common rules of the part 5-51.
The part 5-53 deals with the choice and implementation of equipment relating to protection, control,
disconnection and monitoring.

530.2 (Available)

530.3 Common requirements

530.3.1 The movable contacts of all the poles of the multipolar devices must be mechanically coupled so that
they open or close practically together; however, the contacts intended for the neutral can close before and
open after the other contacts.

530.3.2 In polyphase circuits, single pole devices should not be installed in the neutral conductor.

In single-phase circuits, single-pole devices must not be installed in the neutral conductor, unless a
differential-residual current device satisfying the rules of
413.1 is planned upstream.

530.3.3 Devices providing more than one function shall meet all the requirements of this part corresponding
to each of those functions.

530.4 Fixing of equipment

530.4.1 With the exception of equipment which is specially designed to be connected to movable pipes, the
equipment must be fixed in such a way that the connections of the pipes with the equipment are not
subjected to any tensile or torsional force, despite the stresses resulting from the normal use of equipment.

530.4.2 Insulated conductors (for example H07 VU or R) must be arranged in such a way that they do not
come into contact with the wall.

530.4.3 When the devices are embedded in a wall, they must be housed in a flush-mounting box, fixed in the
wall and chosen according to the nature of the wall, taking into account the possible presence of flammable
materials.

In France, the M0 to M4 classification is the one resulting from the order of June 30, 1983 of the Ministry of
the Interior on the classification of construction and fitting materials according to their reaction to fire and
definition of test methods.
The annex to the part 4-42 gives a conventional classification of building materials from the point of view of
their reaction to fire.
However, it is permissible not to provide a flush-mounting box if the rear part of the switchgear is in a
construction void, provided that this void does not contain combustible materials or likely to cause
significant dust.
The use of a flush-mounting box is necessary when it is necessary to guard against any accumulation of dust
on the connections, which could lead to excessive heating, or even ignition of the dust if it is combustible.

The complete absence of a flush-mounting box is only possible if the wall can constitute a flush-mounting
box. This is particularly so if the partition is made of a dry and insulating material (for example wood).

the table 53A summarizes the conditions under which the fitting of the switchgear must be carried out depending on the
nature of the partitions.

- 230 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

Table 53A - Embedding conditions of the switchgear

NATURE OF THE PARTITION BOX

RECESSED

Masonry (stones, rubble, bricks, concrete). Required

Wood or insulating material. Not required

Composite partition and having a construction void but not containing combustible or Not required
conductive materials.

Other composite partitions. Required

530.4.4 When the equipment is fixed on or in trunking, plinths or moldings, they must be integral with the
base of these ducts, plinths or moldings.

530.4.5 The switchgear must not, during use, separate from its support and make the connection terminals
for conductors and power cables accessible.
The equipment with screw fixing, for use in boxes embedded in the walls, makes it possible to fulfill this
requirement.
Taking into account the constraints of use and the nature of the walls receiving the recessed boxes in which
the socket outlets are installed, claw fixing is strongly discouraged. It will no longer be authorized from 1er
June 2004 for buildings covered by a building permit filed after this date.

531 Fault current protection devices

531.1 Overcurrent protection devices

VS 531.1.1 TN diagram (411.4)

In the TN diagram, the overcurrent protection devices must be chosen and implemented under the
conditions indicated in 434.2, 431 and 533.3 for protection against short-circuits and shall meet the
requirements of 413.1.3.3 for protection against electric shock.

531.1.2 TT diagram (411.5)

The use of overcurrent protection devices in the TT scheme is not permitted for protection against electric
shock.
The use of overcurrent protection devices in the TT system requires earth electrode resistance values that
are difficult to measure and without guarantee over time (less than 1 ohm).

VS 531.1.3 IT diagram (411.6)

When the masses are interconnected, the overcurrent protection devices providing protection at the second
fault shall be chosen under the conditions indicated in 531.1.1, taking into account the requirements of
413.1.5.5.

531.2 Residual-differential current protection devices (abbreviated as DDR)

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as follows:
- Differential-residual current (RCD) protection devices for voltage installations
(1)
nominal at most equal to 1000 V rules.
- Automatic differential-residual current switches for domestic and
(2)
analogues.
-------
(1) UTE C 60-130
(2) NF EN 61008-1 (C 61-150) and NF EN 61008-2-1 (C 61-151)
- 231 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

(3)
- Automatic differential device earth switches with auxiliary source .
(4)
- Differential circuit breakers for control panels of first category installations.
- Automatic differential-residual current switches with overcurrent protection
(5)
incorporated for domestic and similar installations.
(6)
- Circuit breakers with built-in differential-residual current protection.
- Differential-residual devices (RCD) for household and similar uses - Compatibility
(7)
electromagnetic.

531.2.1 General installation conditions

VS 531.2.1.1 The differential-residual current protection devices must ensure the breaking of all the active
conductors of the circuit.

This rule requires in particular that the neutral conductor be cut, including in the TN-S diagram. This
requirement complies with the rule in461.3.
VS 531.2.1.2 The protective conductor associated with the active conductors of a circuit must not pass inside
the magnetic circuit of a differential-residual current protection device.

When the differential-residual device uses a toroidal sensor separate from the measurement and detection
relay, it is sometimes impossible to avoid the passage of the PE conductor through the toroid. This is
particularly the case with multicore cables for which there is not enough room to position the toroid on the
uncoated part of the outer protective sheath. The sensor can then be positioned on the coated part of the
outer protective sheath, enclosing all the active conductors and the protective conductor, provided that the
protective conductor passes back inside the toroidal sensor in the opposite direction as indicated on the
figure. figure 531A.

Active drivers
PE conductor

Detection toroid

Figure 531A - Case of double passage of the PE

531.2.1.3 The differential-residual current protection devices must be chosen taking into account the
VS
division of circuits prescribed in 314, in such a way that any earth leakage current, capable of circulating
during the normal operation of the powered devices, cannot cause the device to shut down unexpectedly.

NOTE - Since differential-residual current protection devices can operate for any value of differential-residual current greater than 50% of
the rated operating current, it is recommended to limit the sum of the prospective leakage currents to one third of this current of rated
operation.

-------
(3) NF C 61-141
(4) NF C 62-411
(5) NF EN 61009-1 (C 61-440) and NF EN 61009-2-1 (C 61-441)
(6) NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120, appendix B)
(7) NF EN 61543 (C 61-443)
- 232 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

When the sum of the leakage currents of the devices supplied by the protected installation part
by an RCD is likely to be greater than half of the rated differential current (I∆not) for this device, certain user
devices can be supplied under the conditions of the TN diagram via a transformer with two windings. The
masses of the user devices are then connected to the neutral or middle point of the transformer secondary
and this connection is connected to an earth. Protection is provided by the overcurrent protection devices of
the active conductors of the secondary circuit.

VS 531.2.1.4 The differential-residual current protection devices must be chosen in such a way as to limit the
risks of undesirable tripping due to electromagnetic disturbances.
NOTE - RCDs conforming to their standards meet the majority of installation cases.

In cases where disturbances are particularly severe or when continuity of service is particularly necessary, it
is recommended to install reinforced immunity RCDs to be defined, on a case-by-case basis, between the
user and the manufacturer.

These RCDs meet basic standards and also benefit from high performance immunity to electromagnetic
disturbances.
Examples of disruptive equipment:
- Micro-computing, electronic ballasts, power electronics, etc.
Examples of installations requiring special continuity of service:
- Hospitals, continuous industrial processes, instrumentation, etc.

531.2.1.5 Influence of DC components

There are different types of RCD depending on their behavior in the presence of DC components:
AC type RCD: RCD for which tripping is ensured for sinusoidal alternating differential currents, whether they
are suddenly applied or they increase slowly.
Type A RCD: RCD for which tripping is ensured for sinusoidal alternating differential currents and also for
pulsed direct differential currents, whether they are suddenly applied or they increase slowly.

Type B RCD: RCD for which tripping is ensured for sinusoidal alternating differential currents, for pulsed
continuous differential currents, whether they are suddenly applied or they increase slowly, and also for
smooth direct differential currents.
In general, AC type RCDs can be used.

For example, upstream of:

- devices controlled by triacs such as light or speed variators because the triacs do not generate a DC
component;
- parts of equipment or materials producing and using direct current produced according to the rules
applicable to class II such as microcomputers, TV, HIFI, Video;
- equipment producing direct current supplied via an isolation or safety transformer such as halogen
dimmers.

When class I electrical equipment installed downstream of an RCD is likely to produce DC fault currents, this
RCD must be of type A for single-phase powered applications or of type B for three-phase powered
applications. However, if the part of this equipment liable to produce fault currents with a DC component is
carried out according to the rules applicable to class II, an AC type RCD is suitable whatever the type of
power supply.

Example :
Class I equipment which incorporates a diode power supply (or diode bridge) or a switching power supply
such as:
- power supplies for direct current circuits;
- variable speed drives with frequency converter;
- ASI.
- 233 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

In the particular case of installations in residential premises, this rule results in the indication of the type of
RCDs in the differential switch selection table. (board771C).

531.2.1.6 The same RCD, if it is highly sensitive (I∆not ≤ 30mA), provides both protection against the risks of
indirect contact and additional protection against the risks of direct contact. (see531.2.5).

531.2.2 Choice of devices according to their operating mode

VS 531.2.2.1 Differential-residual current protection devices can be either voltage-independent or voltage-

dependent operation, taking into account the requirements of the 531.2.2.2.

For voltage-dependent devices, this voltage can be supplied either by the power supply network or by an
auxiliary source.

531.2.2.2 The use of differential-residual current protection devices with voltage-dependent operation which
do not open automatically in the event of a power failure is only permitted if the devices are implemented in
installations operated and maintained by knowledgeable (BA4) or qualified (BA5) people.

Therefore, they should not be used in residential premises. However, in the event that such premises are
supplied from a monitored power connection, a general control and protection device dependent on the
supply voltage and not opening automatically in the event of failure of the power supply, can be used
provided that downstream, the entire installation is protected by RCDs whose operation is independent of
voltage.

531.2.3 Choice of devices according to the nature of the protection to be provided

531.2.3.1 Protection against indirect contact

The use of RCD ensures protection against the risks of indirect contact in accordance with 411.3.

Their implementation depends on the earth connection diagram (see 531.2.4.1, 531.2.4.2 and 531.2.4.3).

531.2.3.2 Additional protection against the risks of direct contact

The use of high sensitivity DDR (I∆not ≤ 30mA), provides additional protection against the risks of direct
contact in accordance with 415.1.
Their implementation does not depend on the earth connection diagram except for parts of the installation
in TN-C diagram where the use of RCD is incompatible.

531.2.3.3 Protection against fire risks

The use of medium sensitivity DDR (I∆not ≤ 300mA) provides protection against the risk of fire generated by
grounding currents.
This measure is required in particular in premises with a risk of fire (BE2, see 422.1.7) and in potentially
explosive areas (BE3, see 424.10).
Their implementation does not depend on the earth connection diagram.

531.2.4 Installation according to the earth connection diagram

VS 531.2.4.1 TN diagram
If, for certain terminal circuits, the maximum breaking times of the table 41A, cannot be respected by the
overcurrent protection devices of these circuits, they can be protected by a differential-residual current
protection device. Unless there is a particular constraint on selectivity, several circuits can be protected by
the same device.

- 234 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

If certain grounds of an installation are connected to a local earth electrode which is electrically different
VS from that of the TN diagram, the corresponding part of the installation must be considered as an installation
in the TT diagram, and protection in the event of a fault must be ensured by differential-residual current
devices, according to the rules applying to the TT system.
The value of the resistance of the local earth electrode and the highest rated differential-residual current of
the installed devices must satisfy the condition of 411.5.3.

531.2.4.2 TT diagram

531.2.4.2.1 Location of RCDs

A differential-residual current protection device must be placed at the origin of the installation, unless the
part of the installation between the origin and the device (s) satisfy the protection measure by use of
protective equipment. class II or by equivalent insulation (412).
NOTES -
1 - When the installation has several origins, this requirement applies to each origin.
2 - When the installation has several differential-residual current protection devices, their coordination can be carried out in accordance
with 535.4.

When a single RCD is placed at the origin of the installation, the entire installation is de-energized in the
event of a fault. (figure 531B)

Figure 531B - A single RCD at the origin of the installation

Depending on the characteristics of the installation and the risks considered, it may be necessary to provide
RCDs of different sensitivities to protect different parts of the installation.

On the other hand, it may be desirable to obtain a certain selectivity between the operation of devices
located at different levels of the installation.

When the general protection device used at the origin of the installation includes a differential protection
function provided by an independent relay acting on a current shedding or undervoltage release and
sensitive to the measured zero sequence component, this zero sequence component can be measured:

- or using one or more toroids placed on the active conductors, downstream of the general control device
when possible. This arrangement can be adopted when the number and the section of the conductors
are compatible with the through holes in the toroids;

- or using a toroid placed on the conductor connecting the neutral point of the transformer to its earth
(whether or not the neutral is distributed).

- 235 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

531.2.4.2.2 Choice of RCD characteristics

The value of the rated differential-residual current I∆not of an RCD must not be greater than that
corresponding to the maximum value of the earth electrode resistance of the part of the installation
protected by this device.
Table 53B indicates, for the different normal values of rated differential operating current of RCDs, the
maximum value of the earth electrode resistance.
In practice, the value to be taken into account for the resistance of the earth electrode must take account of
possible seasonal variations.
When it is not possible in practice to measure the resistance of the earth connection of the masses, it must
be ensured that the impedance of the fault loop is not greater than the value indicated in the table 53B.

Table 53B - Maximum value of the earth connection according to the rated current of the RCD

MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL-RESIDUAL CURRENT MAXIMUM VALUE OF RESISTANCE

ASSIGNED TO DDR FROM THE EARTH OF THE MASSES
(I∆not) (ohms)

Low sensitivity 20 A 2.5

10 A 5
5A 10
3A 17

Mean 1A 50
sensitivity 500 mA 100
300 mA 167
100 mA 500

High ≤ 30 mA > 500

sensitivity

The use of type "S" differential-residual current devices is considered to meet the requirements of 411.3.2.2,
if the phase-to-neutral voltage is less than or equal to 230 V.

531.2.4.3 IT diagram

VS 531.2.4.3.1 Case of the first fault

If medium-sensitivity differential devices are used and if the first fault cut-out is not accepted, the value of
the rated differential-residual current I∆not of the RCD must be greater than twice the value of the current
flowing during a first fault (If).

I∆n > 2×If

The use of high sensitivity RCDs is required for terminal circuits (for example those supplying outlets with
rated current less than or equal to 32 A). This RCD generally trips upon the appearance of a first fault
located downstream of this device.

- 236 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

531.2.4.3.2 Case of the second fault affecting interconnected masses

When RCDs are used under the conditions of 411.6.4a), there must be one RCD per circuit.

The operating characteristics of this DR device must be chosen in accordance with thetable 41A.

531.2.4.3.3 Case of the second fault affecting non-interconnected masses

When, in an installation, all the grounds are not interconnected, an RCD must protect each group of
interconnected grounds.
The conditions for determining the characteristics of the RCD are those of the TT system defined in
411.5.

I∆n ≤ 50 RTO
In addition, protection against the risks of indirect contacts of each of the circuits placed downstream of this
RCD must be ensured in accordance with the rules of the 411.6.4.

531.2.4.3.4 Case of protection of the neutral conductor during the second fault
As shown in 431.2.2, it is allowed to protect the neutral conductor using an RCD per circuit concerned,
respecting the following conditions:
- the rated differential-residual current is at most equal to 0.15 times the admissible current in the
corresponding neutral conductor;
- this device must cut all the active conductors of the corresponding circuit, including the neutral conductor.

A differential device meeting the preceding conditions can be common to a set of terminal circuits if all of
the following conditions are met:
a) Each of these circuits is protected against indirect contacts by the overcurrent protection device placed at
its origin, in accordance with the rules set out in 411.6.4.

b) The characteristics of these terminal circuits are identical:

- the pipes are of the same type or admit the same admissible currents;
- the conductors are of the same section; and
- overcurrent protection devices have the same rated current and the same tripping characteristic
(type B, C or D).

531.2.5 Use of high sensitivity RCD (/∆not at most equal to 30 mA)

531.2.5.1 The use of an RCD with a rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA is an additional
protective measure against electric shocks. As such, they must protect the circuits listed in411.3.3.

In the case of socket-outlets, the differential devices can be implemented either at the origin of the circuit or
at the level of the socket.
The power cut resulting from the operation of such devices can disrupt the operation of certain devices,
such as computer equipment and freezers. Special arrangements can then be made, for example:

- power supply by dedicated 30 mA DDR;

- direct supply by an isolating transformer.

531.2.5.2 In the TT system, the use of high sensitivity RCDs is necessary to ensure protection against indirect
contacts when the resistance of the earth connection of the masses has a high value, for example greater
than 500 ohms.

- 237 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

If during measurements, the value of the earth electrode resistance, although high, is compatible with the
use of medium sensitivity RCDs, it may however be preferable to provide high sensitivity devices in order to
guarantee safety. in the event of an increase in the resistance of the earth electrode over time.

531.2.5.3 The use of high sensitivity RCDs is required in particular when the conditions of external influences
are particularly severe or when the risk of humidity can affect the good insulation of the equipment. These
cases are specified in theparts 7 of this standard.

532 (available)

533 Overcurrent protection devices

533.1 General provisions

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are in particular the
following:
Circuit breaker :
(8)
- circuit breaker with cylindrical cartridges;
- circuit breaker with fuses for alternating current with a nominal voltage equal to 500V - Additional rules for
(9)
circuit breakers for industrial use;
- AC fused circuit breaker with nominal voltage equal to 500V - Cutter and cartridge circuit breaker;
(10)

Circuit breakers:
- circuit breakers for protection against overcurrents for domestic and similar installations;
(11)

(12)
- differential circuit breakers for control panels of first category installations;
(13)
- low voltage industrial control equipment - Circuit breakers.

VS 533.1.1 Fuses whose replacement elements are likely to be removed or replaced by persons other than
informed (BA4) or qualified (BA5) must be of a model that complies with the safety requirements of the
standard in force - Circuit breaker with low voltage fuses. Part Three: Additional rules for fuses intended for
use by unqualified persons(8).

Fuses or assemblies comprising replacement elements capable of being removed or replaced only by
informed (BA4) or qualified (BA5) persons must be installed in such a way that it is ensured that the
replacement elements can be removed or put in place without risk of accidental contact with active parts.

Cylindrical cartridge fuses conforming to the standard in force (8) can be used in TT and TN installations with
nominal voltage 230 / 400V, but not in IT installations with the same nominal voltage.

VS 533.1.2 Circuit breakers which can be operated by persons other than informed (BA4) or qualified (BA5)
must be designed or installed in such a way that it is not possible to modify the setting of their overcurrent
relays without voluntary action. requiring the use of a wrench or tool.

-------
(8) NF C 61-203
(9) NF EN 60269-2 (C 63-210)
(10) NF C 63-213
(11) NF EN 60898 (C 61-410). In the remainder of this standard, these circuit breakers are referred to as domestic.
(12) NF C 62-411
(13) NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120). In the remainder of this standard, these circuit breakers are called industrial.
- 238 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

VS 533.2 Choice of overload protection devices

The rated (or set) current of the protection device must be chosen in accordance with
433.2.
The overload protection device must be sensitive to the rms value of the current flowing in the protected
circuit.
Circuit breakers equipped with bimetallic strip (especially circuit breakers for domestic use) and fuses are
naturally sensitive to the rms value of the current. Circuit breakers for industrial use can be fitted with
electronic trip units which must include a calculation algorithm allowing the effective value of the current to
be taken into account. This disregard of the rms value can generate unwanted tripping (overprotection) if
the tripping threshold corresponds to a value lower than the real rms current, or to a lack of protection in
the reverse case.

In certain cases, to avoid untimely operations, temporary variations in load current must be taken into
consideration when choosing the protection curve.
In the case of cyclic loads, the values of Inot and of I2 should be chosen on the basis of the values of IB and
VS of Iz for thermally equivalent constant loads:
or
IB is the operating current of the pipeline. is the
Iz admissible current of the pipeline. is the rated
Inot current of the protection device.
I2 is the current effectively ensuring the operation of the protection device.
The rated currents of the fuses and circuit breakers protecting the pipes against overloads are obtained
from the tables in the UTE C 15-105 guide.

533.3 Choice of short-circuit protection devices

The paragraph 434.5 defines a breaking capacity rule in 434.5.1 and a cutoff time rule in 434.5.2.

To meet these rules, the choice of short-circuit protection devices must comply with the following
conditions.

533.3.1 Breaking capacity

For all short-circuit protection devices, the maximum prospective current at the point of installation of the
protection device must be less than the breaking capacity of this device.

The standards relating to circuit breakers specify a breaking capacity (ultimate I cu

for the
industrial and rated circuit breakers I for
cn
household circuit breakers) which must be at least equal
the maximum prospective short-circuit current at the location where the circuit breaker is installed.
These standards also provide for a service breaking capacity (I). The conditions of cs
operation of the installation may justify the choice of the protection device according to the service breaking
capacity, for example when the circuit breaker is placed at the origin of the installation.

When the installation is carried out according to the IT diagram, the protection devices must also be able to
cut on one pole, under voltage between phases, the double fault current.
These devices can be:
- either devices whose breaking capacity on one pole under line-to-phase voltage is at least equal to:

• 0.15 times the three-phase short-circuit current at the point considered if the latter is less than or equal
to 10,000 A,
• 0.25 times the three-phase short-circuit current at the point considered if the latter is greater than
10,000 A.
- 239 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

In the absence of more precise information, it can be assumed that the breaking capacity on a single pole
under the voltage between phases of three-pole and four-pole devices is at least equal to the ultimate three-
phase breaking capacity at a voltage equal to 3 times that of the nominal voltage of the circuit concerned.

For single-pole protection devices (small circuit breakers, fuses), the breaking capacity to be taken into
consideration is that indicated for the voltage between phases, for example 400 V in a 230 / 400V
installation.
- either devices with a maximum rating greater than or equal to 100 A and for which this capacity is
explicitly recognized in the standards relating to them; this is the case of industrial circuit breakers
conforming to appendix H of the standard(14).

533.3.2 Switch-off time

The application of the rule 434.5.2 for short-circuits with a duration of at most 5 s, the minimum and
maximum short-circuit conditions must be taken into account.
This results in the following conditions for fuses and for circuit breakers, taking into account their different
characteristics.

To) case of fuses : the minimum short-circuit current Ik must not be less than Ii(Figure 533A).

VS Intensity / time curve

corresponding to the
admissible thermal stress in the
protected pipe.

F Melting curve of the fuse

(upper limit of the operating
area).

I
Ii

Figure 533A - Fuses - breaking time

When the operating time of the fuse for the current Ii is greater than 5 s, the current Ii is replaced by the
operating current of the fuse in 5 s.

b) case of circuit breakers : For circuit breakers, two conditions must be met (figure 533B):
- the minimum short-circuit current must be at least equal to Ii ;
- the prospective short-circuit current at the point of installation of the circuit breaker must be less than Ij.

-------
(14) NF EN 60947-2 (C 63-120)

- 240 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

VS Intensity / time curve

corresponding to the
admissible thermal stress in the
protected pipe.

D Circuit breaker operating curve.

Figure 533B - Circuit breakers - breaking time

Ii is the instantaneous or short delay operating current of the circuit breaker.

The second condition is verified by comparing the through-flow energy I²t of the circuit breaker during the
short-circuit breaking time with the maximum thermal stress admissible by the pipe.

For short-circuit currents whose duration is greater than several periods, the through-flow energy I²t of the
protection device can be calculated by multiplying the square of the rms value of the intensity of the short-
circuit current by the time of circuit breaker operation. For short-circuit currents of shorter duration, refer to
the I²t characteristics supplied by the manufacturer.

The minimum short-circuit current is that corresponding to a clear short-circuit occurring at the point
furthest from the protected pipe, between phase and neutral (Ik1) or between two phases (Ik2) if the neutral
is not distributed.

The same protection device generally provides both overload protection and short-circuit protection; it is
then not necessary to check the condition of the minimum short-circuit current.

This is the general case for circuit breakers for domestic and industrial use which have overload and short-
circuit detection relays. The same is true for gG type fuses which provide both overload and short-circuit
protection. This may not be valid for very long circuits, such as tunnel circuits, exterior lighting circuits. In
such cases, the cut-off time rule must be systematically verified, as recommended, for example standard NF
C 17-200 for public lighting circuits.

When the same protection device only provides protection against short circuits, it is generally associated
with another protection device against overloads. As these two devices are coordinated, no additional
verification is required.

This is the case, for example, with motor protection where, in the same cabinet, a circuit breaker without an
overload relay is associated with a specific motor thermal relay and a contactor. The different types of
association of these devices are described in the standard(15). These types of association are also possible
with fused circuit breakers (for example type aM).

-------
(15) NF EN 60947-4-1 (C 63-110)
- 241 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

534 Protection devices against voltage disturbances

534.1 Protection devices against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to maneuvers

534.1.1 Nature and role of the devices

The devices providing protection against transient overvoltages are lightning arresters, isolation
transformers specially designed for this purpose, special filters or a combination of these devices.

Only surge arresters are dealt with in the rest of this article.
Their choice and implementation must not interfere with the operation of the installation and other
protection devices.
They must not present a danger to people and property during their operation, as well as during their
possible destruction.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to consider is as follows:
Equipment for installations supplied directly by a public low voltage distribution network. Surge arresters for
low voltage installations (see standard NF C 61-740).
THE'article 443 contains the rules for protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to
maneuvers.
Surge arresters are intended to limit the level of overvoltages of atmospheric origin coming from the
distribution network to a level compatible with the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment of the
installation and of the equipment supplied by this installation; in practice, they also provide protection
against switching overvoltages.
They protect installations against surges induced in electrical conduits but do not generally protect against
direct lightning strikes either on the lines of the distribution networks or on buildings. The protection of
buildings against lightning is covered by standard NF C 17-100 and standard NF C 17-102.

The UTE C 15-443 guide gives more complete indications for the choice and implementation of surge
arresters in low voltage electrical installations supplied directly by a public low voltage distribution network.

534.1.2 Location and level of protection provided by lightning arresters

VS 534.1.2.1 When surge arresters protect an entire installation, in accordance with the rules of 443, these
must have a level of protection corresponding to the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment to be
protected and to the discharge currents determined during the acceptable risk assessment. They are then
placed immediately downstream of the device ensuring the isolating function at the head of the installation.

The cases where it is recommended to provide a surge arrester at the origin of an installation are indicated
in 443.2 of the part 4-44. The impulse withstand voltage of the equipment is indicated in thetable 44B.

If the installation includes a general protection device, the surge arrester is placed immediately downstream
of this device.
In the case of pole-mounted delivery stations conforming to standard NF C 13-103, the surge arresters are
connected immediately downstream of the D2 circuit breaker installed downstream of the meter and the
distribution panel located in the user's property.

534.1.2.2 A surge arrester intended to protect particularly sensitive operating equipment is installed near
this equipment, on its supply circuit. It must have a level of protection and a coordinated discharge current,
on the one hand with the other protection devices, in particular those installed upstream, and on the other
hand, with the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment of use. .

- 242 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

A surge arrester intended to protect material or equipment particularly sensitive to overvoltages can also be
placed at the origin of the installation if these materials are located near this origin; in this case, it is not
necessary to install the surge arresters provided for534.1.2.1.

534.1.3 Installation of surge arresters

534.1.3.1 The surge arresters at the origin of the installation must be connected at least between the
VS following points:

- If the neutral conductor is connected to the earth at the origin of the installation or if the neutral is not
distributed:
- between each phase conductor and either the main equipotential bonding or the main protective
conductor, following the shortest path.
- If the neutral conductor is not connected to the earth at the origin of the installation:
- between each phase conductor and either the main equipotential bonding or the main protective
conductor, and
- between the neutral conductor and either the main equipotential bonding or the main protective
conductor, following the shortest path.

534.1.3.2 If a surge arrester is installed at the origin of the installation, downstream of a residual current
device, the latter must be of a type which does not trip under the effect of shock currents of 5 kA (waveform
8/20).
A type S or delayed differential-residual current device satisfying the 8/20 current wave test, at the level of 5
kA by declaration by the manufacturer, meets this requirement.

534.1.3.3 Surge arresters must not be installed in rooms where there is a risk of fire or explosion (rooms BE2
and BE3), unless special precautions are taken.

VS 534.1.3.4 In order to ensure optimum protection against overvoltages, the connection conductors of the
surge arrester should be as short as possible (preferably not exceeding 0.5 m in total).

See implementation diagrams in guide 15-443 and principle diagrams of the figure 534A of this article.

NOTES -
VS 1 - Increasing the length of the connection conductors of the surge arresters reduces the effectiveness of the surge protection.

2 - The connection conductors are those connecting the phase to the surge arrester and connecting the surge arrester to the equipotential bonding or to the
protective conductor or to the PEN.
2
The earth conductors of the surge arresters must have a minimum copper section of 4 mm.
2
NOTE - In the presence of a lightning rod, this minimum section is 10 mm.

534.1.4 Choice of surge arresters

VS 534.1.4.1 Surge arresters must comply with the standard (16).

-------
(16) NF EN 61643-11 (C 61-7XX)

- 243 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

VS 534.1.4.2 The surge arresters connected between live conductors and earth must be chosen according to:

a) of the maximum steady-state voltage Uvs of the surge arrester equal to or greater than the values
indicated in the table below:

Table 53C - Choice of voltages Uvs and UT

Surge arrester connected Network earthing diagram

Between

TT TN-C TN-S IT with IT without

neutral neutral
distributed distributed

Uvs UT Uvs UT Uvs UT Uvs UT Uvs UT

phase conductor and 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 N/A N/A 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 N/A N/A
neutral conductor
each driver of 1.1 U0 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 Voltage Voltage
3 U0 N/A N/A
3 U0 N/A
Between Between
phase and PE phases phases
(see (see (see
note note 2) note 2)
2)
neutral conductor and PE U0 N/A N/A N/A U0 N/A U0 N/A N/A N/A
(see (see (see
note 2) note 2) note 2)

each driver of N/A N/A 1.1 U0 1.45 U0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
phase and PEN

NA: not applicable

NOTES -
1 - U0 is the phase-to-neutral voltage of the low-voltage network.
2 - These values relate to the most unfavorable fault conditions, so the 10% tolerance is not taken into account.

This table is taken from standard NF EN 61643-11.

The maximum steady-state voltage Uvs is the admissible specified value of the rms voltage at power
frequency which can be applied continuously between the terminals of the surge arrester. UT characterizes
the temporary overvoltage at industrial frequency due to faults on the LV network.

VS The surge arrester must withstand a temporary overvoltage UT minimum as defined in Table 53C without
modification of its characteristics or functionalities.

b) temporary power-frequency overvoltages due to faults on the HV network, the maximum value of which
is conventionally taken equal to 1200 V between neutral and earth and 1200 V + U0 between phase and
earth.
Temporary overvoltages are defined in 442.
VS c) the presumed discharge current:
At the origin of an installation supplied by the public distribution network, the recommended nominal
discharge current is 5 kA (waveform 8/20). More severe criteria (very high exposure, presence of lightning
rod, low impedance of the discharge circuit, etc.) may lead to the choice of higher values.

d) the level of protection of the surge arrester (Up) coordinated with the shock withstand voltage of the equipment
to be protected.

- 244 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

e) the presence of other surge arresters in the same installation.

VS
The manufacturer must indicate the measures to be taken to ensure their mutual coordination, in
particular for lightning arresters with a level of protection other than that at the origin of the installation,
intended to protect user equipment comprising sensitive electronic circuits.

NOTE - Surge protection devices incorporated in the user equipment are not taken into consideration for this coordination.

f) In the presence of a lightning conductor, the study of the lightning protection system makes it possible to
assess the additional stress for the network on which the surge arrester is installed.

In this case, a surge arrester must be installed at the origin of the installation.
This surge arrester must have the following characteristics:
- Type 1,
- minimum impulse current Iimp of 12.5 kA,
- UP ≤ 2.5 kV.

For a building, this surge arrester can be replaced by a surge arrester installed at the origin of each of the
private installations.
This surge arrester must have the following characteristics:
- Type 2,
- discharge current In ≥ 5 kA (8/20 wave), UP ≤
2.5 kV.

A type 2 surge arrester is tested with a lightning current of form 8/20 while a type 1 surge arrester is tested
with a lightning current of longer duration (generally of form 10/350).

For the sizing and installation of surge arresters, see guide UTE C 15-443.

534.1.4.3 The surge arrester originally installed in a 230/400 V installation must have a maximum level of
protection Up 2.5 kV at nominal discharge current.

This level of protection is compatible with the withstand of future equipment using normal shock withstand
voltage.

534.1.5 Protective measures

534.1.5.1 Means must be implemented to indicate that the surge arrester no longer performs its protective
function.
NOTE - Under these circumstances, certain circuits supplying sensitive user equipment may need to be opened or rescued.

534.1.5.2 Surge arresters must be arranged in such a way that, in the event of failure, there is no risk of fire
or explosion. When necessary, the manufacturer must indicate, in his documentation, the suitable types of
protection of the surge arrester against these risks.

534.1.5.3 Protection devices against short circuits, thermal runaway and against earth fault currents must
be provided to ensure disconnection of the surge arrester. These devices must be coordinated with any
upstream protection and with the nominal discharge current of the surge arrester. Measures must be taken
to avoid the risk of unavailability of the electrical power supply in the event of failure of the surge arresters
placed at the origin of the installation.

The protection devices are incorporated or placed in series with the surge arresters. When they are
incorporated, they are called disconnectors.
Refer to UTE C 15-443 guide in 6.3.1.

- 245 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

If the general control and protection device of the installation is a branch circuit breaker including the
differential function, this is of type "S". Thus, the operation of the surge arrester installed downstream will
not cause the opening of the branch circuit breaker in the event of operation due to an overvoltage.

534.1.5.4 Once installed, the surge arresters and their possible protection devices must not create, at the
end of their life, a connection between neutral and earth.

534.1.5.5 Protection against indirect contact, in accordance with part 4-41, must remain insured in the
protected building, even in the event of failure of the surge arresters:
- in the TN system, this requirement is generally satisfied by protection devices against overcurrents
upstream of the surge arresters;
- in TT and IT systems, this requirement is generally satisfied by installing the surge arrester downstream
of an RCD.

534.1.6 Signaling devices

The protection devices defined in 534.1.5.3 must be fitted with a light, mechanical or sound signaling device
indicating the disconnection of the surge arrester from the rest of the installation. The surge arrester must,
in this case, be replaced.

- 246 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

F1
VS L1
L2
L3
PEN PE
NOT

F2

5b
x x
4

5a 6

3
RB RTO

Figure 534A - Installation of surge arresters in TN system

F1
L1
L2
I∆ L3
PE
NOT
NOT
7
F2

x x
4
5b

5a
6

RB 3 RTO

Figure 534B - Installation of surge arresters in TT system

- 247 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

VS F1
L1
I∆ L2
L3
PE
7

F2
No binding
5b
to earth or
Z x x
impedance
high 4

5a
6

RB 3
RTO

Figure 534C - Installation of surge arresters in IT scheme

Legend for Figures 534A to 534C

3 Main earth terminal F1 protective device at the origin of the installation

4 Surge arrester providing Category 2 protection F2 protective device prescribed by the surge arrester
manufacturer

5 earth connection of the surge arrester either 5a or 5b RTO earth connection (earth resistance) of the installation
6 Equipment to be protected RB earth connection (earth resistance) of the power supply
7 Differential current protection device

- 248 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

534.2 Power-frequency surge protection devices

534.2.1 Nature and role of surge protectors

The devices providing protection against power frequency surges are surge protectors.

They are intended to limit the level of power-frequency overvoltages to a level compatible with the power-
frequency withstand voltage of the equipment of the installation and of the equipment supplied by this
installation.

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to consider is as follows:
- Surge protectors, Rules (17).

534.2.2 Choice of surge protectors

The choice of surge protectors must take into account the following criteria:
- nominal voltage of the installation;
- insulation level of the installation;
- connection mode of the surge suppressor;
- presumed short-circuit current at the origin of the installation.

534.2.3 Effective level of protection provided by a surge protector according to its connection mode

When the surge limiter is connected between the neutral of the low-voltage installation and the earth, the
effective level of protection provided by the limiter is equal to the sum of the nominal starting voltage 100%
at power frequency of the limiter and the voltage between phase and neutral of the installation.

When the surge limiter is connected between a phase of the low-voltage installation and the earth, the level
of protection provided by the limiter is equal to the sum of the nominal starting voltage 100% at power
frequency of the limiter and of the phase-to-phase voltage of the installation.
The conductor connecting the input terminal of the surge protector to the live conductors must be insulated
in the same way as the latter. The terminal must be protected against direct contact.

534.2.4 Installation of surge protectors

The conductors connecting the surge protector on the one hand to the live conductors and, on the other
hand, either to the earthing of the installation grounds, or to a separate earth connection, must be able to
withstand all the currents likely to occur. to cross the limiter.
The cross-section of these conductors is determined in accordance with the indications given for the cross-
section of the protective conductors (see 543.1).
The input terminal of the surge suppressors must be connected to the appropriate active conductor of the
installation between the output terminal of the transformer and any disconnecting device.
When an installation is supplied by several transformers operating in parallel, a surge protector must be
provided for each transformer.
If the characteristics of the short-circuit current likely to flow through the surge suppressor may be greater
than those it can withstand, a low value impedance can be inserted between the earth terminal of the limiter
and the earth. This impedance can be inserted into the earth common to several surge protectors.

the table 53C indicates, for each standard model of surge protector, the conditions under which three-phase
low voltage installations are protected when in the IT system, a surge protector is installed either between
neutral and earth or between a phase and earth.
-------
(17) NF C 63-150

- 249 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

Table 53D - Effective protection level provided by a surge protector

LIMITER CONNECTED BETWEEN LIMITER CONNECTED BETWEEN

VOLTAGE NEUTRAL AND EARTH PHASE AND EARTH

NOMINAL Constraint Voltage Level of Constraint Voltage Level of

OF Of voltage nominal protection Of voltage nominal protection

THE INSTALLATION eligible of effective eligible of effective

limiter limiter

(V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V) (V)

127/220 1330 250 880 1330 250 970

230/400 1,430 440 1330 1,430 440 1320
400/690 1,600 440 1,500 1,600 250 1440
580/1000 1780 440 1,680 - - -

534.2.5 Earth connections

The earth terminal of the surge suppressors must be connected:

a) either to the earth of the earths of the installation;

b) or to a separate earth electrode with a resistance RB satisfying the condition of

442.2.6.1.

The provisions of this sub-paragraph are intended to prevent the occurrence of dangerous voltages.

When an insulation fault occurs between the circuits of the installation and circuits with higher voltage, the
flow of the corresponding current in the earth connection of the surge limiter brings the equipment of the
installation to a potential that risks compromising their insulation.

534.3 Protection devices against the effects of brownouts

The protection devices must allow the starting of the motors when the voltage is not less than 85% of the
nominal voltage and intervene without failure when the voltage is less than approximately 80% of the
nominal voltage at the nominal frequency and with time delay if necessary.

The protection devices against brownouts are chosen from the following:

- low voltage relay acting on a switch or circuit breaker;

- contactors comprising a self-power supply contact (so-called "3-wire").
The protection devices against voltage drops may be delayed if the operation of the device it protects
accepts without inconvenience an interruption or a voltage drop of short duration, 2 seconds for example.

If contactors are used, delayed opening and reclosing must in no case prevent instantaneous breaking by
control or protection devices.

535 Coordination between the different protection systems

535.1 Selectivity between overcurrent protection devices

The selectivity between overcurrent protection devices is the coordination between the operating
characteristics of several overcurrent protection devices of
- 250 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

such that when overcurrents appear within given limits, the device intended to operate between these limits
operates, while (the) others do not.

Different types of selectivities are possible:

- Partial selectivity: Selectivity during an overcurrent in which, in the presence of two overcurrent
protection devices placed in series, the downstream protection device provides protection up to a given
level of overcurrent without causing the operation of the other protective device;

- Total selectivity: Selectivity during an overcurrent in which, in the presence of two overcurrent
protection devices placed in series, the downstream protection device provides protection without
causing the operation of the other protection device.

Different means are used to achieve the 2 types of selectivity in the case where the protection devices are
circuit breakers:
- Amperometric selectivity: It is based on an offset in intensity of the time / current protection curves;

- Time selectivity: It is based on a time lag of the time / current protection curves;

- Energy selectivity: It is based on the ability of the downstream protection device to limit the energy
passing through it to a value lower than that necessary to trigger the upstream device.

Figure 535A - Types of Selectivity

When several protection devices are placed in series and when safety or operating requirements justify it,
their operating characteristics must be chosen so as to eliminate only the part of the installation in which
the fault is located.
In practice, the selectivity between two fuses of the gG type can be considered to be assured if the ratio of
their rated currents is at least equal to 2.5.
Time discrimination between protection devices can only be obtained by comparing the operating
characteristics of the protection devices concerned and by checking that for any short-circuit current the
non-operating time of the device placed upstream is greater than the time. operating total of the
downstream device.

- 251 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

When the protection devices are circuit breakers, the superposition of the time / current curves makes it
possible to qualify amperometric and time discrimination up to the instantaneous tripping threshold of the
upstream circuit breaker (if the upstream circuit breaker has an intentional delay greater than that of the
downstream circuit breaker) ; this is then generally obtained as soon as the ratio of the thermal (long delay
in the case of an electronic trip unit) and magnetic (short time delay in the case of an electronic trip unit)
protection settings is greater than 1.6.
If the circuit breakers are instantaneous tripping (without intentional delay), it is necessary to consult the
energy selectivity tables given by the manufacturers and carried out according to the tests prescribed by the
product standards on the circuit breakers.
When the protection devices are of a different nature (for example circuit breakers with fuses and circuit
breakers), the search for discrimination requires the comparison of the actual operating characteristic
curves supplied by the manufacturers.

535.2 Companion protection between overcurrent protection devices

An accompanying protection of two overcurrent protection devices is an overcurrent protection, in which
the protection device, which is generally, but not necessarily, located on the source side, performs the
overcurrent protection with or without the '' help the other protective device and prevent undue stress on it
(see
434.5.1).
When several protection devices are placed in series, they can be coordinated so that in the event of a
downstream short-circuit, the upstream protection device acts to limit the energy passing through the
devices located downstream to a value lower than that. that the downstream devices and the pipes
protected by these devices can withstand in accordance with 434- 3.

When the downstream protection device is a circuit breaker and the upstream protection device is a fuse or
a circuit breaker, this technique allows the downstream circuit breaker to have an ultimate breaking capacity
Icu reinforced.
When the protection devices in series are circuit breakers, the accompanying protection is called parentage.

- 252 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

Ii Icu Icu

Figure 535Ba - Time / current curves Figure 535Bb - Energy / current curves

VS1 = Non-current limiting circuit breaker (N) C

2= Current limiting circuit breaker (L)Ii =
Intersection current

The downstream circuit breaker C1, if he was alone, would have an energy limitation curve that would follow
curve C1 then the dotted line curve after the current Ii : its breaking capacity would be Icu..
When associated with upstream circuit breaker C2 up to point Ii, the energy limited by C1 being less than the
trigger energy of C2 (curve C1 below curve C2), only C1
opens.
From the point of intersection Ii, the energy limited by C1 becomes equal to the trigger energy of C2, the 2
circuit breakers will open simultaneously and the association will limit the energy more severely than circuit
breaker C1 alone ; therefore its breaking capacity changes from Icu (VS1) havecu (VS1 + C2).

To determine the characteristics of the wiring, it is not possible to compare the characteristics of the circuit
breakers: it is necessary to ask the manufacturer for wiring tables drawn up in accordance with the tests
prescribed in the product standards on circuit breakers.

535.3 Association between differential-residual current protection devices and overcurrent protection
devices

VS 535.3.1 When a differential-residual current protection device is incorporated or combined with an

overcurrent protection device, the characteristics of the entire device (breaking capacity, operating
characteristics as a function of the rated current) must comply with the rules. in 433 and 434 and in 533.2
and 533.3.

- 253 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

535.3.2 When a differential-residual current protection device is neither incorporated nor combined with an
VS
overcurrent protection device (differential switch):
- The rated current of such a device when it is placed upstream of several circuits must be:
• either greater than or equal to the sum of the rated currents of the protection devices placed
downstream or to the operational current calculated by the designer;
• or greater than or equal to the rated current of the protection device located directly upstream.

In the specific case of installations in living quarters, see table 771D.

- The device must be able to withstand without damage the thermal and mechanical stresses that it is likely
to undergo in the event of a short-circuit occurring downstream from the place where it is installed,
even if, due to current imbalance or current flowing to earth, the device opens by itself.

RCDs which are neither incorporated nor combined with an overcurrent protection device, but which have a
breaking device, are called "differential switches". In practice, their breaking capacity is most often lower
than the presumed short-circuit current at the point of installation. In this case, they should be associated
with a short-circuit protection device determined according to the coordination characteristics provided by
the manufacturer.

An RCD can trip when a short-circuit current greater than six times its rated current Inot crosses it.

535.4 Selectivity between differential-residual current protection devices

The diagrams of figures 535C To 535F show the possible arrangements, indicating the corresponding
advantages and disadvantages.

VS 535.4.1 When several RCDs are provided in the same installation and if selectivity is required, they can be
arranged according to one of the following methods:

a) either the devices are placed at the head of each installation part by subdividing the latter into as many
parts as appropriate (535.4.2),

NOTE - The overall selectivity of the installation can be improved by a good practice of the 314.1, ie by subdividing the RCDs protecting
the divisional and terminal circuits in order to limit the consequences of a fault to a minimum of applications.

b) or the devices are placed in cascade. In the latter case, it is necessary to ensure the selectivity between
the devices located in series (535.4.3).

535.4.2 Selection of circuits

In this case, the installation does not initially include any RCD but all feeders must be protected (individually
or in groups) by medium or high sensitivity RCDs depending on the risks considered.

In the event of a fault, only the device protecting the corresponding feeder operates.
This diagram is only allowed if appropriate means are implemented to guard against earth faults in the part
of the installation between the general circuit breaker and the differential devices.

These appropriate means may result from the use of class II equipment or from the application of the
measure of protection "by additional insulation" against indirect contacts (see 412).

- 254 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

Figure 535C - Devices at the head of each part of the installation

535.4.3 Selectivity between differential-residual current protection devices

Selectivity between differential-residual current protection devices can be total or partial.

535.4.3.1 Total selectivity

Total discrimination between differential-residual current protection devices arranged in series may be
prescribed for safety or operating reasons, so as to maintain the power supply to parts of the installation
not affected by any fault.
This selectivity can be obtained by choosing and implementing differential-residual current protection
devices which, while providing the required protection to the various parts of the installation, only interrupt
the power supply to the parts of the installation. downstream of the device installed upstream of the fault
location and close to it.
To ensure total selectivity of two differential-residual current protection devices in series, the time / current
non-operating characteristic of the device placed upstream must be above the time / current operating
characteristic of the device placed downstream. .

This is explained by :

a) the rated differential-residual operating current of the upstream device must be greater than that of the
downstream device,

b) the operating time of the upstream device must be greater than that of the downstream device for all
fault current values.
Total selectivity can be achieved by using, for example, a delayed device for the one placed upstream, and
whose rated differential-residual current is at least equal to 3 times that of the device placed downstream.

It is necessary to ensure that the maximum breaking time of each device meets the protection conditions
defined in 411.3.2.

- 255 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

The following examples show illustrations of the rules of total selectivity.

t

TO

Figure 535D - Total selectivity

Devices A (downstream) and B (upstream) have operating characteristics such as

both conditions a) and b) are satisfied.

Circuit breaker
The device located downstream is an RCD with
connection
differential (500 mA) rated differential current equal to 30 my
type “S” The upstream device is a differential branch
circuit breaker (500 my) of type "S".

Figure 535E - Two levels of selectivity

The most downstream device is a 30mA RCD.

Circuit breaker
differential
1A The intermediate device is a RCD with a delay of
delay 200 ms 50 ms and a rated differential current of 300 my
,
The device placed upstream is a delay RCD of
200 ms and rated differential current 1 TO.

Figure 535F - Three levels of selectivity

- 256 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

In all cases, the resistance of the earth connection must be appropriate for the highest rated differential
current RCD, ie in practice the one placed at the origin of the circuit supplying the protected building.

535.4.3.2 Partial selectivity

If one of the conditions a and b in 535.4.3.1 (total selectivity) is not satisfied, the selectivity is partial.

Selectivity between two non-timed devices, one with medium sensitivity and the other with high sensitivity
(for example 500 mA or 300 mA and 30 mA) is almost zero, the fault currents sufficient to trigger the device
upstream.
Selectivity between an “S” type medium sensitivity device (for example 500 mA) and a non-timed medium
sensitivity device (for example 300 mA) is almost total, the delay of the upstream device generally making it
possible to eliminate the fault by the only downstream device.

536 Control and disconnection devices

536.1 General

Any disconnecting or control device must comply with the rules of part 4-46.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are indicated in table 53E.

Attention is drawn to the fact that for certain applications, such as controlling motors, the control devices
must be able to withstand starting currents.
Protection or control devices can perform the isolating function provided they meet the conditions set out in
536.2
If a device is used for more than one function, it must meet the requirements of each of these functions.

the table 53E indicates the functions that the protection, control and disconnecting devices can perform.

In some cases, additional requirements may be necessary for combined functions.

For the choice of the rated current of these devices, the prescriptions of paragraph 535.3.2apply, except for
devices providing only functional control.

The devices ensuring only a functional control are mainly those installed on the terminal circuits for the
control of lighting, VMC, etc.

- 257 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

Table 53E - Functions performed by protection, control and

sectioning

Device Standard Sectioning Cut Ordered

emergency functional

switches C 63-130 S 0 0
C 61-150 and C 61-151 C
63-140 to C 63-145 C
contactors 63-110, C 63-111 C S 0 0
Domestic circuit breakers 61-410, C 61-440 C 0 0 0
Industrial circuit breakers remote 63-120 S 0 0
control switches C 61-800 X X 0
Outlets 0 0 (4) 0
(≤ 32 A)
Outlets 0 X (3) X
(> 32 A)
ACP (2) C 63-161 S 0 0
Fuse cutout C 61-203 0 X X
C 63-213

Semiconductor X X 0

0 Function assured.
X Function not assured.
S Function ensured if the device is recognized as suitable for isolation by its standard.
(2) Connection, control and protection device.
(3) Article 20 of the Decree of 14.11.88 requires that the reunion or separation of the two components of sockets
rated higher than 32 A can only be carried out without load.
(4) If accessible.

536.2 Disconnecting devices

536.2.1 The disconnecting devices must effectively cut all the active supply conductors of the circuit in
VS question, taking into account the provisions in 461.2.
The equipment used for isolation must comply with sub-paragraphs 536.2.1.1 to
536.2.5.
The devices providing the isolating function can be:

- either devices for which the isolation function is explicitly recognized by the standards relating to them,
in which case compliance with the rules in 536.2.1.1 and 536.2.1.2 is considered to be satisfied by
compliance with their standard;

- or other devices which must then comply with all the rules in 536.2.

536.2.1.1 The disconnecting devices must meet the following two conditions:
VS
a) withstand in new condition and in clean and dry conditions, in the open position, between the terminals
of each pole, an impulse voltage whose value is given in table 53E according to the nominal voltage of
the installation .

- 258 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

VS Table 53F - Impulse withstand voltage for disconnecting devices

Nominal voltage Impulse withstand voltage for

of the installation disconnecting devices

(V) (kV)

230/400 5
400/690 8
1000 10

The impulse withstand voltages in table 53F are equal to 1.25 times those corresponding to the overvoltage
category of distribution circuits and terminals (category ///), as fixed in the table 44 B of 443.

The values in table 53F are valid for both alternating current and direct current.

In practice, the shock withstand tests are not carried out if the following minimum contact opening
distances are respected:
- for single-break devices:
• 4 mm for the nominal voltage 230/400 V;
• 8 mm for nominal voltage 400/690 V;
• 11 mm for the nominal voltage 1000 V.
- for double-break devices, the sum of the contact opening distances must be at least equal to 1.25 times the
above value.
For voltages other than those in table 53F, the minimum contact separation distance is that corresponding
to the immediately higher rated voltage.

b) have a leakage current through open poles not greater than

VS - 0.5 mA per pole when new and in clean and dry conditions, and
- 6 mA per pole at the end of their conventional lifespan determined by the corresponding standard,

under a test voltage applied between the terminals of each pole and equal to 110% of the nominal voltage
between phase and neutral of the installation. When the test is carried out in direct current, the value of the
direct voltage shall be equal to the rms value of the alternating current test voltage.

536.2.1.2 The opening distance between the device contacts must be visible or be clearly and reliably
indicated corresponding to the “Off” or “Open” position. Such an indication must appear only when the
distance between the opening contacts has been reached on each pole of the device.

NOTE - The marking prescribed in this paragraph can be achieved by the use of the graphic symbols "O" and "I" indicating respectively
the positions "Open" and "Closed" when the use of these symbols is allowed by the corresponding standard of the equipment.

The visibility or the clear and sure indication of the position of the contacts corresponds to the prescription
concerning the fully visible cut prescribed in certain texts.
Switches and circuit breakers for domestic use that comply with their standards are accepted as suitable for
the isolation function. The indication of the standard therefore acts as a marking for the sectioning.

- 259 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

For devices for industrial use, the ability to isolate is an optional function. It is for this reason that a specific
marking is provided for devices fulfilling the isolation function:

In the case of devices suitable for isolation, the position indicated by "O" corresponds to the "open-
disconnected" position, while this same indication corresponds to the "open" position for non-disconnecting
devices.

536.2.1.3 Semiconductor devices must not be used as disconnecting devices.

VS

536.2.2 Disconnecting devices must be designed or installed in such a way as to prevent inadvertent closing.

NOTE - Such closing could be caused, for example, by shocks or vibrations or by inadvertent maneuvers.

536.2.3 Provisions must be made to protect the disconnecting devices against accidental or unauthorized
opening under load.
NOTE - This can be achieved by placing the unit in a lockable space or enclosure or by locking it down. Another solution can consist in
slaving the device without load with a switching device under load (opening or closing).

536.2.4 The disconnecting means should preferably be provided by a multipolar disconnecting device
cutting all the poles of the corresponding power supply.

NOTE - The isolation of a circuit can be ensured for example by means of:
- disconnectors, switch-disconnectors;
- circuit breakers recognized as suitable for isolation by their standard;
- outlets ;
- replacement fuse elements;
- barrettes;
- specially designed terminals not requiring the movement of a conductor;
- ACP recognized as suitable for isolation by their standard.

536.2.5 The devices used for disconnection must be clearly identified, for example by marking, to indicate
the circuit which they disconnect.
The single-pole disconnecting devices of each circuit are separated from the disconnecting devices of other
circuits by sufficient space to avoid any errors.

536.3 Emergency cut-off devices

VS
536.3.1 The devices providing emergency shutdown must be able to cut the full load current of the
corresponding part of the installation, taking into account, if necessary, the currents of stalled motors.

For stalled rotor currents, the risks of the motors not starting should be taken into account.

In practice, the starting current of the most powerful motor should be taken into account in addition to the
full load currents of the other motors.

VS 536.3.2 The emergency cut-off means can consist of:

- or a cut-off device capable of directly cutting the appropriate power supply;
- or a combination of devices activated by a single action to cut off the appropriate power supply.

- 260 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

VS Sockets with a rated rating greater than 32 A must not be used for emergency shutdown.

NOTE - Emergency shutdown can, for example, be achieved by means of:

- switches in the main circuit;
- push buttons and the like in the control circuits.

536.3.3 The emergency cut-out devices must cut off the main circuit. They can be :

- either with direct manual control;

- either electrically controlled, such as circuit breakers, contactors, ACP; in this case, they open by lack of
voltage or by emission of current.

536.3.4 The control means (handles, pushbuttons, etc.) of the emergency cut-out devices must be clearly
identified.

536.3.5 The control means of an emergency cut-off device must be capable of being locked or of being
immobilized in the cut-off position, unless the control means for the emergency cut-off and for the resupply
are both under load. supervision of the same person.

After releasing the control unit of the emergency cut-off device, the resupply of the corresponding part of
the installation must require intentional action.
The operation of the emergency device takes priority over any other non-safety related function and must
not be inhibited by the normal operation of the installation.

536.3.6 When it is necessary to act on several switching devices, the action on a single control device must
cause the opening of all these devices.

536.4 Cut-off devices for mechanical maintenance

The cut-off devices for mechanical maintenance must perform the isolation function and the emergency cut-
off function.

536.5 Functional control devices

VS 536.5.1 Functional control devices must be suitable for the most severe conditions in which they may be
called upon to operate.
NOTE - Functional control can, for example, be achieved by means of:
- switches;
- semiconductor control devices;
- circuit breakers;
- contactors;
- remote switches;
- sockets with rated current not exceeding 32 A;
- connection, control and protection devices (ACP).

536.5.2 Functional control devices can interrupt the current without necessarily opening the corresponding
poles.
NOTE - Semiconductor control devices and some control auxiliaries are examples of devices capable of interrupting the current in the
circuit but not necessarily breaking the corresponding poles.

536.5.3 Disconnectors, fuses and strips must not be used for functional control.

- 261 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

537 Monitoring devices

537.1 Permanent insulation monitors (CPI)

VS 537.1.1 In accordance with the rule set out in 411.6.5, a permanent insulation monitor must be installed in
IT system installations.

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to consider is as follows:
- Permanent isolation control devices (18).

It is recalled that protection against indirect contacts is only ensured if the protections in the event of a
double fault have been implemented.
Arrangements are made for the search and elimination of the first fault as soon as the operating conditions
of the installation allow it.

537.1.2 Installation of permanent insulation monitors

When the neutral conductor is distributed, the "network" terminal of the CPI is connected to the neutral
conductor as close as possible to the origin of the installation whose insulation it is monitoring, without the
interposition of any protective device against overcurrents.
When the neutral conductor is not distributed, the "network" terminal of the CPI can be connected:

- either to an artificial neutral point of three impedances connected to the phase conductors near the
origin of the installation;
- or to a phase conductor.
If the CPI is connected between a phase and earth, it must have a voltage withstand between its "network"
terminal and its "earth" terminal at least equal to the voltage between phases. This voltage appears at these
terminals in the event of the first insulation fault on another phase.

For direct current installations, the "network" terminal of the CPI is connected either directly to the
compensator if it exists, or to one of the poles of the source.
The “earth” terminal of the CPI must be connected to the closest earth connection to the installation masses.
The power supply circuit of the CPI is connected either to the installation on the same circuit as the
connection point of the "network" terminal and as close as possible to the origin of the installation, or to an
auxiliary high power source. reliability.
In the first case, this circuit must be protected against overcurrents by appropriate protection devices
whose breaking capacity is at least equal to the presumed short-circuit current at its point of installation.

-------
(18) NF EN 61557-8 (C 42-198-8)

- 262 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

The point of connection to the installation must

be chosen so that the CPI is able to monitor the
insulation of the installation under all operating
conditions.
In installations where the transformer
substation is remote from use, it is permissible
to connect the CPI to the earth of the neutral of
the installation.
When the CPI power supply circuit is connected
between phase and neutral, the protection
devices must be installed as indicated in 431.2.2.

Attention is drawn to the fact that due to their

proximity to the origin of the installation, it may
be necessary to provide protection devices with
a high breaking capacity.

When an installation is supplied by several Figure 537A - Connecting a CPI

power sources in parallel, a permanent Example of connection of a permanent
insulation monitor is necessary per power insulation monitor in an installation where no
source, provided that they are interlocked so point is directly connected to earth (isolated
that only one CPI remains connected to the neutral): the CPI is inserted between the
installation. Each permanent insulation monitor neutral point of the transformer and the
monitors the disconnected power source, thus nearest earth ground.
enabling this source to be reconnected without
prior insulation fault.

537.1.3 Setting the permanent insulation monitors

A permanent insulation monitor planned in accordance with 411.6.5 is a device which continuously monitors
the insulation of an electrical installation. It is intended to signal any significant reduction in the level of
insulation of the installation in order to find the cause before a second fault occurs, thus preventing the
power supply from being cut.
Consequently, it is set to a value lower than that corresponding to the natural isolation of the installation
when the latter is operating normally with the maximum of connected loads.
The lower the setting of the permanent insulation monitor is, the easier it will be to find the fault because it
corresponds to the maximum earth leakage current and the maximum current injected by the associated
fault finding system.
A low insulation resistance does not create a danger for the user. Therefore, setting the alarm threshold to a
low value (~ 500Ω) of the CPI makes it possible to launch the search only in the event of a real fault. A
second prevention threshold of the CPI, set at a value approximately 50% lower than the insulation
resistance of the entire installation, makes it possible to warn in the event of a drop in insulation of the
network requiring verification of the entire installation.
Indeed, a drop in insulation resistance can sometimes result not from the existence of a clear insulation
fault, but from a general reduction in the insulation of an installation, reduction due for example to the
presence of humidity resulting from prolonged shutdown of all or part of the installation or of a user device.
In such cases, commissioning the installation makes it possible to return the insulation to a value greater
than the prevention setting threshold of the CPI.
Permanent insulation monitors must be designed or installed in such a way that the setting can only be
changed using a wrench or a tool or a code.

- 263 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

537.1.4 Choice of permanent insulation monitorsThe

characteristics involved in the choice of the CPI are:

a) The value of the admissible current in the CPIs:

The CPIs are designed so that the current through the device does not exceed 30 mA, even in the event of a
clear fault.
For certain applications (operating theater, for example), lower current values can be prescribed, it is then
necessary to use CPI specially designed for this purpose.

b) The nature of the measurement current:

Regarding the nature of the current, the most commonly used CPIs are:

- those which apply a direct voltage to the installation;

- those which apply an alternating voltage to the installation.
The former provide an indication of the insulation resistance but their indications risk being disturbed by an
insulation fault occurring downstream of a rectifier element of the monitored installation. They are sufficient
for installations with few or no rectifying elements supplied without the intermediary of transformers.

The second indicate the value of the insulation resistance and the leakage reactances of the installation
measured at the frequency of the measurement source: to reduce the influence of these reactances, the
CPIs generally use a frequency markedly lower than that of the monitored installation. These devices are
particularly suitable for alternating current installations comprising many rectifier elements and for direct
current installations.
Simplified design devices, the principle of which is to detect the appearance of a first fault by a comparison
method, devices which are not covered by the standard in force
(19), and which do not monitor the insulation of the artificial midpoint, are permitted in certain special cases
of direct current installation with 2 conductors isolated from the earth, provided that:

- the insulation of all distributed live conductors is monitored;

- all the masses of the installation are interconnected;
- the conductors of the circuits are arranged in such a way as to make the risk of an earth fault
improbable, for example consisting of cables considered to be of class II (table 52A).

537.2 Permanent insulation monitors for monitoring de-energized equipment

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to be considered is as follows:
Permanent insulation monitoring devices (19).
In installations in the TT or TN system, when a safety device is requested only in the event of a disaster, i.e.
when the safety device is normally in the standby state, a permanent controller Power-off isolation device
must continuously monitor this equipment during periods of non-operation.

The reduction in isolation will be signaled by a light or sound device with the possibility of remote
information transmission.
The permanent isolation monitor with no voltage must be connected between the earth and an active
conductor of the equipment to be monitored. The measuring circuit will be cut automatically when the
equipment is powered up.

-------

(19) NF EN 61557-8 (C 42-198-8)

- 264 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

As the equipment is separated from the network when measuring the insulation when de-energized, the
insulation levels to be measured are generally very high: the alarm threshold will generally have a value
greater than 300 kΩ.

537.3 Fault location device

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standard to be considered is as follows:
Permanent insulation monitoring devices (20).
In cases where the IT system has been chosen for reasons of continuity of service, it is strongly
recommended to associate the permanent insulation monitors with devices allowing the location of
insulation faults under voltage. Their function is to detect the faulty feeder when the permanent insulation
monitor has detected its presence.
The time devoted to finding the faulty feeder is thus significantly reduced because it prevents the circuits
from being cut one by one when the installation no longer supplies the priority circuits.
Residual current devices having only detection and measurement functions (such as toroids installed in a
fixed position on the various circuits of the installation or mobile clamps associated with measuring devices)
can be used for more precise localization of the insulation faults.

________________

-------
(20) NF EN 61557-8 (C 42-198-8)

- 265 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-53

(Blank page)

- 266 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Part 5-54 - Earthing, protective conductors and

equipotentiality

541 General ................................................. .................................................. ................ 268

542 Earthing installations ............................................ .......................................... 268
543 Protective conductors ............................................... ............................................. 271
544 Equipotential bonding conductors .............................................. ........................................ 276
545 Earthing arrangements and functional equipotential bonding ........................... 277

Annex A - (normative) - Method for calculating the k factor in 543.1.2 ................................... 279

Annex B - (normative) - Example of an earthing installation .................................... . 283

Annex C - (informative) - Earth connections.................................................. ......................... 284

- 267 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

541 General

VS 541.1 Scope and object

This part deals with the earthing arrangements, protective conductors and equipotential bonding in
order to meet the safety requirements and the functional requirements of the electrical installation.

541.2 Definitions

The definitions used for earthing, protective conductors and equipotential bonding conductors are
shown in annex B.

542 Earthing installations

542.1 General requirements

542.1.1 Earthing arrangements can be used both or separately for protection and functional reasons
depending on the needs of the electrical installation. Protection requirements should take priority.

542.1.2 All the earth connections in the same building must be interconnected (earthing of low voltage
masses, functional earth, lightning rod earth).

In the case of several buildings in the same installation, it is recommended that the earth connections
of the different buildings be interconnected.

542.1.3 Attention must be paid to the provisions relating to earth connections used at high and low
VS voltage (see 442).

542.1.4 The choice and implementation of the equipment ensuring the earthing must be such as:

- the value of the earthing resistance complies with the installation's protection and operating rules
and is assumed to be maintained as such,
- earth fault currents and leakage currents can flow without danger, particularly from the point of
view of thermal, thermomechanical and electromechanical stresses,

- solidity or mechanical protection is ensured according to the estimated conditions of external

influences (see 512).
and, if necessary, appropriate to the functional requirements.

542.2 Earth connections

The value of the earth electrode resistance must meet the protection and operating conditions of the
electrical installation.

The maximum resistance values of the earth electrodes are indicated, depending on the case, in
411.5.3, 411.6.2.

The values of the resistances of the earth connections of the masses of high-voltage substations are defined
in standards NF C 13-100 and NF C 13-200 and those of the earth connection of the neutral in442.

- 268 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Table 54A - Maximum values of earth electrodes

Diagram of RP RPB RPAB RB RTO

connections to the
land according to
442

TNR / / NF C 15-100 / /
442.2.4.1
NF C 13-100
Annex 4.1

TTN / NF C 15-100 / / NF C 15-100

442.2.4.2 411.5.3
NF C 13-100
442.2.4.2
NF C 13-200
442.2

TTS NF C 13-100 / / NFC 15-100 NF C 15-100

442.1 442.2.6.1 411.5.3
NFC 13-200
442.3

ITR / / NF C 15-100 / /
442.2.4.3
NF C 13-100
Annex 4.1

ITN / NF C15-100 / / NF C 15-100

442.2.4.3 411.6.2
NF C 13-100
442.2
NF C 13-200
442.2

STI NF C 13-100 / / NF C 15-100 NF C 15-100

442.1 442.2.6.1 411.6.2
NF C13-200
442.3

RTO is the resistance of the earth electrode of the low-voltage installation RB is the earth
resistance of the neutral of the low-voltage installation RP is the resistance of the earth
electrode of the transformer substation masses When earth electrodes are interconnected,
the indices are grouped together.

The values of the resistances of the lightning rod earth connections are defined in standard NF C
17-100.

VS 542.2.1 The materials and dimensions of the earth electrodes must be chosen in such a way as to resist
corrosion and have appropriate mechanical strength.
542.2.2 The effectiveness of an earth electrode depends on local soil conditions. One or more earth
electrodes appropriate to the conditions of the ground and to the value of the prescribed resistance
must be chosen.

Annex C provides means of calculating earth electrode resistances.

- 269 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

542.2.3 Earth electrodes

542.2.3.1 Buckle at bottom of excavation

The realization of the earth connection by a loop at the bottom of the excavation or by an equivalent
arrangement such as the use of de facto earth connections constituted in particular by the metal posts
of the external walls of buildings with metal framework, is made compulsory by the decree of 04
August 1992 for any building intended to house workplaces (including collective housing buildings).

The excavation bottom loop can be made up of a bare copper conductor with a cross section of at least
25 mm², in good contact with the ground,

The realization of a bottom digging loop during the construction of the buildings is the best solution to
obtain a good earth connection. Indeed :

- it does not require any additional earthwork;

- it is established at a depth which generally makes it possible to overcome the constraints due to
seasonal conditions;
- it ensures good contact with the ground;
- it practically achieves the maximum use of the surface of the buildings and gives the minimum value
of the resistance of the earth electrode that can be obtained with this surface;
- it can be used, from the start of building construction, as an earth connection for site installations.

The conductive elements of the construction, both metallic elements and reinforcements of reinforced
concrete, except those of prestressed concrete, should be connected to the protective earth
connection-conductor assembly.

These connections make it possible, on the one hand, to reduce the value of the overall earthing resistance of
the masses and, on the other hand, to ensure the equipotentiality of all the masses and of all the
simultaneously accessible conductive elements.

542.2.3.2 Other methods of making earth electrodes

When the bottom digging loop is not mandatory, the following earthing methods can be used:

- strip or cable embedded in the clean concrete;

- plates;
- stakes or tubes;
- ribbons or threads.

Annex C gives indications for the dimensions of these elements.

The earth electrodes must never consist of a metal part simply submerged in water. They should not be
established in bodies of water or rivers.

This prohibition is not justified so much by a poor conductivity of the water as by the risk of drying out
and by the danger to which persons coming into contact with the water could be exposed while a fault
occurs.

542.2.4 The type and depth of burial of the earth electrodes must be such that drying out and freezing
VS do not increase the resistance of the earth electrode above the value prescribed in the part 4-41 and in
442.

542.2.5 Attention should be paid to electrolytic corrosion when using different materials in an earthing
installation.

- 270 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

542.2.6 Metal pipes for the distribution of liquids or gases must not be used as earth electrodes.

NOTE - This requirement does not exclude the connection of these networks to the main equipotential bonding in accordance with
VS the part 4-41.

542.3 Earth conductors

542.3.1 Earth conductors must meet the requirements of 543.1 and, when they are buried, their section
must comply with the values in table 54B.

Table 54B - Minimum cross-sections of buried earth conductors

Nature of conductors Minimum sections

Insulated conductors 16 mm2 in copper

Bare conductors 25 mm2 in copper
50 mm2 in galvanized steel or stainless steel

542.3.2 The connection of an earth conductor to an earth electrode must be carefully made and
electrically satisfactory. This connection must be made by exothermic soldering, pressure connectors or
other fasteners. If a fastener is used, it must not damage the earth electrode or the earth conductor.

NOTE - Connection or fixing devices by non-exothermic welding do not provide adequate mechanical strength.

542.4 Main earth terminals or bars

542.4.1 In any installation, a terminal or a main earth bar must be provided and the following
conductors must be connected to it:

- earth conductors;
- protective conductors;
- the main equipotential bonding conductors;
- functional earth conductors, if necessary.
A device can be provided on the earth conductors in an accessible place, making it possible to measure
the resistance of the corresponding earth electrode (see also 612.6.2).

542.4.2 Each conductor connected to the main earth terminal must be able to be disconnected
VS individually and only with the aid of a tool.

543 Protective conductors

543.1 Minimum sections

543.1.1 The cross-section of the protective conductors must meet the conditions for automatic
disconnection of the power supply prescribed in 411.3.2 and be able to withstand the presumed fault
currents.

It is either calculated in accordance with 543.1.2, or chosen in accordance with table 54C. In both cases,
543.1.3 must be applied.

For equipotential bonding conductors, see 544.

- 271 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Table 54C - Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor related to

VS
the section of the associated phase conductor

MINIMUM SECTION OF CONDUCTORS

PHASE CONDUCTOR SECTION PROTECTION
OF THE INSTALLATION
(mm²)
S (mm²)
If the protective If the protective conductor is not
conductor is of the same of the same type as
type as the conductor the phase conductor
phase
k1 x S
S ≤ 16 S k2

k1 x 16

16 <S ≤ 35 16 (*) k2

k1 S
S (*) x
k2 2
S> 35 2
(*) For the PEN conductor, a section reduction is only permitted in accordance with the neutral conductor sizing rules in
part 5-52.
k1 is the value of k of the phase conductor chosen in table A.54D or in the tables of part 4-43 in accordance with the
material of the conductor and its insulation.
k2 is the value of k of the protective conductor chosen according to the appropriate table of tables A.54B To
A.54F.

In the TT diagram, the section of the protective conductor can be limited to:
25 mm² in copper, 35
mm² in aluminum,
provided that the earth connections of the neutral and the masses are separate, otherwise the
conditions of the TN diagram apply.

VS The equipment of the installation must be designed in such a way that their terminals dedicated to the
protective conductors can accept the sections prescribed in this subparagraph.

543.1.2 The section of the protective conductors must be at least equal to that determined by the
following formula (applicable only for breaking times not greater than 5 s):

I2 t
S=
k
in which
S is the section of the protective conductor, in square millimeters.
I is the rms value of the fault current that can flow through the protection device for a negligible
impedance fault, in amperes.
t is the operating time of the breaking device, in seconds.
k is the factor whose value depends on the nature of the metal of the protective conductor, its
insulation and its initial and final temperatures (the values of k are given inAnnex A).

The above formula is used like the one in the article 434.5.2 relating to short-circuit currents. See also
guide UTE C 15-105.
- 272 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

VS If applying the formula results in non-standard sections, the nearest higher section should be used.

In flexible cables, the protective conductor has the same cross section as the phase conductors.

VS 543.1.3 Protective conductors that are not part of the supply line must have a cross section of at least:

- 2.5 mm² Cu or 35 mm² Alu if the protective conductors include mechanical protection;

- 4 mm² Cu or 35 mm² Alu if the protective conductors do not include mechanical protection.

543.1.4 When a protective conductor is common to several circuits, the section of this protective
conductor must be dimensioned according to the largest section of the phase conductors.

This rule is not applicable to the PEN conductor in the TN-C diagram, the neutral conductor not being
able to be common to several circuits.

In TN-S and IT systems, the common protective conductor must remain near the active conductors of
the circuits concerned (see 411.4.3 and 411.6.4).

543.2 Types of protective conductors

543.2.1 Can be used as protective conductors:

VS
- conductors in multicore cables;
- insulated or bare conductors passing through a common envelope with the active conductors;

- separate insulated or bare conductors;

- certain conductive elements, under the conditions set out in 543.2.2 a) and b).

543.2.2 When the installation includes enclosures or frames of factory-fitted assemblies or

prefabricated pipelines with metal enclosure, these enclosures or frames may be used as protective
conductors if they simultaneously satisfy the following three conditions:

a) their electrical continuity must be achieved in such a way as to be protected against mechanical,
chemical or electrochemical deterioration;
b) they comply with the requirements of 543.1 ;
c) they must allow the connection of other protective conductors at any predetermined branch point.

543.2.3 The use of the following metallic elements as protective or equipotentiality conductors is not
permitted:
- cable trays and similar systems;
- all metallic pipes (water, gas, flammable liquids, heating, etc.);
- conductive elements belonging to the building structure;
- cables carrying self-supporting cables.

- 273 -
Translated from French to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.com

NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

543.3 Maintaining the electrical continuity of the protective conductors

VS
543.3.1 Protective conductors must be suitably protected against mechanical and chemical
deterioration and electrodynamic forces.

543.3.2 The connections must be accessible for verification and testing, with the exception of:

- connections with filling material;

- welds;
- connections of prefabricated pipes, the casing of which constitutes a protective conductor.

543.3.3 No equipment should be inserted in the protective conductor, but connections which can be
removed with a tool can be used for tests.

543.3.4 When an earth continuity check device is used, the windings must not be inserted in the
protective conductors.

543.3.5 The grounds of the equipment to be connected to the protective conductors must not be connected
in series in a protection circuit, with the exception of the case referred to in 543.2.2.
The connection of each of the conductors must be independent.

543.4 PEN conductors

VS
543.4.1 A PEN conductor can only be used in fixed installations and, for
mechanical reasons, must have a section at least equal to 10 mm2 in copper or 16 mm2 in aluminum.

The cross-section of the PEN conductor meets the conditions imposed by 524 for the neutral conductor.

VS 543.4.2 The PEN conductor must be insulated.

The envelopes of metal pipes must not be used as a PEN conductor, with the exception of prefabricated
pipes conforming to NF C 63-422.
Certain cables comprising an uninsulated conductor (assembled with the phase conductors or
concentric conductor arranged in meanders), which have been designed for underground public
distribution networks at low voltage with neutral grounded directly as well as the branch connections
on these networks, can only be used in connections covered by NF C 14-100.

543.4.3 If, from any point in the installation, the neutral conductor and the protective conductor are
VS separated, it is not allowed to connect them together downstream from this point.

The PEN conductor must be connected to the terminal or to the bar provided for the protective
conductor.

This prescription does not prohibit the installation of a bar common to PEN, PE and neutral.

- 274 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

TNC arrival

PEN

PE NOT PEN

Circuits TNS TNC

distribution

Figure 543A - Example of realization

VS 543.4.4 Conductive elements must not be used as PEN conductors.

543.5 Protective conductor used for functional grounding

If such a conductor is used, it must meet the requirements for protective conductors. In addition, it
must also comply with those relating to earthing and functional equipotential connections (see545).

A direct current return conductor of an information processing equipment power supply can be used as
an associated protective and functional grounding conductor.

543.6 Arrangement of protective conductors

If overcurrent protection devices are used for protection against indirect contact, the protective
conductor must be incorporated in the same pipe as that containing the live conductors or must be
located in the immediate vicinity.

543.7 Reinforced protective conductors for leakage currents greater than 10 mA

For equipment of use with indicated leakage currents greater than 10 mA intended for permanent
connection, protective conductors must be designed as follows:

- either the protective conductor must have a cross section of at least 10 mm2 copper or 16 mm2 in
aluminum, for the entire course
NOTE - The PEN conductor conforms to 543.4 meets this requirement.

- either a second protective conductor with a cross section at least equal to that required for
protection against indirect contact must be installed up to the point where the protective conductor
or the PEN conductor has a cross section of at least 10 mm2 copper or 16 mm2 in aluminium.

This assumes that the device has either a 10 mm capacity terminal2 Cu or 16 mm2 Alu, i.e. a separate
terminal for a second protective conductor.
If these provisions are not provided for, the leakage current is considered to be less than 10 mA.

NOTE - Equipment normally exhibiting high leakage currents may not be compatible with installations comprising differential-
VS residual current protection devices. The possibility of untimely tripping due to capacitive load currents during power-up, as with
residual current due to leakage current, should be considered.

- 275 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

544 Equipotential bonding conductors

544.1 Main equipotential bonding conductors

VS
The main equipotential bonding conductors must have a section not less than half that of the
protective conductor of the largest section of the installation, with a minimum of 6 mm². However, their
section may be limited to 25 mm² if they are made of copper or to the equivalent value if they are made
of another metal.
In TN or IT system, in large buildings, either because of their height or because of their surface, it is
recommended, to reduce the contact voltages, to complete the main equipotential link, by a main
equipotential link additional (sometimes called local), at each level for a high building, at the level of
each major switchboard for a large-area building.

VS 544.2 Additional equipotential bonding conductors

544.2.1 An additional equipotential bonding conductor connecting two masses must have a section not
less than the smaller of that of the protective conductors connected to these masses.

544.2.2 An additional equipotential bonding conductor connecting a mass to a conductive element

must have a section not less than half that of the protective conductor connected to this mass.

544.2.3 These drivers must meet the conditions of 543.1.3.

- Between two masses: - Between a mass and a structure:

S PE
Yes SPE1 ≤ SPE2 S LS (*)
SLS = SPE1 2

S PE 1 S PE 2 S PE

S LS S LS
Metallic structure
(Pipes, frames etc.)

(*) with a minimum of 2.5 mm² Cu if the conductors are mechanically protected, 4 mm² Cu if
the conductors are not mechanically protected.

Figure 544A - Cross-sections of additional equipotential bonding conductors

Conductors not incorporated in a cable are mechanically protected when they are laid in conduits,
trunks, moldings or similarly protected.

- 276 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

545 Earthing arrangements and functional equipotential bonding

545.1 General

This subclause deals with the requirements for earthing and functional equipotential bonding of data
processing equipment and the like requiring interconnections for data transmission.

NOTES -
1 - Examples of equipment and installations for which this paragraph may be applicable:
- communication and data transmission equipment or data processing equipment or installations using signal transmission
with return to earth in the interior or exterior installation of a building;

- DC power supply networks serving information processing equipment inside a building;

- auto-switch equipment or installations;

- local data transmission networks;
- fire alarm and intrusion detection systems;
- technical building management systems;
- computer aided machining systems.
2 - In this paragraph, the term "functional" concerns the use of earthing and equipotential bonds for reasons of signal
transmission and EMC.
3 - This paragraph does not deal with the possible influence of lightning (see NF C 17-100). The article443 deals with protection
against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to maneuvers and protection against electromagnetic disturbances in building
installations.

545.2 Equipotential bonding

If an equipotential bonding belt is prescribed for functional reasons, it must be connected, by the
shortest practical path possible, to the main earth terminal of the building.

NOTES -
1 - The equipotential bonding can be bare or isolated.
2 - The equipotentiality belt is preferably implemented in such a way that it is accessible throughout its entire route, for example in
a chute. To avoid corrosion, it may be necessary to insulate bare conductors at the level of the supports and when passing through
the partitions.

545.2.1 Equipotential bonding section

The cross-section of the equipotential bonding must be at least equal to 25 mm2 .

545.2.2 Connections to the equipotential bonding belt

The following conductors must be connected to the equipotential bonding:

- conductive screens, conductive sheaths and armor of communication cables;

- the conductive envelopes of communication equipment;
- grounding conductors of surge protection devices;
- earthing conductors of radiocommunication antenna systems;
- the grounding conductor of the grounding polarity of a direct current power supply for information
processing equipment;
- functional earth conductors;
- the down conductors of the lightning rods.

- 277 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

545.3 Functional equipotential bonding

If an equipotential bonding is carried out for functional reasons, it includes cable screens, metallic
elements of construction, metallic elements of electrical pipelines, metallic pipelines of liquids and
gases.

The integration of metal parts and the reinforcement of buildings in the earthing can be advantageous.
The metal reinforcements must then be welded together and connected to the equipotential bonding
belt. If welding is not allowed, it is recommended to incorporate complementary steel rods connected
to the reinforcing rods by means of metal wires.

The requirements to be met by functional equipotential bonding (e.g. section, shape, position) depend
on the frequency range used by information processing equipment and the like, the presumed
electromagnetic environment conditions and the characteristics of the equipment. equipment
immunity / frequency (see UTE C 15-900 guide).

545.4 Functional earth conductors

Functional earthing can be achieved by using the protective conductor of the power supply circuit of
the information processing equipment or by using a specific separate conductor.

545.4.1 Section

The section of the functional earthing conductors must take into account any fault currents that may
flow; appropriate data should be obtained from the manufacturer.

545.4.2 Types of combined protective and functional earthing conductors

Examples of types of combined protective and functional earthing conductors are given in 543.2.1.

545.5 Signal transmission and interconnections between separate earth electrodes

If signal transmission is planned between buildings with separate earth connections, the following
should be:

- either to interconnect the two earth electrodes by a conductor accompanying the signal
transmission cable, which must have a minimum section of 16 mm2 copper or equivalent;

- or to make a connection by non-metallic optical fiber cables.

NOTE - Faults on high voltage distribution networks and lightning can create excessive potential differences between different
buildings or areas and lead to hazardous conditions for equipment.

- 278 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Annex A - (normative) - Calculation method for the k factor in 543.1.2

VS

The k factor is determined by the formula:

Qc (β + 20) θ f- θi )
k= ln (1+
ρ20 β + θi

or

Qc is the volumetric heat capacity of the conductor material, in J ° / C mm3 at 20 ° C

β is the reciprocal of the temperature coefficient of the resistivity at 0 ° C of the conductor, in ° C

ρ20 is the resistivity of the conductor at 20 ° C, in Ω.mm

θi is the initial temperature of the conductor, in ° C

θf is the final temperature of the conductor, in ° C

Table A.54A - Parameter values for various materials

Material β (° C) Qc (J / ° C mm3) ρ20 (Ω.mm) Qc (β + 20)

ρ20
Copper 234.5 3.45X10-3 17.241X10-6 226
Aluminum 228 2,5X10-3 28.264X10-6 148
Steel 202 3.8X10-3 138X10-6 78

The values of the factor k shown in the tables A.54B To A.54F were established taking into account the
following principles:
- when the protective conductor is not incorporated in a cable, its temperature when the fault occurs
is taken to be equal to the ambient temperature (30 ° C) (tables
A.54B and A.54C and A.54F);
- when the protective conductor is one of the constituent conductors of a multi-conductor cable, it is
located before the appearance of the fault at the operating temperature of the cable through which
its admissible current flows, that is to say at the temperature maximum allowed by thetable 52F.
The conditions are then identical to those concerning protection against short-circuits (434) (board
A.54D). The same applies to the protective conductors made up of the armor or sheaths of the
cables (tableA.54E).

In addition, for bare conductors, the risk of damaging neighboring materials must be taken into
account and the maximum allowable temperature is limited depending on the proximity of the
materials (tables A.54C and A.54F).

- 279 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

VS Table A.54B - Values of k for unincorporated insulated protective conductors

cables, and not bundled with other cables

Conductor insulation Temperature ° C Conductor material

protection

Copper Aluminum Steel

Initial Final K values
70 ° C PVC 30 160/140 (1) 143/133 (1) 95/88 (1) 52/49 (1)
90 ° C PVC 30 160/140 (1) 143/133 (1) 95/88 (1) 52/49 (1)
90 ° C EPR or PR 30 250 176 116 64

60 ° C Rubber 30 200 159 105 58

85 ° C Rubber 30 220 166 110 60

Silicone rubber 30 350 201 133 73

(1) The lower value is applicable to insulated conductors with a section greater than 300 mm2

Table A.54C - Values of k for a bare protective conductor in contact with a

cable sheath, but not bundled with other cables

Cable sheath Temperature ° C Conductor material

Copper Aluminum Steel

Initial Final K values
PVC 30 200 159 105 58

PR / EPR 30 150 138 91 50

Silicone rubber 30 220 166 110 60

- 280 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

VS Table A.54D - Values of k for a protective conductor incorporated in a cable,

or bundled with other insulated cables or conductors

Insulation material Temperature ° C Conductor material

Copper Aluminum Steel

Initial Final K values
70 ° C PVC 70 160/140 (1) 115/103 (1) 76/68 (1) 42/37 (1)
90 ° C PVC 90 160/140 (1) 100/86 (1) 66/57 (1) 36/31 (1)

90 ° C EPR or PR 90 250 143 94 52

60 ° C Rubber 60 200 141 93 51

85 ° C Rubber 85 220 134 89 48

Silicone rubber 180 350 132 87 47

(1) The lower value is applicable to insulated conductors with a section greater than 300 mm2

Table A.54E - Values of k for a protective conductor such as a sheath

metal of a cable, e.g. armor, concentric conductor, etc.

Insulation material Temperature ° C Conductor material

Copper Aluminiu Steel

m
Initial Final K value
70 ° C PVC 60 200 141 93 51

90 ° C PVC 80 200 128 85 46

90 ° C EPR or PR 80 200 128 85 46

60 ° C Rubber 55 200 144 95 52

85 ° C Rubber 75 220 140 93 51

- 281 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Table A.54F - Values of k for bare conductors which do not risk damaging the
VS
neighboring materials by the indicated temperatures

Conductor material

Tempera Copper Aluminum Steel

- ture
Terms & Conditions
initial

°C Value Temp Value Temp Value Temp

k max ° C k max ° C k max ° C

Visible and
in
30 228 500 125 300 82 500
areas
restricted

Terms & Conditions 30 159 200 105 200 58 200

normal

Risk 30 138 150 91 150 50 150

fire

- 282 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Annex B - (normative) - Example of an earthing installation

Figure B1 - Terminology

M Mass ................................................. .................................................. .......... (232.8) Metallic pipe

P for water, gas, heating, etc.
VS Conductive element ................................................ ......................................... (232.9) Main earth
B terminal ............................................. ..................................... (243.2) Reinforced concrete
F reinforcements
T1 Full digging loop ............................................. .................................. (542.2.3.1) Lightning rod
T2 earth ............................................ ... (NF C 17-100 and 17-102)

1 Protective conductor ............................................... .................................. (543.1) Main protective

2 conductor ............................................. ...................... (543.1) Main equipotential bonding
3 conductor ............................................ ... (544.1) Additional equipotential bonding
4 conductor ....................................... (544.2) Lightning rod down conductor ...................... (NF C
5 17-100 and NF C 17-102) Functional equipotentiality belt .... .................................................. (
6 545.2.1) Functional earth conductor .......................................... .......... (545.4.1) Functional
7 equipotential bonding conductor ........................................... (545.3) Main protective and
8 earthing conductor
9
functional ................................................. ...................................... (543.1 and 545.4) Earth
10 conductor .............................................. ......................................... (542.3.1) Equipotential
11 bonding conductor of the protection installation
against lightning ............................................... ............. (NF C 17-100 and NF C 17-102)
NOTE - The article numbers in parentheses are those of the articles relating to the section of the corresponding conductors.

- 283 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Annex C - (informative) - Earth connections

1. General

The resistance of an earth electrode depends on its dimensions, its shape and the resistivity of the
ground in which it is established. This resistivity is often variable from one point of land to another, and
it also varies in depth.
It is recalled that the resistivity of a ground is expressed in Ω.m: it is numerically the resistance in ohms
of a cylinder of ground of 1 m² section and 1 m length.
The superficial aspect of the soil and its vegetation can give indications on the more or less favorable
character of a ground to the establishment of the earths. The measurements on earth electrodes
already carried out on similar grounds give better indications.
The resistivity of a land depends on its humidity and temperature, which vary according to the seasons.
The humidity level is itself influenced by the granulation of the ground and its porosity. In practice, the
resistivity of a ground increases when the humidity level decreases.
The layers of subsoils traversed by water currents, such as one finds in the vicinity of rivers, are only
rarely suitable for establishing earthenings. These layers are in fact made up of very permeable stony
soil, washed out by water itself purified by natural filtration and exhibiting high resistivities. It would
then be necessary to cross them by deep stakes to search below for better conductive land if they exist.

Frost considerably increases the resistivity of soils, which can reach several thousandΩ.m in the frozen
layer; the depth of this layer can go down to one meter in some areas.

Drought also increases the resistivity of the land, the effects of desiccation being able to be felt in
certain cases up to a depth of more than 2 meters: the values reached by the resistivity are then of the
same order as in the event of frost.

2 - Resistivity of soils
the table C.54A gives, for information, resistivity values for a certain number of terrains. These values
have been gathered from certain documents published in France and abroad.

the table C.54B shows that the resistivity can, for the same type of ground, vary in large proportions.

- 284 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Table C.54A

NATURE OF THE GROUND RESISTIVITY

(in Ω.m)
Wetlands ................................................ ............... from a few units to 30
Silt .................................. .................................................. .... 20 to 100
Humus ............................................. ......................................... 10 to 150
Wet peat ....... .................................................. ................ 5 to 100

Plastic clay ................................................ ......................... Marls 50

and compact clays ..................... ............................... Jurassic 100 to 200
marls ................ ............................................... 30 to 40

Clayey sand ................................................ ........................... 50 to 500

Silica sand ..................... .................................................. .... Bare 200 to 3000
stony soil ........................................... .............................. Stony 1,500 to 3,000
ground covered with grass ............... ................................ 300 to 500

Soft limestones ................................................ ...................... 100 to 300

Compact limestone .......................... ........................................ 1,000 to 5,000
Cracked limestones ........ .................................................. ........... 500 to 1000
Schists ...................................... .............................................. 50 to 300
Micaschists ... .................................................. ........................ 800

Granites and sandstones according to weathering ............................................. . Very 1,500 to 10,000

weathered granites and sandstones ............................................ ........... 100 to 600

To allow a first approximation of the resistance of an earth electrode, the calculations can be carried
out using the average values given in table C.54B.
It is understood that the calculations made from these values only give a very approximate value of
the resistance of an earth electrode. The measurement of the resistance of this earth connection can
make it possible, by application of the formulas given in 3, to estimate the local average value of the
resistivity of a ground, the knowledge of this value can be useful for subsequent work carried out in
similar conditions.

Table C.54B

NATURE OF THE GROUND AVERAGE VALUE

RESISTIVITY
(in Ω.m)
Greasy arable land, compact wet fill ...................................... Lean arable 50
land, gravel , coarse embankments .................................. Bare stony soils, 500
dry sand, impermeable rocks .... ................................. 3000

3 - Specially established earth electrodes

3.1 - Constituent elements
Specially established earth connections are made using elements buried in the ground and which are
suitably hot-dip galvanized steel, fully adherent copper coated steel, or bare copper. Connections
between metals of a different nature must not come into contact with the ground.

Unless special study is carried out, light metals are not admitted.
The minimum thicknesses and diameters of the elements indicated below take into account the usual
risks of mechanical and chemical deterioration. However, these dimensions may be insufficient, in
particular when significant corrosion risks are to be feared.

- 285 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

Particularly significant corrosion risks are to be feared in areas traversed by stray currents, for example
direct current traction return currents. In such cases, special precautions are necessary.

The earth electrodes are buried as far as possible in the wettest parts of the available ground. They
must be kept away from deposits or infiltrations that could corrode them (manure, liquid manure,
chemicals, coke, etc.) and be installed if possible outside very passenger areas.

3.2 - Establishment of earth connections

a) Conductors buried horizontally. - These conductors can be:
- solid or stranded conductors, of bare copper or covered with a lead sheath, of at least 25 mm²
section;
- copper strips of at least 25 mm² section and 2 mm thick;
- galvanized mild steel strips of at least 100 mm² section and 3 mm thick embedded in the clean
concrete of the building foundations;
- galvanized steel cables of at least 95 mm² thick sections embedded in the clean concrete of the
building foundations.
Fine wire cables (braids) are not recommended.
The resistance R (in ohms) of an earth electrode made by a horizontally buried conductor, can be
calculated approximately by the formula.
2
R=
THE
in which ρ is the resistivity of the ground (in ohms. meters), L the length of the trench occupied by the
conductor (in meters).
It should be noted that laying a conductor in a sinuous path in the trench does not appreciably improve
the resistance of the earth electrode.
In practice, these conductors are arranged in two ways:
- Loops at the bottom of the excavation of the buildings: these earth electrodes are formed by a belt at the
bottom of the excavation affecting the perimeter of the building.
The length L to be taken into consideration is the perimeter of the building.
- horizontal trenches: the conductors are buried to a depth of about 1 meter in trenches dug for this
purpose.
The trenches should not be filled with pebbles, clinker or the like, but preferably with earth which can
retain moisture.

b) Thin buried plates. In practice, rectangular plates of 0, 5m x 1 mor square plates of 1 m sideways,
buried vertically so that the center of the plate is at a depth of about 1 meter.

The plates have a thickness of at least 2 mm if they are copper and at least 3 mm if they are made of
galvanized steel.
To ensure better contact of the two faces with the ground, the solid plates are preferably arranged
vertically.
The resistance of an earth electrode formed by a plate buried at a sufficient depth is approximately
equal to:
R = 0.8
THE

where ρ is the resistivity of the ground, in ohms. meters, and L is the perimeter of the plate in
meters. c) Vertical stakes - Vertical stakes consist of:
- galvanized steel tubes of at least 25 mm outside diameter;
- galvanized mild steel profiles with a side of at least 60 mm;
- 286 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

- copper or steel bars at least 15 mm in diameter; in the case of steel bars, they are either covered
with an adherent protective layer of copper of suitable thickness, or galvanized.

The resistance R (in ohms) of the earth electrode formed by a vertical rod is approximately equal to:

R=
THE
where ρ is the resistivity of the ground (in ohms. meters), and L is the length of the stake (in meters).
When there is a risk of frost or drought, the length of the poles must be increased by 1 m or 2 m.

It is possible to reduce the value of the resistance of the earth electrode by placing several vertical
stakes connected in parallel and at least their length apart in the case of two stakes and more if there
are more.
Attention is drawn to the fact that, in the case of long lengths of stakes, the soils are rarely
homogeneous; long stakes can be used to reach low resistivity layers of soil where they exist.

4 - De facto earth connections

Metal pillars interconnected by a metal structure and buried at a certain depth in the ground, can be
used as earth electrodes.
The resistance R (in ohms) of the earth electrode formed by a buried metal pillar is equal to:

3L
R = 0.366 log10
THE d

THE being the buried length of the pillar in meters,

d being the diameter of the cylinder circumscribed to the pillar, in meters,
ρ being the resistivity of the ground in ohms. meters.
A set of interconnected pillars distributed around the perimeter of a building presents a resistance of
the same order as that of the loop at the bottom of the excavation.
The possible encapsulation of concrete does not preclude the use of pillars as earth electrodes and
does not appreciably modify the value of the resistance of the earth electrode.

_______________

- 287 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-54

(Blank page)

- 288 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

Part 5-55 - Other materials

551 Electric power generators ............................................. ..................................... 290

552 Transformers ................................................. .................................................. ........ 291
553 Static power equipment .............................................. ....................................... 292
554 Accumulator batteries .............................................. .............................................. 293
555 Installation materials .............................................. .................................................. . 296
556 Measuring devices............................................... .................................................. .... 298
557 Power capacitors ............................................... ......................................... 300
558 Equipment sets .............................................. ............................................... 302
559 Materials for use .............................................. .................................................. .... 307

- 289 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

551 Electric power generators

551.1 General
Electrical energy generators can be rotating machines or machines converting mechanical, chemical
or solar energy into electrical energy, with a static interface.

Their implementation must comply with the regulatory requirements concerning the connection of
installations comprising means of production, which, where applicable, provide for the prior
agreement of the local distribution service.

Protection against short-circuits and protection against indirect contacts must be ensured both when
the installation is supplied by any source (generator or public distribution network) and, where
appropriate, by the various sources in parallel.

NOTE - Precautions may be necessary to limit the current flowing in the links between the neutral points of the sources, in
particular with regard to the effect of the 3rd harmonic.

551.1.1 Additional requirements for electric power generators constituting a replacement

power supply for the public distribution network (standby systems)

Arrangements that meet the isolation requirements of the part 4-46 must be taken in such a way that
the generator cannot under any circumstances operate in parallel with the public distribution
network. Appropriate arrangements can be:

- electrical and mechanical interlocking between the operating mechanisms or the control circuits of
the reversing devices;
- a locking system with a single transfer key;
- a three-position, two-way, non-overlapping switch;
- an automatic switching device with appropriate locking;
- any other means providing an equivalent degree of operational safety.

551.1.2 Additional requirements for electric power generators capable of operating in parallel
with the public distribution network
When choosing an electric power generator intended to operate in parallel with the public
distribution network, all measures must be taken to avoid harmful effects on the public distribution
network or on other installations due to the factor of power, voltage variations, harmonic distortions,
imbalances, starts, voltage fluctuation or synchronization effects. When synchronization is necessary,
it is preferable to use automatic synchronization systems taking into account frequency, phase and
voltage.

A protection, known as decoupling, must be provided to disconnect the electric power generator, in
the event of loss of power from the public distribution network, of voltage or frequency variations
greater than those declared for the power supply. normal.

The type of protection, its sensitivity and the response time depend on the protection of the public
distribution network and must be approved by the distributor. Its adjustment is made inaccessible to
the user by seals or any other arrangement. If necessary, the tripping circuits resulting from this
protection as well as the measurement circuits are also made inaccessible to the user if they are
connected upstream of the general control and protection device.

- 290 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

Means must be provided to prevent the connection of an electrical energy generator to the public
distribution network if the voltage and frequency of the network are outside the operating limits of
the decoupling protection.

Disconnection means must be provided to allow the electric power generator or the installation to be
separated from the public distribution network. These means must be accessible to the distributor's
agents at all times.

When an electric power generator can also function as a replacement for the public distribution
network, the installation must meet 551.1.1

551.2 Special provisions

551.2.1 Generating sets

Rooms where heat engines are installed, regardless of their power, must be well ventilated to the
outside.
All measures must be taken so that the combustion gases are evacuated directly to the outside and
cannot in any case spread into other rooms.
The combustion gas evacuation ducts must be made of non-combustible materials, be airtight and
have a fire rating equal to the building's degree of fire stability.

Safety regulations relating respectively to establishments open to the public and to high-rise
buildings indicate the conditions for use in the building and supply of fuel to the groups, as well as
the conditions for storing liquid fuels.

Regulations set limits for sound levels.

The UTE C 15-401 guide defines the conditions for use in the installation of generating sets according
to their type and the nature of the installations supplied.

552 Transformers

The choice of transformer protection devices must take into account the inrush currents when
energizing the transformers.
The circuits of the autotransformers must be established for the highest voltage which can appear
either between conductors or between conductors and earth. The voltage of the secondary circuits of
autotransformers, between conductors or between conductors and earth, must not be greater than
the upper limit of range II.

For the application of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as
follows:
(1)
- Power transformers. Rules ;
(2)
- Low power transformers for various applications. Rules ;
(3)
- Circuit separation transformers and safety transformers.

-------
(1) NF EN 60076-1 (C 52-176-1)
(2) NF C 52-200
(3) NF EN 61558-2-6 (C 52-558-2-6)
- 291 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

553 Static power equipment

553.1 Rectifiers and converters

The conversion is done with or without galvanic isolation between the input and the output, depending on the
technology used.
a) food
Indications relating to technical solutions against current and voltage harmonics are given in 330.1.1.

b) downstream circuits

The protection of the circuits located downstream of the rectifiers or the inverters, concerning in
particular the protection against electric shock, against overcurrents and possibly discrimination,
must take into account the operating characteristics of the rectifiers and converters indicated by the
manufacturer.
For the application of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as
follows:
(4)
- Semiconductor converters;
(5)
- Self-switched semiconductor converters;
(6)
- Stabilized power supplies with direct current output;
(7)
- Direct current semiconductor converters;
(8)
- Stabilized power supplies with alternating current output.
The supply of converters by means of transformers with separate windings makes it possible to avoid
the circulation of DC components which could disturb the operation of the differential-residual
current devices and of the insulation monitors.

553.2 Contactors or electronic starters and variable speed drives

553.2.1 General
These devices do not perform the isolation function.
Contact the manufacturer for the determination of the protection conditions and the calculation of
voltage drops.
For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as follows:
(9)
- AC motor semiconductor dimmers and starters;
- Solid-state alternating current dimmers and contactors for loads other than motors;
(10)

(11)
- Variable speed electric power drives;
(12)
- Electronic equipment used in power installations. The implementation of
these products is carried out according to the following standard:
- Implementation and cohabitation of power and communication networks in residential, tertiary
and similar premises installations.

-------
(4) NF EN 60146-1-1 (C 53-211)
(5) NF C 53-221
(6) NF C 53-222
(7) NF C 53-223
(8) NF C 53-224
(9) NF EN 60947-4-2 (C 63-112)
(10) NF EN 60947-4-3 (C 63-113)
(11) NF EN 61800-1 (C 53-240-1)
(12) EN 50178
- 292 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

553.2.2 Semiconductor starters

Solid state starters offer a modern solution to the starting problems of asynchronous squirrel cage
motors. By controlling the starting and stopping of motors, they constitute a complementary
technology to electronic speed variation. They reduce starting currents.

They improve the quality of electric drives for applications that do not require speed variation.

553.2.3 Variable speed drives

Two essential rules must be considered:
- the variable speed function must be adapted to an application;
- the drive has an influence on its environment and vice versa.
When installing a motor-drive unit, the manufacturers' installation recommendations must always be
taken into account.

553.3 Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) of Static Type

A static uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of the static type is a set of converters, switches and
energy storage devices, for example batteries, capable of ensuring the continuity of supply to the
load, in the event of power source fault.

The UTE C 15-402 guide deals with the installation rules for static uninterruptible power supplies.

553.4 Static transfer systems

These devices based on static switches ensure the seamless transfer from a main source to a
secondary source, either in automatic mode, possibly under conditions (synchronism, voltage value),
or in manual mode (maintenance).
Static switches based on thyristors or based on power semiconductors ensure, during transfer, the
breaking of the phase conductors and possibly the neutral conductor according to the diagram of the
connections to the earth upstream and downstream of the equipment. , and the distribution or not of
the neutral.

See also the UTE C 15-402 guide.

554 Accumulator batteries

554.1 Portable or mobile batteries

The charging of portable or mobile batteries must be carried out in a place where electrolyte seeps
and projections and its vapors are not harmful, sufficient ventilation must be ensured and no open
flames must be in the vicinity.

Accumulator charging workshops, of which the maximum direct current power that can be used for
this operation is greater than 10 kW, constitute installations classified for the protection of the
environment and subject to declaration under heading No.2925, and must therefore ensure that the
provisions of the decree relating to this section are met.
No special provisions are required for the ventilation of installations ensuring the so-called normal
charge of electric vehicles (decree of May 29, 2000).

- 293 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

554.2 Fixed batteries

For the application of the rules in 511.1, the standard to be considered is the
(13)
following: Stationary batteries of lead-acid accumulators type "Planted". Rules .
554.2.1 Accumulator batteries installed in a fixed position must be located in an electrical service
room, access to which is only authorized by the personnel responsible for their maintenance and
supervision.
However, they can be placed in a room which is not of electrical service:
- if they are locked in a cupboard which can only be opened (using a key for example) by the
personnel responsible for their maintenance and supervision, or
- if the product CU of the capacity in ampere-hours by the nominal voltage in volts of the batteries
is less than or equal to 1,000.
In all cases, the room, and where applicable the cabinet, must be ventilated under the conditions
defined in 554.2.3.
Regulations may impose more severe installation conditions if the accumulator batteries are intended
to supply safety installations. This is particularly the case for establishments open to the public and
for high-rise buildings.

554.2.2 When the nominal voltage of the batteries is greater than 150 volts, a non-slip service floor,
insulated from the ground and of a minimum width of 1 m around the batteries must be provided so
that it is not possible to touch the both the ground or a conductive element connected to the ground
and one of the battery elements.

554.2.3 The room containing accumulator batteries must receive, by mechanical ventilation, a supply
of fresh air at least equal to 0.05 NI cubic meters per hour, N being the number of cells of the battery
and I the maximum intensity of the current capable of being drawn into the battery by the charging
device; detection of insufficient air flow through the fan should cause the power supply to the
charging device to be cut off.

The foregoing provisions are not required when use is made of accumulators such that any explosive
release of gas is avoided, taking into account the characteristics of the charging device.

The ventilation requirements for rooms containing accumulator batteries depend in particular on the
gaseous emissions in the accumulator cells.
The accumulator elements in charge are the seat of electrolysis phenomena governed by Faraday's
law.
The corresponding gas evolution can give rise to recombination.
By convention, in the context of this text, when the recombination rate is at least equal to 95%, the
storage batteries are called sealed batteries (formerly called recombination batteries); otherwise, they
are called open batteries.

1 - OPEN BATTERIES

These batteries must be installed in a room in which the volume of renewed air must be at least equal
to 0.05 NI cubic meters per hour, N being the number of cells in the battery.

-------
(13) NF EN 60896-1 (C 58-431)
- 294 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

The intensity of the current I to be taken into consideration is:

1.1 - When the charging system includes both regulation and monitoring devices, the independence
of which is verified by compliance with the provisions of standard NF C 58-311, the maximum value Im
of the rectified battery charging current.
1er case: The electrical and operating characteristics of the accumulator battery and of the associated
rectifier-charger are defined during the qualification tests of the assembly (example: alternating back-
up system integrating in a rectifier-charger assembly, battery, inverter).

A monitoring threshold UdS, such as the maximum rectified load current Im, is not exceeded, must be
determined.
The charging system is then equipped with both:
- a charging current limiting device, set to the maximum value IbL,
- and a device for monitoring the voltage at the battery terminals, independent of the voltage
regulation, causing the charging device to shut down when the voltage reaches that
corresponding to the end of charging under the maximum rectified charging current /bL.

The value I is then taken equal to IbL as defined in the NF C 58-311 test standard. This value is
declared by the manufacturer of the charging system.
2e case: The electrical and operating characteristics of the accumulator battery were not known at the
time of the rectifier-charger qualification tests.
A monitoring threshold IdS, such as the maximum rectified load current Im, is not exceeded, can be
determined.
The charging system is then equipped with both:
- a device for monitoring the voltage at the battery terminals, independent of the voltage
regulation, causing the charging device to shut down when the voltage exceeds the normal
operating voltage,
- a charge current limiting device set to the maximum value /bL,
- and a load current monitoring device, independent of the current limitation, set to the value IbS
causing the charging device to shut down when the current exceeds that corresponding to the
maximum rectified current IbL.
The I valuem is then taken equal to IbS as defined in the NF C 58-311 test standard. This value is
declared by the manufacturer of the charging system.
1.2 - When the charging system does not include the regulation and monitoring devices provided for
in 1.1, the value of the rectified charging current corresponding to the operation of the charging
system power supply protection device, regardless of the characteristics of the charging system.
possible regulation device, either:
I2
I = Ivs
Inot

Inot being the nominal current of the charging system power supply device,
Ivs being the rectified load current corresponding to the current Inot, this current being generally
higher than the nominal current delivered by the rectifier in normal service,

I2 being the current effectively ensuring the operation of the charging system power supply
protection device (see 433.2).
The power supply protection device of the charging system to be considered is the built-in protection
device, if there is one, or, failing that, the device protecting the power supply circuit of this charging
system against overloads.

- 295 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

Verification of the requirements in 1.1 and 1.2 is carried out by an approved laboratory, in accordance with
the methods of standard NF C 58-311.

Open batteries must not be installed in rooms where air conditioning is carried out in a totally closed
circuit.

2 - WATERPROOF BATTERIES

2.1 - So-called sealed batteries are usually associated with a specific rectifier-charger, the assembly
meeting the requirements of the second part of standard NF C 58-311.

Under these conditions, the volume of air to be renewed is 0.0025 NIbL, IbL being defined in standard
NF C 58-311. This value is declared by the manufacturer of the charging system.
When such batteries are installed in a general purpose room, the provisions applicable to pollution
rooms defined in Decree 84-1093 of 7 December 1984 (decree laying down the rules relating to the
ventilation and sanitation of work) are considered to meet this requirement.

2.2 - If, on the other hand, the rectifier-charger does not have the operating characteristics specific to
the sealed battery to which it is connected and that, consequently, they do not constitute an
association meeting the requirements of the second part of the standard NF C 58-311, the volume of
air to be renewed must be calculated according to the provisions applicable to open coils.

The verification of the requirements for sealed batteries and for sealed battery rectifier-charger
assemblies is carried out in accordance with the procedures of standard NF C 58-311.

When the cabinet containing the battery has ventilation openings in the high and low position,
natural air circulation is considered sufficient.
554.2.4 The starting batteries of thermal engine-generator sets, as well as their charging devices, may
be installed in the same room as the set, provided that the room is permanently ventilated under the
conditions prescribed in 554.2.3.

554.2.5 The battery connections can be made in bare conductors, but the elements must be arranged
so that two bare conductive parts with a potential difference between them exceeding 150 volts
cannot be inadvertently touched simultaneously.

In accordance with the rules of part 4-46, a device must make it possible to separate all the poles of
the battery in the installation.

555 Installation materials

This article only concerns installation materials other than those covered by the part 5-53
(Equipment).
The provisions in 531.1 and 531.2 are applicable to the installation materials which are the subject of
this article.

555.1 Socket outlets

555.1.1 An appropriate number of socket outlets should be installed to meet user needs safely, and to
limit the use of multiple socket outlets.

555.1.2 The socket-outlets must have as many electrically distinct and mechanically secured contact
members as the pipes have conductors.

- 296 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as follows:
a) equipment for domestic and similar installations:
(14)
- Sockets and extenders with nominal current 20 A and 32 A. Rules;
(15)
- 16 A 250V sockets and extenders;
- 16 A 250V socket outlets for plinths or grooved wooden frames;
(16)

- Sockets and extenders with nominal current 20 A and 32 A.

(17)
Characteristics;
b) industrial low voltage switchgear:
(18)
- Power outlets, extensions and connectors. Rules ;
- Power outlets, extenders and connectors using pin and socket contacts. Interchangeability
(19)
ratings.

555.1.3 When the pipelines have a protective conductor, use must be made of single sockets for the
active conductors and the protective conductor. The sockets have an earthing contact that must not
come into contact with the main components; this contact must ensure the connection before the
establishment of the main contacts and break this connection after their separation.

555.1.4 When different types of voltages or currents are used, it is necessary to use devices of distinct
and non-interchangeable models.

555.1.5 When it is necessary to prevent the switching of poles or phases, so-called "irreversible"
devices must be used.

555.1.6 The socket-outlets must be arranged so that the dangerous active parts are not accessible to
touch, both when their parts are assembled and when they are separate.

555.1.7 16 A - 250 V outlet sockets must be of a plug type. Under BA2 conditions, socket outlets
without blanking are prohibited.
The shutter type consists of a system integrated into the socket outlet and intended to prevent the
introduction of an object into a single cell, thus ensuring the
(20)
protection of children. This type is defined in the standard in force. Industrial
outlets are not affected by this measure.

555.1.8 The socket outlets fixed to the walls of the premises must be arranged so that the axis of their
cells is at a height of at least 50 mm above the finished floor for a rated current less than or equal to
20 A .
This height is increased to 120 mm for socket outlets with rated current greater than 20 A.

These minimum heights of 50 and 120 mm are applicable whatever the installation method and
whatever the external influence class AD.

555.1.9 Socket outlets installed in floors must have degrees of protection IP24 and IK08.

-------
(14) NF C 61-300
(15) NF C 61-303
(16) NF C 61-305
(17) NF C 61-316
(18) NF EN 60309-1 (C 63-300)
(19) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)
(20) NF C 61-303
- 297 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

555.2 Powerline carriers

The NF C 90-201-1 standard concerning the transmission of low voltage electrical signals applies to
the choice and use of these devices.

In living quarters or the like, only differential mode injection devices are permitted.

In other cases, differential mode injection devices are strongly recommended. However, in special
cases, common mode injection devices can be installed as indicated in standard NF C 90-201-1.

The manufacturer must provide the following characteristics at 50 Hz for the filters:
- resistance,
- reactance,
- short-circuit resistance.

556 Measuring devices

556.1 General

The nature of the current measurement (fundamental or rms value) must be indicated.
Electronic type measuring devices must take into account the real rms value of the currents and
voltages by considering the harmonic currents at least up to order 15.

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as follows:
- Safety rules for electrical measuring and electrical measuring instruments, indicators and
(21)
recorders and their accessories;
- Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring devices and their accessories - Part 2:
Special requirements for ammeters and
(22)
voltmeters;
(23)
- Single phase voltage transformers. Characteristics ;
(24)
- Current transformers. Characteristics ;
Unless there is a specific application, measurement transformers are of the single-phase type; their
role is to supply:
- measuring and counting devices;
- protection relays.
Accuracy class of measuring devices. - When choosing the accuracy class, the following indications are
given in the absence of more precise information.
- class 0.1 corresponds to devices intended for the most precise measurements of power carried
out in the laboratory;
- classes 0.2 and 0.5 correspond to devices intended for power and energy measurements;

- classes 1 and 1.5 correspond to industrial devices for measuring power, energy or power factor in
the context of energy management;
- classes 2.5 and 5 correspond to devices for indicating the intensity of the current, voltage and
frequency.

-------
(21) NF EN 61010-1 (C 42-020)
(22) NF EN 60051-1 (C 42-100)
(23) NF C 42-501
(24) NF C 42-502 and NF EN 60044-1 (C 42-544-1)
- 298 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

Precision power of instrument transformers - The precision power is determined by taking into
account the consumption of the devices and the circuits of use. Indeed, if the power drawn by the
measuring circuit is too great, the precision of the measuring devices may be lower than that
corresponding to their class.
556.2 Voltage transformers
The primary of voltage transformers can be fitted with upstream protection, the breaking capacity of
which is adapted to the short-circuit current of the power supply installation.
The secondary of voltage transformers must be protected against downstream short circuits by circuit
breakers, except in special cases.
Depending on the operating conditions, it may be necessary to provide a disconnecting device on the
primary. If operating conditions allow, this device can be shared with other receivers.

556.3 Current transformers

The thermal limit values of the short-time current of a transformer are chosen according to the
maximum value of the prospective short-circuit current at the location where the transformer is
installed and its possible limiting character.
The current transformers intended for measurements (measuring circuit and counting circuit) are
chosen so that the measuring devices which they supply are not damaged when the primary current
reaches the value of the short-circuit current at the point of installation.

The current transformers intended for protection (protection relay circuit) are chosen so that their
accuracy limit factor is high enough so that the current errors in the event of a short circuit are not
too large. Their precision power is chosen at least for the highest load to be expected.

556.4 Combined transformers (voltage-current)

Voltage and current transformers can be combined in one device.

556.5 Voltage and current monitoring

a) Harmonic distortion rate

The current (THDi) or voltage (THDu) harmonic distortion rate is measured at least up to order 15.

The measuring device can have an alarm threshold allowing the control of the THDi or THDu level.

NOTES -
1 - The indications given in the table 330.1.1 can help in the choice of adjustment thresholds.
2 - For critical installations (power supply by group, large non-linear loads, etc.), it is recommended that this monitoring measure
be integrated into the switchgear providing protection for the main feeders.

b) Disturbance monitoring
The monitoring of low-frequency disturbances requires the simultaneous consideration of several
quantities (see 330.1.1) such as frequency fluctuation, voltage variation (including micro-cuts),
harmonic currents and distortions, etc.
Certain multifunction measuring devices allow the synchronized acquisition of these different
quantities. These quantities are used to detect any low frequency disturbances and to check that the
solutions implemented to overcome these problems are effective.

- 299 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

557 Power capacitors

For the application of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as
follows:
- Self-regenerating power shunt capacitors for alternating current networks with a rated voltage
(25)
less than or equal to 1000 V;
- Non-self-regenerating power shunt capacitors for alternating current networks with a rated
(26)
voltage less than or equal to 1000 V.
Power capacitors are used, in particular, for power factor correction, filtering of harmonics in
association with series inductors, or voltage regulation.

557.1 The rules of this article are applicable to static power capacitors other than those forming part
of equipment or apparatus meeting a specific standard or used in special conditions or systems.

The special cases referred to in the rule are, for example:

- the realization of certain anti-harmonic filters;
- induction heat generation installations;
- association with certain asynchronous rotating machines;
- series capacitors used in alternating current installations.

557.2 Points to consider when choosing capacitors

They must be chosen and installed according to the manufacturer's instructions on the one hand and
general technical conditions on the other. The most important points to consider are:

557.2.1 Harmonic distortion

Harmonic distortions can have detrimental effects on capacitors.

The use of anti-harmonic inductors in series with each capacitor step avoids resonance problems and
protects the capacitors.

If harmonic distortions are observed, compensation arrangements should be made. The custom is to
use anti-harmonic inductors as soon as the power of the loads generating harmonics exceeds 20% of
the power of the supply transformer. If this power exceeds 50%, anti-harmonic filters should be used.

557.2.2 Rated voltage

The value of the rated voltage of the capacitors sometimes differs from that of the rated voltage of
the network.
The rated voltage of the capacitors is at least equal to the maximum operating voltage of the
installation, taking into account the influence of the capacitors, the inductive elements which may be
associated with them in series and the possible presence of harmonic currents. The load variations of
the installation must also be taken into account (total or partial de-energization of the capacitors at
low load).
However, excessive safety margins should be avoided when choosing the rated voltage, as they can
lead to a decrease in the reactive power of the capacitor bank.

-------
(25) NF EN 60831-1 (C 54-108), NF EN 60831-2 (C 54-109)
(26) NF EN 60931-1 (C 54-118), NF EN 60931-2, (C 54-119)

- 300 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

557.2.3 Altitude - The capacitors are designed to operate up to 2000 meters. Beyond that, the choice
is to be made in agreement with the manufacturer.

557.2.4 Operating temperature - Capacitors are very sensitive to excessively high temperatures;
they must therefore be chosen and installed in such a way that the ambient air temperature does not
exceed the limit values of the temperature category.
Too high a temperature has a great influence on the service life of the capacitors. It is therefore
advisable to install them in such a way as to allow good evacuation by radiation and by convection of
the heat produced by the losses and to protect them against radiation (solar or other). The use of
capacitors intended for a higher rated voltage is sometimes necessary to take account of the harmful
effects of excessively high temperatures.

557.2.5 Overvoltages - The choice and installation of capacitors must take into account the
overvoltages likely to be encountered at the place of installation. Capacitors can operate for long
periods at voltages not exceeding 1.10Unot, excluding transient overvoltages.

Among the transient overvoltages, we should particularly note those resulting from the restarting of
switching devices when they are opened. Equipment (switches, circuit breakers, contactors) suitable
for operating the capacitors should be chosen.

In the case of large capacitor banks, any surge arresters for protection against transient overvoltages
are chosen to take account of the discharge current of the capacitors.

With regard to temporary overvoltages at industrial frequency, it is necessary to limit the current
value of the capacitors to 90% of the magnetizing current of the motors to which the capacitors are
directly connected (suppression of self-excitation).
557.2.6 Overcurrent
The capacitors are normally designed to be able to operate permanently at a permanent current
equal to 1.3 times the current generated by the rated sinusoidal voltage below the rated frequency,
transients excluded. They must be protected for any overcurrent of higher value.

Overload currents above the allowable values can be caused by excessive voltage at the
fundamental frequency, by harmonics, or by both. The main sources of harmonics are rectifiers,
power electronics, magnetic circuits with saturated cores. To protect the capacitors against
overcurrents due to harmonics, it may be necessary to add anti-harmonic inductors in series with the
capacitors. The rated voltage of the capacitors must then be increased.

557.2.7 Control and protection equipment

Except in special cases (for example filtering of harmonics), the capacitor control and protection
equipment must permanently withstand a maximum of 1.5 times the rated current, in order to take
into account harmonics and capacity tolerances.
Due to the transient phenomena at the time of power-up, it must withstand the electrodynamic and
thermal forces due to the overcurrents which appear at this time.
When several banks or steps are connected in parallel, it is necessary to limit transient overcurrents
by using inductors in series with the capacitors or by energizing the capacitors through a resistor.

557.2.8 Safety rules

Each capacitor must be equipped with a device allowing discharge after disconnection.

- 301 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

558 Equipment sets

558.1 General
An on-load disconnection and cut-off device must be provided inside or near any switchgear
assembly.

Equipment sets can be:

a) either manufactured in the factory according to a given type, conforming to a specific standard,
- Low voltage switchgear assemblies - Part 1: Rules for series assemblies and series derived
(27)
assemblies ;
(28)
- Low voltage motor starters .

The assemblies are installed in accordance with the instructions given by the manufacturer. The
conditions under which they are inserted in an installation are determined by the characteristics at
the point of installation. The characteristics of the switchgear assemblies are determined by
agreement between the interested parties.

These determine in particular:

- the conditions of selectivity of the various protections;
- short-circuit resistance of the various elements;
- the influence of any disturbances of any kind;
- The operating, maintenance and development conditions, for example the Service index (UTE C
63-429).

b) is manufactured and installed in accordance with the rules in 558.2 to 558.6.

The identification of conductors in factory-fitted assemblies must comply with 7.6.5.1 and 7.6.5.2 of
NF EN 60439-1 or comply with their own standard.

The rules from 558.2 to 558.6 are applicable to switchgear assemblies other than those conforming to
a specific standard and whose rated voltage is at most equal to the upper limit of range II.

558.2 Materials
The materials used must be able to withstand the mechanical stresses, humidity and heat
encountered in service.

Insofar as the materials of the construction elements are not likely to withstand the expected
stresses, a suitable treatment (for example painting or galvanic protection of the surface) must be
provided.
The use of untreated natural wood is only allowed under conditions of external influences.AD1.

M4 or unclassified materials must not be used.

When degrees of protection greater than IP44 are necessary, protection can only be assumed, taking
into account the characteristics of the enclosures used and the mounting conditions, due to the
difficulties of verification on site.

It is always desirable to arrange a location from external influences such that a degree of protection
higher than IP44 is not required.

-------
(27) NF EN 60439-1 (C 63-421)
(28) NF EN 60947-4-1 (C 63-110)
- 302 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

558.3 Protective Measures to Ensure Safety

558.3.1 General
Equipment assemblies not manufactured in the factory must be designed and produced in such a way
that they can be used under the conditions defined in the parts 4 and 5, notably :
- 41 : Protection against electric shock. :
- 43 Protection against overcurrents.
- 543 : Protective conductors.

558.3.2 Protection against electric shock

558.3.2.1 Arrangement for protection against direct contact (411.2)

Removable panels intended to prevent direct contact with live parts must only be removable using a
tool or a wrench.

558.3.2.2 Provisions for protection against indirect contact (411.3)

558.3.2.2.1 Earthing of the masses

All the masses must be connected directly to each other either by suitable assemblies or by means of
equipotential bonding conductors. These connections must ensure good conductivity and must be
able to withstand the maximum fault current, taking into account the characteristics of the protection
and breaking devices.

The electrical connection between all the masses must be carried out in such a way that the
dismantling of one or more of these parts, for service or maintenance reasons, does not affect the
electrical continuity of the protection circuit.

To connect the external protective conductor, a terminal ensuring an efficient and durable contact
must be provided; this terminal must be suitably identified, either by the double green and yellow
coloring, or by the symbol 417.5019.

For each incoming and outgoing protective conductor, a separate connection point must be provided.

When the protective conductor is incorporated in a cable, it is recommended to separate it from the
live conductors so as to allow the installation of a zero sequence current measuring clamp.

The use of the construction elements of the assembly as protective conductors is permitted when the
conditions of the first two paragraphs of this paragraph are met.

The use of these construction elements as neutral and PEN conductors is prohibited.

When electrical devices not supplied with SELV or PELV (see 414) are mounted on doors or covers, the
following conditions must be observed:
- the masses of these devices must be in electrical connection with the doors or covers;

- doors or covers made of conductive materials must be electrically connected by a protective

conductor to the conductive elements of the installation. The cross section of this conductor must
correspond to the connection cross section of the device mounted on the door or cover and
having the highest rated current.
In the case of doors and covers not carrying electrical devices or only carrying devices supplied with
SELV or PELV, this electrical connection is not necessary. In this case, the usual metal fasteners
(hinges, latches, etc.) are deemed to provide a sufficient connection for the protection circuit.

- 303 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

If the door or cover is made of insulating material and includes electrical devices supplied with a
voltage greater than the limit for very low voltage, with masses accessible from the outside, these
must be connected to the protective conductor.

558.3.2.2.2 Protective measure by double insulation or reinforced by installation. (See as well412

).

558.3.2.2.2.1 enclosure designed to produce a class II double or reinforced insulation level

assembly:
When an enclosure (box or cabinet) supplied without switchgear is declared by the manufacturer
capable of achieving the level of double or reinforced insulation of class II, the installation of
switchgear inside this enclosure and the installation installation (fixing, connection of conductors, etc.)
must be carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions so as not to harm the initial double
insulation in accordance with the construction rules (see 412).

In the case of an insulating envelope:

- Class I equipment located in the enclosure is not earthed.
- The equipment located on the enclosure must be of class II or III.

In the case of a metal enclosure:

- The metal enclosure must not be earthed.
- Equipment located in the enclosure and which is not class II or III must be separated from the
accessible metal parts of the enclosure by additional insulation and not connected to earth.

- Class I equipment located in the enclosure is not earthed.

- The equipment located on the enclosure must be of class II or III.

558.3.2.2.2.2 other envelopes

a) General rules
When a manufacturer supplies accessories enabling a sub-assembly with a double or reinforced
insulation level to be produced inside a class I enclosure, the installation (accessories, plates, fixing,
connection of conductors, etc. ) must be carried out according to the instructions of the manufacturer
of this equipment so as not to impair the protection provided in accordance with the construction
rules (see 412).
In addition, the following rules must be observed:
- In the sub-assembly, equipment that is not class II or III must be separated from the accessible
metal parts of the enclosure by additional insulation and not connected to the earth.

- The equipment located on the enclosure can be of class I, II or III.

- The enclosure of the metal cabinet must be earthed.

Example of application:
The preceding provisions find their application in particular when the protection device placed at the
origin of an installation made in a TT system does not have a differential function.

They must then be applied:

- between the AGCP and the differential devices placed at the origin of the circuits or groups of
circuits, under the conditions specified in sub-paragraph 535.4.2 which deals with the selection of
circuits;
- between the AGCP and the isolating transformer when a transformer is planned, in unattended
installations, to supply materials or equipment the shutdown of which could have adverse
consequences, in accordance with part 7-773.

- 304 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

AGCP AGCP = General control and protection

device

DDR DDR DDR = Differential device

DP DP DP DP DP = Protection device (circuit

breaker or fuse)

Figure 558A - Example of a metal enclosure fitted with a sub-assembly with

a double or reinforced insulation level

NOTE - In figure 558A above, the equipment located above the dotted line - that is to say the part located upstream of the output
terminals of the RCDs - is made in class II or by additional insulation .

If a control device is placed upstream of the differential devices, it must:

- either be class II by construction;
- either have no accessible metal parts and have at least the degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD;

- either comply with provision 3 below:

b) Specific rules for making a sub-assembly with a double or reinforced insulation level

For the protection of live parts, the following provisions must be observed:
1. If the live parts belong to equipment of class II or deemed to be equivalent (for example, molded
material switchgear equipped with terminal shields, cables considered to be of class II (412.2.1), no
additional provision is then necessary.
2. If the live parts are only provided with main insulation (for example, insulated conductors without
sheath, insulated connection terminals), these parts must be separated from the casing by additional
insulation, carried out for example by insulating supports of at least 3 mm thick or by trunking or
insulating conduits capable of withstanding a dielectric test voltage of 2,500 V for one minute.

3. If the live parts are bare (for example busbars, non-insulated connection terminals), these parts
must be:
- either lined with double insulation or reinforced insulation capable of withstanding a
dielectric test voltage of 4000 V for one minute, the creepage lines and the distances in air
must be at least equal to twice the values of table 53F ;

- 305 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

- or separated from any conductive part by a distance of at least 20 millimeters. If the

enclosure can be opened without using a key or a tool, the bare active parts accessible after
opening the enclosure must be protected against any accidental contact by obstacles which
can only be removed by means of 'a wrench or tool.

4. In all three cases, the outer sheath of the cables must be maintained up to the vicinity of the
connections, fixing the cables on their route so as to avoid any displacement, even in the event of
loosening of the connections.
The pipes in the class II part of the assembly must not have a common route with the class I pipes,
unless the latter have insulation equivalent to that of class II.

Figure 558B below illustrates exemplary embodiments of these arrangements

Accessible conductive enclosure

To Closed off

Insulation
main

To

b
b b
Insulation
additional
b

To ≥ 20 mm
b = 2 d (d, distance from 536.2.1.1)

a: smallest distance in air between an active part and any conductive support or conductive element. b: smallest distance
in air between an intermediate part and any conductive support or conductive element.

NOTE - The main insulation must meet the standards of the materials used.

Figure 558B - Bare bars in a cabinet with accessible conductive enclosure

558.4 Assembly
558.4.1 The switchgear must be installed in accordance with the instructions provided by the
switchgear manufacturer (conditions of use, distances to be observed for cutting arcs, etc.).

In addition, the provisions of Articles 512, 513 and 515 must be observed.

558.4.2 The conductors and cables installed in the assemblies must comply with the rules of part 5-52.

In particular, the connections must comply with the rules of the article 526 and conductors and cables
must be protected against external influences as specified in 522.
The supply conductors of the devices and measuring instruments fixed in the covers or doors must be
installed in such a way that the movements of the cover or of the door cannot give rise to damage to
these conductors.
Insulated conductors and cables arranged in assemblies are considered to be laid in trunking (laying
method 31 or 32 depending on table 52C).
Conductors and cables are protected against overcurrents in accordance with the rules of part 4-43
Insulated conductors and cables are arranged in such a way that their insulation cannot be damaged
by sharp edges, the movement of a cover, vibrations, etc.

When bare conductors are used, the provisions of Article 529.7 are applicable.

- 306 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

558.4.3 The following minimum distances must be observed:

- between bare active parts of different polarities: 10 mm;
- between bare active parts and other conductive parts (masses, outer casings): 20 mm, this
distance being increased to 100 mm when the outer casings considered include openings the
smallest dimension of which is between 12 and 50 mm.

558.5 Marks and indications

558.5.1 Any assembly must be provided with a nameplate indicating its manufacturer. The plates
of the built-in devices must not be removed.
558.5.2 In assemblies, the affiliation of the equipment (such as protection devices, switchgear,
terminal strips, etc.) to the corresponding circuit must be clear. The designations of the materials
must be legible, made in a durable manner and placed in such a way as to avoid any risk of confusion.
Labels and nameplates must be affixed in an effective and durable manner and correspond to the
designations in the accompanying documents (such as diagrams, list of spare parts, list of pipelines)
which must be attached.

559 Operating materials

559.1 Connection of devices to installations

The devices can be connected to the installations, either directly to a fixed pipe (see 559.1) or via a
mobile pipe (see 559.1.2).

The devices supplied via a mobile pipe include portable, mobile and semi-fixed devices as well as
those for which this mode of connection is recognized by the standards concerning them.

559.1.1 Direct connection of devices to a fixed pipe

The pipes must be protected against the damage to which they are exposed. In addition, the
connections of the conductors with the devices must not be subjected to tensile and torsional forces.

When entering the devices, the pipes must be protected as provided for in 521.7. The connections of
the conductors with the devices must be carried out in accordance with the rules set out in526.

In all cases, the connection system chosen must not alter either the electrical protection class or the
IP degree of the equipment.
The user equipment is connected:
- either on the network connection terminals integrated (by construction) into the equipment,
- either by a specific adapter or by a connector (which can be a socket / socket outlet assembly),

- or using terminals placed in a box.

The preceding provisions are not applicable to prefabricated pipes conforming to standard NF C
63-411.
Electric heaters installed at a fixed position are supplied by circuits reserved for heating and are
connected directly to the fixed pipes, without the interposition of a socket or connector.

All recessed piping must be terminated with a connection box.

If this box is fixed in a ceiling and is intended to supply a lighting point, it must be provided for the
suspension of the luminaires; the means of suspension and its attachment to the structure of the
building must ensure the suspension of a load of at least 25 kg without danger.

- 307 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

By built-in is meant a total or partial incorporation into the construction or installation in voids such as
slabs, composite partitions, etc.
Holding a load of 25 kg by the means of suspension of the box from the ceiling implies fixing the box
to the building structure.

In the case of a fixed surface-mounted power supply, the equipment can be connected without the
interposition of a connection box, provided that the equipment used is, by construction, provided with
terminals for connection to the network or if the pipe is, by construction, provided with specific
connection connectors.

In the case of the presence of a luminaire connection box, said box must be equipped with a
luminaire connection device (DCL) base enabling the luminaire to be connected.

This prescription is applicable for a rated current of the luminaire less than or equal to 6A and
conditions of external influences at most equal to AD2.

The installation of a DCL socket prevents damage to the conductors during the various changes of
luminaires, which ultimately results in an impossibility of connection.

559.1.2 Connection of devices via a mobile pipe

559.1.2.1 Mobile conduits must include the necessary number of electrically separate and
mechanically secured conductors, including the protective conductor if this conductor is necessary.

The use of electrically resistant metal conductors is only permitted if it is authorized by the standard
relating to the corresponding material.
The cross-section of the conductors is chosen according to the nominal current of the device, according to
the indications of the tables 52E and 52F.
2
This section must be at least 0.75 mm, except when the specific rules for devices allow smaller
sections.
The choice of flexible cables is made according to the indications in 522.
Device standards generally specify the series of cables that can be used.

When choosing flexible cables, account should be taken of the mechanical stresses to which the
cables may be subjected, either because of the use of the device which they supply, or because of
their length. When you fear mechanical damage or when you need long lengths, cables with a
particularly resistant sheath are used (series 07 RN-F, 05 RR-F, 05 WF or 07 X4 X5F). Only cables of the
07 RN-F series can be used in construction sites.

The flexible cables connected to a device producing heat must not be in a series comprising an outer
shell of thermoplastic material when the parts of the device that the cable can come into contact with
reach a temperature above 85 ° C. In particular, this excludes the use of cables from the 03 VH-H and
05 WF series in this case.
When the parts of the device that the cable can come into contact with reach a temperature above 85
° C, it is recommended to choose the cable among the series whose insulating casing is made of
vulcanized rubber and is protected either by a textile coating ( series H 03 RT-F) or by a vulcanized
sheath (series 07 RN-F or 05 RR-F).
Where power conductors may be subjected to high temperatures - for example in continuous lighting
ramps - heat-resistant conductors such as those of the H 05 SJ-K series must be used, unless
additional protection is provided by wrapping or sheathing in heat-resistant insulating material.

559.1.2.2 Mobile pipelines must comply with the applicable rules of Part5-52.

- 308 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

559.1.2.3 When the mobile pipe has a protective conductor, it must be identified by the double green-
and-yellow coloring.
When the mobile pipe does not have a protective conductor, the conductor marked with the double
green-and-yellow coloring, if it exists, must not be used.
When the mobile pipe has a neutral conductor, this must be identified by the color light blue. In other
cases, the conductor marked with light blue can be used for another purpose, except as a protective
conductor.
See as well 514.3.

559.1.2.4 The connections of the mobile pipes must be made using suitable equipment.

The connections of the mobile pipes to the fixed pipes are made:
- either via sockets (555), these being able to constitute at the same time the control device,

- or by connection boxes.

The connections of the mobile pipes to the devices are made:

- either by means of flexible cables permanently connected to the devices,
- or by means of a connector, the latter having to be arranged in such a way that the active parts of
the mobile socket and of the base are not accessible to the touch when they are under voltage.

A connector is an assembly intended to electrically connect at will a flexible cable and a device of use.

It consists of two parts:

- a mobile plug forming part of the flexible power supply cable or intended to be connected to it.

- a connector socket incorporated or attached to the user device.

559.2 Lighting fixtures - Light fixtures

559.2.1 General
This paragraph is applicable to the choice and installation of luminaires in the fixed installation.

For the application of the rules set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as follows:
(29)
- Series of lighting standards.

This paragraph does not deal with:

- public lighting installations (NF C 17-200) and lighting installations (NF C 17-202);

- SELV lighting installations (UTE C 15-559);

- lighting for furniture products (C 15-801);
- discharge lamps operating at a rated no-load output voltage greater than 1 kV but not exceeding
10 kV (cold cathode lamps) (NF C 15-150-1 and NF C 15-150-2).

559.2.2 General instructions for installation

The luminaires must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Luminaires without transformer / converter, fitted with ELV (Very Low Voltage) lamps supplied in
series, must be considered as low voltage devices and not as ELV devices. They are therefore class I or
II, but not class III.

-------
(29) Series of standards NF EN 60598 (C 71-000 and following)

- 309 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

Sockets fitted with pull-pull switches are only permitted if the switch is operated by means of either an
insulating cord or a metal chain connected to the mechanism by means of an insulating part; this
chain must not be able to come into contact with the active parts of the socket.

The installation of luminaires in formwork, curtain boxes and similar arrangements must not
adversely affect the operating conditions of the luminaires.
Instructions are given on this subject in the UTE C 15-801 guide.

559.2.3 Protection against thermal effects

559.2.3.1 The installation of luminaires must take into account their thermal effects on the
environment. The following parameters should be considered:
- the maximum admissible power dissipated by the lamps;
- the fire resistance of nearby materials;
- the minimum distance between luminaires and combustible materials, including the path of the
light beam from the spots.
559.2.3.2 The luminaires must be installed in accordance with the indications provided by the symbols in
accordance with standard NF C 71-000

Use of heat-resistant power cable, interconnect or

external wiring ................................ ..................... t ..... ° C (The number of cable
cores is optional)

Luminaires designed for silver cap

lamps ........................................... ..............
Rated maximum ambient temperature ..... tTo . . . ° C

Warning against the use of lamps

COOL
cold beam ...............................................
BEAM

Minimum distance from illuminated objects m

(meters) .......................................... .................

Luminaires suitable for direct mounting on F

normally flammable surfaces ..........

Luminaires not suitable for direct mounting on

normally flammable surfaces (suitable only for
F
mounting on non-flammable surfaces) .........

Luminaires suitable for mounting in / on normally

flammable surfaces where a thermal insulating
material can cover the F
luminaire ............................. ..........

Luminaires for severe conditions of use.

Luminaires for use with high pressure sodium

lamp requiring an external E
ignitor ..................................... ........................

- 310 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

Luminaires for use with high pressure sodium I

lamp and internal ignitor ............

Replace any cracked protective screen ...... (Rectangular)

Where

(Round)

Luminaires designed for use only with self-

protected tungsten halogen lamps with
protective screen.

559.2.4 Fixing and connection

559.2.4.1 The means of fixing suspended luminaires (accessories, junction boxes, couplers for
luminaires, etc.) must be capable of supporting a mass of at least 25 kg.

If the mass of the luminaire is greater than 25 kg, special measures must be taken.

Under conditions of external influences AD1 Where AD2, it is allowed to use the supply conductors to
support the lighting apparatus provided that the mass of the suspended apparatus does not exceed 5
kg.

The cable or cord between the fixing means and the luminaire must be installed in such a way that
any excessive tension and torsion stress in the conductors is avoided.
Means must be provided to prevent any strain on the electrical connections..

559.2.4.2 Through-wiring can only be carried out in luminaires provided for this purpose and in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

559.2.4.3 The connection cables must be chosen in accordance with the marking relating to the
temperature of the luminaire, as follows:
- for luminaires conforming to NF C 71-000, without temperature marking, heat-resistant cables
are not prescribed;
- for luminaires conforming to NF C71-000, with temperature marking, cables suitable for the
indicated temperature must be used.

559.2.5 Auxiliary equipment independent of the luminaire

Only independent auxiliary equipment provided by the manufacturer may be used.

When the independent power supply apparatus includes an ignitor and is located outside the
luminaire, particular attention must be paid to the type of conductors connecting the ignitor to the
lamp socket (s). It is through these conductors that the voltage pulse travels. The manufacturer must
indicate the characteristics of the conductors to be used.

- 311 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

559.2.6 Capacitors
In the event that capacitors with a total value greater than 0.5µF are used, apart from those included
in the luminaire by the manufacturer, a discharge resistor must be provided.

(30)
NOTE - The capacitors used in the field of lighting must comply with NF C 71-242 .

559.2.7 Protection against electric shock on luminaire stands

Luminaire stands are understood to mean the stands of sales stores or parts thereof, used for the
presentation of luminaires.

Protection against electric shock must be ensured:

- either by a SELV power supply;
- or by automatic cut-off of the power supply via 30 mA DDR.

559.2.8 Strobe effect

For the lighting of rooms containing machines with moving parts, account must be taken of the
stroboscopic effects which may lead to ambiguities on the impression of stationary effect of the
moving parts. These effects can be avoided by choosing a luminaire equipped with suitable
equipment.

559.2.9 Recessed luminaires in ceilings and false ceilings (suspended ceilings)

559.2.9.1 Implementation
Materials, including switchgear, must be arranged so as to facilitate their operation, inspection,
maintenance, access to their connections and replacement.

Only devices fitted with fixed mains connection terminals and those fitted with connectors with anti-
pull device are allowed.

When the lighting devices require removal to change the lamp (s), they must be equipped with strain
relief devices such that the conductors are protected against tensile or torsional forces.

559.2.9.2 Fixing of luminaires

The weight of the luminaires and their possible equipment must be compatible with the mechanical
resistance of the ceiling or suspended ceiling on which they are installed.
Under these conditions, ceiling and suspended ceiling can be considered as stable elements of the
construction and, consequently, the luminaires can be fixed on them.

It is commonly accepted that for luminaires and their possible equipment with a mass of less than 200
g, the ceiling and suspended ceiling are automatically considered as stable elements of the
construction.
Regarding any switchgear independent of the luminaire, in the case of a suspended ceiling that
cannot be dismantled, the switchgear must be accessible for maintenance. Its introduction through
the orifice intended for mounting the luminaire is not authorized, except in the case of equipment
supplying a single lighting device.

559.2.9.3 Thermal effects

In order not to call into question the thermal tests carried out by the manufacturer, the space
receiving the rear part of the luminaire should be suitably ventilated and not cause external heating.
In case of uncertainty, the use of luminaires which may be covered with a thermal insulating material
bearing the symbol should be considered.
F
-------
(30) Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescence and other discharge lamp circuits - General safety requirements.

- 312 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

559.2.9.4 Very Low Voltage Luminaires

The prescriptions of UTE C 15.559 guide apply.

559.2.10 Light paths

The supply conductors of the lighting devices arranged in light paths are installed under the same
conditions as the installation in the trunking.
However, for light paths located more than 3 m above the floor of the premises, conductors are
allowed if the cover has the minimum degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.

As regards the connections, the transplanting of the supply conductors is permitted under the
conditions specified in article (526.8).
The connections must either present by construction a minimum degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB,
or be placed in a connection box having the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB.

The degree of protection can be ensured by the light path cover since it cannot be removed without
the aid of a tool.
When connectors are used, they must be arranged so that the dangerous live parts are not accessible
to the touch (see 555.1.5).

559.3 Household electrical appliances

Devices with bare electrodes or uninsulated resistors, immersed in water (for example water heaters,
steam humidifiers, etc.) are allowed under the following conditions:

- their tanks are made of a non-conductive material;

- their power supplies must be protected by differential-residual current devices rated at most
equal to 30 mA.

559.4 Electronic apparatus for household and similar purposes

(31)
.
The receiving antennas must be installed in accordance with the standard in forceFor the application
of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standard to consider is as follows:
(32)
- Audio, video and similar electronic apparatus - Safety requirements.

559.5 Industrial heaters

For the application of the requirements set out in 511.1, the standards to be considered are as
follows:
(33)
- Industrial electric heating: Resistance ovens. Rules ;
(34)
- Infrared radiation emitters - Characteristics;
(35)
- Safety in electrothermal installations.

Industrial heaters with poor insulation are generally supplied through transformers with two
windings or by motor-generator sets with separate windings when the leakage currents of these
devices can interfere with the operation of the installations that supply them.

-------
(31) UTE C 90-122
(32) NF EN 60065 (C 92-130)
(33) C 79-600
(34) NF EN 60240-1 (C 79-651)
(35) NF EN 60519 (C79-63X).

- 313 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

559.5.1 Cooking appliances and ovens

The accessible parts of the ovens which can be brought to a dangerous temperature must be
surrounded by a guard or signaled to the attention of the personnel by a visible inscription.

When furnaces have high leakage currents - such as resistance furnaces - they must be supplied
according to the TN scheme.

559.5.2 Liquid heaters

559.5.2.1 Heating or reheating devices for combustible or flammable liquids must either be fitted with
a temperature limiter that interrupts or reduces the heating before a dangerous temperature is
reached or else be constructed in such a way as not to constitute a cause danger to persons or
damage to neighboring objects in the event of excessive heating.

The provisions of this sub-paragraph do not concern devices the use of which requires the presence
of an operator supervising their operation.

559.5.2.2 Devices comprising bare electrodes or non-insulated resistors, immersed in water (for
example, steam humidifiers, clothing cleaning devices, etc.) are allowed in installations in the TN
system.

They can be admitted in a TT or IT scheme under one of the following conditions:

a) either, their tanks are made of a non-conductive material and their power supplies must be
protected by differential devices with a rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA;

b) or, the power supply of such devices must be carried out by means of a transformer with two
windings, one transformer supplying only one device.

559.5.2.3 Heating cables

The heating cables arranged around the fluid pipes must be protected by differential current devices
with a differential-residual current rated at most equal to 30 mA.
When the pipes are made of a conductive material, they must be earthed by the protective conductor
of the power cable.

559.6 Engines
The rated power of a motor is the mechanical power available on the shaft, it follows that the supply
power of a motor is always greater than its rated power.

For the calculation of the section of the power supply conductors of the elevators, please refer to
772.3.2.3c).

559.6.1 Limitation of disturbances due to engine starting

The current absorbed by any motor when it is started must remain limited to a value which is not
detrimental to the installation which supplies it and does not cause unacceptable disturbances to the
operation of other devices connected to the same source.

- 314 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

In the case of motors supplied directly by a public distribution network, their starts generally do not
cause excessive disturbances if the starting current is not greater than the values in table 55A.

Table 55A - Maximum motor starting currents

LOCAL MAXIMUM START-UP CURRENT

Overhead network Underground network

Motor connected residential (limited power 45 A 45 A

connection)

in single phase others (connection to 100 A 200 A

monitored power)

Motor connected residential (limited power 60 A 60 A

connection)

in three phase others (connection to 125 A 250 A

monitored power)

Beyond these currents, powering the motors is subject to the prior agreement of the energy
distributor so that arrangements are made to ensure that their use remains compatible with the
conservation of the distribution installations and the service without serious disturbances of
electricity. users.
For the conservation of the installation, any noticeable heating of the pipes should be avoided, while
ensuring that the protection devices do not intervene during start-up.

The disturbances caused to the operation of other devices connected to the same source are due to
the voltage drop caused by the inrush of current which, at start-up, can be a significant multiple of the
current absorbed by the motor at full load.
The values in Table 55A allow, with the most commonly used motors, the following rated power
values from Table 55B.

Table 55B - Maximum power of directly supplied motors (kVA)

TYPES OF ENGINES Single phase 230 V Three-phase 400 V

direct start other modes

full power starting
LOCAL

Living quarters 1.4 5.5 11

Others - air network 3 11 22
-
Local - underground network 5.5 22 45

Other premises include premises such as those in the tertiary sector, the industrial sector, general
services, residential buildings, the agricultural sector, etc.
Prior examination by the energy distributor is necessary in the case of motors driving a machine with
high inertia, motors with slow starting, motors with braking or reverse current reversing.

______________

- 315 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-55

(Blank page)

- 316 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 5-56

Part 5-56 - Safety installations

561 General ................................................. .................................................. ................ 317

562 Security sources ............................................... .................................................. ..... 318
563 Circuits ................................................. .................................................. ...................... 319
564 Equipment for use .............................................. .................................................. .... 320
565 Requirements specific to safety sources which cannot operate in
parallel with normal sources ............................................. ................................. 320
566 Requirements specific to safety sources capable of operating in parallel
with normal sources .............................................. .............................................. 320

- 317 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-56

561 General
VS
This part deals with the general requirements relating to safety installations, the choice and
implementation of electrical power supplies for safety installations and sources.

A safety power supply includes a safety source that allows it to maintain the operation of devices
essential to the safety of persons in the event of failure of the normal-replacement source.

The normal source generally consists of a connection to the high or low voltage public distribution
network.
The replacement source makes it possible to maintain operation in the event of failure of the normal
source, of all or part of an installation for reasons other than the safety of persons.

In France, safety installations are generally defined in regulatory texts. They include, for example:

- in all types of establishments:

• the installations necessary in the event of fire to ensure the evacuation of people and facilitate the
intervention of the emergency services;
• the emergency lighting installations also necessary for the evacuation of people in the event
of fire, but also, and more often, in the event of failure of normal lighting.

- in establishments covered by labor legislation:

• installations whose unexpected shutdown or continued shutdown would pose a risk to
workers.
- in healthcare establishments:
• installations where the failure of the power supply would entail a risk for people being
treated.
- in covered car parks:
• toxic gas evacuation installations.

These installations sometimes concern all categories of people, sometimes a particular category such
as the public, workers, patients, occupants of an apartment building, etc. The provisions which they
must comply with are contained in the regulatory texts drafted by the ministries responsible for the
security of the various categories of people.

When these installations are supplied by a safety generator set, this group may be common to all the
installations provided:
- that the group complies with standard NF E 37-312;
- that its power and the energy reserve are determined in such a way that they allow the start-up
and operation of all safety installations under the most unfavorable conditions;

- that it be implemented in accordance with the strictest rules of the various applicable texts;

- that the various safety installations are supplied, from the general safety panel, by separate
circuits and that the protections are selective in such a way that any fault occurring on one of the
circuits has no effect on the supply other safety circuits.

- 318 -
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-56

VS A safety power supply is:

- either not automatic when the start-up is initiated by an operator;
- or automatic when the activation is independent of an operator.

An automatic feed is classified according to the switching time as follows:

- no shutdown: automatic power supply capable of ensuring permanent power supply under
specified conditions during switching, for example with regard to voltage and frequency
variations;
- short stop: automatic feeding resumes in 0.5 s;
- medium shutdown: automatic feeding resumes in 10 s;
- long shutdown: automatic feeding resumes in more than 10 s.
Switching times may be specified in regulatory texts, for example 10 s for establishments open to the
public.

561.1 Since a safety installation must operate in the event of a fire, the equipment which constitutes it
VS
must have, by construction or by installation, a fire resistance of appropriate duration.

561.2 Provisions for protection against indirect contacts not involving automatic first fault shutdown
are preferably chosen. In the IT diagram, a permanent insulation monitor must give an audible and
visual signal during a first fault.

The usual arrangement is the IT system supply (411.6).

This does not exclude the use of TN or TT schemes when the regulatory texts allow it. It is recalled
that in this case, if safety equipment only works in the event of a disaster (in the case of smoke
extraction fans), the regulatory texts generally require that its isolation from the earth be
continuously monitored during periods of non-use by a CPI associated with a signaling device.

Locally, the following arrangements can be made:

- protection by use of double or reinforced insulation materials (412);
- protection by electrical separation (413).

VS 561.3 The equipment of the safety installations, including the pipes, must be arranged in such a way
as to facilitate their operation, their visit, their maintenance and access to their connections.

562 Security sources

562.1 Generating sets must comply with NF E 37-312.

Centralized safety accumulator batteries and the equipment accompanying them in the power supply
systems must comply with NF EN 50171.

VS 562.2 The safety sources must be installed in a fixed position and in such a way that they cannot be
affected by the failure of the normal-replacement source.

Additional information is given in the part 5-55 :

- 551.2.1 : Generators ;
- 553.3 : Static uninterruptible power supplies;
- 554 : Accumulator batteries.

- 319 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-56

VS 562.3 Safety sources must be installed in an appropriate location and be accessible only to persons
responsible for maintenance and supervision of the equipment.

562.4 The location of safety sources must be suitably ventilated so that the gases and fumes they
produce cannot spread into rooms accessible to people.

562.5 Separate, independent connections supplied by a public distribution network are not allowed.

562.6 The sources of security must be chosen in such a way as to ensure the appropriate autonomy.

562.7 A security source can be used for facilities other than security facilities as long as its availability
for the latter is not compromised.

In addition to the prescriptions of 562.2, a fault appearing in a circuit not intended to supply the
safety installations must not lead to the opening of any circuit supplying the safety installations. This
requires selectivity between protection devices and may require automatic load shedding of circuits
supplying non-safety installations.

A building or an establishment may include one or more replacement generators to supply, for
reasons other than safety, according to the decision of the contracting authority or the establishment
manager, all or part of the electrical installations of this building or of this establishment.

This or these replacement groups can be used as safety source (s) under the following conditions:

- the group or groups meet the rules for security groups;

- when there are several generators, in the event of failure of one of them, the power still available
must remain sufficient to ensure the start-up and operation of all the safety installations;

- when the replacement generator set is unique:

• its power must be such as to enable all safety installations to be started and operated under
the most unfavorable conditions;
• the emergency lighting must be powered by one or more specific safety sources (accumulator
batteries, autonomous units), which is generally the case, because the generators are not
suitable for supplying the emergency lighting.

C 562.7 Paragraphs 562.1 To 562.7 do not apply to stand-alone blocks.

563 Circuits

563.1 Cables for safety installations must be different from cables for normal installations, that is to
say contain only safety circuit conductors.

This does not exclude the routing of these different cables on the same support.

563.2 The circuits of the safety installations must not cross locations presenting a risk of fire (BE2),
VS and locations presenting a risk of explosion (BE3).

563.3 In some cases, the overload protection prescribed by paragraph

433.2.1, must not be implemented.

- 320 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 5-56

The regulatory texts specify these cases relating to circuits supplying motors, circuits whose
conductors have a section that must meet 433.3 e).

VS 563.4 Each circuit must be protected in such a way that any electrical incident affecting it, by
overcurrent, rupture or earth fault, does not interrupt the power supply to the other safety circuits
supplied by the same source.

563.5 Protection, control and alarm devices must be clearly identified. The protection and control
devices must be grouped together in places accessible only to the persons responsible for the
maintenance and monitoring of the equipment.

564 Operating materials

VS 564.1 In lighting installations, the types of lamps must be compatible with the switching time in order
to maintain the specified level of illumination.

The rule of this article prohibits the use for emergency lighting of discharge lamps of a type such that
their ignition requires a time greater than 15 seconds.

VS 564.2 In equipment supplied by two different circuits, a fault occurring in one circuit must not affect
the protection against electric shock and the correct operation of the other circuit. The earthing of
this equipment must be carried out by the two protective conductors.

565 Special requirements for safety sources which cannot operate in parallel with
normal sources

565.1 All precautions must be taken to avoid the paralleling of sources, for example by means of
mechanical interlocking.

In the case of a source operating as a replacement for the public distribution network, appropriate
provisions are given in 551.1.1

VS 565.2 Protection against short circuits and protection against indirect contact must be ensured
regardless of the source supplying the installations.

566 Specific requirements for safety sources capable of operating in parallel with
normal sources

In the case of a source that can operate in parallel with the public distribution network, the
requirements of 551.1.2 apply.

VS Protection against short-circuits and protection against indirect contact must be ensured both when
the installation is supplied separately by any one of the two sources and by the two sources in
parallel.

NOTE - Precautions may be necessary to limit the current flowing in the links between the neutral points of the sources, in
particular with regard to the effect of the 3rd harmonic.

See the UTE C 15-401 guide for the compatibility of the different earth connection diagrams.

------------

- 321 -
NF C 15-100 Part 5-56

(Blank page)

- 322 -
NF C 15-100 Title 6

Title 6 - Checks and maintenance of installations

600 Introduction ................................................. .................................................. ............... 323

Part 6-61 - Checks and commissioning ............................................ ........................... 323
610.1 General ................................................. .................................................. ...... 323
610.2 (available) ............................................... .................................................. ........ 323
610.3 Definitions ................................................. .................................................. ........ 323
611 Visual inspection ................................................ .................................................. ...... 324
612 Tests ................................................. .................................................. ....................... 325
612.1 General ................................................. .................................................. ...... 325
612.2 Continuity of protective conductors and main and additional equipotential
bonds ...................................... ...................................... 325
612.3 Insulation resistance of the electrical installation ......................................... ...... 326
612.4 Protection by SELV or PELV or by separation of circuits .............................. 327
612.4.1 Protection by SELV ............................................... .......................................... 327
612.4.2 Protection by PELV ............................................... .......................................... 327
612.4.3 Protection by electrical separation .............................................. ................... 327
612.5 Resistance of floors and walls ............................................ ........................... 327
612.6 Verification of protection conditions by automatic cut-off
food .............................................. .................................................. . 327
612.6.1 General ................................................. .................................................. ... 328
612.6.2 Measurement of the resistance of the earth electrodes .......................................... ........... 329
612.6.3 Fault loop impedance measurement ........................................ ......... 330
612.6.4 Measuring the resistance of protective conductors .................................... 330
612.7 Functional tests ................................................ ............................................. 331
Part 6-62 - Periodic checks ............................................... .................................. 331
620.1 General ................................................. .................................................. ...... 331
620.2 Periodicity of periodic checks .............................................. ................ 331
620.3 Area of periodic checks .............................................. .................. 331
620.4 Report ................................................. .................................................. ............ 332
Part 6-63 - Maintenance of installations .............................................. ................................. 332

- 323 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS 600 Introduction

Part 6-61 concerns commissioning checks and part 6-62 periodic checks.

These checks, on commissioning and periodically, should be compared with the initial check of the
electrical installations, when they are put into service or after they have undergone a structural
modification, and the periodic checks, provided for in'Article 53 of the decree of November 14, 1988,
verifications covered by the decree of October 10, 2000. This decree defines, in particular, in detail the
scope of the verifications and the content of the reports relating to said verifications. The verifications
relate to the measures taken to meet the requirements of the decree of November 14, 1988 and the
orders issued for its application. These provisions are assessed by reference to the corresponding best
practice, in particular the provisions relating to the prevention of the risk of electric shock, burns, fire or
explosion of electrical origin contained in the installation standards, in particular. low voltage in
particular this standard and its application guides. The test methodology is that described in this part.

Part 6-61 - Checks and commissioning

610.1 General

610.1.1 Any installation must, during implementation or when it is completed and before it is made
VS available to the user, be checked.

610.1.2 The information requested in 514.5 must be made available to those carrying out the checks.

It is recalled that the diagrams are part of the documents requested in Annex III (point 4) of the decree of
October 10, 2000.

610.1.3 Precautions must be taken during verification and testing to avoid danger to persons and
VS
damage to property and equipment installed.

610.1.4 When extending or modifying existing installations, it shall be checked that the extensions or
modifications to the installation meet the requirements of this standard and do not compromise the
safety of the existing installation.

610.1.5 The verifications must be carried out by a qualified person, competent in the field of verifications,
having a thorough knowledge of the provisions of this standard and of those of the national regulations.

The regulatory texts may specify the conditions which the persons authorized to carry out these
verifications must meet, where applicable, the need for approval.

VS 610.1.6 Following verification in accordance with the requirements of this part, a report shall be drawn
up. This report must include the observations relating to the visual inspection and the tests carried out.

NOTE - Information relating to periodic checks is given in the part 6-62.

610.2 (available)

610.3 Definitions

610.3.1
verification
the verification includes all the methods by means of which the conformity of the entire electrical
installation with this standard is proven. It includes visual inspection and testing.

- 324 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS 610.3.2
visual inspection
visual inspection consists of examining electrical installations to ensure that they are correctly installed.

610.3.3
testing
The purpose of the tests is to ensure, by measurements made by means of appropriate measuring and
testing devices, the effectiveness of the implementation of the provisions prescribed by the standard,
when it is not possible to do this by visual inspection.

611 Visual inspection

611.1 The visual inspection must precede the tests and be carried out normally with the entire
installation de-energized.

611.2 The visual inspection is intended to verify whether the permanently connected electrical equipment:

- complies with the safety requirements of the applicable material standards;

NOTE - This can be verified by examination of the marking or certificate.

- is correctly selected and installed in accordance with this standard and the manufacturers'
instructions;
- does not show any visible damage that could affect safety.

611.3 The visual inspection shall include at least the verification of the following conditions, as far as they
apply:

- protective measures against electric shock, including the measurement of distances, for example
with regard to protection by barriers or enclosures, by obstacles or by distance (see appendices A
and B of the part 4-41);
NOTE - The rule in annex C1 in the part 4-41 “Protection by non-conductive premises” can only be verified when the installation
supplies only permanently connected equipment.

- presence of fire barriers and other measures preventing the spread of fire and protection against
thermal effects (see parts 4-42, 4-43 and 527);
- choice of materials and installation in potentially explosive areas (see 424);

- choice of conductors for admissible currents and voltage drop (see 523);
- selection and adjustment of protection and monitoring devices (see part 5-53);

The choice of conductor cross-sections and the setting of the protective devices are verified according to
the calculation notes drawn up by the designer in accordance with the rules of this standard, and in
particular the parts 4-41, 4-43, 5-53 and 5-54. For living quarters, please refer to thepart 7-771.

VS - presence of appropriate disconnection and control devices (see part 4-46 and537);

- compliance with the rules prohibiting the installation of single-pole breaking devices on the neutral
conductor;
- choice of materials and protective measures appropriate to external influences (see
512.2 and 522);
- identification of neutral conductors and protective conductors (see 514.3);
- presence of diagrams, warning notices and similar information (see 514.5);
- identification of circuits, fuses, switches, terminals, etc. (see514);
- making the conductor connections (see 526);

- 325 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

The purpose of this check is to check that the fixing means are suitable for the conductors concerned
and that these connections are correctly made.

If there is any doubt about the efficiency of a connection, the contact resistance should be measured at
the right of this connection. This resistance must not be greater than the resistance of a conductor one
meter in length and having the smallest section of the connected conductors; in any case, this resistance
should not be greater than 0.02 ohm.

- accessibility and identification for ease of operation and maintenance of emergency cut-out devices
VS (see 536.3) and cut-off devices for mechanical maintenance (see 536.4).

It must be verified that the conditions of use of these devices are not modified by their implementation.

612 Tests

VS 612.1 General

The following tests must be carried out as far as they apply and preferably in the following order:

- continuity of the protective conductors and of the main and additional equipotential bonds (see
612.2);
- insulation resistance of the electrical installation (see 612.3);
- protection by SELV or PELV and by separation of circuits (see 612.4);
- resistance of floors and walls (see 612.5);
- automatic power cut off (see article 612.6);
- polarity test (see 612.7);
- functional tests (see 612.8).

When a test gives an unsatisfactory result, this test and all the tests which preceded it, and the results of
which may be influenced by the test in question, must be repeated after elimination of the defect.

The test methods described in this part are reference methods; other methods are not excluded on
condition that they give such safe results.

The measuring devices must comply with the standards of the NF EN 61557 series (1) concerning them. If
other measuring devices are used, they must provide an equivalent level of performance and safety.

Tests for protection by separation of circuits are carried out when the following protective measures are
used:
- protection through the use of SELV or PELV (see 414);
- protection by electrical separation (see 413).

612.2 Continuity of protective conductors and main and additional equipotential bonding

A continuity test must be performed.

It is recommended that the test be carried out with a source of a no-load voltage of 4 V to 24 V, in direct
or alternating current, and with a current of at least 0.2 A.

Attention is drawn to the fact that the current used for the continuity test must be compatible with the
risks of fire or explosion of the location considered.

-------
(1) NF EN 61557 series (C 42-198)

- 326 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS This test is required as part of the verification of the protection conditions by automatic power cut-off
(see 612.6). It is considered satisfactory if the device used for the test gives a stable indication and
complies with the indications of the UTE C 15-105 guide.

612.3 Insulation resistance of the electrical installation

Insulation resistance must be measured between each live conductor and earth.

NOTES -
1 - In the TN-C diagram, the PEN conductor is considered as part of the earth.
2 - During this measurement, the phase conductors and the neutral conductor can be connected together.

Table 61A - Minimum insulation resistance values

Nominal circuit voltage Test voltage Resistance

while running isolation
continued
V MΩ
V
SELV and PELV 250 ≥ 0.25
Less than or equal to 500 V, except for the
above cases 500 ≥ 0.5
Greater than 500 V 1000 ≥ 1.0

The measurements are carried out with the installation switched off.

The insulation resistance of an entire installation at its origin is generally measured. If the measured
value is lower than that specified in table 61A, the installation can be divided into several groups of
circuits and the insulation resistance of each group is measured.

If, for a group of circuits, the measured value is less than that specified in Table 61A, the insulation
resistance of each circuit is measured.

When circuits or parts of circuits are disconnected by undervoltage devices (eg contactors) cutting all live
conductors, the insulation resistance of these circuits or parts of circuits is measured separately.

If certain user devices are connected and if in this case the measured value is lower than that specified in
table 61A, then these devices are disconnected.

With regard to the devices for use, it must be ensured that their insulation resistance is not less than the
value prescribed by the standard concerning them or, failing that, 0.5 MΩ.

With regard to the insulation resistance of heating cables embedded in the walls of buildings, the values
concerning the insulation resistance of pipelines must be applied, namely:

The insulation resistance measured after placing in concrete, must be at least equal to 1000 ohms per
volt of rated voltage per heating element, with a minimum of 0.25 MΩ.

It follows that, taking into account the rated voltage values of the heating elements, the insulation
resistances must be at least equal to:

- 0.25 MΩ for heating elements with rated voltage 230 volts.

- 0.40 MΩ for heating elements of rated voltage 400 volts.

- 327 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

the table 61A is applicable for checking the insulation resistance between ungrounded protective
conductors and earth.

The measurements must be carried out in direct current. The test apparatus shall be capable of
supplying the test voltage specified in Table 61A with a current of 1 mA.

VS 612.4 Protection by SELV or PELV or by separation of circuits

The separation of circuits must be verified in accordance with 612.4.1 in the case of protection by SELV, to
612.4.2 in the case of protection by PELV and 612.4.3 in the case of protection by electrical separation.

The measurement of the insulation resistance of the separate circuit is carried out with respect to earth.

VS 612.4.1 Protection by SELV

The separation of the active parts from those of the other circuits as well as from the earth, in
accordance with 414, must be checked by measuring the insulation resistance. The insulation resistance
values obtained must comply with thetable 61A.

612.4.2 Protection by PELV

The separation of the active parts from those of the other circuits as well as from the earth, in
accordance with 414, must be checked by measuring the insulation resistance. The insulation resistance
values obtained must comply with thetable 61A.

612.4.3 Protection by electrical separation

The separation of the active parts from those of the other circuits as well as from the earth, in
accordance with 413, must be checked by measuring the insulation resistance. The insulation resistance
values obtained must comply with thetable 61A.

The separation required in 413.3.3 between separate circuit and any other circuit is verified by
examination. When a device has both a separate circuit and another circuit, this separation is achieved by
constructing the equipment in accordance with the safety requirements of the relevant standard.

In the case of fixed separation sources, it is verified that the secondary circuit has double or reinforced
insulation with respect to the enclosure.

Mobile sources must be double or reinforced insulation.

VS 612.5 Resistance of floors and walls

It may be necessary to measure:
- the minimum resistance of floors and walls to meet the requirements ofannex C1 of the part 4-41
Where,
- the maximum resistance of floors in premises for medical use where there is a risk of inflammation
to meet the requirements of paragraph 14.1.3 of standard NF C 15-211.

The measurements are made in at least five different locations of the room, located near the four angles
and the center. In each of these locations, five measurements are made in a circle 50 cm in diameter, the
average value of which will be taken.

If we want to ensure a minimum resistance, we will use for resistance of the room, the lowest value of
the averages of measurements carried out, the measurements having been made on a wet ground.

- 328 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS If we want to ensure maximum resistance, we will use as the resistance of the room, the highest value of
the averages of the measurements taken, the measurements having been made on a dry soil, that is,
that is, not having been washed for at least four hours.

THE'Annex A of this part gives, by way of example, a method of measuring the resistance of floors and
walls.

612.6 Checking the protection conditions by automatically cutting off the power supply

612.6.1 General

The effectiveness of the protective measures against indirect contact by automatically cutting off the
power supply is checked as follows:
The verification of the effectiveness of the protection measure against indirect contacts depends on the
earth connection diagram.

a) For the TN diagram

VS
Verification of compliance with the rules of 411.3.2 and of 411.4.3 must include:

1) measurement of the fault loop impedance (see 612.6.3). Alternatively, compliance can be checked
by measuring the resistance of the protective conductors (see
612.6.4)

These measurements are not necessary when calculations of fault loop impedances or resistance of the
protective conductors are available, and when the arrangements of the installation allow the length and
the section of the conductors to be verified, in which case the verification of the continuity of the
protective conductors (see 612.2) is sufficient.

2) verification of the characteristics of the associated breaking device:

- by test for differential-residual current devices.
The automatic cut-off of the power supply by means of a differential device must be verified by injection
of a differential-residual current. I∆not generated by appropriate test equipment; the cut-off time is not
checked.
- by visual examination of the setting current for circuit breakers or of the rated current for fuses;

The verification consists in ensuring that the minimum clear fault current between a phase conductor
and the protective conductor is at least equal to the current ensuring the operation of the protective
device within the time prescribed in 411.3.2.2 Where 411.3.2.3.

The minimum clear fault current can be determined by calculation if the phase conductors and the
protective conductor are installed in the immediate vicinity without the interposition of ferro-magnetic
elements. In accordance with the provisions in411.3, this minimum fault current must be at least equal
to:

- if the protection is provided by a circuit breaker, to the current ensuring the instantaneous or short
delay operation of the circuit breaker;
- if the protection is provided by fuses, the current ensuring the blowing of the fuse in a time at most
equal to that fixed in the table 41A depending on the rated voltage of the installation.

It is therefore sufficient to verify that the installation complies with the calculation note provided by the
designer, by examination:

- sections and lengths of circuits;

- rated currents (for fuses) and adjustment (for circuit breakers) of automatic cut-off devices.

The calculations carried out by computer programs having received the technical opinion of the UTE
following the allocation procedures of the UTE C 15-500 guide are deemed to ensure compliance with the
rules of this standard.

- 329 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

When the condition of proximity of the active conductors and the protective conductor is not respected,
the verification in principle requires the measurement of the impedance of the fault loop and the
calculation, as a function of this impedance, of the minimum fault current. franc.

VS b) For the TT scheme

Compliance with the rules of 411.5.3 must include:

1) measurement of the resistance of the earth electrode RTO the masses of the installation (see 612.6.2);
2) visual inspection and testing of differential-residual current devices;
The automatic cut-off of the power supply by means of a differential device must be verified by injection
of a differential-residual current. I∆not generated by appropriate test equipment; the cut-off time is not
checked.
3) Checking the continuity of the protective conductors (see 612.2).
Test methods for differential-residual current devices are given in annex B as examples.

c) For the IT scheme

VS
The first fault current must be calculated or measured.
NOTES -
1 - This measurement is not necessary if all the earths of the installation are connected to the power supply earth (see 312.2.3) when
the installation is connected to earth through an impedance (see 411.6.1).
2 - The measurement is carried out only if the calculation is not possible because all the parameters are not known. Precautions must
be taken when carrying out the measurements in order to avoid the dangers resulting from a double fault.

When on the second fault, the conditions are similar to those in the TN diagram (see
411.6.4a), the checks are carried out in accordance with point (a) above.
When on the second fault, the conditions are similar to those in the TT diagram (see
411.6.4b), the checks are carried out in accordance with point (b) above.
NOTE - The measurement of the fault loop impedance requires establishing, during the measurements, a negligible impedance link
between the neutral point of the power supply and the protective conductor at the origin of the installation.

When the masses are interconnected, the verification of the protection conditions is carried out as
indicated in 612.6.1.1, taking into account the following details:
- the current to be taken into consideration is equal to half of the minimum fault current between an
active conductor and the protective conductor of the circuit considered, the active conductor being a
phase conductor if the neutral is not distributed and the neutral conductor if it is distributed;

- the operating time of the protective device is that specified in the table 41A.

612.6.2 Measuring the resistance of the earth electrodes

The resistance of an earth electrode is measured using a suitable method.

NOTES -
1 - Theannex C describes, by way of example, a measurement method using two auxiliary earth electrodes and specifies the
conditions to be fulfilled.
2 - When, in the TT diagram, the location of the installation (for example in towns) does not make it possible to have two auxiliary
earth electrodes in practice, the measurement of the resistance of the fault loop gives a value by excess.

It may be useful to measure the “open bar” and “closed bar” earth electrodes in order to know if the
“closed bar” value is due to the specially established earth electrode or to de facto earth electrodes.

It is not always necessary to disconnect the earth terminal in order to measure the resistance of the
earth electrode.
The earth electrode resistance can be measured "closed bar" when it is certain that the measured value
does not come from the connection of the earthing installation to a de facto earth electrode which could
be removed without notice (for example, water or gas distribution network in the event of replacement
of a metal pipe by an insulating pipe).

- 330 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

This is generally the case when the earth connection is carried out by a belt at the bottom of the
excavation. In other cases, the measurement must be made "open bar".

VS 612.6.3 Measurement of the fault loop impedance

The fault loop impedance measurement must be carried out at the same frequency as the nominal
frequency of the power supply.
The measured fault loop impedance must meet the conditions of 411.4.3 for the TN diagram and 411.6.4
for the IT scheme.
NOTE - When the value of the fault loop impedance can be influenced by large fault currents, the results of measurements carried
out with such currents in the factory or in the laboratory may be taken into account. This applies in particular to factory fitted
assemblies, including prefabricated pipelines, metal conduits and cables with metal coating.

612.6.4 Measuring the resistance of the protective conductors

612.6.4.1 The verification consists in measuring the resistance between any mass and the point closest to
the main equipotentiality.

NOTE - Protective conductors include metallic conduits and other metallic envelopes for conductors under the conditions defined in
543.2.

It is recommended to carry out this measurement at a no-load voltage between 4 and 24 V in direct or
alternating current and with a current of at least 0.2 A.
In circuits protected by an overload protection device with a rated current not exceeding 32 A, it is
possible to use sources developing a nominal current lower than 0.2 A.

VS Resistance R measured must meet the following condition:

k Uo
R≤
2 ITo

Uo being the nominal voltage between phase and neutral (V),

ITo being the current ensuring the operation of the protection device over time t
defined by table 41A for TN and lT diagrams, or 5 s for distribution circuits. When the protection device is
a circuit breaker,ITo is the minimum current ensuring instantaneous or short time delay operation of this
circuit breaker.

k being a factor equal to 1 in the TN diagram,

3
in the IT diagram when the neutral is not distributed,
2
1
in the IT diagram when the neutral is distributed.
2

The maximum values of resistance R for the different protection devices and for the different nominal
voltages Uo are given in the UTE C 15-105 guide.

- 331 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

612.6.4.2 When the prescriptions in 612.6.3 Where 612.6.4.1 are not satisfied and that an additional
VS
connection is made in accordance with 415.2, its effectiveness must be checked as indicated in 415.2.2.

612.7 Functional tests

Equipment assemblies, motors and their auxiliaries, controls, interlocks, IPCs, shall be subjected to a
functional test in order to verify that they are correctly assembled, adjusted and installed in accordance
with the requirements of this standard.
Protective devices should be subjected to functional tests, if necessary, to verify that they are correctly
installed and adjusted.

Part 6-62 - Periodic checks

620.1 General
VS
Periodic checks of the electrical installations are carried out to determine whether the installations and
parts of the installations have not suffered any deterioration rendering them unsafe for use and that
they are maintained in accordance with the installation rules, except when specified. contrary prescribed
by national regulations.
In addition, they include examining the effects of any change in the use of the premises for which the
installation was intended.

NOTE - The general rules and methodological indications given for the initial verification are valid for the periodic verifications.

620.2 Frequency of periodic checks

After the initial verification, the verifications of the electrical installations should be carried out with a
minimum periodicity according to the characteristics of the installation, the use and the environment.
The maximum periodicity between inspections may be indicated in national regulations.

The main texts prescribing the verification intervals are as follows:

- decree of 10 October 2000 for establishments receiving workers;
- order of 25 June 1980 amended for establishments open to the public;
- decrees relating to classified installations;
- decree of the general regulations of the extractive industries.

620.3 Field of periodic checks

It is recommended that periodic checks include at a minimum:
- a visual inspection relating to protection against direct and indirect contact and protection against
fire and explosion;
- an insulation resistance test;
- a continuity test of the protective conductors;
- a functional test of the differential devices, see annex B ;
- monitoring of overcurrent protection devices;
- measuring the resistance of the earth electrode.
The appropriate regulatory texts, in particular the decree of October 10, 2000, indicate the scope of the
periodic checks.

- 332 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

620.4 Report

Following the periodic checks, a report must be drawn up and must include, in addition to any
observations relating to the visual examination and the tests carried out, information relating to
modifications and extensions which do not comply with the requirements, specifying the parties
concerned. installation.

VS Part 6-63 - Facility maintenance

The installations must be kept in good condition at all times.

Any defect or anomaly found in the condition of the electrical equipment or in its operation must be
reported to a person responsible for monitoring the installation.
This is particularly the case when the protection devices against overcurrents or against electric shocks
operate without a known cause.
In particular, it is necessary to ensure:
- the maintenance of provisions putting the active parties out of reach,
- the connections and condition of the protective conductors,
- the condition of the flexible cables supplying mobile devices as well as their connection devices,

- correct setting of the protective devices.

Any installation or part of an installation which would appear to be dangerous must be immediately de-
energized and may only be put back into service after satisfactory repair.

Maintenance and checking of installations must only be entrusted to persons qualified to carry them out.

For the safety conditions in which these operations must be carried out, it is useful to refer to the
indications contained in the Compendium of general electrical safety instructions. (2).

In particular, operations to replace electrical equipment must only be carried out after disconnection of
the corresponding supply circuit. For certain equipment, it is necessary to verify the absence of any
voltage on the equipment supply terminals, this is the case when the equipment supply mode can lead to
fear of a voltage return by a circuit other than the main material supply circuit. For example, replacing a
surge protector (534.2) requires the isolation of the circuits of the high voltage supply of the transformer
and of the feeder to the low voltage installation.

___________

-------
(2) UTE C 18-510

- 333 -
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS Annex A - (informative) - Insulation resistance measurement method

floors and walls

A magneto ohmmeter or an insulation meter with a built-in battery is used for these measurements,
giving a no-load voltage of approximately 500 V (or 1000 V if the rated voltage of the installation is
greater than 500 V) in direct current. .
The resistance is measured between the measuring electrode and a protective conductor of the
installation.
The electrode may be one of those described below. In case of dispute, the use of electrode 2 is the
reference method.
NOTE - It is recommended to perform the test before applying the surface treatment (varnishes, paints and similar products).

Measuring electrode 1
750 N

Wooden tray

I THE

Metal tray

Wet laundry

UI
Flooring

Ground

Figure A1 - Measuring electrode 1

The floor and / or the wall should be covered with a damp cloth of approximately 270 mm X 270 mm in
the most unfavorable places, for example at the joints of the floor covering, according to figure A1. A
metal tray of about 250 mm X 250 mm X 2 mm should be placed on the damp cloth and a force of about
750 N (one person) or 250 N (one hand) should be applied, respectively for the floor or a wall. The load
does not really influence the measured resistance. In the case of floors or walls liable to be damp, such
as carpets or wallpaper, it is recommended to dispense with damp linen. In the case of the presence of
humidity, different values can be obtained.

Measuring electrode 2
The measuring electrode is made up of a metal tripod whose parts bearing on the self are distributed at
the vertices of an equilateral triangle. Each bearing part is provided with a flexible sole, ensuring, when
loaded, an intimate direct contact with the surface to be tested on a surface of approximately 900 mm²
and representing a resistance of less than 5,000 ohms.

Before carrying out the measurements, the part to be tested is wet or covered with a damp cloth. During the
measurements, a force of approximately 750 N or 250 N is applied to the tripod depending on whether it is
about walls or walls.

- 334 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS

Figure A2 - Measuring electrode 2

The resistance of antistatic floors is measured with the measuring electrode 2, the floor being in a dry
state, that is to say not having been washed for at least four hours.

- 335 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS Annex B - (informative) - Verification of the functioning of the

differential-residual current protection

NOTE - The permanent leakage current of the installation is vectorially added to the test current. In case of doubt, the functional
check is carried out by disconnecting the load.

The following methods are given by way of example.

Method 1

Figure B1 shows the principle of a method in which a variable resistor is connected between an active
downstream conductor and the grounds. The current is increased by reducing the value of the variable
resistor RP.

Current I∆ for which the device operates must not be greater than the rated differential-residual current I
∆not.

L1

L2

L3

NOT

Rp

NOTE - Method 1 can be used for TN-S and TT schemes; it is not recommended for the IT scheme.

Figure B1 - Example for method 1

- 336 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS Method 2

Figure B2 shows the principle of a method in which the variable resistor is connected between an active
conductor upstream and another active conductor downstream.

The current is increased by reducing the value of the variable resistor RP.

Current I∆ for which the device operates must not be greater than I∆not. The load must be disconnected
during the test.

NOTE - Method 2 can be used in all TN-S, TT and IT schemes.

Figure B2 - Example for method 2

- 337 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Title 6

VS Annex C - (informative) - Measurement of the resistance of an earth electrode

As an example, the following method can be used when the measurement of the resistance of the earth
electrode is prescribed (see figure C1).
An alternating current of constant intensity circulates between the earth electrode T and an auxiliary
earth electrode T1 placed at a distance from T such that the influence surfaces of the two taps
land do not overlap.
A second auxiliary earth connection T2, which can be a metal stake driven into the ground, is then placed
halfway between T and T1, and the voltage drop between T and T2 is measured.

The resistance of the earth electrode is equal to the voltage between T and T2 divided by the current
flowing between T and T1, provided that there is no mutual influence between the earth electrodes.

In order to verify that the resistance of the earth electrodes is correct, two more readings are taken by
moving the earth electrode T2 about 6 m further, then 6 m closer to the
socket T. If the three results are substantially in agreement, the average of the three readings is taken as
the resistance of the earth electrode T. Otherwise, the tests are repeated by increasing the distance
between T and T1.

If the test is carried out with a current at power frequency, the internal impedance of the voltmeter used
must be at least 200 Ω /V.
The current source used for the test must be separated from the distribution network (for example by a
transformer with two windings).

T: earth connection under test, disconnected from all other power sources auxiliary earth
T1 : connection
T2 : second auxiliary earth electrode
X: other position of T 2 for control measurement
Y: other position of T for
2 other control measures

Figure C1 - Earth resistance measurement

______________

- 338 - 2002
TITLE 7. - Rules for special installations and locations

Part 7-701 - Rooms containing a bathtub or a shower (Shower rooms)

Part 7-702 - Swimming pools and other basins

Part 7-703 - Rooms containing radiators for saunas

Part 7-704 - Site installations

Part 7-705 - Electrical installations in agricultural establishments

Part 7-706 - Small conductive enclosures

Part 7-708 - Electrical installations of caravan parks

Part 7-709 - Electrical installations of marinas

Part 7-711 - Temporary electrical installations of structures, barracks, stands in fields

fairgrounds, markets, leisure parks, circuses and places of exhibitions or shows

Part 7-717 - Mobile or transportable units

Part 7-752 - Liquid fuel distribution areas

Part 7-753 - Electrical space heating equipment

Part 7-771 - Living quarters

Part 7-772 - Special provisions for the installations of common areas and services
general of collective buildings

Part 7-773 - Protection of unattended installations

Part 7-781 - Electrical service premises or locations

NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

Part 7-701 - Rooms containing a bathtub or a shower

(Bathroom)

701.1 Application domain.............................................. ............................................ 339

701.3 Determination of general characteristics .............................................. ........ 339

701.4 Protection to ensure safety ............................................. .......................... 340

701.41 Protection against electric shock ............................................. ................. 340

701.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ...... 341

701.51 Common rules ................................................ ............................................. 341
701.52 Pipelines ................................................. .................................................. . 341
701.53 Apparatus ................................................. .................................................. ... 341
701.55 Other materials ................................................ ................................................ 342

701.71 Additional rules for shower rooms .......................................... 349

Annex - (informative) Equipotential bonding .................................................. .............351

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-701 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 339 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

VS 701.1 Scope
The specific requirements of this part apply to rooms containing bathtubs and / or showers (with or
without shower tray), in which the risk of electric shock is increased due to the reduction in the
electrical resistance of the wet or submerged human body. and its contact with the potential of the
earth.
NOTE - For balneotherapy rooms:
- when the installation is individual, the rules of this part apply;
- when the installation is collective, the rules of the game 7-702 are applicable.

The rules in this part are based on the following two principles:
- limitation of electrical equipment located near the bathtub or shower tray;
- equalization of the potentials of all simultaneously accessible conductive elements and masses.

VS 701.3 Determination of general characteristics

701.32 Classification of volumes

701.320.1 These prescriptions consider four volumes,

- volume 0 is the interior volume of the bathtub or shower tray;

- volume 1 is limited,
• on the one hand, by the cylindrical surface with vertical generatrix circumscribed to the bathtub
or the shower tray or, for a shower with fixed head without tray, by the cylindrical surface with
vertical generatrix of radius 0.60 m and whose axis goes through the fixed head,
• on the other hand, by the horizontal plane located above the volume 0 and that located 2.25 m
above the bottom of the bathtub or the shower tray.
- volume 2 is limited,
• on the one hand, by the exterior vertical surface of volume 1 and a parallel surface located 0.60
m from the first,
• on the other hand, by the ground and the horizontal plane located 3.0 m above the ground.
- volume 3 is limited,
• on the one hand, by the exterior vertical surface of volume 2 and a parallel surface located 2.40
m from the first,
• on the other hand, by the ground and the horizontal plane located 2.25 m above the ground.

The dimensions are measured taking into account the walls and walls (see figures 701A,701B and 701C
).

701.320.2 In the case where there is no shower tray and where the shower head is located at the end of
a hose, the vertical axis of the cylindrical surface is considered at the origin of the hose and the volume
1 is limited by the cylindrical surface located at 1.20 m from this point, whatever the position of the
pour point.

VS 701.320.3 Individual shower stalls shall meet the requirements of paragraphs 701.1 to 701.5.

701.320.4 The volume located above volume 1 up to a height of 3 m above the ground is volume 2.

The volume located above volume 2 for a height greater than 3 m above the ground is excluding
volumes.
The volume located above volume 3 is excluding volumes.See
figures 701B.

- 340 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

701.320.5 The space below the bathtub or shower and on their sides is assimilated to volume 3 if it is
closed and accessible by a hatch provided for this use and which can only be opened using a tool .
Otherwise, the rules for volume 1 apply to that space.

However, in both cases the minimum degree of protection IPX3 is required.

701.320.6 When a closed false ceiling is placed in volumes 1 and 2, the space located above this false
ceiling is assimilated to a volume 3 [see figure 701B e)].

If a perforated false ceiling is at a height of between 2.25 m and 3 m, the volumes thus defined are
shown in the figure. 701B c).

701.4 Protection to ensure safety

VS
701.41 Protection against electric shock

NOTE - For the protection of the socket-outlets, see 701.53.

701.414.1 When SELV is used, protection against direct contact must be ensured, whatever the nominal
voltage, by means of barriers or enclosures having at least the degree of protection IP2X.

701.414.2 In volume 0, only the protection measure by SELV with a nominal voltage at most equal to 12
V in alternating current or 30 V in direct current is allowed, the safety source being installed outside
volumes 0, 1 and 2.

701.414.3 All electrical equipment located outside volumes 0, 1, 2, 3 in rooms containing a bathtub or
shower are protected by 30mA RCD regardless of the dimensions of this room.

701.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding

An additional equipotential bonding must connect all the conductive elements and all the masses of
volumes 1, 2 and 3.
See appendices A and B of this part.
In the case of total rehabilitations, a door or window frame will be considered electrically connected in
fact to the equipotential bonding when the continuity, measured according to
612.2, between a conductive element effectively connected to the additional equipotential bonding and
the frame, is at most equal to 2 Ω. In this case, there is no need to implement a conductor connecting
the frame to the local additional equipotential bonding since it is considered to have been carried out.

A door or window frame that is not likely to propagate a potential will be considered when the
insulation resistance, measured according to 612.3, between a conductive element connected to the
local additional equipotential bonding and the frame is at least equal to 50,000 Ω. In this case, there is
no need to connect the frame to the additional local equipotential bonding.

- 341 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

VS 701.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment

701.51 Common rules

701.512.2 External influences

The conditions for external influences are as follows depending on the volumes considered:
Table 701A - External influences
VOLUMES 0 1 2 3

Ambient temperature (AA) 4 4 4 4

Humidity (AB) 4 4 4 4

Presence of water (AD) 7 4 3 2

Electrical equipment must have at least the following degrees of protection:

• in volume 0: IPX7;
• in volume 1: IPX4 or, if this volume can be subjected to jets of water for cleaning in public baths:
IPX5;
• in volume 2: IPX3 or, if this volume can be subjected to jets of water for cleaning in public baths:
IPX5;
• in volume 3: IPX1 or, if this volume can be subjected to jets of water for cleaning in public baths:
IPX5.
Table 701B summarizes the conditions under which the electrical equipment can be used in the
different volumes.

701.52 Pipelines
VS
701.520.01 The pipes must have insulation satisfying the rules of protection by double or reinforced
insulation and not include any metallic coating.
These conduits are, for example, formed by insulated conductors in conduits or insulating trunking
systems or by multiconductor cables with an insulating sheath.

When crossing a wall of a wet room requires additional mechanical protection, sections of rigid metal
ducts (MRL) can be used, but it is not necessary to connect them to the equipotential bonding of the
room. of water due to their short length.

VS 701.520.02 In volume 0, no piping is allowed, except SELV limited to 12 V in alternating current or 30 V

in direct current.
In volumes 1 and 2, the pipes must be limited to those necessary to supply the devices located in these
volumes.
701.520.03 Connection boxes are not allowed in volumes 0, 1 and 2.
By way of derogation, in volume 2, connection boxes allowing the connection of user devices are
allowed on condition that they are placed behind these devices.

701.53 Apparatus
In volume 0, no equipment must be installed.
In volumes 1 and 2, no equipment must be installed, with the exception of SELV circuit switches
supplied at a voltage not greater than 12 V in alternating current or 30 V in direct current, the safety
source being installed outside of volumes 0, 1 and 2.
NOTE - Insulating cords controlling switches are allowed in volumes 1 and 2 on condition that they meet the requirements of the
(1)
standard in force.
-------
(1) NF EN 60669-1 (C 61-110)

- 342 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

By way of derogation, in volume 2, a socket outlet supplied by a razor isolation transformer with a rated
VS power of between 20 VA and 50 VA is permitted.
(2)
to comply with the standard .

This socket outlet can have a degree of protection IP20.

VS In volume 3, socket outlets, switches and other equipment are allowed, provided they are:

• either supplied individually by an isolating transformer in accordance with 413.3 ;

• either supplied with SELV (414);
• or protected by a differential-residual current protection device with a rated differential-residual
current not exceeding 30 mA.
In the bathrooms, socket outlets installed in the ground are prohibited.

701.55 Other equipment

In volumes 0 and 1, only devices intended for use in a bathtub supplied with SELV limited to 12 V
alternating current and 30 V direct current are authorized, the source being outside volumes 0, 1 and 2.

The supervisors must make arrangements so that semi-stationary Class 1 operating devices (such as
laundry drying devices, washing machines) are under no circumstances inside the rooms. volumes 0, 1
and 2.
If the dimensions of the bathroom do not allow them to be placed outside of volume 2 and if it is not
possible to place them in another room, these devices can nevertheless be installed if part of volume 2
them. receiving space is transformed into volume 3, for example by interposing a fixed and durable
partition in non-metallic material (wall, partition, screen, etc.) with a height equal to that of volume 1.
(See figure 701B).
In volume 2, only luminaires and space heaters and other equipment for use may be installed, provided
that this equipment is of class II and is protected by a differential-residual device of differential-residual
current assigned to the device. plus equal to 30mA.

These same devices cannot be installed on the aprons of baths and the benches and niches of baths or
showers.

Lighting fixtures may include:

- a socket outlet without earthing contact provided that this socket is supplied via an isolating
transformer;
- a switch if this is planned by construction.

The mirror cabinets comprising lighting device, switch and socket outlet can be installed in volume 2
provided that they meet the rules of class II and that the socket outlet is powered by means of a
separation transformer. Class l cabinets can only be installed in volume 3 or outside volumes.

Storage water heaters must be installed in volume 3 and outside volumes.

If the dimensions of the bathroom do not allow them to be placed in these volumes, these devices can
nevertheless be installed:
- in volume 2;
- in volume 1, if they are horizontal and placed as high as possible;
on the other hand, respecting the following two conditions:
- the water pipes are made of a conductive material;
-------
(2) NF EN 61558-2-5 (C 52-558-2-5)

- 343 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

- the water heater is protected by an RCD of rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30
mA.

Instantaneous water heaters can be installed in volumes 1 and 2 on condition that they are protected
by a differential-residual current RCD rated at most equal to 30 mA and connected to water pipes made
of conductive material.

VS In volume 3, devices for use are admitted on condition that they are:
- either supplied individually by an isolating transformer in accordance with 413.3 ;
- either supplied with SELV (414);
- or protected by an RCD with rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA.

Equipment with pulsed jet agitation meeting the corresponding standards can be installed in the
volume below the bathtub provided that the rules of
701.415.2 are satisfied and that the volume below the bathtub is accessible only with a tool.

Electric heating elements embedded in the ground, intended for space heating, can be installed below
volumes 2, 3 and outside volumes provided that they are covered with a grounded metal mesh or have
a metallic coating placed to earth, connected to the equipotential bonding defined in 701.415.2.

Table 701B - Materials admitted according to volumes

- 344 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

Because the standards relating to household electrical appliances do not take into account the marking
and tests according to the IP system, the marking of drops of water and the corresponding tests are
accepted with the following equivalences:

Table 701C - Marking of water drops

Degree of NF EN 60598-1 NF EN 60335-1

protection (C 71-000) (C 73-800)
LIGHTING DEVICES
ELECTRODOMESTICS

Protected against vertical IPX1

drops of water

Protected against rain IPX3

Protected against splashing IPX4

water

Protected against jets of water IPX5

Waterproof IPX7

NOTE - Double marking (ie water drops and the IP code) is not allowed because the tests are different.

- 345 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

a) Bathtub b) Bathtub, with fixed wall

Volume 0
Volume 0

Volume 1 Volume 2
Volume 1 Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 3

0.60 m 2.40 m
0.60 m 2.40 m

0.60 m
c) Shower d) Shower with fixed wall

Volume 0 Volume 2 Volume 3 Volume 0 Volume 2 Volume 3

0.60 m 2.40 m Volume 1 0.60 m

Volume 1 2.40 m

f) Shower without tray

e) Shower without tray (fixed shower head)
but with fixed wall (fixed shower head)

Fixed shower head Fixed shower head

0.
60

0.
m

60
m

Volume 1
0.
60

0.
m

60
m

Volume 2
Volume 2
2.
04

2.
m

40

Volume 3
m

Volume 3

Volume 0

Volume 1

Volume 2 Volume 3

Figures 701A - Dimensions of volumes (plan)

- 346 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

h) Shower without tray

g) Shower without tray (mobile shower head)
but with fixed wall (mobile shower head)

flexible
flexible

Mobile shower head

1.20 m
1. Mobile shower head
20
m
Volume 1
Volume 1

Volume 2

m
0.60
0.
60
m

Volume 2
2. Volume 3
40
m

m
2.40
Volume 3

Volume 1

Volume 2

Volume 3

Figures 701A (continued) - Dimensions of volumes (plan)

a) Bathtub

Ceiling

Excluding volume

3 2 1
3.00 m

2.25 m
2.25 m

0.60 m
0
Base: bottom of the tub

Space under the tub 1 Where 3

2.40 m
(see 701.320.5)
Volume 0

Volume 1

Volume 2

Volume 3

Figures 701B - Dimensions of volumes (elevation view)

- 347 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

b) Shower

Excluding volume

Excluding volume
3.00 m

2.25 m
3 2 1
2.25 m

Volume 0
2.40 m 0.60 m Space under the receiver 1 Where 3
Volume 1 (see 701.320.5)

Volume 2

Volume 3

c) Openwork suspended ceiling at a height of between 2.25 m and 3 m

Excluding volume

3 2 1
3.00 m

2.25 m

2.25 m

0.60 m

0
Base: bottom of the tub

Base: bathroom floor

Space under the tub 1 Where 3

2.40 m
(see 701.320.5)
Volume 0

Volume 1

Volume 2

Volume 3

Figures 701B (continued) - Dimensions of volumes (elevation view)

- 348 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

d) Closed ceiling at a height greater than 3 m

Ceiling

Excluding volume

3 2 1
3.00 m

2.25 m

0.60 m

Base: bathroom floor

2.40 m

e) Closed suspended ceiling at a height of less than 2.25 m

3 2 1
Ceiling height at 2.25 m
3.00 m

2.25 m

0.60 m
0
Base: bathroom floor
Base: ground

Space under the tub 1 Where 3

2.40 m
(see 701.320.5)
Volume 0

Volume 1

Volume 2

Volume 3

Figures 701B (continued) - Dimensions of volumes (elevation view)

- 349 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

701.71 Additional rules for shower rooms

A shower room is a room with several shower stations, separated or not by partitions:

We distinguish :

- the shower rooms with shower cubicles with individual dressing gowns;
- shower rooms with shower cubicles without individual dressing gowns;
- the shower rooms in which the shower stations are not separated by partitions.

A shower cabin has a single shower station.

The rules of this part are applicable to shower rooms taking into account the following additional rules:
VS

701.71.1 Individual shower cubicles

An individual shower cubicle, located in a shower room, is a closed room comprising two parts:

- the actual shower which constitutes volume 1;

- a stripper which constitutes volume 2.
These two parts are separated by a partition which can be fixed or mobile; the partition must have a
height at least equal to that of the shower head.

VS 701.71.2 Collective showers

When the shower rooms have cubicles without an individual dressing table (see figure701D):

- volume 1 is made up of the shower cubicles;

- volume 2 is made up of the part of the shower room outside the shower cubicles.

The partitions of the shower cubicles must have a height at least equal to that of the shower heads with
a minimum of 2 meters.
When the shower rooms do not have shower cubicles (see figure 701E):
- volume 1 is defined, in the horizontal plane, by the surface intended to ensure the flow of water,
possibly limited by a partition;
- volume 2 is made up of the part of the shower room outside volume 1.

For volume 1, from a reference plane formed by the floor or the bottom of the shower tray if it is above
the floor, low voltage lighting devices must be located at a higher height to that of the shower head
with a minimum of 2.25 m.
For the other volumes, the rules of the table 701B are applicable.

The supply lines for the lighting devices are made according to the additional insulation protection
measure (according to 412).

An equipotential bonding, carried out in accordance with the indications of 415.2 and of 543, must connect all
the conductive elements of the room and the grounds of the electrical equipment.

- 350 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

Examples of realization

Cloakrooms

Shower cubicles (volume 1)

Dressing gowns (volume 2)

Volume 3

Figure 701C - Shower room with shower cubicles with individual dressing table

Cloakrooms

60 cm

Shower cubicles (volume 1)

Volume 2

Volume 3

Figure 701D - Shower room with shower cubicles without individual dressing table

NOTE - Any passage from volume 1 to volume 3 must be done through volume 2. If this does not physically exist, it must be
entered in volume 3 (see figure 701F).

- 351 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

Annex - (informative) - Equipotential bonding

TO - ADDITIONAL EQUIPOTENTIAL LINK

A1 - The purpose of the additional equipotential bonding is to equalize the potentials of all the
conductive elements and of all the masses of the bathroom and to limit the contact voltage to a non-
dangerous value, taking into account the particular conditions in which the people (condition of
external influences BB3).
A2 - The equipotential bonding is carried out:
- either by a conductor with a cross-section of 2.5 mm² if it is mechanically protected (that is to say
placed in a duct, or under a trunking), 4 mm² if it is not mechanically protected and fixed directly to
the walls (for example, fixed above the plinth);
- or by a galvanized strip having a section of at least 20 mm² and a thickness of at least 1 mm.

The conductors must not be embedded directly in the walls; on the other hand, the strips can be
embedded in the walls (floor or partition).
A3 - It is possible to confuse the equipotential bonding and the earthing conductor of a mass inside the
room in a single green and yellow conductor (see figure 701E). In this case, the section of this
conductor is identical to that of the active conductors of the corresponding circuit.

A4 - The equipotential bonding is carried out inside the bathroom, which does not imply that it is
located all along its path inside the volume limited by the walls, the main thing being that each
bathroom has The water has an individual equipotential bonding.
For example, if it is not possible to connect certain conductive elements and masses inside the
bathroom, this connection can be made outside in rooms as close as possible to the bathroom. . The
conductive elements to be connected to this equipotential bonding are indicated in B2.

AT 5 - The equipotential bonding can be carried out in flush mounting, but the fitting must be done in
the walls of the bathroom. The embedding must then be carried out according to the rules of
paragraph529.1.2 for pipes in recessed conduits, it can be made by a 2.5 mm² conductor laid under an
insulating conduit.
A6 - There is no need to require that the equipotential bonding be visible over its entire path, but it is
recommended that the connections remain accessible; otherwise, the electrical continuity of the
connection is checked as indicated in article612.2.
A7 - A metal frame can be used as a component of the equipotential bonding subject to checking its
electrical continuity.
On the other hand, the other conductive elements (and in particular the fluid pipes) must not be used
as equipotential bonding elements, because of the risk of this connection being removed if the
conductive elements are removed.
AT 8 - If there is no earth in the bathroom, the additional equipotential bonding is only made between
the conductive elements.
A9 - In order to facilitate the creation of the additional equipotential bonding and to ensure optimum
safety, the following solution is particularly recommended:
A connection box specific to all the circuits concerned by the room will be installed inside it. This box
contains a terminal block to which will be connected:
- the protective conductors of all circuits of volumes 1, 2 and 3;
- the additional equipotential bonding conductors, connected to the conductive elements of the
room.
It is authorized to carry out an additional equipotential bonding via a protective conductor, provided
that none of the conductors concerned has a cross section of less than 2.5 mm² (see figures 701E).

- 352 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

Figures 701E - Examples of additional equipotential bonding

- 353 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-701

B - ELEMENTS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE ADDITIONAL EQUIPOTENTIAL LINK

B1 - As a general rule, all conductive elements should be connected to the equipotential bonding under
the conditions of 701.415.2, with the exception of those generally of small dimensions which do not
present any risk of being brought to a defined potential or different from that of the equipotential
bonding.
B2 - Must be connected to equipotential bonding

a) metallic pipes for hot water, cold water, drain, gas.

There is no place:

- to bypass the threaded connections of metal water pipes laid out in the open, because the thread
ensures sufficient continuity, even when it is fitted with a stuffing element;

- to connect the valves connected to insulating pipes to the equipotential bonding.

b) metallic drains and metallic bathtub bodies or shower trays;
c) one of the inlet or outlet pipes for central heating radiators or other heating elements (such as towel
warmers), regardless of the class of equipment;
When a central heating radiator is connected by insulating pipes, there is no need to connect the
radiator and the distributor with equipotential bonding.
d) the metal frames of doors, windows and openings if they can come into contact with metal elements
of the construction (such as concrete reinforcements). In the case of total rehabilitation, see
701.415.2.
e) the metal reinforcements of the floor. In the case of total rehabilitation, see701.415.2.
B3 - It is not necessary to connect non-electric and non-heating metal devices (such as towel rails) as
these devices are not likely to provide a potential different from that of other conductive elements.

B4 - The high and low metal grilles for natural ventilation do not need to be connected to the
equipotential bonding because they are not likely to provide a potential different from that of the other
conductive elements.
B5 - For mechanical ventilation ducts and outlets, it is only necessary to connect these elements to the
equipotential bonding of the bathroom if the main duct, the bypass or the branch and the outlet are
metallic.

______________

- 354 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

Part 7-702 - Swimming pools and other ponds

702.1 Scope, object and fundamental principles ......................................... ......... 355

702.11 Application domain .............................................. .................................................. ... 355

702.2 Definitions ................................................. .................................................. ................... 355

702.3 Determination of general characteristics .............................................. ................... 355

702.32 Classification of volumes ............................................... ............................................. 355

702.4 Protection to ensure safety ............................................. ..................................... 356

702.41 Protection against electric shock ............................................. ............................. 356
702,414 Protection by safety extra low voltage (SELV) ........................................ .......... 356
702.46 Sectioning and control ............................................... ......................................... 357

702.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ................. 357

702.51 Common rules ................................................ .................................................. ...... 357
702,512 Service conditions and external influences ............................................ ................... 357
702.52 Pipelines ................................................. .................................................. ............. 358
702,522 Choice and implementation according to external influences ....................................... 358
702.53 Equipment................................................. .................................................. ............... 358
702.55 Other materials ................................................ .................................................. .......... 359

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.

The numbers following the particular number of part 7-702 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.

The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 355 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

H 702.1 Scope, object and basic principles

702.11 Scope

The specific requirements of this part apply to swimming pool basins and fountain basins. They are
also applicable to the volumes surrounding them. In these volumes, in normal use, the risk of electric
shock is increased due to the reduction in the resistance of the human body and its contact with the
earth potential.

For footbaths, the regulations relating to swimming pools must be applied.

NOTE - For balneotherapy rooms:

- when the installation is individual, the rules of part 7-701 are applicable;
- when the installation is collective, the rules of this part apply.

702.2 Definitions

For the purposes of this part, the following definition applies.

702.2.21 Fountain basins

Basins not intended to be occupied by people.

702.3 Determination of general characteristics

702.32 Classification of volumes

These prescriptions are based on the dimensions of the three volumes (examples are given in figures
702A, 702B, 702C, 702D and 702E).

To) Volume 0
This volume includes the interior of the basin, its openings in the walls or the bottom, the footbaths,
the internal part of waterfalls or fountains.
b) Volume 1
This volume is limited by:
- volume 0;
- the vertical plane located 2 m from the edges of the basin;
- ground or surface where people can stand;
- a horizontal plane located 2.5 m above the ground or the surface.
When the swimming pool has diving boards, springboards, starting blocks, a slide or structural
elements intended to be occupied or accessible by people, volume 1 is limited by:

- a vertical plane located 1.5 m around the diving boards, springboards, starting blocks, slides and
structural elements such as accessible sculptures and pools;
- the horizontal plane located 2.5 m above the highest level intended to be occupied by people.

- 356 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

H vs) Volume 2
This volume is limited by
- the exterior vertical plane of volume 1 and the parallel plane located 1.5 m from the latter;
- the ground or surface intended to be occupied by people and a horizontal plane located 2.5 m
above the ground or the surface.

There is no volume 2 for fountains.

702.4 Protection to ensure safety

702.41 Protection against electric shock

702.411.3 Special requirements relating to the various volumes

702.411.3.1 Volumes 0 and 1 of swimming pools

In volumes 0 and 1 of swimming pools, only the protection measure by SELV at a nominal voltage not
higher than 12 V in alternating current or 30 V in direct current is allowed, the safety source being
installed outside volumes 0, 1 and 2 (see also
702.53 and 702.55).

702.411.3.2 Volumes 0 and 1 of the fountains

In volumes 0 and 1 of the fountains, one of the following protective measures must be used:

- SELV (see 414), the security source being installed outside of volumes 0 and 1;
- automatic shutdown of the power supply (see 415.1) by differential device with rated residual-
residual current not exceeding 30 mA;
- electrical separation (see 413.3), the separation source supplying a single device being located
outside of volumes 0 and 1.
702.411.3.3 Volume 2 of swimming pools

NOTE - There is no volume 2 for fountains.

One or more of the following protective measures must be used:

- SELV (see 414), the security source being installed outside of volumes 0, 1 and 2;
- automatic shutdown of the power supply (see 415.1) by differential device with rated residual-
residual current not exceeding 30 mA;
- electrical separation (see 413.3), the separation source supplying a single device being located
outside of volumes 0, 1 and 2.
702.414 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) protection

702.414.1 Requirements for circuits

702.414.1.1 When SELV is used, whatever its nominal voltage, protection against direct contact must
be ensured by barriers or enclosures having at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB in
accordance with NF C 20-010.
The rules for the sizing and protection of SELV lighting circuits are given in guide UTE C 15-559. For
voltage drops, the rules may not be applied for swimming pools for domestic use to the detriment of
the life of equipment and lighting.

- 357 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

H 702.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding

All the conductive elements of volumes 0, 1 and 2 must be connected by equipotentiality conductors,
themselves connected to the protective earth conductors of the equipment located in these volumes.

NOTES -
1 - This connection can be provided in the immediate vicinity of the location, for example on a distribution panel, on an accessory
or on any other equipment.
2 - See also 702.55.1.

Examples of elements to be connected to the additional equipotential bonding:

- floor reinforcements, if they exist;
- metal pipes;
- accessible metal frames;
- the water and air inlet and outlet grids (unless the corresponding pipes are made of insulating
material).

Examples of elements that may not be linked to the additional equipotential bonding:
- diving board ladders;
- the ladders and barriers of the basin;
- the stepping stones.

702.46 Disconnection and control

For public swimming pools, under article L131 of the Municipalities Code and article L 221-6,
paragraph 2, of the Consumer Code, it is prescribed the addition near the swimming pool, of a device
emergency allowing, if necessary, the immediate interruption of the "suction cup" effect and the
release of a bather pressed against the grid.

H 702.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment

702.51 Common rules

702.512 Operating conditions and external influences

702.512.2 External influences

The conditions for external influences are as follows:

Table 702A - Conditions of external influences

VOLUMES 0 1 2

Ambient temperature (AA) 4 4 4

Humidity (AB) 4 4 4

Presence of water (AD) 8 5 2*

Unless otherwise indicated, the class of other conditions of external influences is 1.

- 358 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

H Electrical equipment must have at least the following degrees of protection in accordance with NF C
20-010:
- in volume 0: IPX8;
- in volume 1: IPX5;
- in volume 2: IPX2 for swimming pools inside buildings or IPX5 if this volume
can be subjected to jets of water for cleaning;
IPX5 for swimming pools outside buildings.
For the equivalence between the degrees of protection IP and the marking by water drops, see the
table 702C.
Table 702B summarizes the conditions under which electrical equipment can be used in the different
volumes of swimming pools.

H 702.52 Pipelines

702.522 Selection and implementation according to external influences

702.522.21 Implementation according to volumes

In volumes 0, 1 and 2, the pipes must not have a metallic sheath.

NOTE - Cables should be laid in conduits made of insulating material.

702.522.22 Limitation of pipelines according to volumes

In volumes 0 and 1, the pipes must be limited to those necessary to supply the devices located in
these volumes.

702.522.23 Additional requirements for fountain pipes

For fountains, the following additional requirements must be met:

a) The cables supplying the equipment located in volume 0 must run as far as possible from the edges
of the pool and supply the equipment vertically by the shortest possible route.

H07RN-8F cables are suitable in volume 0.

H b) In volume 1, the cables must be protected against mechanical damage (AG3).

702.522.24 Connection boxes

Connection boxes are not allowed in volumes 0 and 1, with the exception of those located in volume 1
for SELV circuits.

702.53 Apparatus
In volumes 0 and 1, no equipment except SELV, including sockets, must be installed.

In volume 2, sockets and switches are allowed on condition that they are protected by one of the
following measures:
- SELV (see 414), the security source being installed outside of volumes 0, 1 and 2;
- automatic shutdown of the power supply (see 415.1) by differential device with rated residual-
residual current not exceeding 30 mA;
- electrical separation (see article 413.3), the separation source supplying a single device being
located outside of volumes 0, 1 and 2.

- 359 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

702.55 Other equipment

702.55.1 Equipment specific to swimming pools

702.55.1.1 General
In volumes 0 and 1, only devices intended for use in swimming pools may be installed, taking into
account the requirements of 702.55.1 to 702.55.4.
The cleaning equipment for swimming pools is supplied with 12 V alternating current SELV or 30 V
direct current.
A feed pump or other electrical equipment specially used in swimming pools placed in a room or
location adjacent to the swimming pool and accessible by a trap (or door) located on the beach
surrounding the swimming pool, must be protected by one of the measures following:

- SELV limited to 12 V (see 414);

- electrical separation (see 413);
- automatic power cut (411) with the following conditions simultaneously fulfilled:

To) the pump or other equipment is connected to the pool basin:

- or by electrically insulating water pipes;
- or by metallic water pipes connected to the equipotential bonding of the pool basin.

b) the equipment located inside the enclosure is of class II or, if it is of class I and
earthed, is separated from the metallic elements by an additional insulation;

vs) the equipment is only accessible through the hatch (or access door) which can only be
opened using a key or a tool;
d) when the hatch (or access door) is open, all the equipment must have a degree of
protection at least equal to IPX5;
e) the additional equipotential bonding must be carried out according to 702.415.2 ;
f) the power supply of these user equipment must be protected by a differential-
residual current differential protection device rated at most equal to 30 mA or these
user equipment are supplied individually by an isolating transformer in accordance
with 413.3.

The room in which these materials are located is considered to be outside of volumes 1 or 2.

702.55.1.2 Special requirements for low voltage electrical equipment installed in volume 1 of
swimming pools and other basins
Fixed equipment specially intended for use in swimming pools (for example filtration units, counter-
current swimming) supplied with a voltage other than SELV limited to 12 V alternating or 30 V direct,
are admitted in volume 1 with the following prescriptions:

a) Electrical equipment must be located in an enclosure with insulation equivalent to additional

insulation and with IK07 mechanical protection.

b) The requirements of 702.55.1.1 a) to f) apply, and

c) The opening of the hatch specified in 702.55.1.1 d) must cut off all active conductors supplying the
equipment located in the enclosure. The installation of the omnipolar switch as well as the cable
entry must be equivalent to class ll.

- 360 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-702
H Electric heating elements embedded in the ground are allowed subject to:
- either, they are protected by the SELV protection measure (see 414), the security source being
installed outside of volumes 0, 1 and 2; Where
- either, they are covered with a buried metal mesh or a metal sheath earthed or connected to the
equipotential bonding defined in 702.415.2 and that their supply circuits are protected by a
differential-residual current protection device at most equal to 30 mA.

Table 702B - Installation requirements

Because the standards relating to household electrical appliances do not take into account the
marking and tests according to the IP system, the marking of drops of water and the corresponding
tests are accepted with the following equivalences:

Table 702C - Equivalence between IP and Marking

Degree of NF EN 60598-1 NF EN 60335-1

protection (C 71-000) (C 73-800)
LIGHTING DEVICES
ELECTRODOMESTICS
Protected against rain IPX3

Protected against splashing IPX4

water

Protected against jets of water IPX5

Waterproof IPX7

NOTE - Double marking (ie water drops and the IP code) is not allowed because the tests are different.

- 361 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

H 702.55.2 Underwater lighting fixtures

(1)
Luminaires placed in water or in contact with water must comply with the standard .
Lighting devices located behind watertight windows must be installed in such a way that no contact,
intentional or not, can occur between the masses of the luminaire and a conductive part of the
windows.

702.55.3 Electrical equipment for fountains

The electrical equipment in volumes 0 and 1 must be inaccessible, for example by using reinforced
glass or grids that can only be removed using a tool.
(1)
The luminaires in volumes 0 and 1 must be fixed and comply with the standard.
Electric pumps must meet the conditions of external influences (see
702.512.2).

Table 702D - Use of materials in fountains

---------

(1) NF EN 60598-2-18 (C 71-018)

- 362 - 2002
 NF C 15-100
1.5 m 1.5 m

Volume 2
2.5 m
2.5 m

2.0 m 2.0 m
- 363 -

Volume 0

Volume 1

Volume 2

NOTE - The dimensions of the volumes are limited by the fixed walls and walls.

Part 7-702
Figure 702A - Dimensions of volumes for swimming pool basins and footbaths
2002
 NF C 15-100
2.5 m
h

Volume 2
2.5 m

h
- 364 -

2.0 m 2.0 m

Volume 0

Volume 1

Volume 2

Part 7-702
2002

NOTE - The dimensions of the volumes are limited by the fixed walls and walls.

Figure 702B - Dimensions of volumes for above ground basins

 NF C 15-100
Dimensions in meters

r1 = 2
1.5 m r2 = r1 - s1 - s2
r3 = 3.5
r4 = r3 - s1 - s2
r3
r1 2.0 m r5 = r3 - s3- s4

Volume 0
r5
- 365 -

r4 Volume 1
s1
Volume 2

r1
r1
s3 r3

s4
s2

Part 7-702
r5
2002

Figure 702C - Examples of volume dimensions (plan view) with fixed partitions at least 2.5 m high
 NF C 15-100
Dimensions in meters

r1 = 2
1.5 m r2 = r1 - To
r3 = r2 - s2
r4
r4 = 3.5
r2
r5 = r4 - To
r5 r1 2.0 m
r6 = r5 - s2
To r7 = r4 - b
r3
r8 = r7 - s4

Volume 0
s1
Volume 1
- 366 -

Volume 2

r1
r1
s3 b

r4

s4
s2
r8 r7

Part 7-702
2002

Figure 702D - Examples of volume dimensions (plane representation) with fixed partitions
at least 2.5 m high
 NF C 15-100
Dimensions in meters

1.5 2

Water in volume 0

Volume limit 0
1.5

Volume 1

1.5
2.5
2.5

2.5
- 367 -

2
2.5

Washbasin

2.5

Bowl

Part 7-702
2002

Figure 702E - Example of determining the volumes of a fountain

NF C 15-100 Part 7-702

(Blank page)

- 368 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-703

Part 7-703 - Rooms containing sauna radiators

703.1 Application domain .............................................. ................................................. 369

703.2 Definitions ................................................. .................................................. .............. 369

703,414 Very low voltage protection measure ........................................... ............... 369

703.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ........... 369

703.51 Common rules ................................................ .................................................. .369
703.52 Pipelines ................................................. .................................................. ........ 369
703.53 Apparatus ................................................. .................................................. ......... 369

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-703 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.

The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 369 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-703

H
703.1 Scope
The specific requirements of this part apply to rooms in which hot air sauna equipment is installed in
(*)
accordance with the standard in force.
The rules in this part apply to saunas where the humidity is kept high for long periods of time.

Turkish baths are examples of premises to which the rules in this part apply.

H 703.2 Definitions
703.2.09.01 Hot-air sauna: Room or location in which air is heated in high temperature service and
relative humidity is normally low, rising only for a short time when water is poured over the radiator.

703.414 Very low voltage protection measure

703.414.4.7 When SELV is used, protection against direct contact must be ensured, whatever the
nominal voltage, by means of barriers or enclosures having at least the degree of protection IP2X or
IPXXB.

703.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment

703.51 Common rules

703.512.2 Electrical equipment must have at least IP24 degrees of protection. Four zones are defined
as indicated in thefigure 703A.
- in zone 1, only equipment belonging to radiators for saunas is allowed;
- in zone 2, no special requirements are necessary from the point of view of the material's resistance
to heat;
- in zone 3, the equipment must be able to withstand a temperature of 125 ° C;
- in zone 4, only the following are installed:
• luminaires mounted in such a way as to prevent them from overheating,

• control devices for sauna radiators (thermostats and temperature limiters),

• the pipes connected to them.

Heat resistance should be as prescribed for zone 3.

703.52 Pipelines
The pipes must have insulation meeting the requirements of article
412.2 and must not have any metallic coating.

703.53 Apparatus
Equipment not incorporated in the radiator must be placed outside the room.

(*) NF EN 60335-2-53 (C 73-823)

- 370 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-703

Figure 703A - Ambient temperature zones

______________

- 371 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-703

(Blank page)

- 372 - 2002
Translated from French to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.com

NF C 15-100 Part 7-704

Part 7-704 - Site installations

704.1 Application domain .............................................. ................................................. 373

704.3 Determination of general characteristics .............................................. ............. 374

704,313 Food ................................................. .................................................. ....... 374
704.35 Security installations ............................................... ............................................ 374
704,351 Safety lighting ............................................... .............................................. 374
704,352 Other safety circuits .............................................. ....................................... 375

704.41 Protection against electric shock ............................................. ....................... 375

704.43 Over-current protection .............................................. ............................. 375
704,433 Overload protection .............................................. .............................. 376
704,434 Short-circuit protection ............................................ ........................... 376

704.5 Choice and implementation of materials ........................................... ............................ 376

704.51 Common rules ................................................ .................................................. .376
704,512 Operating conditions and classification of external influences ................. 376
704.52 Pipelines ................................................. .................................................. ........ 376
704,525 Voltage drops in installations ............................................ .................... 377
704,536 Control and isolating devices ............................................ ........... 377

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-704 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.

The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 373 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-704

Useful information (safety sheets, practical guides, etc.) can be obtained from the OPPBTP (Professional
Organization for the Prevention of Building and Public Works).

H 704.1 Scope
The specific requirements of this part apply to temporary installations intended:

- construction work for new buildings;

- repair, modification, extension or demolition of existing buildings;

- to public works;
- earthworks;
- and similar works.

The parts of buildings which undergo transformations such as extensions, major repairs or
demolitions, are considered as building sites during the duration of the corresponding works, insofar
as these works require the realization of a temporary installation.

The requirements of this part are not applicable to the electrical installations of surface mines and
quarries.
The decree of 23 September 1991 supplementing the general regulations for extractive industries
(creating a title entitled Electricity) is applicable to mines and quarries.
H The rules of this part are not applicable to the administrative premises of construction sites (for
example offices, changing rooms, meeting rooms, canteens, restaurants, dormitories, sanitary rooms,
etc.) for which the general rules of titles 1 to 6 of this present standard are applicable.

NOTE - For special situations, more stringent requirements apply, for example part 7- 706 for confined conductive enclosures.

The operation of worksites subjects electrical equipment to very severe conditions, and it is important
that the equipment used can withstand the corresponding stresses.
Special attention is drawn to the importance of protective measures against direct and indirect contact
and to the need for frequent checks.
The materials used in the site installations are chosen so as to meet the following conditions:

- flexibility of use allowing their successive use in different sites;

- easy replacement of elements;
- ease of implementation, transport and storage;
- appropriate arrangements to ensure that safety is maintained under the intended conditions of
use;
- the access possibilities in normal operation, the operating maneuvers to be able to be carried out:

• for ordinary maneuvers, such as connecting a user device to a socket, by uninformed

persons (BA 1);
• for all other operations, such as the replacement of fuses, without access to live parts, by
trained persons (BA 4);
• for operations and maneuvers requiring access to active parts, only by qualified persons (BA
5).

H 704.1.5 On construction sites, fixed installations are limited to the assembly comprising the general
control unit and the main protection devices (see 704-536).

NOTE - This set of equipment is considered to be the interface between the power supply and the site installation.

Downstream installations are considered mobile installations, with the exception of those parts which
are designed in accordance with the rules of the part 52.

- 374 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-704

704.3 Determination of general characteristics

704.312.2 Types of earth connection diagrams

The TT and TN-S schemes are preferably used in site installations.

The TN-C diagram can be used in the fixed part of the installations, that is to say in the part between
the origin of the installation and the assembly comprising the general control unit and the protection
devices. main.
The IT scheme can be used when it is necessary to avoid breaking at the first earth fault in special cases
and for part of an installation (for example, supplying a network of groundwater drawdown pumps).
water, supply of ventilation fans).
But this scheme involves heavy constraints: protection of the neutral conductor, limitation of the length
of pipes for protection at the second fault; in addition, the insulation must be monitored by a
permanent insulation monitor and the signaling of a first fault requires the search and rapid
elimination of this fault.

H 704.313 Power
All equipment must be identified according to the source which supplies it and must only include
elements belonging to a single installation, except for replacement power supply, signaling or control
circuits.
NOTE - The same site can be served from several power supplies, including generator groups.

704.35 Security installations

Safety installations are installed whenever there is a risk that the safety of persons may be
compromised by the possible failure of the normal power supply to a circuit or device.

704.351 Emergency lighting

When prescribed by a text, emergency lighting must enable the safety measures required by the failure
of normal lighting to be taken, taking into account the particularities of the site.

In particular, it must allow the evacuation of personnel and the application of instructions.
In particular, consideration should be given to installing this lighting in particularly dark areas such as
the central core of high buildings or underground parking levels.

Security lighting must be electric. It can be

insured:
- by autonomous blocks (solution strongly recommended) in accordance with the standards
(1)
concerning them;
- by an installation powered by an accumulator battery, the autonomous operating time being at
least one hour;
- by accumulator or battery-powered lamps (in the case of limited staff), the operating time being at
least one hour;
- by thermal motor-generator units capable of ensuring the correct supply of the emergency lighting
in a time not exceeding 15 seconds.
The emergency lighting can be reinforced by additional elements such as reflectors, reflector plates.

Light points must be used to mark out the traffic lanes necessary for the evacuation of personnel. The
evacuation route is, if necessary, indicated by opaque or transparent luminous panels bearing in a very
visible way in white on a green background the indications "exit" or "emergency exit" or an arrow
indicating the direction of the exit.

(1) NF C 71-800, NF C 71-801 and NF C 71-805

- 375 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-704

704.352 Other safety circuits

VS
Circuits supplying equipment such as lift or exhaust pumps, ventilation fans, etc. whose continuity of
service is essential, their shutdown causing serious risks of drowning and suffocation to personnel, are
to be treated as safety circuits.

These circuits are designed in such a way that protection is ensured without automatically cutting off the
power supply on the first fault and must be able to be supplied with power in the event of a failure of the
normal power supply and according to the powers:
- by generating sets capable of supplying the safety circuits with a time of at most 15 seconds;

- by accumulator batteries associated with a rectifier charger (receivers supplied with direct current)
or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (receivers supplied with alternating current).

H 704.41 Protection against electric shock

704.411.1 General
A high sensitivity RCD (I∆not ≤ 30 mA) must be installed upstream of any circuit intended to supply mobile
or portable devices (circuits supplying sockets).

Whatever protection measures are taken (choice and implementation of equipment, maintenance,
upkeep, verification), the following risks cannot be neglected:
- direct contact following degradation of insulation;
- direct contact as a result of equipment failure or carelessness of persons;
- indirect contact with a mass not connected to an earth electrode following a rupture or poor
continuity of the protective conductor.

H 704.411.1.1 Protection against direct contact

The protective measures against direct contact used are:
- protection by isolation of active parts (annex A.1 in 4-41);
- protection by means of barriers or envelopes (annex A.2 in 4-41).

704.411.1.2 Protective measures

a) SELV (414) can be used in all circumstances and especially when working conditions are severe, for
example in cramped conductive enclosures for powering portable tools, for grinding in wet
environments or for heating concrete.

PELV (414) can be used for heating concrete.

b) The protective measure by using class II equipment or by equivalent insulation (412) is used for
equipment for which this protective measure is carried out by construction.

This protective measure is recommended for portable hand tools. Attention is drawn to the fact
that portable tools do not always have a sufficient degree of protection for their use in locations
subject to splashing water (IPX4).

c) The protective measure by electrical separation (413) is limited to the supply of one device per
transformer.

704.43 Over-current protection

The overcurrent protection devices are preferably circuit breakers which avoid setting and replacement
errors and facilitate operation.

- 376 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-704

704.433 Overload protection

In principle, any circuit should be protected against overloads. Special arrangements must be made for
circuits supplying lifting devices, in order to avoid unwanted tripping.

H 704.434 Short-circuit protection

The site assembly chosen must be such that the protection devices of each circuit have a breaking
capacity at least equal to the presumed short-circuit current at the point where it is installed.

In order to deal with any eventuality (displacement, permutation, various modifications, etc.), it is
advisable to choose on the same site worksite assemblies having the same resistance to short-circuit
currents, thus allowing them to be installed in n ' any location on the job site.

704.5 Choice and installation of equipment

704.51 Common rules

(2)
704.511.1 Site assemblies must comply with the requirements of the standard or with article 558 of
this standard.

704.512 Operating conditions and classification of external influences

704.512.2 Choice and installation of equipment according to external influences

Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum conditions for external influences likely to be encountered in
worksite installations are as follows:

AA ambient temperature: - 5, + 40 °VS (AA4)

AD presence of water: splashing water (AD4)
AE presence of solid bodies: very small (AE3)
AG mechanical shocks: significant vibrations: (AG3)
Ah medium (AH2)

The equipment must have the minimum degrees of protection IP44 and IK08.

H 704.52 Pipelines

704.522.8.1.8 To avoid damaging the cables, they must not be laid in pedestrian or vehicle crossings. If
such installation is necessary, special protection against mechanical damage and against contact with
machinery must be provided.

When flexible cables are used, these must be of type 07 RN-F or 07 BN4-F. Rigid cables must have
equivalent mechanical strength.

(2) NF EN 60439-4 (C 63-424)

- 377 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-704

H 704.525 Voltage drops in installations

Voltage drops greater than the limits set for building installations may be permitted provided that they
do not interfere with the operation of the equipment, in particular when starting the motors.

704.536 Control and disconnection devices

An apparatus assembly must be capable of being cut and severed by a device located inside the
assembly.
Emergency cut-off devices must be provided on the power supply to all user equipment.

Power supply disconnecting devices must be able to be locked in the open position (see 462.2) (for
example by locking or arrangement in a locked envelope).

Each circuit must be supplied with power from distribution assemblies, each assembly comprising:

- overcurrent protection devices;

- protection devices against indirect contact;
- outlets, if necessary.
Safety and replacement power supplies must be connected by devices so that any interconnection
between the different power supplies is not possible.

704.542.2 Earth connection

When the earthing of buildings under construction is carried out by a bottom excavation loop, which is
the mandatory solution for any building intended to house workplaces (including collective housing
buildings), this earth connection must be used by the site companies, as soon as it is carried out by the
main construction company intervening first on the site.

Temporary earth connections should be created if electrical devices are used before the existence of
the bottom digging loop.

704.555.1 Power outlets

The socket-outlets must comply either with standard NF EN 60309-1 (C 63-300) or with standard NF C
61-303.
The socket-outlets must be:
- either inside the sets described in 704.511.1 ;
- or outside on the envelopes (cabinets or boxes) of these sets.

In accordance with the decree of 14/11/88, the combination or separation of the two components of
the sockets of the connectors and extensions with an admissible current greater than 32 A must only
be possible without load.

______________

- 378 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-705

Part 7-705 - Electrical installations in agricultural establishments

705.1 Application domain .............................................. ................................................. 379

705.353 Safety or replacement source ............................................ .................... 379

705.4 Protection to ensure safety ............................................. ............................... 379

705.41 Protection against electric shock ............................................. ....................... 379
705.42 Protection against fire, burns and explosion ...................................... ...... 379
705,422 Additional fire protection rules ........................................ 379
705,443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due
maneuvers ............................................... .................................................. .379

705.5 Choice and implementation of materials ........................................... ............................ 380

705.51 Common rules ................................................ .................................................. .380
705,536 Disconnection and control devices ............................................ ........... 380
705.55 Other materials ................................................ .................................................. .... 380

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-705 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.

The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 379 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-705

H 705.1 Scope
The specific requirements of this part apply to all parts of the fixed installations of agricultural and
horticultural establishments located outdoors and indoors and to places where farm animals are kept
(such as stables, barns , henhouses, pigsties, premises for the preparation of animal feed, granaries,
barns for hay, straw and fertilizers, etc.).

The residential accommodation facilities of such establishments are not subject to the rules of this Part,
but to the part 7-771.

In the event of an incident, the continuity of service of the functions vital to the survival of the animals should
be considered.

H 705.353 Safety or replacement source

For intensive animal husbandry (industrial animal production), the possible need for a replacement
source should be taken into account.

705.4 Protection to ensure safety

705.41 Protection against electric shock

705,414 When SELV or PELV is used, protection against direct contact must be ensured by means of
barriers or enclosures having at least the degree of protection IP2X or IPXXB, whatever the nominal
voltage.

705.415.1 Circuits supplying sockets, whatever their rated current, must be protected by differential
devices whose rated differential-residual current is not greater than 30 mA.

705.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding

In the rooms where the animals are located, an additional equipotential bonding must connect all the
masses and all the conductive elements which can be touched by the animals. All conductive floors
must have metal reinforcements connected to the additional equipotential bonding.

H 705.42 Protection against fire, burns and explosion

705.422 Additional fire protection rules

In premises or locations at risk of fire (BE2), protection must be ensured by RCDs with a rated
differential-residual current at most equal to 300 mA.
These premises or locations are defined in the UTE C 15-103 guide.
H When continuity of service is required, these devices must be either type S or delayed.

Heating devices used in animal rearing rooms must be fixed and kept at an appropriate distance from
animals and combustible materials to avoid any risk of burns to animals or of fire.

For radiant appliances, the distance must be at least 0.5 m, unless a greater distance is specified by the
manufacturer of the appliance in the instruction manual.

705.443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to maneuvers

When lightning protection is not required by 443, the use of surge arresters is nevertheless
recommended.

- 380 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-705

705.5 Choice and installation of equipment

705.51 Common rules

705,512 Electrical equipment must have at least the degrees of protection as indicated in guide UTE C
15-103.

H 705.536 Disconnection and control devices

Emergency cut-off devices must not be placed in places accessible by animals or to which access would
be prevented by animals.

705.55 Other equipment

When electric fences are placed in the vicinity of overhead power lines, appropriate distances must be
observed to limit induced currents.
The rules for implementing electric fences are covered by standard NF EN 60335-2- 76 (C 73-876).

______________

- 381 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-705

(Blank page)

- 382 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-706

Part 7-706 - Conductive cramped enclosures

706.1 Application domain .............................................. ................................................. 383

706.4 Protection to ensure safety ............................................. ............................... 383

______________

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-706 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 383 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-706

H 706.1 Scope
The specific requirements of this section apply to installations of confined conductive enclosures
(locations BC4) and to the power supply of devices inside these enclosures.

A cramped conductive enclosure is a room or work place whose walls are essentially made up of
metallic or conductive parts, inside which a person can come into contact, on a large part of his body,
with the surrounding conductive parts and of which the smallness limits the possibilities of
interrupting this contact
Examples of conductive enclosures are boilers, all metal tanks whose dimensions are such that the
people who enter them for their repair or maintenance are continually in contact with the walls.

In general, it suffices that one dimension of the enclosure is particularly small - for example a crawl
space or a garage pit - so that the freedom of movement of people is restricted and that the rules
relating to conductive enclosures are applicable.

The requirements of this part do not apply to places in which people can move freely to work, enter or
leave them, without physical constraint.

They apply to the installation of fixed equipment in cramped conductive enclosures and to the supply
of portable equipment in these enclosures.

H 706.4 Protection to ensure safety

706.410.3 General
Only the following protective measures are permitted:
a) for powering portable tools and portable measuring devices:
- either SELV (414);
- either the electrical separation of the circuits limited to the supply of a single device (413).

The electrical equipment is preferably of class II; if they are of class I, their mass and all the conductive
elements constituting the conductive enclosure are interconnected.

b) for the power supply of portable lamps:

- the SELV (414);
A fluorescent luminaire with a built-in step-up transformer supplied with SELV is also allowed.

H c) For the supply of fixed equipment:

- either the automatic cut-off of the power supply (411); an additional equipotential bonding (
415.2) must connect the masses of fixed equipment and the conductive parts of the
enclosure;
- or the SELV (article 414);
- either the electrical separation of the circuits limited to the supply of a single device (413);

- either a differential protection device having a rated differential-residual current at most

equal to 30 mA protecting class II equipment or having equivalent insulation, provided that
this equipment has an adequate degree of protection.

When an electrical equipment has a drive motor located outside the enclosure, this motor may be
subject to other protective measures, provided that the device is driven by means of a flexible shaft or
other means of transmission of motive force meeting the protection by additional insulation
according to the article 412.

- 384 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-706

H Safety sources and separation sources must be installed outside the cramped conductive enclosure,
unless they are part of the fixed installation inside the cramped conductive enclosure under
conditions of vs).

706.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding

If for certain equipment, such as measuring or control devices, it is necessary to have a functional
earth connection, an equipotential bonding must connect all the masses, all the conductive elements
inside the conductive enclosure. and the functional earth.

_________________

- 385 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-706

(Blank page)

- 386 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708

Part 7-708 - Electrical installations of caravan parks

708.1 Application domain .............................................. ................................................. 387

708.2 Definitions ................................................. .................................................. .............. 387

708.3 Main Features ................................................ ........................................ 387

708.31 Standardized voltages ................................................ .............................................. 387

708.41 Protection against electric shock ............................................. ....................... 388

708.5 Choice and implementation of materials ........................................... ............................ 388

708.51 External influences ................................................ ................................................. 388
708.52 Pipelines ................................................. .................................................. ........ 388
708.53 Apparatus ................................................. .................................................. ......... 388
708,530 General and common rules .............................................. .............................. 388

Annex - (informative) - Example of instruction for connecting the caravan to the power supply of the
caravan park .................................................. ..................................391

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-708 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 387 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-708

H 708.1 Scope

The specific requirements of this part apply to those parts of the electrical installations of caravan
parks which provide the possibilities of powering recreational vehicles or tents.

They do not apply to indoor electrical installations of mobile leisure homes, recreational vehicles,
mobile or transportable units.
NOTES -
1 - For installations in caravans and motorized caravans, operating with 12 V direct current, the standards EN 1648-1 and EN
1648-2 apply.
2 - For installations in caravans and motorized caravans, operating above 12 V direct current, the NF S 56-200 standard applies.

708.2 Definitions

708.2.1 Recreational vehicle

Unit equipped for housing for temporary or seasonal occupation and able to meet the requirements
for the construction and use of road vehicles.

708.2.1.1 Caravan
Towed leisure vehicle, used for tourism, and capable of meeting the requirements for the
construction and use of road vehicles.

708.2.1.2 Motor caravan (motorhome)

Self-propelled leisure vehicle used for tourism and capable of meeting the requirements for the
construction and use of road vehicles.

NOTE - The motorized caravan is either adapted from a production series of vehicles, or designed and built on an existing
chassis, with or without driver's cab, the housing being fixed or removable.

708.2.1.3 Leisure mobile home

Transportable leisure vehicle which includes means of movement but does not meet the
requirements for the construction and use of road vehicles.

708.2.2 Caravan site

Floor location intended for the installation of a vehicle equipped for recreation.

708.2.3 Caravan park

Land area that contains several caravan sites.

708.2.4 Caravan power supply point

Equipment which comprises the means of connection and disconnection of the power cables of
leisure vehicles with an electrical supply network.

708.3 General characteristics

708.31 Standard voltages

The nominal voltage of the power supply system for recreational vehicles must not exceed 230 V for
single-phase alternating current or 400 V for three-phase alternating current.

- 388 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-708

H 708.41 Protection against electric shock

708.411.4 In the case of a TN scheme, only the TN-S scheme should be used.The IT
scheme is not recommended.

H 708.415.1 Additional protection by residual differential current devices

The socket-outlets must be protected by a residual current device having a rated residual current not
exceeding 30 mA.

708.5 Choice and installation of equipment

708.51 External influences

The equipment installed in the caravan parks must meet the following conditions of external
influences:
- presence of water: AD4 (water splashes), IPX4;
- presence of foreign bodies: AE2 (small objects), IP3X;
- mechanical stresses (shocks): AG3 (high), IK08.

708.52 Pipelines
The following pipes are suitable for the circuits supplying the power supply points of the caravans:

- underground pipes;
- overhead lines.

NOTE - It is recommended that the power supply to the connection points of recreational vehicles be made through buried pipes.

708.529.5 Buried pipelines

Buried pipelines must meet the requirements of 529.5.
Buried pipes must, unless they include additional mechanical protection, be placed outside any
caravan site or any surface where tent poles or anchor hooks may be installed.

708.529.7 Overhead lines

All overhead conductors must be insulated.

Poles and other overhead line supports must be placed or protected so that they cannot be damaged
by any foreseeable movement of vehicles.
Overhead lines must be at a height above the ground of 6 m or more in all places where vehicles can
move and 3.5 m in other places.

708.53 Apparatus

708.530 General and common rules

708.530.1 The power supply point should be placed at the edge of the pitch and no more than 20 m
from the connection point of the RV or tent.

- 389 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-708

H 708.530.2 Sockets

708.530.2.1 Each socket outlet and its casing constituting a part of the
(1)
power supply point must comply with the standard and meet at least the degree of protection IP44.

708.530.2.2 The socket-outlets must be placed at a height of between 0.50 m and 1.50 m between the
axis of the cells and the floor. In special cases due to environmental conditions, the maximum height
may be greater than 1.5 m.

708.530.2.3 The rated current of the socket-outlets must correspond to the maximum demand and be
at least 16 A.

708.530.2.4 At least one socket outlet must be provided for the connection of any recreational vehicle.

708.530.3 A socket-outlet should only power one caravan.

At least socket outlets conforming to the standard should be provided. (1) of the following minimum
characteristics:

Single-phase socket-outlets:
- Rated voltage: 200-250 V
- Rated current: 16 A
- Time position: 6 h
- Number of poles: 2 and one earth contact
- Construction: IP44 and IK08 minimum

In addition, socket outlets with the following characteristics can be provided:

- Single-phase socket-outlets:
- Rated voltage: 200-250 V
- Rated current: 32 A
- Time position: 6 h
- Number of poles: 2 and one earth contact
- Construction: IP44 and IK08 minimum

- Three-phase socket-outlets:
- Rated voltage: 346-415 V
- Rated current: 32 A
- Time position: 6 h
- Number of poles: 4 and one earth contact
- Construction: IP44 and IK08 minimum

708.530.4 A maximum of four outlet sockets can be grouped together in an enclosure.

708.531.1 Each socket-outlet must be individually protected by a differential current device having a
rated differential-residual current not exceeding 30 mA.

708,533 Over-current protection

Each socket outlet must be individually protected against overcurrent.

(1) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)

- 390 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-708

708.559 Operating materials

708.559.1 Connecting the caravan

The caravan is often supplied with power from terminals with both sockets and water taps.

The risks which result from the proximity of the socket outlets and the water supply, concern not only
the possibility of simultaneous contact but the possibilities of watering the socket outlets and making
the ground wet nearby. In fact, these risks are taken into consideration when choosing the degree of
protection of the socket-outlets (IPX4 corresponding to condition AD4).

However, it is desirable that the electrical equipment and the water distribution taps are suitably
separated so as to avoid any accidental and simultaneous contact between the first and the second.

In addition, it is recommended that the terminals themselves be of insulating material.

H 708.559.1.1 Components of the connection device

The means of connection between the socket-outlet of the caravan site and the leisure vehicle must
consist of:
(2)
- of a plug as specified by the standard;
- a flexible cable of the H07 RN-F type or equivalent comprising a protective conductor, identified
according to HD 308;
- a connector as specified by the standard (2).

708.559.1.2 Cable length

The cable length should not exceed 25 m. The cable must not have intermediate connections along its
entire length.

708.559.1.3 Cable cross section

For a 16 A socket-outlet, the minimum section is 2.5 mm2. For a 32 A socket outlet, the
minimum section is 6 mm2.
H 708.559.1.4 Installation of cables
The cables are installed in such a way that they are not damaged by stress or crushing.

708.559.1.5 User information

The campsite operator has the obligation to inform the user about the nature of the current delivered
and the possibilities of connecting the caravan (see Appendix).

(2) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)

- 391 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-708

Appendix - (informative) - Example of instruction for connecting the

caravan on feeding the caravan park

It is recommended that the campsite director provide each caravan user intending to connect to the
campsite power supply with a clear and up-to-date instruction manual and affix, at each power point,
a copy to up to date of this instruction manual easily readable and protected against bad weather.

This instruction manual must include, at least, the following information:

DIRECT CONNECTION TO POWER SUPPLY INSTRUCTIONS

OF THE CARAVAN PARK

This campsite provides you with a direct connection and earthing to the campsite power supply for
your caravan.

General

a) The power supply for this campsite is .... * V, ...... * Hz [normally 230 V 50 Hz single phase
(3)
or 400 V 50 Hz three-phase], supplied by sockets conforming to the standard, 6 o'clock position (9
o'clock for three-phase in the case of an IT system).

b) A single flexible connection cable must be connected to any socket.

c) The flexible connection cable must be of a single length and not exceed 25 m. It is of the HO7-RNF
type:
- 3G2.5 for a 16 A socket-outlet;
- 3G6 or 5G6 for a 32 A socket-outlet.

d) Any repair or modification is dangerous for uninformed persons. In case of difficulty, call
the campsite management.

At the arrival

a) Cut off the power supply to all devices located in the caravan.

b) Connect the flexible cable first to the connection box of the caravan, then to the campsite socket.

Before leaving

a) Switch off the power supply to all devices in the caravan.

b) First disconnect the flexible cable from the campsite socket, then from the caravan box.

c) Replace the protective cover of the caravan connection box.

d) Coil the connection cable and store it in a dry place where it will not be damaged.

* To be completed by the campsite director.

(3) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)

- 392 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709

Part 7-709 - Electrical installations of marinas

709.1 Application domain .............................................. ................................................. 393

709.2 Definitions ................................................. .................................................. .............. 393

709.3 Determination of general characteristics .............................................. ............. 393

709,313 Nominal supply voltages ............................................. ........................... 393

709.41 Protection against electric shock ............................................. ....................... 393

709.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ........... 393

709.51 External influences ................................................ ................................................. 393
709.52 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ........ 394
709.53 Apparatus ................................................. .................................................. ......... 394
709,530 General and common rules .............................................. .............................. 394
709,531 Fault current protection devices .......................................... 395
709,533 Overcurrent protection devices ............................................ ........ 395
709,559 Equipment for use .............................................. ............................................... 395

Annex - (informative) - Example of instruction for connecting the boat

pleasure craft on the port supply .................................................. ..............................396

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-709 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 393 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-709

H
709.1 Scope
The requirements of this section are applicable to the electrical installation of marinas for supplying
pleasure craft with a length less than or equal to 24 m.

NOTE - Such installations are characterized by the risk of corrosion, the presence of water, movement of structures, mechanical
damage and the increased risk of electric shock due to reduced resistance of the human body and contact of the body with it. the
potential of the earth.

709.2 Definitions

709.2.1 Pleasure craft

Any boat, vessel, yacht, houseboat or motorized floating unit used exclusively for sports and
recreation.

709.2.2 Marina

Installation for the mooring of pleasure boats with piers, jetties and fixed docks or pontoons allowing
the mooring of more than one pleasure boat.

709.2.3 Mooring point

A place where a boat can get wet.

709.3 Determination of general characteristics

709.313 Nominal supply voltages

The nominal voltage of installations supplying pleasure craft must not exceed 230 V in single-phase
alternating current or 400 V in three-phase alternating current.

709.41 Protection against electric shock

709.411.4 In the case of a TN scheme, only the TN-S scheme should be used.

The IT scheme is not recommended.

H 709.415.1 Additional protection by differential-residual current devices

The socket-outlets must be protected by a differential-residual current device having a rated
differential-residual current not exceeding 30 mA.

709.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment

709.51 External influences

Equipment installed on and above piers, wharfs, quays or pontoons must meet the following
conditions of external influences:

Presence of water AD4 (water jets) AD5 IPX4

(water jets) IPX5
AD6 (Water packages) IPX6

NOTE - The appropriate code will be chosen based on actual external influences.

Presence of foreign bodies AE3 (Small objects), IP4X

Presence of corrosive or polluting substances AF3 (Atmospheric)
Mechanical stress (shocks) AG3 (Important), IK08

- 394 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-709

H 709.52 Selection and installation of electrical equipment

709.52.1 Marinas pipelines

The general rules of part 52 of NF C 15-100 are applicable taking into account the conditions of
external influences (709.51).

709.52.1.1 The following pipes must not be used:

- overhead lines,
- insulated conductors in conduits,
- cables with aluminum conductors.

709.52.1.2 Cables should be selected and installed in such a way that mechanical damage due to tides
and other movements of floating structures is avoided. Ducts must be installed to allow water to flow
through slopes and / or drain holes.

709.53 Apparatus

709.530 General and common rules

709.530.1 Enclosures with sockets for supplying power to pleasure craft should be located as close as
possible to the mooring points to be supplied.

NOTES -
1 - The socket-outlets for supplying boats can be installed in boxes separate from the distribution panel.

2 - If the socket outlets are installed in a distribution panel, this panel must be located as close as possible to the mooring points
to be supplied.

709.530.2 Distribution boards and socket outlets installed outdoors must have the minimum degrees
of protection IP44 and IK08. Enclosures must resist corrosion.

When distribution boards and associated outlets are installed on floating installations or jetties, they
must be fixed at least 0.3 m above the gangway.

709.530.3 An outlet should only power a pleasure craft.

(1)
Socket outlets conforming to the following minimum specifications should be provided: of

Single-phase socket-outlets:
- Rated voltage: 200-250 V
- Rated current: 16 A
- Time position: 6 h
- Number of poles: 2 and one earth contact
- Construction: IP44 and IK08 minimum

In addition, socket outlets with the following characteristics can be provided:

- Single-phase socket-outlets:
- Rated voltage: 200-250 V
- Rated current: 32 A
- Time position: 6 h
- Number of poles: 2 and one earth contact
- Construction: IP44 and IK08 minimum

(1) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)

- 395 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-709

H - Three-phase socket-outlets:
- Rated voltage: 346-415 V
- Rated current: 32 A
- Time position: 6 h
- Number of poles: 4 and one earth contact
- Construction: IP44 and IK08 minimum

709.530.4 A maximum of four outlet sockets can be grouped together in an enclosure.

709.531 Fault current protection devices

709.531.2 Differential-residual current devices

The socket-outlets must be individually protected by a differential-residual current device with a rated
differential-residual current not exceeding 30 mA.

709.533 Overcurrent protection devices

Each socket outlet must be individually protected against overcurrent.

709.559 Operating materials

709.559.1 Connection of pleasure craft

709.559.1.1 Components of the connection device

The connection device of the pleasure boat consists of:

- a plug with a contact connected to the protective conductor having the characteristics indicated in
709.530.2 ;

- a flexible cable of the H07 RN-F type or equivalent comprising a protective conductor,
permanently connected to the pleasure boat, or to a connector having the characteristics
indicated in 709.530.3.

709.559.1.2 Cable length

The cable length should not exceed 25 m. The cable must not have intermediate connections along its
entire length.

709.559.1.3 Cable cross section

For a 16 A socket-outlet, the minimum section is 2.5 mm2. For a 32 A socket outlet, the
minimum section is 6 mm2.

709.559.1.4 Installation of cables

The cables are installed so that they are not:

- moved by the movements of the pleasure craft, or

- damaged by friction, tension or crushing.

Unless they are installed in plastic conduits, ducts, stringers or the like, they should be secured by
clamps or ties at intervals of approximately 0.3 m. They must be installed away from fuel tanks,
exhaust pipes and heat sources.

709.559.1.5 User information

The operator of the marina has the obligation to inform the user of the nature of the current
delivered and the possibilities of connecting the pleasure craft (see Appendix).

- 396 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-709

H
Annex - (informative) - Example of instruction for connection
of the pleasure boat on the harbor supply

It is recommended that the port manager provide each boat user intending to connect to the marina
supply with a clear and up-to-date instruction manual and affix a copy at each supply point. up-to-
date with these easy-to-read and weatherproof instructions.

This instruction manual must include, at least, the following information:

ANCHORING INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIRECT CONNECTION

TO THE DOCK SUPPLY

This marina puts at your disposal for your pleasure boat a direct connection and a grounding to the
supply of the quay.
General
a) Unless you have an on-board isolation transformer to separate your boat's electrical system from
shore power, corrosion (electrolysis) can damage your boat or neighboring boats.

b) The power supply for this marina is .... * V, ...... * Hz [normally 230 V 50 Hz single phase
(2)
or 400 V 50 Hz three-phase], supplied by sockets conforming to the standard, 6 o'clock position (9
o'clock for three-phase in the case of an IT system).
c) Measures must be taken to prevent the service cable from falling into the water in the event of
disconnection.
d) A single flexible connection cable must be connected to any socket.
e) The flexible connection cable must be of a single length and not exceed 25 m. It is of the HO7-RNF
type:
- 3G2.5 for a 16 A socket-outlet;
- 3G6 or 5G6 for a 32 A socket-outlet.
f) The ingress of moisture, dust or salt into the on-board connection box can cause danger. Carefully
examine, clean and dry the outlet before making the connection to shore power.

g) Any repair or modification is dangerous for uninformed persons. In case of difficulty, call
the port management.

At the arrival

a) Cut off the power supply to all on-board devices.

b) Connect the flexible cable first to the on-board box, then to the dock socket.

Before fitting

a) Cut off the power supply to all on-board devices.

b) First disconnect the flexible cable from the shore power socket, then from the on-board box.
c) Replace the protective cover of the on-board connection box to prevent water ingress.

d) Coil the connection cable and store it in a dry place where it will not be damaged.

* To be completed by the port manager.

(2) NF EN 60309-2 (C 63-310)

- 397 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-709

(Blank page)

- 398 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-711

Part 7-711 - Temporary electrical installations of structures, barracks,

stands in fairgrounds, markets, parks,
leisure, circuses and places of exhibitions or shows

711.1 Application domain .............................................. .................................................. 399

711.3 Determination of general characteristics .............................................. .............. 399

711.4 Protection to ensure safety ............................................. ................................ 399

711.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ............ 400

711.52 Pipelines ................................................. .................................................. ........ 400
711.55 Other materials ................................................ .................................................. ..... 400

711.6 Verification ................................................. .................................................. ............. 401

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-711 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 399 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-711

VS 711.1 Scope
The specific requirements of this part apply to temporary electrical installations of marquees, tents,
structures, barracks, stands that are found in locations or enclosures such as fairgrounds, markets,
amusement parks, circuses, venues. 'exhibitions or shows.

Unless otherwise specified, this part is not applicable to machinery and equipment for which there are
requirements in the relevant standards, such as the standard relating to
(1)
machine safety.

This part deals with the electrical installation in stands, marquees, etc., the fixed power supply for this
installation having to comply with the general rules of this standard.

If the temporary installations covered by this part include mobile or transportable units in which an
installation or part of an electrical installation is incorporated, these units must comply with the
provisions of the part 7-717.

711.3 Determination of general characteristics

VS
711.313 Food
The nominal supply voltage of temporary electrical installations must not exceed 230/400 V in
alternating current.

711.4 Protection to ensure safety

711.411 Protective measure by automatic power cut-off

711.411.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact

711.411.3.2 Automatic power supply cut-off
At the origin of the installation and at the head of the non-terminal circuits, automatic cut-off is ensured
by medium sensitivity residual current devices, delayed or of type S, in order to ensure selectivity with
the differential devices protecting the terminal circuits (see 711.415.1).

711.411.4 TN diagram
If the earth connection scheme is TN, only the TN-S scheme should be used.

711.411.6 IT diagram
The IT earth connection diagram can only be used if it is not possible to choose another diagram.

However, the IT scheme can be used for DC applications.

-------
(1) NF EN 60204-1 (C 79-130)

- 400 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-711

VS 711.415.1 Supplementary protection

Whatever the earth connection diagram, all terminal circuits must be protected by an RCD of rated
differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA, with the exception of circuits supplying high power
motors which may be protected. by medium sensitivity devices of type S or not deliberately delayed.

In the case of an IT scheme, one RCD per circuit must be provided.

711.415.2 Additional equipotential bonding

In places used for animals, an additional equipotential bonding must connect all the masses and
conductive elements which can be touched simultaneously by the animals.

711.421 General fire protection rules

Illuminated display cases and display panels shall be made of materials with suitable heat resistance,
mechanical strength, electrical insulation and ventilation, taking into account the combustibility of
objects exposed to the heat given off by the illumination. .

Stalls with a concentration of electrical equipment, lighting or lamps likely to emit excessive heat must
be equipped with roofs made of M0, M1 or M2 materials, suitably ventilated.

711.422.1.13 Motors controlled automatically or remotely, or not continuously monitored, must be

protected against excessive temperatures by overload protection devices with manual reset or by
similar devices.

711.462 Disconnection and breaking under load

Each structure, hut, stand or entity, intended to be occupied by a specific user and each distribution
circuit supplying external installations must be provided with its own easily accessible and easily
identifiable load disconnection and cut-off devices.

711.463 Emergency shutdown

An emergency cut-off device must be provided at the head of the electrical installation of entities such
as barracks or stands. This emergency cut-off function can be provided by the device prescribed in
711.462.

711.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment

711.52 Pipelines
711.526 Electrical connections
The connections must be enclosed in enclosures with a minimum degree of protection IP4X or IPXXD.

711.53 Protection devices against indirect contact and against overcurrents, circuits of entities such as
barracks or stands must be implemented in closed enclosures with a minimum degree of protection
IP4X or IPXXD which can only be opened using a wrench or a tool.

711.55 Other equipment

711.551 Low voltage generator sets

Generating units must be located or protected in such a way as to avoid dangers and injuries to
persons by inadvertent contact with high temperature or dangerous parts.

The UTE C 15-401 guide defines the conditions for use in the electrical installation of generating sets.

- 401 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-711

711.559.2 Lighting apparatus - Luminaires

VS
711.559.2.1 Lighting
Luminaires and light patterns must be securely attached to the structure or supports intended to hold
them.

See as well 559.2.4.

Luminaires and light patterns fixed less than 2.5 m (within reach) from the ground or susceptible to
VS accidental contact must be firmly fixed, and located or protected in such a way as to prevent any risk of
injury to persons or ignition of objects. materials. Access to the light source must only be possible after
removing a barrier or enclosure using a tool.

711.559.2.2 Sockets
Sockets with penetrated insulation for connections must not be used unless the cable and sockets are
compatible and the sockets cannot be removed after fixing the cable.

711.559.2.3 Lamps in shooting ranges

Lamps in shooting ranges and fairgrounds in which projectiles are used must be properly seated to
avoid accidental damage.

711.559.2.4 Headlamps
If mobile floodlights are used, they must be implemented in such a way that they are inaccessible.
Power cables must be flexible and must have appropriate mechanical protection. These cables must be
of type H07RN-F or H07BB-F

711.559.2.5 Risk of fire from lighting fixtures and spotlights

The luminaires and projectors must be fixed and protected so that their orientation or a concentration
of heat is not likely to cause the ignition of any material. The minimum distance requirements for
illuminated objects given by the manufacturer must be observed.

711.559.2.6 Illuminated discharge signs and tubes operating at a rated no-load output voltage
exceeding 1kV
Illuminated discharge signs and tubes operating at a rated no-load output voltage greater than 1kV
must be installed in accordance with the provisions of standards NF C 15-150-1 and NF C 15-150-2.

If they are enclosed in envelopes, these must be of at least M3 material or of a material satisfying the
glow wire test, the temperature of the glow wire being 750 ° C.

The material of the rear support surface of the signs or tubes must be M1.

711.559.2.7 SELV lighting installations

SELV lighting installations must meet the requirements of guide UTE C 15-559.

711.6 Verification
The national regulations indicate the conditions for checking the temporary installations referred to in
this part, in particular the regulations emanating from the Ministry in charge of Labor and those
emanating from the Ministry of the Interior.

_____________

- 402 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

Part 7-717 - Mobile or transportable units

717.1 Application domain .............................................. .................................................. 404

717.3 Determination of general characteristics .............................................. .............. 404

717,312 Types of distribution diagrams ............................................. .............................. 404
717,313 Food ................................................. .................................................. ........ 404

717,411 Protection by automatic power cut-off .......................................... ... 404

717.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ............ 405

717.51 Common rules ................................................ .................................................. .405
717,512 External influences ................................................ ................................................ 405
717,514 Identification ................................................. .................................................. ....... 406
717.55 Other materials ................................................ .................................................. ..... 406
717,555 Installation materials .............................................. .............................................. 406

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-717 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 403 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

717.1 Scope
VS
The specific requirements of this part are applicable to units:
- either of the mobile type, for example vehicles (self-propelled or towed);
- or of the transportable type, for example containers or cabins installed on site.
Examples of use are radio / TV transmitters, medical services, advertising, fire fighting, workshops,
etc.
Several units can be electrically interconnected. These
VS
prescriptions are not applicable:
- replacement generator sets;
- pleasure craft;
(1)
- mobile machines conforming to standard NF EN 60204-1;
- to caravans;
- electric vehicle traction equipment.

The additional requirements of the parts of the title 7, if applicable, will be taken into account, for
example for showers, places for medical use, etc.

717.3 Determination of general characteristics

717.312 Types of distribution diagrams

717.312.2 Types of earth connection diagrams

717.312.2.1 TN diagram

The TN-C scheme is not allowed inside a unit.

717.313 Food

The following methods can be used to power a unit:

a) power supply by a low voltage generator set (see figures 717A.1 and 717A.2);The generator
group can be inside a unit or a mobile group.
b) direct power supply by a fixed electrical installation (see figure 717B);
VS
c) power supply by a fixed electrical installation via a transformer ensuring simple separation (see
figures 717C.1 and 717C.2).

NOTES -
1 - In all cases, an earth connection can be provided for functional reasons.
2 - Simple separation is appropriate, for example if data processing equipment is used in the unit or if reduction of
electromagnetic influences is required.

Sources, connection or separation devices can be inside the unit.

717.411 Protection by automatic power cut-off

a) for power supplies conforming to 717.313 (a) and 717.313 c), only TN and IT diagrams are
authorized and protection by automatic power cut-off must be ensured:
- in TN system, in accordance with the provisions of 717.411.4, the protection devices being RCDs;

- in an IT scheme, in accordance with the provisions of 717.411.6.

-------
(1) NF EN 60204-1 (C 79-130)

- 404 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

b) for power supplies conforming to 717.313 b), only TN or TT schemes are authorized and the
VS automatic power supply cut-off must be ensured by an RCD.
All equipment upstream of the devices ensuring the automatic cut-off of the power supply in the unit,
including these protection devices themselves, must be protected by using equipment of class II or
having equivalent insulation.

717.411.3.1 Equipotential bonding

717.411.3.1.1 Main equipotential bonding

The accessible conductive parts of the units such as frame, conductive casing, overall or tubular
structure must be interconnected and connected to the main protective conductor of the unit by the
main equipotential bonding. This connection must have a flexible core.

717.411.3.1.2 Equipotentiality of the masses

The grounds of the electrical equipment of the units must be interconnected and connected to the
main protective conductor of the unit, which is itself connected to the main equipotential bonding.

717.411.3.1.3 If several units are electrically interconnected and supplied by the same source, the
main equipotential bonds must also be interconnected.
711.411.3.1.4 If an outdoor LV generator set is used, its ground must be connected to the main
equipotential bonding.

717.411.4 TN diagram
VS
In the case of power supply by a low voltage generator set [717.313 (a)] or through a transformer
ensuring simple separation [717.313 c)], if the TN diagram is chosen, the neutral point or, if this is not
possible, a phase conductor, must be connected to the main equipotential bonding (see figures
717A.1 and 717C.1).

717.411.6 IT diagram
In the case of power supply by a low voltage generator set [717.313 (a)] or through a transformer
ensuring simple separation [717.313 c)], if the IT scheme is chosen, the "earth" terminal of the CPI
must be connected to the main equipotential bonding (seefigure 717 C.2).

717.415.1 Additional protection by DDR

VS
Additional protection by residual differential current protection devices rated at most equal to 30 mA
is necessary for equipment used outside the unit and for all socket-outlets, with the exception of the
socket-outlets. outlets supplied by circuits protected by:

- SELV, or
- PELV, or
- electrical separation.

717.5 Choice and installation of electrical equipment

717.51 Common rules

717.512 External influences

Equipment installed outside the mobile units must meet the following conditions of external
influences:
- presence of water: AD4 (water splashes), IPX4;
- presence of foreign bodies: AE2 (small objects), IP3X;
- mechanical stresses (shocks): AG3 (high), IK08.

- 405 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

VS 717.514 Identification
An indicator plate should be affixed in a location visible to the user of the unit, clearly and
unambiguously indicating the types of power supplies that can be connected to the unit. The
descriptions given in717,313 must be used.

717.521.2 Pipelines
Flexible copper cables with a minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 should be used for connecting the
unit to the power supply. The cables must enter the unit through an insulating entry so as to ensure
double insulation. The cable sheaths must be securely attached or hooked to the unit.

717.55 Other equipment

717.555 Installation materials

(2)
717.555.1Plugs and sockets must comply with NF EN 60309-1 .

717.555.2 The socket-outlets located outside the unit must be fitted with an enclosure ensuring a
degree of protection at least equal to IP44.

717.559.1 Connecting the mobile unit

717.559.1.1 Elements of the power supply connection devices

The connection devices connecting the unit to the power supply must comply with NF EN 60309-1 (2)
and the following rules:
- the plugs must have an envelope of insulating material;
- plugs and sockets must provide a degree of protection at least equal to IP44, if they are external;

- device inputs and their enclosures must provide a degree of protection at least equal to IP55;

- the male part must be on the unit.

-------
(2) NF EN 60309-1 (C 63-300)
- 406 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

(Blank page)

- 407 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

L1
L2
L3
1a 8
NOT

PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a

M1 M2
M

I∆not = 30mA 5
4 10a

11 INOT OS
NOTEFW
2
9 6d 6b 6c

9 9
5

7 7 3

Figure 717A.1 - Example of power supply by a low voltage generator set located
inside the unit, in TN diagram

L1
L2
L3
8
NOT
1a
PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a
Generator group
Low tension M1 M2
M
I∆not = 30mA
5
4 10a

11
11 INOT OS
NOTEFW
2
6b 6c
9 6d
9 9
6d
5

6th 6th

7 7 3

Figure 717A.2 - Example of power supply by a low voltage generator set

located outside the unit in TN diagram

- 408 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

VS Legend for figures 717A.1 and 717A.2

1a Power supply to the unit by a LV generator set in accordance with 717.313 (a)
2 Class II insulation or equivalent up to the first protection device ensuring automatic
power supply cut-off
3 Possible conductor staircase
4 Connection of the neutral point (or, if it does not exist, of a phase conductor) to the
conductive casing of the unit
5 Sockets for use inside the unit Main equipotential bonding in
6 accordance with 717.411.3.1.1
6a for the possible antenna;
6b for any conductive external steps in contact with the earth; 6c for a functional earth
connection (if necessary);
6d for the conductive casing of the unit;
6th interconnection of the main equipotential links of two units;

7 Socket outlets for supplying user equipment outside the unit

8 Over-current protection device, if necessary Over-current protection device

9 (e.g. circuit breaker)
10a RCD of rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA for protection by
automatic cut-off of the power supply to outlets or circuits used outside the unit

10b RCD for protection by automatic cut-off of the power supply to circuits used inside the
unit
11 Main earth terminal or bar

M Motor
M1 and M2 Various electrical equipment

- 409 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

L1 L1
L2 L2
1b L3 L3
NOT 8
NOT

PE PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a

M1 M2
M
I∆not = 30mA
10a

11 INOT OS
NOTEFW
2
6d 6b 6c
9 9

7 7 3

Figure 717B - Example of power supply by a fixed installation in TN or TT system

- 410 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

VS Legend for Figure 717B

1b Power supply to the unit by a fixed electrical installation in accordance with 717.313 b)
2 Class II insulation or equivalent up to the first protection device ensuring automatic
power supply cut-off
3 Possible conductor staircase
5 Socket sockets used inside the unit Main equipotential bonding
6 in accordance with 717.411.3.1.16a for the possible antenna

6b for any conductive external steps in contact with the earth 6c for a functional earth
connection (if necessary)
6d for the conductive casing of the unit
7 Socket outlets for supplying user equipment outside the unit

8 Over-current protection device, if necessary Over-current protection devices

9 (e.g. circuit breaker)
10a RCD of rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA for protection by
automatic cut-off of the power supply to outlets or circuits used outside the unit

10b RCD for protection by automatic power cut-off Terminal or main earth
11 bar

M Motor

M1 and M2 Various electrical equipment

- 411 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

L1 L1
L2 L2
1 C L3 L3
8
NOT
PE PE
10b 6
8 9 9 9
6a

M1 M2
M
= 3 0 m TO 5
10a

11 INOT OS
NOTEFW
2
6d 6b 6c
9
9 9
5

7 7 3

Figure 717C.1 - Example of power supply by a fixed installation with diagram of the connections
any earth, via a transformer ensuring separation
simple, the secondary being in TN scheme

L1 L1
L2 L2
1 C L3 L3
8
NOT
12 CPI PE
6
9 9 9
PE
6a

8 M1 M2
M
I∆not = 30mA
5
10a

11 INOT OS
NOTEFW

2
6d 6b 6c
9
9 9
5

7 7 3

Figure 717C.2 - Example of power supply by a fixed installation with any earth
connection diagram, via a transformer ensuring
a simple separation, the secondary being in an IT scheme
- 412 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

VS Legend for figures 717C.1 and 717C.2

1C Power supply to the unit by a fixed electrical installation, by means of a transformer with
single isolation in accordance with 717.313 c)
2 Class II insulation or equivalent up to the first protection device ensuring automatic
power supply cut-off
3 Possible conductor staircase
4 Connection of the neutral point (or, if it does not exist, of a phase conductor) to the
conductive casing of the unit
5 Sockets for use inside the unit Main equipotential bonding in
6 accordance with 717.411.3.1.16a for the possible antenna

6b for any conductive external steps in contact with the earth 6c for a functional earth
connection (if necessary)
6d for the conductive casing of the unit
7 Socket outlets for supplying user equipment outside the unit

8 Overcurrent protection device, if necessary

9 Overcurrent protection devices (e.g. circuit breaker)
10a RCD of rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA for protection by
automatic cut-off of the power supply to outlets or circuits used outside the unit

10b RCD for protection by automatic power cut-off Terminal or main earth
11 bar
12 Permanent insulation monitor
M Motor

M1 and M2 Various electrical equipment

______________

- 413 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-717

(Blank page)

- 414 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752

Part 7-752 - Liquid Fuels Distribution Areas

752.1 Application domain .............................................. ................................................. 415

752.46 Emergency shutdown .............................................. .................................................. ..415
752.51 Dangerous places ................................................ ........................................ 415
752.52 Pipelines ................................................. .................................................. ........ 415
752,542 Earthing installation ............................................ ..................................... 415
752.55 Other materials ................................................ .................................................. .... 416

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-752 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 415 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752

752.1 Scope

The requirements of this part are applicable to the electrical installations of liquid fuel distribution
areas.
Flammable liquid distribution facilities are generally classified facilities, most often subject to
declaration. As a result, they must in particular meet the requirements of standard decree n ° 261 bis
(current nomenclature n ° 1434) relating to the filling and distribution of flammable liquids.

752.46 Emergency shutdown

An emergency shut-off device must be provided to cut off the power supply to the liquid fuel
distribution area.

752.51 Hazardous locations

In accordance with European Directive 1999/92 / EC of 12/16/99, the document relating to protection
against explosions drawn up and kept up to date by the head of the establishment mentions the
hazardous locations classified as zones.

However, the above-ground and limited volumes must be classified in zone 1:

a) for the openings of the loading ports of the storage tanks:

- by the spherical surface located 2 m around the mouth if the latter is outside,
- by the walls of the room if the outlet is located inside.

b) for vents:
- by the spherical surface located 2 m around the orifice:

c) for dispensing devices:

- by the cylindrical surface located at "x" meters around the device "x" being equal to the length
of the loading hose increased by 1 m and by the horizontal plane tangent to the top of the
device if the latter is at l outside, and by the horizontal plane located 2 m above the summit if
the latter is located inside.

752.52 Pipelines
The pipes must be chosen and installed in accordance with the provisions of the BE3 locations (see
424).

Buried pipes, with the exception of those essential for the operation of the devices necessary for the
operation of the repository, must run at a distance from the storage tank (s) greater than 0.50 m,
counted in projection on the plan. horizontal.
752.53 Apparatus
The protective devices are installed in cabinets located outside of hazardous locations and washing
and lubrication areas.

752.542 Earthing installation

For the same establishment, there must be only one earth electrode or a set of
interconnected earth connections to ensure the earthing of the tanks and that of the masses of the
electrical installation.
The earth connections are located outside the volumes located below zones 0 and 1; the same applies
to the grounding circuits of the installation.

- 416 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752

752.55 Other equipment

Distribution devices must comply with Directive 94/9 / EC.
Other equipment installed in hazardous locations must meet the conditions of external influences BE3
(see 424).
The switchgear and the light sources are placed out of the reach of vehicles, taking into account the
largest admissible clearance.
It is recommended that the light sources respect a free height of 2 meters at all points.

This prescription does not exclude the use of light sources for obstacles or the pathway of traffic
areas, provided that they are suitably protected against mechanical damage (IK07) (512.2.7.1).

______________

- 417 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-752

(Blank page)

- 418 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

Part 7-753 - Electrical space heating equipment

753.1 Scope and common rules ........................................... .................... 419

753.2 Definition ................................................. .................................................. ................ 419

753.3 Technical file................................................ .................................................. .... 420

753.4 Heating elements for radiant floors ............................................. ........... 420

753.5 Electric heating equipment installed in the ceiling ......................................... 423

753.6 Heating with wall transmitters (convector, radiant panel and

accumulation transmitters) .............................................. .............................................. 424

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.

- 419 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

753.1 Scope and common rules

This part deals with the installation:

- heating elements for radiant floors;

- electric heating equipment installed in or on the ceiling;

- direct wall heaters and storage heaters.

753.2 Definition

753.2.1 Heating elements for radiant floors

• Heating element
Element made up of a flexible heating cable or film, and its cold connection (s) intended to
connect this heating cable or film to the connection point to the installation of the food.

• Radiant accumulation floor

Electric inertial heating, at low temperature, by the floor made up of a heating element encased
in a thick reinforced slab.
• Direct radiant floor
Direct electric heating, at low temperature, by the floor composed of a heating element above a
thermal insulation and a thin reinforced floating screed.

This type of heating is generally called an Electric Radiant Floor (PRE).

753.2.2 Electric heating equipment installed in or on the ceiling

• Plaster radiant ceiling
Special plasterboard ceiling fitted with heating panels and non-heating panels.

The heating panel includes a heating element glued under a rigid panel of mineral wool and
equipped with a cord and a specific plug.
This type of heating is generally referred to as PRP.
• Modular radiant ceiling
Suspended ceiling composed of a combination of radiant modules and non-heating modules
prefabricated in the factory:
A radiant module is a prefabricated heating unit in the form of a sandwich panel assembled by
gluing and composed of a thermal insulator, a decorative underside, a heating element placed
between the insulation and the underside. decorative and equipped with a cord and a specific
plug.
This type of heating is generally referred to as PRM.
• Radiant hanging cassette
Radiant heater for horizontal ceiling installation, the constituent parts of which are enclosed in a
rigid casing, and intended to be fixed or suspended from the ceiling or to be embedded in a
modular suspended ceiling.
• Reflector device
Radiant heating apparatus comprising a metal frame containing one or more heating elements
at medium or high temperature, the emitted radiation being returned to the room by one or
more reflectors.

- 420 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

753.2.3 Direct wall transmitter

• Convector
Appliance fixed to a vertical wall, equipped with an electrical resistance allowing the room to be
heated by natural air convection through one or more outlet openings.

• Radiant panel
Appliance fixed to a vertical wall, equipped with an electrical resistance allowing the room to be
heated, mainly by heating the visible face of the appliance.

753.2.4 Storage transmitter

• Storage heater
Heating device whose stored heat is obtained by charging an accumulator core, the heat being
able to be restored at any time.

753.3 Technical file

In the case of heating by radiant floor or by equipment installed in the ceiling, a technical file must
contain, as the case may be, the following information:
- the type of heating elements;
- the rated voltage;
- the rated resistance;
- the number of heating elements installed;
- the length / area of the heating elements;
- characteristics relating to conductors, screens;
- power density per area;
- installed / heated areas;
- the arrangement of the heating elements;
- the location of the heating elements;
- location of junction boxes;
- the rated current of the overcurrent protection devices;
- the rated current of the differential devices.

753.4 Heating elements for radiant floors

753.4.1 Protection against fault currents

753.4.1.1 Electrical heating equipment comprising insulated heating elements, with armor, sheath or
other earthed metallic coating must be protected by differential-residual current devices with rated
differential-residual current not exceeding 500 mA. If the installation is carried out in an IT system, the
impedance of the permanent insulation monitor (CPI) and the characteristics of the residual current
devices must be chosen so as to ensure breaking when the first fault appears. to ground or earth.

Regardless of the earth connection diagram, the first fault breaking performed by the protection device
having a rated differential-residual current of at most 500 mA is intended to prevent the destruction of
the metal coatings by the circulation of high value fault currents for too long a period.

753.4.1.2 Heating equipment comprising insulated conductors, without armor, sheath or other metallic
coating must be protected by differential-residual current devices with rated differential-residual
current at most equal to 30 mA, each 30 mA RCD being designed for a power rated heating elements at
most equal to 13 kW (400 V) or 7.5 kW (230 V).

- 421 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

In the case of a three-phase installation, it is recommended to implement a differential device per

circuit with two active conductors.

Connection examples:

Circuit breaker

NOT
L1
L2
L3

30 mA RCD 30 mA RCD 30 mA RCD

Element

Figure 753A - Example of protection of an installation

three-phase: supply between phases

General circuit breaker

NOT
L1
L2
L3

30 mA RCD 30 mA RCD 30 mA RCD

Heating element

Figure 753B - Example of protection of an installation

three-phase: supply between phase and neutral

753.4.1.3 The armor, the sheath or the metallic coating of any heating element, when it exists, must be
connected at each end to the protective conductor of the supply circuit.
The protective conductor has the same cross section as the supply conductors.
753.4.1.4 Electric heating elements embedded in the ground, intended for heating a room or location
other than AD1, may be installed provided they are covered with a grounded metal mesh or have a
grounded metal covering .

753.4.1.5 Bare or slightly insulated conductors incorporated in a material or in the floor, for the heating
of this one, are allowed provided that the source is SELV (414.4) and that the greatest voltage between
live parts or between live parts and the earth, is not more than 25 V in alternating current or 60 V in
direct current.
By slightly insulated conductors is meant conductors having a coating of non-conductive material
intended to provide protection against chemical or electrochemical corrosion or mechanical protection,
but for which no electrical characteristics are required. Therefore, from the point of view of protection
against electric shock, such conductors are considered bare conductors.

- 422 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

753.4.2 Over-current protection

If the overcurrent protection of the heating element supply circuits is
(1)
provided by fuses, these must be of the gG type conforming to the standard in force and not household
fuses. In living quarters, only circuit breakers are authorized.

In the case of an accumulation or direct floor fitted with self-regulating cables, the currents announced
by the cable manufacturer must be increased by 30% to take account mainly of cold power-ups.

In addition, the rated current of the protection devices must take into account the temperatures that
can be reached both in the heating supply ducts and inside the cabinets or boxes.

The table below, relating to storage or direct floors fitted with self-regulating cables, takes into account
the previous provisions for the choice of protection devices.

Table 753A - Protection against overcurrents in the case of floor to

accumulation or direct equipped with self-regulating cables

Maximum power Rated current of the device Minimum section

announced by the protection drivers
builder (TO) power supply
(W) (mm²)
230 V 400 V GG fuses Circuit breaker Copper
1,700 3000 16 16 1.5

3,400 6000 25 25 2.5

4,200 7,300 32 32 4

5,400 9,300 40 40 6

7,500 13,000 50 50 10

The minimum sections indicated in the table above are calculated according to the operating current
corresponding to the maximum power announced by the manufacturer increased by 30%. The rated
currents of the protection devices have been determined taking into account the conditions set out
above the table; therefore, these devices only protect the power supply circuits against short circuits.

In the case of other floors, the rules of part 43 are applicable.

753.4.3 Installation of heating elements

(2)
The heating elements must meet the standards in force .

Heating elements intended to be embedded in a concrete floor or other similar material must be IPX7.

Their implementation must comply with standard NF P 52-302-1 (ex DTU 65.7), with the Common
Technical Prescriptions (CPT PRE 06/96 and its additives) and with the technical opinion of the process.

(1) NF C 63-213
(2)) C 32-330; UTE C 73-999
- 423 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

The installer must inform other trades that no penetrating fasteners such as door stop screws should
be used in areas where heating systems are installed.

In the case of establishments open to the public (ERP), the provisions of the ERP safety regulations
should also be applied.

753.5 Electric heating equipment installed in the ceiling

753.5.1 Fault current protection

The circuits supplying the plaster radiant ceiling (PRP) or modular radiant ceiling (PRM) heating
equipment must be:
- either supplied with SELV or PELV and meet the requirements of paragraph 414.4 ;
- either protected by differential-residual current devices (see 531.2) rated differential-residual
current at most equal to 30 mA, each 30 mA RCD being designed for a rated power of the heating
elements at most equal to 13 kW (400 V) or 7.5 kW (230 V).

General circuit breaker

NOT
L1
L2
L3

30 mA RCD 30 mA RCD 30 mA RCD

Heating element
Figure 753C - Example of protection of an installation
three-phase: supply between phases and neutral

If the heating equipment is protected by a metal screen or grid, and is not Class II, the metal screen or
grid must be earthed.
When reflector devices and radiating cassettes are not class I, the circuits supplying them are protected
by RCDs (see 531.2) rated differential-residual current at most equal to 30 mA, each 30 mA RCD being
designed for a rated power of the heating elements at most equal to 13 kW (400 V) or 7.5 kW (230 V).

753.5.2 Installation of plaster or modular radiant ceiling equipmentIssuers must meet the
(3)
standards and guides in force.

Their implementation must comply with the common technical specifications (CPT PEC 12/33), the
technical specifications (PT PRM 10/97) and the technical opinion of the process.

In the case of establishments open to the public (ERP), the provisions of the ERP regulation should also
be applied.

(3) UTE C 73-999 for radiant ceilings (PRP and PRM); NF EN 60335-2 -30 (C 73-830) for reflector devices and radiant cassettes

- 424 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

753.6 Heating with wall transmitters (convector, radiant panel and storage transmitters)

753.6.1 General
The heating devices or equipment are distributed over specific terminal circuits.

The ERP safety regulations require that nursery school heaters not be directly accessible if their surface
temperature is greater than 60 ° C in normal operation.

753.6.2 Disconnection
In the case of heating with pilot wire, the cutting of the pilot wire must be provided.

This disconnection is carried out at the origin of each of the heating circuits by a disconnection device
associated with the protection device.

However, it is permissible to provide general sectioning of the pilot wire:

- either by a disconnecting device associated with a main heating switch;

- or by an independent disconnection device, the protection device dedicated to energy
management being able to fulfill this function.

When the isolation of the pilot wire is independent, a marking must be placed on the distribution board
and inside the connection box of the heating equipment "Attention, pilot wire to be severed".

______________

- 425 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-753

(Blank page)

- 426 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Part 7-771 - Living quarters

771.11 Application domain .............................................. ............................................... 427

771.14 Food ................................................. .................................................. ......... 427

771,443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin (lightning arrester) ................. 432

771.46 Sectioning and control ............................................... .................................... 433

771,462 Disconnection ................................................. .................................................. .... 433
771,463 Emergency shutdown .............................................. .................................................. 433
771,465 Ordered ................................................. .................................................. ......... 433

771,514 Identification of circuits ............................................... ........................................ 434

771,524 Conductor section ............................................... ......................................... 434

771,533 Overcurrent protection devices ............................................ ........ 437

771,558 Control panels, distribution and communication boards - Duct

technical housing (GTL) ............................................. ....................................... 438

Annex A - (normative) - Keraunic levels in France and in the overseas departments ....................... 449

Annex B - (normative) - Electrical installations powered by an autonomous low power source of energy
( ≤ 6 kVA), not connected to the network ................................. 450

Annex C - (informative) - Example of a letter to make the different actors aware of their
responsibilities. .................................................. .................................................. ......451

Annex D - (informative) - Management system or equipment using the information delivered on the
remote information circuit of the distributor's electronic meter
.................................................. .................................................. ......................452

____________

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.

The numbers following the particular number of part 7-771 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.

The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 427 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.11 Scope
This part applies to the electrical installations of private premises for residential use.

In addition to the rules of this part, other parts of Title 7 are also applicable to premises for residential
use, such as:

- the part 7-701 for rooms containing a bathtub or a shower;

- the part 7-702 for private pools;
- the part 7-703 for saunas;
- the part 7-753 for electric heating equipment.

It does not apply to electrical installations of general services and common parts of collective
buildings for residential use to which the rules of titles 1 to 6 of this standard apply, the rules of the
part 7-772 and possibly other parts of the title 7.

Offices and professional premises integrated into housing are in principle subject to the provisions of
the decree of 14 November 1988 relating to the protection of workers in establishments which use
electric currents.

For electrical installations powered by an autonomous energy source (photovoltaic, wind turbine, etc.)
of low power (≤ 6 kVA) not connected to the network, refer to'Annex B.

771.14 Power
The installations of premises for residential use are generally supplied by a public low-voltage
distribution network according to the TT scheme and at a voltage of 230 volts in single-phase or
230/400 volts in three-phase.
In certain cases, these installations can be connected to an installation supplied by a private
transformer substation according to a scheme which can be TT, TN or IT.

When the installation is connected to an installation carried out in the TN scheme, the installation of
premises for residential use is carried out according to the TN-S scheme.

771.314.2 Terminal circuits

An electrical installation must be able to have a sufficient number of points of use to meet the normal
needs of users, namely at least:

771.314.2.1 Sockets
- for one bedroom, three 16 A + T socket outlets, distributed around the periphery;

- for the living room, a 16 A + T socket outlet per 4 m2 surface, distributed around the periphery
with a minimum of five plinths;

Thus, for a stay of 27 m2, it is necessary to provide 7 bases.

- For a kitchen, six non-specialized 16 A + T socket outlets, four of which are to be distributed
above the worktop (s). These plinths are not installed above the basin of a sink, nor above the
hobs or hobs;

However, the exception is allowed for an additional plinth above the hobs, provided that this
plinth is identified for the hood and that it is placed at least 1.80 m from the finished floor.

In the particular case of kitchens with a surface area less than or equal to 4 m², it is permissible
to provide only three socket outlets.

- 428 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

When the hob and sink are arranged so as to leave several work surfaces, the socket outlets are
distributed as best as possible to avoid the circulation of cables from household appliances over
the sink or the hob. Cooking.

- A socket outlet of at least 16 A + T in other rooms with a surface area of more than 4 m2 and
traffic. This provision is not compulsory for WCs and non-adjoining annexes such as garages,
garden sheds, etc.

The number of 16 A socket-outlets supplied by a single circuit is limited to:

- 5 when the section of the conductors of the circuit is 1.5 mm2 ; or is 2.5
- 8 when the section of the conductors of the circuit mm2.

When receptacles are mounted in the same enclosure, they are counted according to Table 771A.

Table 771A - Outlet Receptacle Count

Number of sockets per box 1 2 3 4 >4

Number of bases counted 1 1 2 2 3

This table does not apply to ordered receptacles where each receptacle is counted as a point of use.

771.314.2.2 Specialized circuits

Each high power household appliance must be powered by a dedicated circuit.

At least four specialized circuits must be planned:

• a specialized circuit for supplying the stove or the hob only (connection box or socket outlet 32 A
single-phase or 20 A three-phase);

• three specialized circuits at least 16 A for supplying devices of the type:

- washing machine,

- dishwasher,
Specialized socket outlets for dishwashers and washing machines should be installed near the
water inlets and outlets required for these devices.

- dryer,
- oven,
- freezer.
When the location of the freezer is defined, a dedicated circuit should be provided that is
protected by 30 mA RCD, preferably with reinforced immunity (see
531.2.1.4) specific to this circuit, or supplied by a separation transformer, in order to alleviate
the health consequences on food following undesirable cuts. It is recommended in this case
to add an alarm system, especially if the freezer is located outside the living area.

In the particular case of type T1 accommodation, it is permissible to adapt the number of specialized
outlets according to the specialized equipment supplied with the accommodation. If this equipment is
not provided, at least three dedicated circuits are provided (one 32A circuit and two 16A circuits).

- 429 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Other specialized circuits are to be implemented, for example for each of the following applications
when they are planned:
- electric water heater,
- boiler and its auxiliaries,
- heat pump,
- air conditioner,
- bathroom heater,
- pool,
- external circuits (supplying one or more uses not adjacent to the building, for example lighting,
automatic gate, etc.),
Indeed, the external circuits are subject to greater risks due to the more severe environmental
conditions, their decommissioning must not affect the internal circuits with the consequences
mentioned above (placing in the dark for example).

- home automation functions (alarms, controls, etc.),

- VMC when it is not collective.

771.314.2.3 Lighting
Each room must have at least one lighting point supplied by a lighting circuit.

a) In bedrooms, living rooms and kitchens, this lighting point must be placed on the ceiling.

If not in use, a light point can be completely concealed.

The lighting point can be supplemented by one or more wall lights or one or more socket outlets
ordered, not replacing the specialized and non-specialized bases.

In the case of total renovation or when technical impossibilities do not allow the creation of lighting
points placed on the ceiling, the room can be lit by two surface-mounted points or by two controlled
socket outlets.

b) In toilets, bathrooms, corridors and other premises, this lighting point must be placed either on
the ceiling or on a wall.

Excluded are cupboards and other places in which it is not intended to enter.

These provisions are not compulsory for non-adjoining annexes such as garages, garden sheds, etc.

The number of lighting points supplied by the same circuit is limited to eight.

The number of lighting circuits must be at least equal to two in dwellings with a surface area greater
than 35 m².

In the case of spotlights or light strips, there is one lighting point for every 300 VA in the same room.

Each lighting point equipped with a DCL (Luminaire Connection Device) base intended to supply a
luminaire according to the article 559.1.1 must be fitted either with a DCL socket fitted with a 2P + E
recoverable plug for the subsequent connection of a luminaire, or with a luminaire fitted with a DCL
plug.

The DCL socket and plug assembly prevents damage to conductors during the various changes of
occupants or lighting, which ultimately results in the impossibility of connection, except by exerting
harmful traction on said conductors or make splices.

- 430 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.314.2.4 Outdoor use points

In order to meet the normal needs of users, an electrical installation must have a minimum number
of points of use in the private outdoor area adjacent to the building, namely:

- one lighting point per main or service entrance;

This lighting point can be powered from an interior lighting circuit.
- power points for electric “awning” blinds, if provided.

When a 16 A, 2P + E socket outlet is installed outside, it is advisable to place a de-energizing device

inside the housing coupled with a voltage presence indicator light.

771.314.2.5 Heaters
The heating appliances or equipment are distributed over separate terminal circuits so that the power
of each circuit is not greater than the values given in tables 771B and 771C.

The table applies to all heating systems other than storage or direct floors equipped with self-
regulating cables for which a table is given in section 7-753.

Table 771B - Circuit breaker protection

Maximum rated current Minimum section of

Maximum power
of the device conductors
(W) protection (mm²)
(TO)
230 V 400 V Circuit breaker Copper
2,250 4000 10 1.5

4,500 8,000 20 2.5

5 750 25 4
7,250 32 6

Table 771C - Fuse protection

Maximum rated current Minimum section of

Maximum power
of the device conductors
(W) protection (mm²)
(TO)
230 V 400 V Fuse Copper
2,250 4000 10 1.5

3,500 6,400 16 2.5

4,500 8,000 20 4

7,250 25 6

In some buildings, heating is provided by devices powered by the general service electrical system.
The circuits supplying these devices are then made and protected in accordance with the provisions
indicated in guide UTE C 15-755.

- 431 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.411.3 Requirements for protection against indirect contact

771.411.3.2 Automatic power supply cut-off

The resistance of the earth electrode to which the earths of the installation are connected must be at
most equal to 100 ohms.
In general, public low-voltage distribution is provided in France for installations supplied according to
the TT scheme and the rule in this paragraph is in accordance with those in paragraphs 411.5.3 and
531.2.4.2.2.
When the earth connection value, even after an improvement test, remains greater than 100 ohms,
for example due to the nature of the ground, the installation must be protected by devices with a
rated differential-residual current of less than 500 mA (see table 53B). If, in particular, the resistance
of the earth electrode is greater than 500 ohms, RCDs with rated differential-residual current at most
equal to 30 mA are necessary (see531.2.5.2)

Differential devices with adjustable sensitivity must not be used in installations for domestic use,
unless the highest differential current meets the conditions of the article 531.2.4.2.2

Personal protection is not guaranteed for certain adjustments of the differential device.

When the general control and protection device placed at the origin of the installation includes the
medium sensitivity differential function, this protection is of type S and its rated differential-residual
current is at most equal to 500 mA in accordance with the rules of NF C 14-100.

When the general control and protection device placed at the origin of the installation does not
include a medium sensitivity differential function, it is recalled that the part of the installation
between the general control and protection device and the or differential devices providing
protection against indirect contacts must be in class II.

In the particular case where a medium sensitivity RCD is installed between the general control and
protection device not including differential protection, and the 30 mA RCD (s), this RCD must be of
type S and of differential-residual current. rated at most equal to 500 mA.

30 mA differential-residual current protection devices must protect all circuits, individually or in

groups of circuits.

In the case of a total renovation of an apartment located in a building without an earthing installation
(earth connection, equipotential bonding, main protective conductor) and pending completion of
this , the following compensatory measures must be observed:

- Realization of a local equipotential bonding in the kitchen.

The implementation rules are those defined for premises receiving a bathtub or a shower (see
part 7-701).

The local equipotential links of the kitchen and the bathroom as well as all the protective
conductors of the installation are connected to the distribution board.

- Protection of the entire installation by DR devices with rated residual current at most equal to 30
mA, the number and rated current of which are defined in thetable 771E.

The user must be warned against the dangers due to the non-continuity of the earth (affix a self-
adhesive label on the electrical panel), see annex C.

- 432 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.411.3.3 All circuits must have a protective conductor. These protective conductors must be
connected:
- on the one hand to the main earth terminal of the installation (see 542.4);
- on the other hand to the earth contacts of the socket-outlets and to the earth terminals of class I
devices.

The socket outlets must have an earth contact, unless they are supplied through an isolating
transformer in accordance with the rules of the article 413.

The presence of a protective conductor in all circuits does not preclude the use of class II user
equipment.
For fixed class II equipment, the protective conductor is not connected. For other equipment,
powered by a socket, class II devices are fitted with a 2P plug which escapes from the earth contact of
the socket outlet.

771.443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin (lightning arrester)

The conditions under which the surge arresters must be used are defined in443.

Table 771D below summarizes these conditions.

Table 771D - Installation conditions for surge arresters

Building power Keraunic level (Nk)

Nk ≤ 25 (AQ1) Nk> 25 (AQ2)
Building equipped with a lightning rod Obligatory Obligatory
LV power supply via a fully or partially
Not required Obligatory (2)
overhead line (1)
LV power supply via an entirely underground
Not required Not required
line
(1) This provision is not applicable when the overhead lines consist of insulated conductors with a
metallic screen connected to the earth or comprising a conductor connected to the earth.

(2) However, the absence of a surge arrester is allowed if it is justified by the risk analysis defined in
guide UTE C 15-443.

When the surge arrester is not compulsory, a risk analysis can be carried out which, if the cost of the
equipment used and their unavailability are vital in the installation, may justify it.

When a surge arrester is installed on the power circuit, it is recommended to also install it on the
communication circuit (see risk analysis in guide UTE C 15-443).

When surge arresters are used in communication networks, they must be connected to the earth of
the installation grounds.

THE'Annex A gives the lightning strike densities in France and the overseas departments.

- 433 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.46 Disconnection and control

771.462 Disconnection

771.462.1 Disconnection at the origin of circuits

Any circuit must initially have a disconnecting device on all active conductors, including the neutral
conductor.

771.462.2 Cutting of the pilot wire of individual electric heating installations

In the case of heating with pilot wire, the cutting of the pilot wire must be provided.

This disconnection is carried out at the origin of each of the heating circuits by a disconnection device
associated with the protection device.

However, it is permissible to provide general sectioning of the pilot wire:

- either by a disconnecting device associated with a main heating switch;
- either by an independent disconnection device; the protection device dedicated to energy
management can fulfill this function.
When the isolation of the pilot wire is independent, a marking must be placed on the distribution
board and inside the connection box of the heating equipment "Attention, pilot wire to be severed".

771.463 Emergency shutdown

The general control and protection device (AGCP) provided at the origin of the installation can provide
the emergency cut-off functions defined in 463 if it is located inside the living quarters.

If it is located in a garage or an adjoining room, there must be direct access between this room and the
accommodation.
If this is not the case, another direct-acting device ensuring the on-load breaking and isolation
functions must be placed inside the housing (see 771.558.2.2).

The origin of the installation is defined in 141.

The general control and protection device is generally the branch circuit breaker.

For residential homes, this device is located in each of the homes.

771,465 Order

771.465.1 Ordered socket outlets

Electrical installations in homes often include controlled socket outlets, intended to supply exclusively
mobile lighting devices, such as lampposts or bedside lamps. These socket-outlets have a nominal
current of 16 A.

The socket outlets ordered are considered, from the point of view of their use, as fixed lighting points.
They are then supplied by the lighting circuits of the installation.

A switch can control at most two socket outlets provided that these sockets are in the same room of
the dwelling. Each base ordered is counted as a lighting point.

A remote control switch, a contactor or any other similar device can control more than two socket
outlets.

It is recommended that you mark the outlet sockets ordered.

- 434 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.465.2 Controlled mechanical ventilation (CMV) and distributed mechanical ventilation (VMR)
control
The VMC or VMR power supply circuit must include a shut-off device. This device can be placed in the
main distribution board.

The circuit breaker dedicated to the protection of this circuit can provide the "Stop" function.

This last arrangement prevents the user from using the “Off” function frequently, which is liable to
cause damage due to humidity (condensation, mold).

It is recommended to use the circuit protection device to ensure the “Stop” function.

The speed control device can be placed outside the main distribution board if it does not have the
"Stop" function.
If the extraction of air from the same housing is carried out by several separate extractors, their
circuits come from the same protection device.
In the case of VMC supplied by general services, see guide UTE C 15-755.

771.514 Identification of circuits

Each of the circuits must be marked with an appropriate indication, corresponding to the needs of the
user and the professional. This identification must specify the premises served and the function (for
example by means of pictograms or other appropriate indications).
This marking must be legible, of durable quality and properly affixed and must remain visible after
installation of the switchboard. It must be understandable without resorting to the documents
defined in 771.514.5.

771.514.5 Drawings
For any electrical installation, diagrams, diagrams or tables must be drawn up to be given to the user.

The information to be included in the attached diagrams and documents are as follows:

- nature and type of protection and control devices (contactors, programmers, load shedders, etc.);

- current setting and sensitivity of protection and control devices;

- predictive power;
- nature of pipes for external circuits;
- number and section of conductors;
- application (lighting, sockets, standby point of use, etc.);
- local served (bedroom 1, kitchen, etc.).

A single-line diagram comprising the above elements meets this requirement.

The diagrams, diagrams or tables should be updated when creating, modifying and extending the
installation and making provisions for subsequent interventions (connections, earth measurement,
test, etc.)

771.524 Cross-section of conductors

The values of the minimum sections imposed in the tables 771B, 771C and 771F are determined
according to the installed powers and take into account the rules of
771.314.2 concerning the limitation of the points of use supplied by each terminal circuit.

771.530.4 Fixing of equipment

In use, the socket-outlets must not separate from their support and make the terminals of the
conductors or power cables accessible.

- 435 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

The equipment with screw fixing, for use in boxes embedded in the walls, makes it possible to fulfill
this requirement.

Taking into account the constraints of use and the nature of the walls receiving the recessed boxes in
which the socket outlets are installed, claw fixing is strongly discouraged. It will no longer be
authorized from 1er June 2004. To ensure good scalability, the use of mixed back boxes is
recommended.

771.531.2.3.2 Additional protection against direct contact

771.531.2.3.2.1 All the circuits of the installation, whatever the diagram of the connections to the
earth of the power supply, must be protected by differential-residual current devices rated at most
equal to 30 mA, the number, type and size of which rated current are given in the table 771E.

These protection devices must be placed at the origin of all circuits except those supplied by an
isolating transformer.

The protection of external circuits supplying installations and equipment not attached to the building
must be separate from that of internal circuits.

The 30 mA RCD protection can be:

- either divisional for a group of circuits;
- either individual for a specialized circuit or not.

The architecture implemented will take into account the desired continuity of use depending on the
applications. In particular, devices combining water and electricity can be a source of tripping. It is
therefore desirable to protect them with specific 30 mA RCDs.

Example: washing machine, dishwasher, etc.

Attention is drawn to the following considerations:

To ensure the protection of people, the power cut resulting from the operation of such devices can
disrupt the operation of certain devices, such as computer equipment and freezers.

Special arrangements can then be made:

- direct power supply by a circuit separation transformer;

- power supply via an outlet on a circuit protected by a dedicated 30 mA RCD, preferably with
reinforced immunity.

- 436 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Choice of the rated current of the differential switches:

The number and rated current of 30 mA differential switches not dedicated to certain specific
functions (freezer, IT, etc.) protecting the circuits of living quarters are at least those indicated in the
following table:

Table 771E - Choice of differential switches

Single-phase connection of
Power : ≤ 18 kVA, with or without electric heating
Surface of the premises
dwelling
Number, type and minimum rated current In
30 mA differential switches

Area : ≤ 35 m² 1 x 25 A type AC and 1 x 40 A type A (1)

35 m² <Surface ≤ 100 m² 2 x 40 A type AC and 1 x 40 A type A (1)
Surface> 100 m² 3 x 40 A type AC (2) and 1 x 40 A type A (1)

(1) The 40 A type A differential switch must protect in particular the specialized cooker circuit
or hob and the specialized washing machine circuit.
In fact, these materials of use, depending on the technology used, can, in the event of a fault, produce
currents comprising DC components. In this case, type A RCDs designed to detect these currents provide
protection.

(2) In the event of electric heating with a power greater than 8 kVA, replace a 40A type AC differential switch
with a 63 A type AC differential switch.

For a three-phase connection, the number and rated current of RCDs to be implemented is that
indicated in table 771E.

If RCDs are used, their type and number are at least those indicated in table 771E, their rating being
adapted to the circuit (s) to be protected.

In order to balance the load, the circuits are judiciously distributed downstream of the RCDs. To
preserve the use of at least one circuit in the same room, it is recommended to protect the circuits of
the outlets and lighting of this room by different RCDs.

In the case of electric heating with a pilot wire, all the heating circuits (including the pilot wire) are
placed downstream of the same RCD.

- 437 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.533 Overcurrent protection devices

Any circuit must be protected by a protection device which is either a fuse or a circuit breaker and
whose maximum rated current is equal to the value indicated in the following table:

Table 771F - Rated current of the protection devices according to the section
drivers

Minimum section Maximum rated current

drivers of the device
Nature of the tour (mm²) protection (A)
Copper Circuit breaker Fuse

Lighting, shutters rolling, taken 1.5 16 10

ordered
(3)
VMC 1.5 2 (1) -
(3)
Circuit enslavement tariff, thread 1.5 2 -
pilot, energy manager, etc.
16 A sockets:
(3)
- circuit with 5 bases maximum: or 1.5 16 -
- circuit with 8 bases maximum: 2.5 20 16

Specialized circuits with 16 A socket (washing 2.5 20 16

machine, dryer, oven etc.)

Non-instantaneous electric water heater 2.5 20 16

Stove, hob
- in single phase 6 32 32
- in three phase 2.5 20 16
Other circuits including the divisional panel:
(2)

1.5 16 10
2.5 20 16
4 25 20
6 32 32

(1) Except in special cases where this value can be increased up to 16 A.

(2) These values do not take into account voltage drops (see 525).

(3) Unauthorized.

771.536.5 Functional control devices

Manual control gear placed near a door is generally installed on the side of the opening, within easy
reach, its height above the finished floor being between 0.80 m and 1.30 m.

- 438 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

The lighting points for the corridors and circulation areas are made as follows:

- either by means of a manual control device placed less than one meter from each access if this
device does not include an indicator light;
- either by means of a manual control device placed less than two meters from each access if this
device has an indicator light;
- or using an automatic system (presence detection).

To facilitate the installation in the future of such devices, it is recommended that the neutral
conductor be available at each control point.

771.555.1.6 Power outlets

It is recalled that the 16 A-250 V socket outlets must be of a shutter type.

The specific “razor” socket with an isolating transformer is not affected.

Sockets with a rated current greater than 16 A are:

- either of a shut-off type;

- be installed so that the axis of the cells is placed at a minimum height of 1.40 m from the finished
floor;
- or fitted with a protective shutter.

Beyond 1er June 2004, only shutter bases will be admitted.

NOTE - For certain specific applications, plinths conforming to standard NF EN 60309-1 are permitted (swimming pools, etc.).

The shutter type consists of a system integrated into the socket outlet and intended to prevent the
introduction of an object into a single cell, thus ensuring the protection of children.

771.558 Control panels, distribution and communication panels - Housing technical duct (GTL)

771.558.1 General
The control panel and the distribution and communication panels must be placed in easily accessible
locations that do not adversely affect the operating conditions of the equipment. These rooms or
locations must not be humid or dusty.

The operating device of the emergency cut-off device must be located at a height of between 1.00 m
and 1.80 m above the finished floor. This height is limited to 1.30 m in rooms for the disabled or the
elderly.

The switching devices for the distribution panel protection devices are also located at a height of
between 1.00 m and 1.80 m except in the case of a closed Technical Housing (GTL) where the axis of
the most low (case of enclosure with more than three rows) will not be installed at a height less than
0.50 m.

771.558.2 Housing technical duct (GTL)

771.558.2.1 General
GTL is prescribed for all living quarters (individual or collective). For residential homes, it is accepted
that it is not provided for.

- 439 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
The GTL brings together all the inlets of the power and communication networks in a single location.

The GTL must allow extensions of the electrical installation as easy as possible and facilitate
interventions in complete safety.

In rehabilitation, GTL is only required in the case of total rehabilitation with redistribution of partitions
of living quarters.

GTL must be materialized.

A consultation organized by the project manager between the electric energy distributor and the
communication operator and the installer is essential for the definition of the point of penetration
and therefore the location of the GTL.

It is exclusively reserved for the electrical and electronic equipment of the installation and their
adductions (for example control, command and protection devices, connection and bypass, etc.)

As GTL is not considered to be an enclosure for electrical equipment, each of the equipment
incorporated must ensure its own protection against electrical and mechanical shocks and against
electromagnetic disturbances.

771.558.2.2 Location
The GTL is located:
• either inside the accommodation, preferably near an entrance (main or service),

• either in a garage or an annex room.

If the GTL has the emergency cut-off device, it must be directly accessible from inside the
accommodation as prescribed in 771,463.

This GTL, with many up and down departures, must not be placed in line with the beams.

In apartment buildings, the GTL must be in communication with the ducts of the building's power and
communication networks.
Each of these communications must have a minimum free section of 300 mm2 (the smallest
dimension cannot be less than 10 mm).

771.558.2.3 Destination
The GTL must contain:

- the control panel, if it is placed inside the accommodation;

Consequently, GTL must guarantee all the specifications required for the installation of the control
panel (NF C 14-100, 7.4 and 7.5).

- the main distribution board;

- the communication board;
- two 16 A 250 V 2P + E socket outlets, protected by a dedicated circuit to supply communication
devices placed in the GTL (digital communication equipment, etc.);

- other communication applications (TV, satellite, interactivity, etc.) when provided.

However, the amplification functions must be located as close as possible to the source, for
example on the collective antenna mast. In addition, distribution can be carried out outside the
GTL, and as close as possible to receiving devices (for example for distribution beyond 15 m).

- 440 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

and eventually :
- multi-service home equipment (home automation);
- anti-intrusion protection.

The GTL must allow the implementation of the various systems while meeting the requirements in
force in terms of insulation, protection against electric shocks and immunity to electromagnetic
influences.

771.558.2.4 Realization
GTL can be made from any material authorized for living quarters (wood, PVC, masonry, etc.).

With regard to the thickness of the walls, the material must make it possible to ensure the mechanical
strength of the fixings of the equipment or to incorporate the appropriate devices. The faces of the
internal walls must also be:
- planes;
- without excessive roughness;
- without dropout;
- barrier-free.

This GTL can also be prefabricated.

The GTL has the following minimum interior dimensions:

- width = 600 mm;
- depth = 200 mm;
- height = the entire height from floor to ceiling.

For dwellings with a surface area less than or equal to 35 m², the width can be reduced to 450 mm
and the depth to 150 mm.

The dimensions of this GTL must be respected over the entire height.

The GTL can be surface-mounted, recessed or semi-recessed.

200 mm 200 mm 200 mm

600 mm 600 mm 600 mm

Recessed Semi-recessed Protrusion

Figure 771A - Examples of GTL materialized by walls

- 441 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
In the case of a surface-mounted installation, the materialization of the GTL may be limited to a
system consisting of a set of trunking (s) plus boxes.

The chute (s) must be easily accessible from floor to ceiling, for the passage of pipes and adductions
with a minimum external section of 150 cm2 and a minimum dimension of 6 cm.

This (or these) chute (s) can either receive the boxes on top, or be implemented above and below the
boxes or on the sides.
The volume defined in this sub-paragraph, even partially occupied, must remain entirely dedicated to
the GTL alone. Any other destination of the remaining volume is prohibited.

g g g
200 mm
vs vs 200 mm To

600 mm 600 mm

a: cabinet
c: box
g: chute

Figure 771B - Examples of GTL protrusions materialized by chutes, boxes

or cabinets

771.558.2.5 Organization
The position of the different elements constituting the GTL (control panel, distribution panel,
communication panel and routing) is free in the GTL, but must respect the following constraints.

The monitoring, command and protection devices must be so arranged that there is a free space
between one of them and an adjacent side wall, such as:

a) in the case of connection with a single control panel for the electricity meter and the general
control and protection device:

- it is possible to have access to the terminals of the general control and protection device and of
the electricity meter without removing the latter;
- any aesthetic cover of the control panel remains removable;

it is possible to remove the connection plate without removing the distribution board (s);

- the distance between the terminals of the electricity meter and the adjacent distribution board is
at least 3 cm if the wall is in insulating material and 8 cm if it is in non-insulating material.

b) in order to take into account the presence of the GTL, the distance between the electricity meter
and the side walls of the GTL will be 8 cm if the wall is non-insulating or 3 cm if the wall is made of
insulating material.

c) in the event that the control panel is in a prefabricated assembly, it is permissible to have to
dismantle the covering parts of this assembly to gain access to the equipment, provided that they are
not used to hold in place pipes or equipment, that the number of parts to be dismantled is limited
and that the dismantling method is easily identifiable by a qualified person.

- 442 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
The connection between the earth strips of the distribution panel and the communication panel must
be as short as possible (preferably less than 50 cm) and with a minimum cross section of 6 mm². By
respecting the rules specific to each table, the communication table can be incorporated into the
distribution table.

The equipment corresponding to other communication applications (TV, satellite, interactivity, etc.) is
installed either below 1.10 m or above 1.80 m, with a reservation of 35 cm in width and 18 cm in
depth.

The routing of the power and communication networks must be done in separate conduits or
trunking compartments. Crossings between these pipes must be avoided as much as possible and be
made at 90 degrees. Be careful not to make loops.

Certain building management products are designed to coexist without operating problems with
power equipment. They can therefore be installed either in the high current or low current part, the
routing being in the part where the product is installed.

The layout of the distribution panel is made so that the distance between the disruptive products (for
example contactors) and the communication panel is as large as possible.

In order to allow a good incorporation of the opening of the GTL to the needs or to the interior
decoration of the dwelling, freedom is given as to the design of the access to the shaft. A key lock is
not permitted. Some examples of realizations are shown below.

Ceiling

TO TO TO

B B
B

TO TO

Ground

2 removable or fixed parts A if A normal frame drop at A allowing a 2 parts allowing

their height is less than 0.30 door to be opened at B of the same the apparatus
the access to
m, height and decoration as those of the in A and a removable part
allowing accessibility from B. neighboring doors in B
allowing having from
1 part B allowing access to the devices apparent
equipment (Automation regulation,
signage etc.)
Figure 771C - Examples of realizations of GTL materialized according to figure 771A

- 443 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

The dimensions of the removable and movable parts will be defined in agreement with the installer (s)
concerned. The GTL is not considered as an enclosure of electrical equipment, each of the
incorporated equipment must ensure its own protection against electric shocks: IP2X or IPXXB or
SELV 25 V alternating or 60 V direct.

600 100 350 150

Communication channel

Communication channel
Connection pipe

Power channel

Power channel
Other application

TV / satellite /
1.8 m 1.8 m interactivity

(*)
250
225

Pc
250 (*)
225
TR
TC
250 250
TR
225

TC
250 250
225

Pc

1.0 m 1.0 m
TV / satellite /
interactivity
Power channel

Other application
Connection pipe

Power channel

100 350 150

PC: control panel TR: distribution

panel TC: communication panel

600

Figure 771D - Example of realization of Figure 771E - Example of realization of

GTL recessed GTL recessed
Control panel on the left Control panel on the left
Connection from the top Connection from the bottom
(*) 330 for a three-phase distribution

- 444 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

600 150 350 100

Connection pipe
Power channel

Power channel
Other application

TV / satellite /
d
1.8 m 1.8 m interactivity

(*)
250
225

Pc (*)

225
TR

250 250
225

TC
250

225
Pc

1.0 m 1.0 m d
TV / satellite /
Communication channel

interactivity

Other application
Power channel

Communication channel
Connection pipe
Power channel

150 350 100

PC: control panel TR: distribution

panel TC: communication panel

d: 8 cm non-insulating wall
(7.5.4 NF C 14-100) 600

Figure 771F - Example of GTL realization Figure 771G - Example of realization of

recessed GTL recessed
Control panel on the right Control panel on the right
Connection from the top Bottom connection
(*) 330 for a three-phase distribution

- 445 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

450 100 250 100

Communication channel

Communication channel
Other application

TV / satellite /
interactivity
Connection pipe

Power channel
Power channel

225
1.8 m 1.8 m

250
225

Pc TR

250
TR

250
225 250
Pc

1.0 m 1.0 m
225

Power channel

Power channel

Connection pipe

TV / satellite /
interactivity

Other application

100 250 100 450

PC: control panel TR: distribution

panel TC: communication panel

Figure 771H - Example of GTL realization Figure 771I - Example of realization of

recessed GTL recessed
Small accommodation Small accommodation
Top connection Bottom connection

- 446 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771
771.558.3 Control panel
The control panel supports the general control and protection device (AGCP) and the electricity meter.

Its characteristics and implementation rules are defined in standard NF C 14-100 (Low voltage
connection installations).

771.558.4 Distribution tables

The protection and disconnection devices for the divisional and terminal circuits must be placed on a
main distribution panel and, if necessary, on one or more additional divisional panels distributed in
the accommodation.
A minimum reserve of 20% must be respected for each table.

These tables comply with the NF C 61-910 standard in force.

771.558.4.1 Main distribution table

The main distribution board must be placed in the GTL. It can be separated or juxtaposed with the
control panel.

771.558.4.2 Divisional allocation tables

Their installation in bathrooms is not recommended. It is prohibited in volumes 0, 1, 2 and 3 defined
in thepart 7-701.

They are not placed in cupboards or wardrobes where the stored objects can make their access
difficult, hinder ventilation and be the cause of abnormal heating or fire (aerosols). Such locations are
however permitted if measures are taken to ensure correct ventilation, not prevent free access and
not be able to store objects in front of the appliances.

They are not installed above or below the basin of a sink, washbasin, water station, cooking or
heating appliance.

771.558.5 Communication table

The communication board must be placed in the GTL.
The communication panel of minimum dimensions 250x225x70 mm is intended to receive the
operator's delivery point and must include at least one earth bar and at least one rail. The functional
link between the earth bars of the distribution board and the communication board must be as short
as possible (preferably less than 50 cm) and with a minimum cross section of 6 mm². By respecting
the rules specific to each table, the communication table can be incorporated into the distribution
table. An Indoor Termination Device (DTI) or equivalent materializes the limit of liability between the
operator's network and the users' internal installations.

It makes it possible to make a cutoff point and to test the continuity of the operator's network. In
addition, it may also contain protection modules and more sophisticated test functions (remote test,
network frequency response, etc.).

By respecting the rules specific to each table, the communication table can be incorporated into the
distribution table.

- 447 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.559.6 Local communication networks

771.559.6.1 Equipment of communication networks

771.559.6.1.1 Communication circuits (telephony included)
The minimum equipment consists of installing at least one communication socket per main room and
in the kitchen with a minimum of two sockets. One of these bases is placed in the living room, near
the television outlet, in a place not obscured by a door.

Each of these bases is served by a pipe coming from the communication panel (TC) of the housing
technical duct (GTL).

The cables used are 4 pair cables. They must comply with standard NF C 93-531-12 currently being
drawn up.
The sockets for communication sockets must comply with standard NF EN 60603-7-3 currently being
drawn up.
To take account of the existing telephone equipment, the “T” telephone sockets (contactor) can still be
used.
The market documents may refer to a higher or more efficient level of equipment based on the UTE C
90-483 guide (under study). This guide offers different levels of performance depending on the
services it is intended to distribute. Compliance with this guide will allow users to access existing or
emerging telecom services. Detailed recommendations regarding the number of circuits, the location
of the communication outlets, and the characteristics of the circuits can be found in this guide.

771.559.6.1.2 Broadcasting / Television

When the communication networks do not provide the television distribution function (see UTE C
90-483 - under study), the minimum equipment consists of the installation of at least:

• Two television sockets in accommodation units up to 100 m²;

• Three television sockets in accommodation units with a surface area of over 100 m².

One of these sockets should be placed in a suitable location in the living room, near a communication
socket.

Each of these sockets must be served by a pipe from the housing technical duct (GTL).

In accommodation up to 35 m², it is allowed to have only one television socket.

In France, television sets are generally designed to be connected to coaxial sockets supplied by
coaxial cables conforming to the UTE C 90-130 guide.

771.559.6.2 Position and location of communication sockets

At least one 16 A socket-outlet must be placed near each communication or television outlet.

The axis of the bases of these communication sockets must be at a minimum height of 50 mm above
the finished floor.
For mixed sockets [LV + communications], whatever the type [surface or recessed], a partition must
separate the two sockets. Intervention on one plinth must be able to be carried out without
intervention on the other.
Claw fasteners are not allowed for communication sockets.
The sockets must not be installed in volumes 0, 1 and 2 of rooms containing a bathtub or a shower.

It is not permitted to install outlets in kitchens above cooking appliances and sink trays.

- 448 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

771.559.6.3 Cable routing.

Communication cables must use routings reserved exclusively for them, with a minimum section of
300 mm² (the smallest dimension cannot be less than 10 mm) or a conduit with a minimum internal
diameter of 20 mm.
In trunking systems, cells must be reserved exclusively for them.
The conductors of a communication circuit should preferably be physically separated from those of an
energy circuit.

In order to meet transmission performance requirements and therefore guarantee quality of service,
it is recommended to lay communication cables in accordance with UTE C 90-483 (under study) and
UTE C 15-900 guides.

- 449 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Annex A - (normative) - Keraunic levels in France and in the overseas departments

Note - To obtain the corresponding lightning strike density (Ng), it suffices to divide Nk by 10

Réunion: Nk = 20 Guyana / Martinique /

Guadeloupe: Nk = 40 Saint-Pierre and
Miquelon: Nk = 1

> 25 (AQ2)
25 (AQ1)

- 450 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Annex B - (normative) - Electrical installations supplied by a source

low-power autonomous energy ( ≤ 6 kVA), not connected
to the network

The distribution diagram must be of type TN-S.

Since such an installation cannot be called upon to increase the power, certain rules of this part are
not applicable and must be adapted.

Specifically,
- the general circuit breaker (25 A) constitutes the emergency cut-off device and is equipped with a
magnetic trip unit with a value adapted to the short-circuit power of the source. This circuit
breaker must be placed in a terminal cover box that can be leaded;

At a minimum, the installation includes:

- a rated differential-residual current RCD equal to at most 30 mA protecting the entire installation;

- a 16 A socket circuit with a minimum section of 1.5 mm² protected by a circuit breaker with a
maximum rated current of 10 A;
- a lighting circuit with a cross section of 1.5 mm² protected by a circuit breaker with a maximum rated current
of 6 A.

Are not prescribed:

- GTL;
- the minimum number of outlet sockets and dedicated outlet circuits;

- the possible surge arrester;

- communication channels.

- 451 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Annex C - (informative) - Example of a letter to raise awareness among the various

actors to their responsibilities.

Electrical safety
existing habitat

Address of the Syndic of co-ownership, or Owner, or manager:

of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................................................

..............................................................

.............................................................. ..............................................................
of the electrical installation carried out Concerns safety work M .......................................... ..................
at:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............................................................
............................................................... Lot number .............. floor .........................

Registered letter with acknowledgment of receipt

M ...............................................

We are carrying out work on the electrical installation of the apartment mentioned in reference.
One of the fundamental provisions to be respected, to ensure the minimum of safety to people
against electrical risks, is the association, in each housing, of a differential device placed at the head
of the installation and an earth connection of appropriate value. .
However, the earth connection is absent in the building.
The decision to carry it out is the sole responsibility of the owner (letter addressed to the owner of the
manager). If the existence of the differential device in this specific case concerns the private parts, the
presence or absence of the earth connection concerns the common parts and is therefore the sole
responsibility of the co-ownership (letter addressed to the Syndic).

For this reason, we cannot recommend enough that you propose the inclusion, on the agenda of the
next general assembly of the co-ownership, of the question of the establishment of an earth
connection, of a column of earth and a main equipotential bonding in order to ensure, in compliance
with the rules in force, the safety of the users of this installation (letter addressed to the Syndic).

For this reason, we cannot recommend enough that you take into consideration our request for the
establishment of an earth electrode, an earth column and a main equipotential bonding so that it is
ensured, in compliance with the rules in force, the safety of users of this installation (letter addressed
to the owner or manager).

This is all the more important as the civil code and a number of legislative texts determine the
obligations in terms of security. In the event of an accident of electrical origin as a result of the
negligence of third parties, the responsibilities of each party could be sought., that of the owner,
the Syndicate, the Syndic, the companies, if the electrical installations supplied or having been the
subject of work did not meet the safety rules.

We remain at your disposal if you require additional information and please accept,
Mr. ............................... ..........., the expression of our distinguished feelings.

Company stamp

- 452 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Annex D - (informative) - Connection of a management or equipment system

to the control or remote information circuits of the
dispenser meter

D1 General and descriptions

The metering of the distributor, electromechanical or electronic, can provide the user with
information to help the management of his uses in the form of control contacts or digital information.

The distributor's electronic meter delivers digital information in a continuous flow to a terminal block
available to the user to which a "remote information circuit" can be connected. Equipment such as
consumption displays, energy managers or electronic load-shedders connected to this circuit decode
this information and translate it into display and / or command (on, off, comfort, reduction,
engagement, etc.) on the installation of the 'user.

D1.1 Physical characteristics required of the tele-information cable:

twisted pair made up of two single strand bare copper conductors with a diameter of 0.5 mm
or 0.8 mm, polyethylene insulation, aluminum screen, conductor serving as continuity drain
and PVC sheath.

In practice, the digital SYT type cable conforming to C 93-529, book 2 meets this requirement.

Only power supplies with a maximum voltage of 48 V direct current are authorized for this type of
cable.

D1.2 Routing and separation of the NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100 domains

It is imperative to always maintain an electrical separation between the parts of the control circuit
cables or the parts of the remote information circuits installed in the areas NF C 14-100 and NF C
15-100. Particular attention must be paid to compliance with this requirement when the installation
envisaged provides for one of these circuits (servo-control or remote information) to run through a
part of the installation within the scope of NF C 14-100.

D2 Case of metering installed inside the dwelling

The counting table for electronic meters has a compartmentalized volume separating the fields of
standards NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100.

Counter
Circuit breaker
r pic
Disjoénlcetceturo
NF C 14-100

Servo contacts
Terminals
"tele-information" NF C 15-100

- 453 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

D3 Case of metering installed outside the home on the property line

When the installation envisaged provides for the metering to be installed outside the home, the
servo-control or remote information circuit must be brought back inside it. Two wiring configurations
are possible:

• the circuit is separated from the power cable (2 separate ducts);

• the circuit runs with the power cable (in the same sheath): in this case, the agreement of the local
distribution service is necessary and it is then necessary to install a specific decoupling device to
achieve an electrical separation between the part of the cable of the servo or remote information
circuit installed in the area of NF C 14-100 and the part of this cable installed in the area of NF C
15-100.

D3.1 Connection:
The drain conductor must be connected to the earth of the installation at a single point in the
distribution panel.

D3.2 Maximum length of the "tele-information circuit":

Telephone type cable: SYT digital:
Length developed under optimal operating conditions: 500 m. Length in
recommended practice: 100 m.

- 454 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

NF C 14-100

1 - the electronic meter is installed on the property line. The cover of the meter customer terminal block must be sealed.
2 - The control link (s) and the remote information circuit are within the scope of NF C 14-100, because it (s)
chimney (s) without physical separation from the power cables.
3 - Unique scabbard.
4 - The servo link (s) lead (s) directly to one or more decoupling devices which perform (s) the
separation and materialize (s) between the domains of NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100.
5 - The remote information circuit leads directly to a decoupling device called “Customer Remote Information Decoupler” (DTC)
which makes the separation and materializes the boundary between the domains of NF C 14-100 and NF C 15-100.

Private domain
Public domain 1

NF C 14-100 NF C 14-100

Teleport

Servo contacts

Terminals
"tele-information"
2 Circuit breaker r
Board
of
division

3
1 - the electronic meter is installed on the property line: the cover of the meter customer terminal block is not sealed.2 - the
connecting sleeves with the housing are separate: each sleeve is governed by its own standard.
3 - The control link (s) and the remote information circuit are within the scope of NF C 15 -100.
4 - The control link (s) and the remote information circuit lead directly into the control panel.
distribution without decoupling device and without Customer Remote Information Decoupler (DTC).

- 455 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-771

Private domain
Public domain

1 2

NF C 14-100

Circuit breaker

6
different iel

Teleport

5
C onta c ts of slav i sse me nts Circuit breaker

Terminals non-differential

"tele-information"

Distribution table

3
1 - the electronic meter is installed on the property line: the cover of the customer terminal block is sealed.
2 - During the journey between 1er counting panel located in the public domain and the 2th panel receiving the AGCP, the
servo link (s) and the remote information circuit are within the scope of NF C 14-100, because they run without physical
separation from the power cable.
3 - Single sheath or not with connecting cables: they are considered as part of the internal electrical installation of the
customer (area of NF C 15-100).
4 - The control link (s) and the remote information circuit lead directly to one or more control relays.
decoupling and on the Customer Teleinformation (DTC) decoupler which separates the NF C 14-100 from the NF C 15-100.
5 - Differential protection at the head of the indoor installation.
6 - Distribution table where the available slavings lead.

In the three examples above, the counting can be electromechanical.

Electromechanical counter
with price change
integrated or not
Clock
or relay

Circuit breaker

Relay
decoupling
enslavement
T

NF C 14-100
Circuit breaker

NF C 15-100

D4 Special case of metering transformation

In case of metering transformation (renovation or other reason), all of the rules set out above must
be respected. Only the following adaptations are possible:

If the use of the control circuits is discontinued and replaced by a remote information circuit, it is
possible to reuse the cable of the existing control link to connect the remote information circuit, for
example, a model of the type 2x1.5mm². However, if this cable is a model without a screen, correct
operation is not guaranteed for the maximum lengths mentioned in § 3.2. It is advisable to check the
operation of the connected equipment in the event of a length approaching or exceeding 50 meters.

______________

- 456 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

Part 7-772 - Special provisions at parties' facilities

municipalities and general services of apartment buildings
dwelling

772.1 General ................................................. .................................................. ............. 457

772.2 Choice and installation of electrical equipment .......................................... ........... 458

772.3 Special requirements for technical rooms of general services,

elevators, boiler rooms, boosters, etc. .................................................. ........... 462

772.4 Alarm and signaling installation ........................................... .......................... 465

Annex - (normative) - Earthing installation ....................................... .................. 466

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-772 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

__________

- 457 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

772.1 General

772.1.1 Scope
This part applies to the electrical installations of the premises of the common areas and of the
general services of collective buildings.
The special clauses (CCS) part of the former DTU 70.1 is the NF P 80-201-2 standard.

However, in the case of an individual building of such importance that certain general services exist,
the rules of 772.3 are applicable.
When the building is a high-rise building, the prescriptions of the amended order of 18 October 1977
(publication C 12-061 of the UTE) apply.

772.1.2 Structure of the installations

The common areas and general services may, where applicable, include:
- lighting services,
- "lift" services,
- space heating and domestic hot water (DHW) services,
- control and command services,
Examples: alarm systems, doormen, home automation, etc.

- "other uses" services.

Examples: water booster rooms, pressure reducing stations, gas, water lifting, antenna supply, etc.

The premises of the common areas include:

- circulation surfaces: entrance halls, corridors, passageways, stairs, etc.,

(1)
- concierge lodges ,
- premises made available to the occupants of buildings, utility rooms, warehouses, bicycle, moped
and baby carriages,
(2)
collective residential premises, meeting rooms , garbage chutes,
collective laundry rooms and dryers, etc.

General service premises include:

- premises used for the operation and maintenance of building services,

- boiler rooms, substations, rooms for elevator machinery, as well as possibly pulley rooms,

- rooms for air conditioning, for water, gas and electricity connections, various other technical
rooms.
It is recalled that all electrical installations in general services are subject to the provisions of the
decree of November 14, 1988 relating to the protection of workers in establishments which use
electric currents.
Each service has a control and protection device and distribution, protection and disconnection
devices for the various circuits.

-------
(1) The concierge's lodge does not include the accommodation part to be treated as a private part.
(2) Collective residential premises, meeting rooms, games, collective premises of residential homes are
subject to the requirements of establishments open to the public, generally of the 5th category when their surface area is
2
greater than 50 m (article 9 of the decree of 31/01/1986).
- 458 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

The equipment sets are:

- or placed in a locked room, accessible only to authorized persons;
- or placed in a lockable box or cabinet, housing the controls, so that they are accessible only to
authorized persons.

In either case, the service face on which the controls are placed must meet at least the degree of
protection IP2X or IPXXB.

772.2 Choice and installation of electrical equipment

772.2.1 Divisional circuits

As many divisional circuits are provided as there are different applications to be supplied.This
concerns, in particular, all the equipment of the common areas.

772.2.2 Pipelines
The prescriptions of the part 5-52 of this standard are applicable. In addition,
the pipes must not pass through private premises.
You should also refer to the UTE C 15-520 guide.

772.2.3 Lighting

772.2.3.1 Illumination

Table 772A

Average illuminance to maintain

(in lux)

Common parts :
Entrance, staircase, landing 40
(shaded areas) 10

Covered garages: 60
Ramp 60
(shadow areas) 15

Elevators:
Machine room (on the ground) Pulley room (on the pulley 200
(s)) Landings (on the ground on the threshold of the landing 100
doors) 50

Boiler rooms: 100

Equipment 200
Table (in the table plan) Others 60

Boosters:
Local 100
Table (in the table plan) 200

The average illuminance on a reference surface is the arithmetic mean of the sum of the illuminances
at different points of this surface.

- 459 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

It is recalled that, according to the "recommendation relating to the interior lighting of

workplaces" (October 1993 edition) of the AFE*, the level of illumination is now expressed in terms of
"average illumination to be maintained". This is the level of lighting, still just acceptable, before
maintenance intervention.

772.2.3.2 Lighted hearth and lighting fixtures

The rules of 772.2.3 must be respected, in particular for any change of direction or level. This
requirement should be taken into account for the choice, number and location of such lighting
equipment.

772.2.3.3 Lighting apparatus control devices

a) Manual control devices
Whatever the type of room, each manual control device must have an indicator light.

b) Automatic devices
These devices are arranged so that the detection covers all the access zones of the controlled traffic.

772.2.3.4 Special equipment

772.2.3.4.1 Entrance halls of buildings, stairs, passageways, corridors

of cellars, technical rooms
a) Arrangements of control devices
The lighting circuits of building entrances, stairways, passageways and corridors are controlled by a
timer with a device allowing permanent operation or by an automatic device.

A timer must not control a slice of more than five levels.

In addition to the controls installed at the levels of each unit, an additional control must be provided
at the levels located on either side of each unit, to enable it to be lit before approaching it.

The lighting of a passageway or an interior corridor can be controlled by the same timer as that of a
staircase serving it. However, if the number of luminaires required to light a passageway or interior
corridor is more than three, an independent timer is required.

Each control device must have an indicator light.Devices with extinction warning are
recommended.

b) Location of manual control devices

The locations of the manual control devices are chosen so that they are less than 2 m from each
apartment entrance door. If there is an obstacle on the course, the control devices are located
between the entrance doors and the obstacles.

By obstacle, we mean pillar, change of direction or level, recess, etc.

1 - Vestibules and entrance halls of buildings

A control device is located at each entrance to the vestibule or airlock, the others near each staircase
or each of the elevator landing doors.
2 - Floor landings
One or more control devices are arranged so that at least one is visible from the threshold of any
accommodation.

-------
* French Lighting Association - 17, Rue Hamelin - 75116 PARIS
- 460 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

3 - Elevator landings
One of the devices must be placed less than 2 m from any elevator landing door and be visible from
the threshold of these doors.
4 - Passages, stairs and corridors
The control devices are located at each end and at each intermediate access so that the distance
between two successive devices does not exceed 6 m.

772.2.3.4.2 Garages and collective indoor parks, for motor vehicles

and access ramps
The term “garages or covered parks” is understood to mean the premises used exclusively for the
parking of motor vehicles, that is to say without having a fuel dispensing station.

For garages, the UTE C 15-103 guide specifies the external influences.

For garages with a surface area greater than 100 m² and whose capacity does not exceed 250
vehicles, the provisions of the decree of January 31, 1986 relating to the fire protection of residential
buildings must be applied. Those with a capacity greater than 250 vehicles are classified under
heading 2935 of the legislation on classified installations and must comply with the provisions
imposed by their classification.

a) Location of lighting equipment

The lighting fixtures are placed so as to obtain lighting of the circulation areas in accordance with the
table 772A.

They are placed out of the reach of vehicles.

It is recommended that the light sources respect a free height of 2 m at all points.

This prescription does not exclude the use of light sources for obstacles or the pathway of traffic
areas, provided that they are suitably protected against mechanical damage by construction or by
installation.

b) Location of control devices and socket outlets

The control devices are placed near the accesses, distributed so that at least one device is visible from
any point of the traffic areas, and must not be located in the parking areas.

It is advisable not to space the manual control devices more than 15 m apart.

Control devices and socket outlets are placed out of the reach of vehicles.

Socket outlets embedded in walls or pillars, etc. are considered out of reach of vehicles.

The control devices may include devices for detecting the presence of people.

772.2.3.4.3 Supply of cellars, boxes or garages, individualBy box is meant a

closed location, generally placed in the basement.

Depending on the specific market conditions, the following arrangements may be made:

a) Electrical supply from general services.

An example is the installation of lighting in a cellar or a box by porthole and switch located outside
the cellar or box.

- 461 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

b) Electrical supply (lighting and 16 A + T socket) to a cellar or box by a pipe from a private installation.
In this case, the circuit must be protected by a differential residual current device rated at most
equal to 30 mA and must include a voltage presence indicator placed on the distribution panel of
the home installation.

The differential device may or may not be specific. The

2
minimum section of such a circuit is 2.5 mm.

No diversion on a private pipe in the common part is allowed.

As a result, a bypass is placed either in the apartment, the cellar or the box.
The pipe (s) from a private installation supplying a cellar or the box must be grouped inside the
general services duct on a specific route. They are identified at the level of the penetrations in
the accommodation and the cellar or the box.

These pipes must have double or reinforced insulation, or equivalent, with respect to the
electrical circuits and the grounds of other electrical installations.

c) Provisions to allow the supply of a cellar, a box or a charging station of an electric vehicle with a
remote metering device are being studied.

772.2.3.4.4 Safety installations

The requirements relating to safety installations and in particular the emergency lighting of common
areas of buildings are indicated in the regulations relating to fire protection in residential buildings.

These prescriptions are the subject of the decree of January 31, 1986.

772.2.3.5 Circuits from common areas supplying private facilities

Examples are building doormen, video surveillance installations, home automation applications, etc.,
for small powers. Other higher power applications concern electric heating.

For applications other than electric heating, when a circuit of an installation from common areas
enters a private room, it must be made of SELV or PELV in accordance with paragraph 414.4 of this
standard.
For applications relating to electric heating, refer to guide UTE C 15-755.

772.2.3.6 Circuits from private installations supplying electrical devices in common areas

Examples are water heaters installed in landing shafts or heating regulation devices, VMC, etc.

When a circuit of an installation originating in a private room serves user devices belonging to the
user of this private room and located in the common areas, this circuit must have double or
reinforced insulation or equivalent compared to to the electrical circuits and to the grounds of the
electrical installation of the common parts or of other electrical installations.

See also guide UTE C 15-755.

- 462 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

772.3 Special requirements for technical rooms of general services, elevators,

boiler rooms, boosters, etc.

772.3.0 Scope
The requirements of this paragraph apply to the installations of technical rooms: elevators, boiler
rooms, pressure boosters, in collective buildings.
When there is a gas pressure reducing station, the rules relating to external influences BE3 (risk of
explosion) apply to the corresponding room (see 424).

Rules imposed by gas distributors do not allow outlets.

772.3.1 Common provisions

772.3.1.1 Main power supply

A divisional circuit, independent of the other circuits, serves the arrival board of the room or the
service. This circuit is taken from the general distribution table for general services.

772.3.1.2 Lighting power supply

The lighting of these technical rooms is provided by a divisional circuit separate from their main
power supply and coming from the general services panel.

However, if the total power required for the main power supply and the lighting is at most equal to 2
kVA, the lighting does not require a separate circuit, except for specific specifications indicated in this
section.

772.3.1.3 Lighting
Manual control devices are placed so that at least one of them is accessible at every entry into the
premises.
The average illumination to be maintained is specified in table 772A.

772.3.1.4 Sockets
Any technical or service room must have at least one 2P + E, 16A socket outlet.

772.3.1.5 Technical alarms and signaling network

The installation of this network must be carried out in accordance with paragraph 772.4.

772.3.2 Elevators
The installation of lifts is governed by the series of standards EN 81-X: Safety rules for the
construction and installation of lifts.

772.3.2.1 Characteristics of the premises and choice of electrical equipment according to

external influences

See guide UTE C 15-103.

- 463 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

772.3.2.2 Pipelines

a) Nature of the pipes

The main feed has its origin in the main general service switchboard.
It is recalled that the elevator supply lines may be placed, under certain conditions, in the ducts
reserved for connection installations, subject to the prior agreement of the Distribution Department
(NF C 14-100).

b) Passage through the elevator shaft

No pipes must pass inside the elevator shaft except those dedicated to the elevator.

c) Cross section of supply conductors

In the absence of more precise indications from the installer of the lifts, the following provisions may
be adopted:
The current used to calculate the section of the supply conductors of an elevator motor is taken at
least equal to:

I =I Id
not +
3

Inot = current in normal operationI

d = starting current

Attention is drawn to the fact that the power to be subscribed to with the Distribution Service for the
main power supply must take into account the current draw at start-up.

If the installation has several elevators supplied by the same pipe and capable of starting
simultaneously, the section of the conductors of the common pipe which supplies them must be
chosen, from the point of view of temperature rises, taking into account the sum of the currents
calculated as above for each of the engines in the ratio of 100% for the most powerful engine, 75% for
the next and 60% for the others.

It is also checked that whatever the number of elevators, the section adopted does not lead to a
voltage drop greater than 5% or 8% for the sum of the currents Id assigned the above coefficients,
depending on whether the power is supplied directly by the public low-voltage distribution network or
by a transformer substation.

- 464 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

772.3.2.3 Machine room

a) Lift panel
The distribution panel is located as close as possible to the entrance door to the room, inside it.

Its composition is specified in chapter 13 of EN 81.

General switch

DDR DDR
30 mA 30 mA

I P P P P P P

(*)

Lighting Pc Lighting Pc Pc Lighting

cabin 1 roof of sheath 1 bowl 1 local local
cabin 1 elevator elevator
machinery machinery
Elevator 1 Elevator 1

To table
engine
Elevator 1

I: Padlockable main motor switch

P: Protection device (circuit breaker or fuse) (*):
Provide a remote switch

Figure 772A - Example of block diagram of the room switchboard

elevator machinery

b) Lighting
The average illuminance to be maintained is specified in Table 772A.
The realization of the lighting of the shaft is the domain of the installation of elevators.

c) Pipes outside the machinery

No pipes or devices, if they are foreign to the operation or safety of the machine room, must not be
installed there.

- 465 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

772.3.2.4 Lighting of elevator landings in collective buildings

If automatic control of landing lighting by opening elevator landing doors is required, this control
must not be carried out directly by devices placed on these landing doors.

The lighting can be controlled:

- either by presence detector;
- either with the agreement of the elevator manufacturer, through contacts provided for this
purpose, in the machine control cabinet, subject to protecting the personnel working in the
machinery against the risks of any voltage from the machine. electrical installation of the building.
This must be done by bringing the general supply line of all the timers back to the elevator power
supply board. The personnel safety conditions are satisfied by the use of a general disconnection
device cutting all the poles of the control circuits of the timer coils and placed, for this purpose, on
the distribution panel provided for in

772.3.2.3 a).

772.3.2.5 Pulley room

The pulley room must be equipped with a distribution board.
The supply circuit for the pulley room can be taken from one of the general service lighting circuits.

772.3.2.6 Replacement or emergency lighting

Whenever the building has a replacement or safety power supply, the machine room must have
lighting connected to this power supply.
Otherwise, emergency lighting by a non-permanent autonomous unit with manual control must be
provided.

Replacement or emergency lighting may use at least one of the normal lighting devices.

Attention is drawn to the need for regular maintenance of autonomous emergency lighting units
(BAES).

772.3.3 Boiler room

Boiler rooms with a heat production device with a useful power greater than 70 kW must comply with
the provisions of the interministerial decree of 23 June 1978.

772.4 Alarm and signaling installation

772.4.1 Alarm and / or signaling installations are required either by a regulatory or normative text, or
by a contractual text. They are either in the field of security or in the field of comfort.

The alarm installations are intended to warn the persons responsible for taking the necessary
measures in the event of an incident or a malfunction of the equipment or installations, in order to
limit the effects and restore the normal situation as soon as possible. .

The fire detection systems must comply with the standards in force.

772.4.2 Alarms and signals in the field of security generally require an independent source (batteries,
etc.).
These power supplies can be specific or common to several installations.

- 466 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

Any signaling reports are generally grouped together on a board in the security room.

Annex - (normative) - Earthing installation

1

2 2

2 2

B P
3
4

1 Main protective conductor (earth riser) Protective conductor of the

2 individual shunt Conductor of the main equipotential bonding
3
4 Earth conductor
B Main terminal
P Metallic pipes, e.g. water, gas, central heating Earth connection
T
Figure 772B - Example of earthing installation

a) earth conductor:
its minimum section must be:
2
- 25 mm bare copper,
2
- 35 mm in aluminum (see NF C 15-100, 542.3.1),

b) main protective conductor:

its section is given in table 54C of NF C 15-100: Si Sph ≤ 16 mm, SPE
2
= Sph

2 2
If 16 mm2 <Sph ≤ 35 mm, SPE = 16 mm If
2
Sph> 35 mm, SPE ≥ Sph / 2.

c) individual branch protective conductor:

its section is equal to that of the active conductors of the connection.

However, in a TT system, the section of the protective conductor can be limited to:
2
- 25 mm bare copper,
2
- 35 mm in aluminium.
____________
- 467 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-772

(Blank page)

- 468 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-773

Part 7-773 - Protection of unattended facilities

The prescriptions of this part supplement, modify or replace the general prescriptions of the other
parts of NF C 15-100.
The numbers following the particular number of part 7-773 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 469 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-773

773.411.3 Protection against indirect contact

Protection against indirect contact of installations not permanently monitored and supplied by the
public low-voltage distribution network is provided by one of the following measures:

a) Supply of the installation or part of the installation via an isolating transformer conforming to the
standard in force (*). The isolating transformer, which must be of class 2, is supplied immediately
downstream of the branch circuit breaker which does not include a differential function.

The part of the installation located downstream of the isolation transformer is protected:
- either according to the measurement by electrical separation in accordance with the rules of 413, if
this part supplies only one user equipment,
- either according to the rules of the TN or IT scheme.

Differential protection of the other parts of the installation is ensured according to the circuit selection
diagram defined in 535.4.2. The connection between the branch circuit breaker and the isolating
transformer is protected by double or reinforced insulation.

b) Protection by a type "S" branch circuit breaker (see 531.2.4.2.2). The part of the installation or the
equipment whose power must be maintained is connected directly to the service circuit breaker. All
or part of the rest of the installation is protected if necessary by one or more differential devices
placed downstream of the branch circuit breaker according to the circuit selection diagram defined
in535.4.2.

c) In the case of installations other than those in premises for residential use, protection by an
automatic reclosing circuit breaker, provided that the reclosing device can be deactivated while
people are present in the premises served, in order to maintain the conditions of protection against
indirect contact.

The number and spacing of recloses depend on the operating and installation conditions,
however, the number of reclosures should be limited, the consequences of which could be
unfortunate for equipment exhibiting a permanent fault.
The conditions under which this device can be neutralized and restored are the subject of a
warning placed near the device.

The stopping of certain devices or equipment, following the operation of a differential device, can have
unfortunate consequences; this is particularly the case for:
- freezers and refrigerated cabinets,
- frost-free heating installations,
- telecommunications equipment in isolated structures,
- broadcasting or television transmission transmission relays,
- automatic level crossings,
- theft alarm or fire detection devices,
- radio beacons.
The operation of the differential device may be due to a fault in other equipment protected by the same
differential device, or to external phenomena (for example atmospheric overvoltages).

______________

-------
(*) NF EN 61-558-2-1 (C 52-558-2-1)

- 470 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-781

Part 7-781 - Electrical service rooms or locations

781.0 Application domain .............................................. .................................................. 471

781.1 General ................................................. .................................................. ............. 471

781.2 Protection by means of obstacles or by putting out of reach by distance ............ 471

781.3 Lack of protection against direct contact ........................................... ........... 472

781.4 Minimum distances to be observed in service passages .................................. 472

781.5 Provisions concerning electrical service rooms ........................................... .474

The prescriptions of this part supplement the general prescriptions of the other parts of NF C 15-100.

The numbers following the particular number of part 7-781 are those of the corresponding parts,
clauses or subclauses of this standard.
The absence of a reference to a part, an article or a paragraph means that the corresponding general
requirements apply.

- 471 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-781

VS 781.0 Scope
This part deals with the special arrangements for electrical service rooms or locations.

781.1 General
Electrical service premises or locations are premises or locations containing electrical equipment and
access to which is restricted to qualified persons responsible for the maintenance and supervision of
the equipment.
Therefore, it is accepted that, in these premises or locations, protection against direct contact is
ensured by means of obstacles (see annex B1 of the part 4-41), or by putting out of range by moving
away (see annex B2 of the part 4-41), and respecting the conditions of 781.2. Protection against direct
contact may even be absent, if the conditions of781.3.

The premises or workplaces reserved for the production, conversion or distribution of electricity,
referred to in article 22 of the decree of 14 November 1988, are premises or places of electrical service
as described above. The same applies to the access rooms reserved for electricians defined in
publication UTE C 18-510.
It should be noted that, for questions of conditions of external influences, it may be necessary to
provide a room, rather than a location.
Electrical service rooms may be prescribed by other regulatory texts (for example the fire safety
regulations relating to establishments open to the public) for reasons other than protection against
direct contact, for example:
- protect premises and clearances from fire risks constituted by electrical equipment;

- in the case of electrical equipment belonging to a safety installation:

• protect these materials from a fire originating in the surrounding areas (see also
561.1);
• prevent these materials from being accessible to people other than those designated by the
head of the establishment (see also 562.2 and 563.5).

VS 781.2 Protection by means of obstacles or by placing out of reach by distance

Protective measures by means of obstacles according toannex B1 to the part 4-41 or by putting out of
range by removal according to theannex B2 to the part 4-41 are only allowed in rooms to which, in
accordance with the operating instructions, only knowledgeable (BA 4) or qualified (BA 5) have access (*)
and if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

- the nominal voltage which occurs in such premises (or locations) must not exceed 1000 V in
alternating current or 1500 V in direct current;
- the rules set out in 781.4.1 and 781.4.3 must be observed in the cases considered;
- the premises (or locations) must be clearly and visibly marked with appropriate markers.

-------
(*) Only authorized persons within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work in the
BA 4 and BA 5 conditions (see also 512.2.16).

- 472 - 2002
Translated from French to English - www.onlinedoctranslator.com

NF C 15-100 Part 7-781

VS 781.3 Lack of protection against direct contact

Protection against direct contact is not required in rooms accessible only to knowledgeable (BA 4) or
qualified (BA 5) persons. (*) duly instructed for the particular need and if the following conditions are
simultaneously met:
- the nominal voltage is not more than 500 volts in alternating current and 750V in smooth direct
current (BTA domain);

This limitation is not prescribed by international standards and results from the regulations for the
protection of workers.
- the premises (or locations) must be clearly and visibly marked with appropriate markers;
VS
- the entrance doors to the premises (or locations) must allow easy exit to the outside. They must be
able to be opened without a key from the inside, even if they are locked from the outside;

- for passages, the minimum dimensions fixed in 781.4.2 and 781.4.3 must be observed;
- if the bare live parts belong to a distribution panel and are located on the face bearing the
operating devices, the floor or the floor must be insulating or insulated for the voltage in question,
in front of this face over at least 1 m in width;
- in the presence of accumulators, when the nominal voltage of the batteries is greater than 150
volts, additional requirements are given in 554.2.2.

781.4 Minimum distances to be observed in service passages

NOTE - The dimensions given below are strict minimum values. In special circumstances, it may be appropriate in the interests of
safety to adopt higher values. Other considerations, such as working positions, evacuation facilities, etc. may require larger values.

781.4.1 The following distances must be observed when protection by means of obstacles is provided:

a) Width of passage between obstacles or between control devices

or between obstacles and control devices: .......................................... ...... 700 mm min.
b) Width of passage between control devices or obstacles and wall: ........ 700 mm min.
c) Height of passage under obstacle: .......................................... ................... 2,000 mm min.
NOTE - The above dimensions apply when all the parts of the obstacle are in place and closed.

781.4.2 In rooms where no protective measures are provided, the following dimensions must be
observed for service passages:
a) When the passage is bordered on one side by unprotected active parts:To1)
width of the passage between the wall and the active parts
unprotected: ............................................... ................................... 1000 mm min.
To2) free passage in front of the controls (handles, etc.): ........ 700 mm min.
b) When the passage is bordered on both sides by active parts:b1)
width of the passage between the active parts and conductors of
each side :............................................... ....................................... 1,200 mm min.
b2) free passage between the controls (handles, etc.): ........ 1,100 mm min.
c) Height of the active parts above the floor: ..................................... 2 300 mm min.

-------
(*) Only authorized persons within the meaning of publication UTE C 18-510 are authorized to work in the
BA 4 and BA 5 conditions (see also 512.2.16).

- 473 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-781

Active parts

<IP2X

vs)
2300
2000
b)

IP0X

700 700 700 700

To) To) To)

To)

Figure 781A - Protection by means of obstacles or by distance

Figure 781B - Lack of protection against direct contact

- 474 - 2002
 NF C 15-100 Part 7-781

VS 781.4.3 Service passages longer than 20 m must be accessible at both ends.

For shorter passages, but longer than 6 m, accessibility at both ends is recommended.

781.5 Provisions concerning electrical service rooms

781.5.1 Location

The general low voltage switchboard must be located as close as possible to the center of gravity of the electrical
loads.

The center of gravity of the electric loads (barycenter of the powers) is the location which takes into
account the situation of the high power consumption units, in order to reduce the length and the
section of the pipes.

The transformer (s) must be located as close as possible to the general low voltage switchboard.

It is recommended that the electrical service room including the general low voltage switchboard is
located as close as possible to the vertical distribution pipes.

781.5.2 Dimensions

The dimensions of the electrical service rooms in which the special measures against direct contact are
applied comply with 781.2 To 781.4. The premises containing the transformer stations, the generators,
the UPS, the main electrical distribution panel have minimum dimensions imposed by the dimensions
of the equipment. Rooms containing simply electrical panels in enclosures (cabinets or boxes) must
meet the minimum dimensions given in table 781A.

The following minimum distances must be respected around distribution boards, and other distribution
equipment.

Table 781A - Minimum distances around distribution boards

Table power

< 60 to kVA > 60 kVA > 250 to kVA > 250 to kVA
< 250kVA connection connection
before back

Front passage 700 mm 1000 mm 1,500 mm 1,500 mm

Rear passage 700 mm

Height under 2000 mm 2,500 mm 2,500 mm 2,500 mm

ceiling of
the location

In the case of enclosures, a minimum distance of 400 mm must be respected between the lower part of the
enclosure and the finished floor, as well as between the upper part of the enclosure and the ceiling.

There is no need to respect the lower distance for boxes placed on the ground.

These distances allow interventions and the making of connections.

- 475 - 2002
NF C 15-100 Part 7-781

If possible, a reserve of space should be provided for an extension of the switchboards and cupboards.

781.5.3 Ventilation and conditioning

Electrical service rooms must:
- either be ventilated to the outside either directly or through a duct in a natural or mechanical
manner; the implementation of ventilation must be accompanied by precautions against the
introduction of dust into the equipment;
- or be air-conditioned.

The use of air conditioning ensures that temperatures are maintained; the switchgear of distribution
cabinets is generally designed for normal operation at a maximum temperature of 40 ° C, the
accumulator batteries to have their nominal autonomy at 20 ° C. See also the article554.2.

______________

- 476 - 2002